2007 saturn outlook owner manual m - gmc · 2020-03-08 · how to use this manual many people read...

Seats and Restraint Systems ....................... 7Front Seats .............................................. 9Rear Seats ............................................. 18Safety Belts ............................................ 24Child Restraints ...................................... 48Airbag System ........................................ 76Restraint System Check ......................... 93

Features and Controls ................................ 95Keys ....................................................... 97Doors and Locks .................................. 106Windows ............................................... 115Theft-Deterrent Systems ....................... 119Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ..... 123Mirrors .................................................. 139OnStar® System ................................... 145Universal Home Remote System .......... 149Storage Areas ...................................... 161Sunroof ................................................ 165

Instrument Panel ....................................... 167Instrument Panel Overview ................... 170Climate Controls ................................... 194Warning Lights, Gages, and

Indicators .......................................... 209Driver Information Center (DIC) ............ 228Audio System(s) ................................... 260

Driving Your Vehicle ................................. 321Your Driving, the Road, and

Your Vehicle ..................................... 322Towing ................................................. 358

Service and Appearance Care .................. 375Service ................................................. 377Fuel ...................................................... 379Checking Things Under the Hood ......... 384All-Wheel Drive ..................................... 420Headlamp Aiming ................................. 421

2007 Saturn OUTLOOK Owner Manual M

1

Bulb Replacement ................................ 422Windshield Wiper Blade

Replacement ..................................... 424Tires ..................................................... 425Appearance Care .................................. 464Vehicle Identification ............................. 474Electrical System .................................. 475Capacities and Specifications ................ 483

Maintenance Schedule .............................. 485Maintenance Schedule .......................... 486

Customer Assistance Information ............. 503Customer Assistance and Information ..... 504Reporting Safety Defects ...................... 516Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy ....... 519

Index .......................................................... 523

2

SATURN and the SATURN Emblem are registeredtrademarks of Saturn Corporation. GENERALMOTORS and GM are registered trademarks andthe name OUTLOOK is a trademark of GeneralMotors Corporation.

This manual includes the latest information at thetime it was printed. We reserve the right to makechanges after that time without further notice.

This manual describes features that may beavailable in this model, but your vehicle may nothave all of them. For example, more than oneentertainment system may be offered or yourvehicle may have been ordered without a frontpassenger or rear seats.

Keep this manual in the vehicle for quickreference.

Canadian OwnersA French language copy of this manual can beobtained from your dealer/retailer or from:

Helm, IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

How to Use This ManualMany people read the owner manual frombeginning to end when they first receive their newvehicle to learn about the vehicle’s featuresand controls. Pictures and words work together toexplain things.

IndexA good place to quickly locate information aboutthe vehicle is the Index in the back of the manual.It is an alphabetical list of what is in the manualand the page number where it can be found.

Litho in U.S.A.Part No. 15861569 B Second Printing ©2006 General Motors Corporation. All Rights Reserved.

3

Safety Warnings and SymbolsThere are a number of safety cautions in thisbook. A box with the word CAUTION is used totell about things that could hurt you or others if youwere to ignore the warning.

{CAUTION:

These mean there is something that couldhurt you or other people.

We tell you what the hazard is and what to do tohelp avoid or reduce the hazard. Please readthese cautions. If you do not, you or others couldbe hurt.

A circle with a slashthrough it is a safetysymbol which means“Do Not,” “Do Notdo this” or “Do Not letthis happen.”

4

Vehicle Damage WarningsYou will also find notices in this manual.

Notice: These mean there is something thatcould damage your vehicle.

A notice tells about something that can damagethe vehicle. Many times, this damage would not becovered by your vehicle’s warranty, and it couldbe costly. The notice tells what to do to help avoidthe damage.

When you read other manuals, you might seeCAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colorsor in different words.

There are also warning labels on the vehiclewhich use the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.

Vehicle SymbolsThe vehicle has components and labels that usesymbols instead of text. Symbols are shown alongwith the text describing the operation orinformation relating to a specific component,control, message, gage, or indicator.

If you need help figuring out a specific name of acomponent, gage, or indicator, reference thefollowing topics:

• Seats and Restraint Systems in Section 1

• Features and Controls in Section 2

• Instrument Panel Overview in Section 3

• Climate Controls in Section 3

• Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators inSection 3

• Audio System(s) in Section 3

• Engine Compartment Overview in Section 5

5

These are some examples of symbols that may be found on the vehicle:

6

Front Seats ..................................................... 9Manual Seats ................................................ 9Driver Seat Height Adjuster ......................... 10Power Seats ............................................... 10Manual Lumbar ........................................... 11Power Lumbar ............................................. 12Heated Seats .............................................. 12Memory Seat and Mirrors ............................ 13Reclining Seatbacks .................................... 15Head Restraints .......................................... 17

Rear Seats .................................................... 18Rear Seat Operation ................................... 18Third Row Seats ......................................... 21

Safety Belts .................................................. 24Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone ........... 24Questions and Answers About

Safety Belts ............................................. 28How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............. 29Driver Position ............................................. 30

Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment ................. 38Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy .............. 39Right Front Passenger Position ................... 39Rear Seat Passengers ................................ 40Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ................ 43Safety Belt Pretensioners ............................ 47Safety Belt Extender ................................... 47

Child Restraints ............................................ 48Older Children ............................................. 48Infants and Young Children ......................... 51Child Restraint Systems .............................. 55Where to Put the Restraint .......................... 59Lower Anchors and Tethers for

Children (LATCH) .................................... 61Securing a Child Restraint in a

Rear Seat Position ................................... 69Securing a Child Restraint in the

Right Front Seat Position ......................... 72

Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems

7

Airbag System .............................................. 76Where Are the Airbags? .............................. 79When Should an Airbag Inflate? .................. 82What Makes an Airbag Inflate? ................... 83How Does an Airbag Restrain? ................... 84What Will You See After an

Airbag Inflates? ........................................ 84Passenger Sensing System ......................... 86

Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ...... 91Adding Equipment to Your

Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .......................... 92Restraint System Check ............................... 93

Checking the Restraint Systems .................. 93Replacing Restraint System Parts

After a Crash ........................................... 94

Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems

8

Front Seats

Manual Seats

{CAUTION:

You can lose control of the vehicle if youtry to adjust a manual driver’s seat whilethe vehicle is moving. The suddenmovement could startle and confuse you,or make you push a pedal when you donot want to. Adjust the driver’s seat onlywhen the vehicle is not moving.

A. Manual Seat Adjustment Bar.B. Driver Seat Height Adjuster. See Driver Seat

Height Adjuster on page 10.C. Manual Reclining Seatback Lever. See

Reclining Seatbacks on page 15.

If your vehicle has a manual bucket seat you canadjust the seat forward or rearward with thebar located under the front of the seat cushion.

Lift the bar to unlock the seat. Slide the seatto where you want it and release the bar. Try tomove the seat with your body to be sure the seat islocked in place.

9

Driver Seat Height AdjusterIf your vehicle has a manual driver seat heightadjuster, it is located on the outboard side of theseat. See Manual Seats on page 9 for moreinformation. To raise the seat, move the leverupward repeatedly until the seat is at the desiredheight. To lower the seat, move the leverdownward repeatedly until the seat is at thedesired height.

Power Seats

A. Power Seat Adjustment Control.B. Power Reclining Seatback Control. See

Reclining Seatbacks on page 15.C. Power Lumbar Control. See Power Lumbar on

page 12.

If the vehicle has power seats, the controls usedto operate them are located on the outboardside of the seats.

Driver’s Seat with Power Seat Control, PowerRecline, and Power Lumbar shown

10

Move the seat forward or rearward by sliding thecontrol forward or rearward.

Your vehicle may have additional features toadjust your vehicle’s power seat:

• Raise or lower the entire seat by moving theentire control up or down.

• Raise or lower the front part of the seatcushion by moving the front of the control upor down.

• Raise or lower the rear part of the seatcushion by moving the rear of the control upor down.

Your vehicle may have a memory function whichallows seat settings to be saved and recalled.See Memory Seat and Mirrors on page 13 for moreinformation.

Manual Lumbar

If your vehicle has thisfeature, the handle islocated on the inboardside of the seatback.See Manual Seatson page 9 for moreinformation.

Turn the handle rearward to decrease lumbarsupport. Turn the handle forward to increaselumbar support.

Keep in mind that as your seating positionchanges, as it may during long trips, so should theposition of your lumbar support. Adjust the seatas needed.

11

Power LumbarIf the seats have power lumbar, the controls usedto operate this feature are located on theoutboard side of the seats. See Power Seats onpage 10 for more information.

• To increase lumbar support, press and holdthe front of the control.

• To decrease lumbar support, press and holdthe rear of the control.

• To raise the height of the lumbar support,press and hold the top of the control.

• To lower the height of the lumbar support,press and hold the bottom of the control.

Release the control when the lower seatbackreaches the desired level of lumbar support.

Keep in mind that as your seating positionchanges, as it may during long trips, so should theposition of your lumbar support. Adjust the seatas needed.

Heated SeatsOn vehicles with heated front seats the controlsare located on the center console near the climatecontrols. To operate the heated seats theignition must be on.

I (Heated Seatback): Press this button to turnon the heated seatback.

J (Heated Seat and Seatback): Press thisbutton to turn on the heated seat and seatback.

The light on the button will come on to indicate thatthe feature is working. Press the button to cyclethrough the temperature settings of high, medium,and low and to turn the heat to the seat off.Indicator lights above the button will show the levelof heat selected: three for high, two for medium,and one for low.

The heated seats will turn off ten seconds afterthe ignition is turned off. If you want to usethe heated seat feature after you restart yourvehicle, you will need to press the heated seat orseatback button again.

12

If your vehicle has remote vehicle start and isstarted using the remote keyless entry transmitter,the front heated seats will be turned on to thehigh setting if it is cold outside. See ″RemoteVehicle Start″ under Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 100. When the keyis inserted into the ignition and the ignitionis turned on, the heated seat feature will turn off.To turn the heated seat feature back on, pressthe desired button.

Memory Seat and MirrorsYour vehicle may have the memory package.

The controls for this feature are located on thedriver’s door panel, and are used to program andrecall memory settings for the driver’s seat andoutside mirrors.

To save your positions in memory, do thefollowing:

1. Adjust the driver’s seat, including the seatbackrecliner and lumbar and both outside mirrorsto a comfortable position.See Outside Power Mirrors on page 142 formore information.Not all mirrors will have the ability to save andrecall the mirror positions.

2. Press and hold button 1 until two beeps letyou know that the position has been stored.

13

A second seating and mirror position can beprogrammed by repeating the above steps andpressing button 2.

To recall the memory positions, the vehicle mustbe in PARK (P). Press and release either button 1or button 2 corresponding to the desired drivingposition. The seat and outside mirrors will move tothe position previously stored. You will hear asingle beep.

If you use the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter to enter your vehicle and the remoterecall memory feature is on, automatic seatand mirror movement will occur. See “MEMORYSEAT RECALL” under DIC Vehicle Customization(With DIC Buttons) on page 250 for moreinformation.

To stop recall movement of the memory feature atany time, press one of the power seat controls,memory buttons, or power mirror buttons.

If something has blocked the driver’s seat whilerecalling a memory position, the driver’s seat recallmay stop working. If this happens, press theappropriate control for the area that is not recallingfor two seconds, after the obstruction is removed.

Then try recalling the memory position again bypressing the appropriate memory button. Ifthe memory position is still not being recalled, seeyour dealer/retailer for service.

Easy Exit SeatThe control for this feature is located on thedriver’s door panel between buttons 1 and 2.

With the vehicle in PARK (P), the exit positioncan be recalled by pressing the exit button. Youwill hear a single beep. The driver’s seat willmove back.

If the easy exit seat feature is on in the DriverInformation Center (DIC), automatic seatmovement will occur when the key is removedfrom the ignition. See “EASY EXIT SEAT” underDIC Vehicle Customization (With DIC Buttons)on page 250 for more information.

Further programming for the memory seat featurecan be done using the DIC. You can select orcancel the following:

• The automatic easy exit seat feature.• The remote memory seat recall feature.

For programming information, see DIC VehicleCustomization (With DIC Buttons) on page 250.

14

Reclining Seatbacks

Manual Reclining Seatbacks

{CAUTION:

You can lose control of the vehicle if youtry to adjust a manual driver’s seat whilethe vehicle is moving. The suddenmovement could startle and confuse you,or make you push a pedal when you donot want to. Adjust the driver’s seat onlywhen the vehicle is not moving.

{CAUTION:

If the seatback is not locked, it couldmove forward in a sudden stop or crash.That could cause injury to the personsitting there. Always push and pull on theseatback to be sure it is locked.

In vehicles with seats that have manual recliningseatbacks, the lever used to operate them islocated on the outboard side of the seat.

To recline the seatback, do the following:

1. Lift the recline lever.

2. Move the seatback to the desired position,then release the lever to lock the seatbackin place.

3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure itis locked.

To return the seatback to an upright position, dothe following:

1. Lift the lever fully without applying pressure tothe seatback and the seatback will return tothe upright position.


15

Power Reclining SeatbacksIn vehicles with seats that have power recliningseatbacks, the control used to recline themis located on the outboard side of the seat behindthe power seat control. See Power Seats onpage 10 for more information.

• To recline the seatback, tilt the top of thecontrol rearward.

• To bring the seatback forward, tilt the top ofthe control forward.

{CAUTION:

Sitting in a reclined position when yourvehicle is in motion can be dangerous.Even if you buckle up, your safety beltscannot do their job when you are reclinedlike this.The shoulder belt cannot do its jobbecause it will not be against your body.Instead, it will be in front of you. In a crash,you could go into it, receiving neck or otherinjuries.The lap belt cannot do its job either. In acrash, the belt could go up over yourabdomen. The belt forces would be there,not at your pelvic bones. This could causeserious internal injuries.For proper protection when the vehicle isin motion, have the seatback upright. Thensit well back in the seat and wear yoursafety belt properly.

16

Do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicle ismoving.

Head Restraints

Adjust the head restraint so that the top of therestraint is at the same height as the top ofthe occupant’s head. This position reduces thechance of a neck injury in a crash.

Pull the head restraintup to raise it. To lowerthe head restraint,press the releasebutton, located on theheadrest post on the topof the seatback, whileyou push the headrestraint down.

17

Rear Seats

Rear Seat Operation

A. Seat Adjustment Handle.B. Reclining Seatback Strap.C. Sliding Seat Lever.

Entering and Exiting the Third Row

{CAUTION:

Using the third row seating position whilethe second row is folded, or folded andtumbled, could cause injury in a suddenstop or crash. Be sure to return the seatto the passenger seating position. Pushand pull on the seat to make sure it islocked into place.

Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safetybelts still fastened may cause damage to theseat or the safety belts. Always unbucklethe safety belts and return them to their normalstowed position before folding a rear seat.

18

To access the third row:

1. Make sure there are no objects on the floor infront of or on the second row seat, or in theseat tracks on the floor.

2. On seats with folding armrests, make sure thearmrest is in the upright position.

3. Make sure the safety belt is unfastened and inthe stowed position.

4. Pull the sliding seat lever (C) forward andmove the seatback forward. The seatcushion will automatically fold, and the entireseat will slide forward.

Returning the Seat to the SeatingPositionTo return the second row seat to its normalseating position:

1. Make sure there are no objects on the floorbehind the second row seat, or in the seattracks on the floor.

2. Pull the seatback rearward until it is locked inplace.

3. Slide the seat rearward by pushing on theseatback until it is locked into place.

4. Push down on the rear of the seat cushionuntil it is locked in place.

5. Push and pull on the seatback and seatcushion to make sure they are locked in place

6. Make sure the safety belt is not under the seatcushion.

19

Reclining the SeatbacksTo recline the seatback:

1. Leaning forward in the seat, pull the recliningseatback strap (B).

2. Move the seatback to the desired position,then release the strap to lock the seatbackin place.


Folding the Rear SeatTo fold the second row seats:

1. Make sure there is nothing on or underthe seat.

2. Make sure the armrest is in the uprightposition, and the safety belt is unfastened.

3. Pull forward on the reclining seatbackstrap (B) and push down on the seatback.

4. If the headrest hits the front seat, slide thesecond row seat rearward.

To return the seatback to the seating position, liftthe upper corner of the seatback and push itrearward until it locks into place. Push and pull onthe seatback to make sure it is locked.

Adjusting the SeatsTo adjust the second row seats, pull outward onthe seat adjustment handle (A). Slide the seatforward or rearward to the desired position.Release the handle and push and pull on the seatto make sure it is locked.

20

Third Row Seats

{CAUTION:

Using the third row seating position whilethe second row is folded, or pushedforward in the entry position, could causeinjury in a sudden stop or crash. Be sureto return the seat to the passengerseating position. Push and pull on theseat to make sure it is locked into place.

The third row seats can be folded forward orremoved.

Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safetybelts still fastened may cause damage to theseat or the safety belts. Always unbucklethe safety belts and return them to their normalstowed position before folding a rear seat.

To fold the seatback:


2. Disconnect the rear safety belt mini-latch,using a key in the slot on the mini-buckle,let the belt retract into the headliner. Stow themini-latch in the holder located in theheadliner.

21

3. Pull up on therelease lever locatedon the back of theseat. The headrestmoves forwardautomatically.

4. Push the seatback forward to lay flat.

To return the seatback to the seating position:

1. Raise the seatback into place by usingthe pullstrap from the rear of the vehicle, or bypushing it into place from inside the vehicle.

2. Make sure the headrest is locked into placebefore sitting in the seat.

{CAUTION:

If the seatback is not locked, it couldmove forward in a sudden stop or crash.That could cause injury to the personsitting there. Always push and pull on theseatback to be sure it is locked.

3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure itis locked in place.

{CAUTION:

A safety belt that is improperly routed, notproperly attached, or twisted will notprovide the protection needed in a crash.The person wearing the belt could beseriously injured. After raising the rearseatback, always check to be sure that thesafety belts are properly routed andattached, and are not twisted.

22

4. Make sure the safety belt is not twisted, andreconnect the center safety belt mini-latch tothe mini-buckle.

5. Pull on the safety belt to be sure the mini-latchis secure.

Removing the Third Row Seats1. Remove the cargo management system, if it is

in the vehicle. See Cargo Management Systemon page 164.


Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety beltsstill fastened may cause damage to the seat orthe safety belts. Always unbuckle the safetybelts and return them to their normal stowedposition before folding a rear seat.3. Fold the seatback down. See Folding the

Seatback earlier in this section.4. Remove the rear bolts located on the floor on

each side of the seat.5. Remove the seat by tilting it slightly upward,

and then pulling it out of the rear of the vehiclein one motion.

6. Put the bolts back into the holes on the floorso they do not get misplaced.

Installing the Third row Seats1. Make sure the seatback is folded forward

before installing the seat. See Folding theSeatback earlier in this section.The seats must be placed in the properlocations for the legs to attach correctly. Thewider seat must be installed on the driverside and the narrower seat on the passengerside. Make sure to remove the bolts fromthe holes in the floor before installingthe seats.

2. Place the seat on the vehicle floor so that thefront seat hooks are on the vehicle bars.

3. Reinstall the bolts, and torque to 55 Y(41 lb ft). Pull up on the seat to make sureit is locked in place.

4. Raise the seatback to its upright position.Push and pull on the seatback to makesure it is locked into place.

5. Push the headrest up into position. Push andpull on the headrest to make sure it is lockedinto place.

23

Safety Belts

Safety Belts: They Are for EveryoneThis part of the manual tells you how to usesafety belts properly. It also tells you some thingsyou should not do with safety belts.

{CAUTION:

Do not let anyone ride where he or shecannot wear a safety belt properly. If youare in a crash and you are not wearing asafety belt, your injuries can be muchworse. You can hit things inside thevehicle or be ejected from it. You can beseriously injured or killed. In the samecrash, you might not be, if you arebuckled up. Always fasten your safetybelt, and check that your passengers’belts are fastened properly too.

{CAUTION:

It is extremely dangerous to ride in acargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle.In a collision, people riding in these areasare more likely to be seriously injured orkilled. Do not allow people to ride in anyarea of your vehicle that is not equippedwith seats and safety belts. Be sureeveryone in your vehicle is in a seat andusing a safety belt properly.

Your vehicle has indicators to remind you andyour passengers to buckle your safety belts. SeeSafety Belt Reminder Light on page 211 andPassenger Safety Belt Reminder Light onpage 212.

In most states and in all Canadian provinces, thelaw says to wear safety belts. Here is why:They work.

24

You never know if you will be in a crash. If you dohave a crash, you do not know if it will be abad one.

A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can beso serious that even buckled up, a personwould not survive. But most crashes are inbetween. In many of them, people who buckle upcan survive and sometimes walk away. Withoutbelts they could have been badly hurt or killed.

After more than 40 years of safety belts invehicles, the facts are clear. In most crashesbuckling up does matter... a lot!

Why Safety Belts WorkWhen you ride in or on anything, you go as fastas it goes.

Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just aseat on wheels.

25

Put someone on it. Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. Therider does not stop.

26

The person keeps going until stopped bysomething. In a real vehicle, it could be thewindshield...

or the instrument panel...

27

or the safety belts!

With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicledoes. You get more time to stop. You stopover more distance, and your strongest bonestake the forces. That is why safety beltsmake such good sense.

Questions and Answers AboutSafety Belts

Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after anaccident if I am wearing a safety belt?

A: You could be — whether you are wearing asafety belt or not. But you can unbuckle asafety belt, even if you are upside down. Andyour chance of being conscious during andafter an accident, so you can unbuckle and getout, is much greater if you are belted.

Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should Ihave to wear safety belts?

A: Airbags are supplemental systems only; sothey work with safety belts — not instead ofthem. Every airbag system ever offeredfor sale has required the use of safety belts.Even if you are in a vehicle that has airbags,you still have to buckle up to get the mostprotection. That is true not only in frontalcollisions, but especially in side and othercollisions.

28

Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive farfrom home, why should I wear safetybelts?

A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you arein an accident — even one that is not yourfault — you and your passengers can be hurt.Being a good driver does not protect youfrom things beyond your control, such as baddrivers.

Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km)of home. And the greatest number ofserious injuries and deaths occur at speeds ofless than 40 mph (65 km/h).

Safety belts are for everyone.

How to Wear Safety Belts ProperlyThis part is only for people of adult size.

Be aware that there are special things to knowabout safety belts and children. And thereare different rules for smaller children and babies.If a child will be riding in your vehicle, seeOlder Children on page 48 or Infants and YoungChildren on page 51. Follow those rules foreveryone’s protection.

First, you will want to know which restraintsystems your vehicle has.

We will start with the driver position.

29

Driver Position

Lap-Shoulder BeltThe driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here is how towear it properly.

1. Close and lock the door.

2. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight. Tosee how, see “Seats” in the Index.

3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt acrossyou. Do not let it get twisted.

The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull thebelt across you very quickly. If this happens,let the belt go back slightly to unlock it.Then pull the belt across you more slowly.

4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until itclicks.Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it issecure. If the belt is not long enough,see Safety Belt Extender on page 47.Make sure the release button on the buckle ispositioned so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

5. Move the shoulder belt height adjuster to theheight that is right for you. Improper shoulderbelt height adjustment could reduce theeffectiveness of the safety belt in a crash. SeeShoulder Belt Height Adjustment on page 38.

30

6. To make the lap part tight, pull up on theshoulder belt.It may be necessary to pull stitching on thesafety belt through the latch plate to fullytighten the lap belt on smaller occupants.

The lap part of the belt should be worn low andsnug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In acrash, this applies force to the strong pelvic bones.And you would be less likely to slide under the lapbelt. If you slid under it, the belt would apply force atyour abdomen. This could cause serious or evenfatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go over theshoulder and across the chest. These parts of thebody are best able to take belt restraining forces.The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop orcrash.

31

Q: What is wrong with this?

A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not givenearly as much protection this way.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your shoulderbelt is too loose. In a crash, you wouldmove forward too much, which couldincrease injury. The shoulder belt shouldfit against your body.

32


A: The lap belt is too loose. It will not give nearlyas much protection this way.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your lap beltis too loose. In a crash, you could slideunder the lap belt and apply force at yourabdomen. This could cause serious oreven fatal injuries. The lap belt should beworn low and snug on the hips, justtouching the thighs.

33


A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if your belt isbuckled in the wrong place like this. In acrash, the belt would go up over yourabdomen. The belt forces would be there,not at the pelvic bones. This could causeserious internal injuries. Always buckleyour belt into the buckle nearest you.

34


A: The belt is over an armrest.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if your beltgoes over an armrest like this. The beltwould be much too high. In a crash, youcan slide under the belt. The belt forcewould then be applied at the abdomen,not at the pelvic bones, and that couldcause serious or fatal injuries. Be sure thebelt goes under the armrests.

35


A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. Itshould be worn over the shoulder at all times.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if you wearthe shoulder belt under your arm. In acrash, your body would move too farforward, which would increase the chanceof head and neck injury. Also, the beltwould apply too much force to the ribs,which are not as strong as shoulderbones. You could also severely injureinternal organs like your liver or spleen.

36


A: The belt is twisted across the body.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured by a twistedbelt. In a crash, you would not have thefull width of the belt to spread impactforces. If a belt is twisted, make it straightso it can work properly, or ask yourdealer/retailer to fix it.

37

To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle.The belt should go back out of the way. Whenthe safety belt is not in use, slide the latch plate upthe safety belt webbing. The latch plate shouldrest on the stitching on the safety belt, nearthe guide loop on the side wall.

Before you close the door, be sure the belt is outof the way. If you slam the door on it, you candamage both the belt and your vehicle.

Shoulder Belt Height AdjustmentBefore you begin to drive, move the shoulder beltheight adjuster to the height that is right for you.Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of thebelt is centered on your shoulder. The belt shouldbe away from your face and neck, but not falling offyour shoulder. Incorrect positioning of the shoulderbelt can reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt.

To move it down, pushdown on the button (A)and move the heightadjuster to the desiredposition. You can movethe height adjuster up bypushing up on theshoulder belt guide.

After you move the height adjuster to where youwant it, try to move it down without pushing thebutton down to make sure it has locked intoposition.

38

Safety Belt Use During PregnancySafety belts work for everyone, including pregnantwomen. Like all occupants, they are more likelyto be seriously injured if they do not wearsafety belts.

A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulderbelt, and the lap portion should be worn as low aspossible, below the rounding, throughout thepregnancy.

The best way to protect the fetus is to protect themother. When a safety belt is worn properly, itis more likely that the fetus will not be hurtin a crash. For pregnant women, as for anyone,the key to making safety belts effective is wearingthem properly.

Right Front Passenger PositionTo learn how to wear the right front passenger’ssafety belt properly, see Driver Position onpage 30.

The right front passenger’s safety belt works thesame way as the driver’s safety belt — exceptfor one thing. If you ever pull the shoulder portionof the belt out all the way, you will engage thechild restraint locking feature. If this happens, letthe belt go back all the way and start again.

39

Rear Seat PassengersIt is very important for rear seat passengers tobuckle up! Accident statistics show that unbeltedpeople in the rear seat are hurt more often incrashes than those who are wearing safety belts.

Rear passengers who are not safety beltedcan be thrown out of the vehicle in a crash. Andthey can strike others in the vehicle who arewearing safety belts.

Lap-Shoulder BeltAll rear seating positions have lap-shoulder belts.If you are using the center third row seatingposition and the safety belt is not attached, seeThird Row Seats on page 21 for instructionon reconnecting the safety belt to the mini-buckle.

Here is how to wear one properly.

1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt acrossyou. Do not let it get twisted.The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the beltacross you very quickly. If this happens, letthe belt go back slightly to unlock it. Then pullthe belt across you more slowly.

40

2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until itclicks. Pull up on the latch plate to makesure it is secure.When the shoulder belt is pulled out all theway, it will lock. If it does, let it go back all theway and start again.If the belt is not long enough, see Safety BeltExtender on page 47.Make sure the release button on the buckle ispositioned so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

3. To make the lap part tight, pull up on theshoulder part.It may be necessary to pull stitching on thesafety belt through the latch plate to fullytighten the lap belt on smaller occupants.

41

The lap part of the belt should be worn low andsnug on the hips, just touching the thighs. Ina crash, this applies force to the strong pelvicbones. And you would be less likely to slide underthe lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt wouldapply force at your abdomen. This could causeserious or even fatal injuries. The shoulderbelt should go over the shoulder and across thechest. These parts of the body are best ableto take belt restraining forces.

The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or acrash.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your shoulderbelt is too loose. In a crash, you wouldmove forward too much, which couldincrease injury. The shoulder belt shouldfit against your body.

42

To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle.For outboard seating positions, when the safetybelt is not in use, slide the latch plate up the safetybelt webbing. The latch plate should rest on thestitching on the safety belt, near the guide loop onthe side wall.

Rear Safety Belt Comfort GuidesRear shoulder belt comfort guides may provideadded safety belt comfort for older childrenwho have outgrown booster seats and for someadults. When installed on a shoulder belt, thecomfort guide positions the belt away fromthe neck and head.

43

There is a guide for each outboard passengerpositions in the second row seat and all passengerpositions in the third row. Here is how to installa comfort guide to the safety belt:

1. For the outboard positions, remove the guidefrom its storage clip on the interior body.

For the third row centerposition, locate thecomfort guide which islocated in a storagepocket, at the top of theseat, under theheadrest on the driver’sside of the vehicle.

To access the comfort guide, you will first needto move the headrest forward by pulling on thehandle behind the seatback. The comfort guidewill now be accessible. Pull the comfort guideout of its storage location and then return theheadrest to its upright position.The elastic cord on the comfort guide isadjustable. You can make it longer or shorterby squeezing the both ends of the plasticadjuster.

Outboard Positions

Third Row CenterPosition

44

2. Slide the guide under and past the belt. Theelastic cord must be under the belt. Then,place the guide over the belt, and insert thetwo edges of the belt into the slots of theguide.

3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it liesflat. The elastic cord must be under the beltand the guide on top.

45

{CAUTION:

A safety belt that is not properly wornmay not provide the protection needed ina crash. The person wearing the beltcould be seriously injured. The shoulderbelt should go over the shoulder andacross the chest. These parts of the bodyare best able to take belt restrainingforces.

4. Buckle, position, and release the safety beltas described in Rear Seat Passengers onpage 40. Make sure that the shoulderbelt crosses the shoulder.

To remove and store the comfort guide, squeezethe belt edges together so that you can takethem out of the guide. Slide the guide intoits storage location or on its storage clip.

46

Safety Belt PretensionersYour vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for thedriver and right front passenger. Although youcannot see them, they are part of the safety beltassembly. They help tighten the safety belts duringthe early stages of a moderate to severe frontal,near frontal or side crash or a rollover if thethreshold conditions for pretensioner activationare met.

Pretensioners work only once. If they activate in acrash, you will need to get new ones, andprobably other new parts for your safety beltsystem. See Replacing Restraint System PartsAfter a Crash on page 94.

Safety Belt ExtenderIf the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you,you should use it.

But if a safety belt is not long enough, yourdealer/retailer will order you an extender. Whenyou go in to order it, take the heaviest coat you willwear, so the extender will be long enough foryou. To help avoid personal injury, do notlet someone else use it, and use it only for theseat it is made to fit. The extender has beendesigned for adults. Never use it for securing childseats. To wear it, attach it to the regular safetybelt. For more information, see the instructionsheet that comes with the extender.

47

Child Restraints

Older Children

Older children who have outgrown booster seatsshould wear the vehicle’s safety belts.

Q: What is the proper way to wear safetybelts?

A: An older child should wear a lap-shoulder beltand get the additional restraint a shoulder beltcan provide. The shoulder belt should notcross the face or neck. The lap belt should fitsnugly below the hips, just touching thetop of the thighs. It should never be worn overthe abdomen, which could cause severe oreven fatal internal injuries in a crash.

According to accident statistics, children are saferwhen properly restrained in the rear seatingpositions than in the front seating positions.

In a crash, children who are not buckled up canstrike other people who are buckled up, or can bethrown out of the vehicle. Older children needto use safety belts properly.

48

{CAUTION:

Never do this.

Here two children are wearing the samebelt. The belt cannot properly spread theimpact forces. In a crash, the two childrencan be crushed together and seriouslyinjured. A belt must be used by only oneperson at a time.

Q: What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulderbelt, but the child is so small that theshoulder belt is very close to the child’sface or neck?

A: If the child is sitting in a seat next to awindow, move the child toward the center ofthe vehicle. Also see Rear Safety BeltComfort Guides on page 43. If the child issitting in the center rear seat passengerposition, move the child toward the safety beltbuckle. In either case, be sure that theshoulder belt still is on the child’s shoulder, sothat in a crash the child’s upper body wouldhave the restraint that belts provide.

49

{CAUTION:

Never do this.

Here a child is sitting in a seat that has alap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part isbehind the child. If the child wears thebelt in this way, in a crash the child mightslide under the belt. The belt’s forcewould then be applied right on the child’sabdomen. That could cause serious orfatal injuries.

Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the beltshould be worn low and snug on the hips, justtouching the child’s thighs. This applies belt forceto the child’s pelvic bones in a crash.

50

Infants and Young ChildrenEveryone in a vehicle needs protection! Thisincludes infants and all other children. Neither thedistance traveled nor the age and size of thetraveler changes the need, for everyone, to usesafety restraints. In fact, the law in every statein the United States and in every Canadianprovince says children up to some age must berestrained while in a vehicle.

{CAUTION:

Children can be seriously injured orstrangled if a shoulder belt is wrappedaround their neck and the safety beltcontinues to tighten. Never leave childrenunattended in a vehicle and never allowchildren to play with the safety belts.

Every time infants and young children ride invehicles, they should have the protection providedby appropriate restraints. Young children shouldnot use the vehicle’s adult safety belts alone,unless there is no other choice. Instead, they needto use a child restraint.

51

{CAUTION:

People should never hold a baby in theirarms while riding in a vehicle. A babydoes not weigh much — until a crash.During a crash a baby will become soheavy it is not possible to hold it. Forexample, in a crash at only 25 mph(40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg) baby willsuddenly become a 240 lb (110 kg) forceon a person’s arms. A baby should besecured in an appropriate restraint.

52

{CAUTION:

Children who are up against, or very closeto, any airbag when it inflates can beseriously injured or killed. Airbags pluslap-shoulder belts offer protection foradults and older children, but not foryoung children and infants. Neither thevehicle’s safety belt system nor its airbagsystem is designed for them. Youngchildren and infants need the protectionthat a child restraint system can provide.

53

Q: What are the different types of add-onchild restraints?

A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased bythe vehicle’s owner, are available in four basictypes. Selection of a particular restraint shouldtake into consideration not only the child’sweight, height, and age but also whether or notthe restraint will be compatible with the motorvehicle in which it will be used.

For most basic types of child restraints, thereare many different models available. Whenpurchasing a child restraint, be sure it isdesigned to be used in a motor vehicle. If it is,the restraint will have a label saying that itmeets federal motor vehicle safety standards.

The restraint manufacturer’s instructions thatcome with the restraint state the weight andheight limitations for a particular child restraint.In addition, there are many kinds of restraintsavailable for children with special needs.

{CAUTION:

Newborn infants need complete support,including support for the head and neck.This is necessary because a newborninfant’s neck is weak and its head weighsso much compared with the rest of itsbody. In a crash, an infant in a rear-facingseat settles into the restraint, so the crashforces can be distributed across thestrongest part of an infant’s body, theback and shoulders. Infants alwaysshould be secured in appropriate infantrestraints.

54

{CAUTION:

The body structure of a young child isquite unlike that of an adult or older child,for whom the safety belts are designed. Ayoung child’s hip bones are still so smallthat the vehicle’s regular safety belt maynot remain low on the hip bones, as itshould. Instead, it may settle up aroundthe child’s abdomen. In a crash, the beltwould apply force on a body area that isunprotected by any bony structure. Thisalone could cause serious or fatal injuries.Young children always should be securedin appropriate child restraints.

Child Restraint Systems

An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for usein a motor vehicle, is an infant restraint systemdesigned to restrain or position a child on acontinuous flat surface. Make sure that the infant’shead rests toward the center of the vehicle.

55

A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraint withthe seating surface against the back of theinfant. The harness system holds the infant inplace and, in a crash, acts to keep the infantpositioned in the restraint.

A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraintfor the child’s body with the harness and alsosometimes with surfaces such as T-shapedor shelf-like shields.

56

A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designedto improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety beltsystem. Some booster seats have a shoulder beltpositioner, and some high-back booster seatshave a five-point harness. A booster seat can alsohelp a child to see out the window.

Q: How Should I Use a Child Restraint?

A: A child restraint system is any device designedfor use in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat, orposition children. A built-in child restraintsystem is a permanent part of the motorvehicle. An add-on child restraint system is aportable one, which is purchased by thevehicle’s owner. To help reduce injuries, anadd-on child restraint must be secured in thevehicle. With built-in or add-on child restraints,the child has to be secured within the childrestraint.

When choosing an add-on child restraint, besure the child restraint is designed to beused in a vehicle. If it is, it will have a labelsaying that it meets federal motor vehiclesafety standards. Then follow the instructionsfor the restraint. You may find theseinstructions on the restraint itself or in abooklet, or both.

57

Securing an Add-on Child Restraint inthe Vehicle

{CAUTION:

A child can be seriously injured or killedin a crash if the child restraint is notproperly secured in the vehicle. Make surethe child restraint is properly installed inthe vehicle using the vehicle’s safety beltor LATCH system, following theinstructions that came with that restraint,and also the instructions in this manual.

To help reduce the chance of injury, the childrestraint must be secured in the vehicle. Childrestraint systems must be secured in vehicle seatsby lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap-shoulderbelt, or by the LATCH system. See LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) onpage 61 for more information. A child canbe endangered in a crash if the child restraint isnot properly secured in the vehicle.

When securing an add-on child restraint, refer tothe instructions that come with the restraintwhich may be on the restraint itself or in a booklet,or both, and to this manual. The child restraintinstructions are important, so if they are notavailable, obtain a replacement copy from themanufacturer.

Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraintcan move around in a collision or sudden stopand injure people in the vehicle. Be sure toproperly secure any child restraint in yourvehicle — even when no child is in it.

58

Securing the Child Within the ChildRestraintThere are several systems for securing the childwithin the child restraint. One system, thethree-point harness, has straps that come downover each of the infant’s shoulders and buckletogether at the crotch. The five-point harnesssystem has two shoulder straps, two hip straps, anda crotch strap. A shield may take the place of hipstraps. A T-shaped shield has shoulder straps thatare attached to a flat pad which rests low againstthe child’s body. A shelf- or armrest-type shield hasstraps that are attached to a wide, shelf-like shieldthat swings up or to the side.

{CAUTION:

A child can be seriously injured or killedin a crash if the child is not properlysecured in the child restraint. Make surethe child is properly secured, followingthe instructions that came with thatrestraint.

Because there are different systems, it is importantto refer to the instructions that come with therestraint. A child can be endangered in a crash ifthe child is not properly secured in the childrestraint.

Where to Put the RestraintAccident statistics show that children are saferif they are restrained in the rear rather thanthe front seat.

We recommend that children be secured in a rearseat, including: an infant or a child riding in arear-facing child restraint; a child riding in aforward-facing child seat; an older child riding in abooster seat; and children, who are largeenough, using safety belts.

59

A label on your sun visor says, “Never put arear-facing child seat in the front.” This is becausethe risk to the rear-facing child is so great, if theairbag deploys.

{CAUTION:

A child in a rear-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if the rightfront passenger’s airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close to theinflating airbag.

Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off the rightfront passenger’s frontal and seat-mountedside impact airbag (if equipped) if thesystem detects a rear-facing child restraint,no system is fail-safe, and no one canguarantee that an airbag will not deploy

CAUTION: (Continued)


under some unusual circumstance, eventhough it is turned off. We recommendthat rear-facing child restraints be securedin a rear seat, even if the airbag(s) are off.

If you secure a forward-facing childrestraint in the right front seat, alwaysmove the front passenger seat as far backas it will go. It is better to secure the childrestraint in a rear seat.

Wherever you install a child restraint, be sure tosecure the child restraint properly.

Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraintcan move around in a collision or suddenstop and injure people in the vehicle. Be sure toproperly secure any child restraint in yourvehicle — even when no child is in it.

60

Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH)The LATCH system holds a child restraint duringdriving or in a crash. This system is designedto make installation of a child restraint easier. TheLATCH system uses anchors in the vehicle andattachments on the child restraint that are made foruse with the LATCH system.

Make sure that a LATCH-compatible child restraintis properly installed using the anchors, or usethe vehicle’s safety belts to secure the restraint,following the instructions that came with thatrestraint, and also the instructions in this manual.When installing a child restraint with a toptether, you must also use either the lower anchorsor the safety belts to properly secure the childrestraint. A child restraint must never be attachedusing only the top tether and anchor.

In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle,you need a child restraint that has LATCHattachments. The child restraint manufacturer willprovide you with instructions on how to use thechild restraint and its attachments. The followingexplains how to attach a child restraint with theseattachments in your vehicle.

Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraintshave lower anchors and attachments or toptether anchors and attachments.

Lower Anchors

Lower anchors (A) are metal bars built into thevehicle. There are two lower anchors for eachLATCH seating position that will accommodate achild restraint with lower attachments (B).

61

Top Tether Anchor

A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the childrestraint to the vehicle. A top tether anchor is builtinto the vehicle. The top tether attachment (B)on the child restraint connects to the top tetheranchor in the vehicle in order to reduce the forwardmovement and rotation of the child restraintduring driving or in a crash.

Your child restraint may have a single tether (A) ora dual tether (C). Either will have a singleattachment (B) to secure the top tether to theanchor.

Some child restraints with top tethers are designedfor use with or without the top tether beingattached. Others require the top tether always tobe attached. In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints have a top tether,and that the tether be attached. In the UnitedStates, some child restraints also have atop tether. Be sure to read and follow theinstructions for your child restraint.

If the child restraint does not have a top tether,one can be obtained, in kit form, for manychild restraints. Ask the child restraintmanufacturer whether or not a kit is available.

62

Lower Anchor and Top Tether AnchorLocations

i (Top Tether Anchor):Seating positions withtop tether anchors.

j (Lower Anchor):Seating positions withtwo lower anchors.


j (Lower Anchor):Seating positions withtwo lower anchors.


Second Row — Bucket

Second Row — 60/40Bench

Third Row

63

To assist you in locatingthe lower anchors, eachsecond row anchorposition has a label,near the creasebetween the seatbackand the seat cushion.

To assist you in locatingthe top tether anchors,the top tether anchorsymbol is located on thetrim cover or near theanchor.

The top tether anchors are located at the bottomrear of the seatback for each seating positionin the second row. Open the trim cover to accessthe anchors. Be sure to use an anchor locatedon the same side of the vehicle as the seatingposition where the child restraint will be placed.

Second Row — Bucket Shown, Bench Similar

64

The third row has one top tether anchor located atthe bottom rear of the center seatback. Thisanchor should be used for the center seatingposition only. Never install two top tethers usingthe same top tether anchor.

Do not secure a child restraint in the right frontpassenger position or the third row outboardseating positions, if a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be attached, or if theinstructions that come with the child restraint saythat the top tether must be attached. There isno place to attach the top tether in these positions.

Accident statistics show that children are safer ifthey are restrained in the rear rather than the frontseat. See Where to Put the Restraint on page 59for additional information.

Third Row Seat

65

Securing a Child Restraint Designed forthe LATCH System

{CAUTION:

If a LATCH-type child restraint is notattached to anchors, the restraint will notbe able to protect the child correctly. In acrash, the child could be seriously injuredor killed. Make sure that a LATCH-typechild restraint is properly installed usingthe anchors, or use the vehicle’s safetybelts to secure the restraint, following theinstructions that came with that restraint,and also the instructions in this manual.

{CAUTION:

Each top tether anchor and lower anchorin the vehicle is designed to hold only onechild restraint. Attaching more than onechild restraint to a single anchor couldcause the anchor or attachment to comeloose or even break during a crash. Achild or others could be injured if thishappens. To help prevent injury to peopleand damage to your vehicle, attach onlyone child restraint per anchor.

66

{CAUTION:

Children can be seriously injured orstrangled if a shoulder belt is wrappedaround their neck and the safety beltcontinues to tighten. Secure any unusedsafety belts behind the child restraint sochildren cannot reach them. Pull theshoulder belt all the way out of theretractor to set the lock, if your vehiclehas one, after the child restraint has beeninstalled. Be sure to follow theinstructions of the child restraintmanufacturer.

Notice: Contact between the child restraint orthe LATCH attachment parts and the vehicle’ssafety belt assembly may cause damage tothese parts. Make sure when securing unusedsafety belts behind the child restraint thatthere is no contact between the child restraintor the LATCH attachment parts and thevehicle’s safety belt assembly.

Folding an empty rear seat with the safetybelts secured may cause damage to the safetybelt or the seat. When removing the childrestraint, always remember to return the safetybelts to their normal, stowed position beforefolding the rear seat.

1. Attach and tighten the lower attachments tothe lower anchors. If the child restraint doesnot have lower attachments or the desiredseating position does not have lower anchors,secure the child restraint with the top tetherand the safety belts. Refer to your childrestraint manufacturer instructions and theinstructions in this manual.

1.1. Find the lower anchors for the desiredseating position.

1.2. Recline the seatback to the full reclinedposition.Make sure the second row benchseatbacks are aligned at the sameangle before placing the child restrainton the seat. Make sure the thirdrow bench seatbacks are both uprightbefore placing the child restraint onthe seat.

67

1.3. Put the child restraint on the seat.1.4. Attach and tighten the lower

attachments on the child restraint to thelower anchors.

2. If the child restraint manufacturer recommendsthat the top tether be attached, attach andtighten the top tether to the top tether anchor,if the vehicle has one. Refer to the childrestraint instructions and the following steps:

2.1. Find the top tether anchor.2.2. If the anchor is covered, flip open the

trim cover to expose the anchor.

2.3. Route, attach and tighten the top tetheraccording to your child restraintinstructions and the followinginstructions:

If the position you areusing does not have ahead rest/restraintand you are using asingle tether, route thetether over theseatback.

If the position you areusing does not have ahead rest/restraintand you are using adual tether, routethe tether over theseatback.

68

If the position you areusing has a fixed headrest/restraint andyou are using a dualtether, route thetether around the headrest/restraint.

If the position you areusing has a fixed headrest/restraint andyou are using a singletether, route thetether over the headrest/restraint.

3. Push and pull the child restraint in differentdirections to be sure it is secure.

Securing a Child Restraint in a RearSeat PositionIf your child restraint has the LATCH system, seeLower Anchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH) on page 61.

There are no top tether anchors in the third rowoutboard seating positions. Do not secure achild restraint in these positions if a national orlocal law requires that a top tether be anchored orif the instructions that come with the restraintsay that the top tether must be anchored.

If your child restraint does not have the LATCHsystem, you will be using the lap-shoulderbelt to secure the child restraint in this position. Besure to follow the instructions that came with thechild restraint. Secure the child in the child restraintwhen and as the instructions say.

1. Put the child restraint on the seat.

2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap andshoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety beltthrough or around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will show you how.

69

3. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release buttonis positioned so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set the lock.

70

5. To tighten the belt, push down on the childrestraint, pull the shoulder portion of the beltto tighten the lap portion of the belt andfeed the shoulder belt back into the retractor.If you are using a forward-facing childrestraint, you may find it helpful to use yourknee to push down on the child restraintas you tighten the belt. You should not be ableto pull more of the belt from the retractoronce the lock has been set.

6. If your child restraint has a top tether, and theposition that you are using has a top tetheranchor, attach and tighten the top tether to thetop tether anchor. Refer to the instructionsthat came with the child restraint and to LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH)on page 61.


To remove the child restraint, unbuckle thevehicle’s safety belt and let it go back all the way.The safety belt will move freely again and beready to work for an adult or larger childpassenger.

When the safety belt is not in use, slide the latchplate up the safety belt webbing. The latchplate should rest on the stitching on the safetybelt, near the guide loop on the side wall.

71

Securing a Child Restraint in theRight Front Seat PositionYour vehicle has a right front passenger airbag.A rear seat is a safer place to secure aforward-facing child restraint. See Whereto Put the Restraint on page 59.

In addition, your vehicle has a passenger sensingsystem. The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn off the right front passenger’sfrontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact airbagwhen an infant in a rear-facing infant seat or asmall child in a forward-facing child restraintor booster seat is detected. See PassengerSensing System on page 86 and Passenger AirbagStatus Indicator on page 214 for more informationon this, including important safety information.

A label on your sun visor says, “Never puta rear-facing child seat in the front.” This isbecause the risk to the rear-facing child is sogreat, if the airbag deploys.

{CAUTION:


Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off the rightfront passenger’s frontal and seat-mountedside impact airbag if the system detects arear-facing child restraint, no system isfail-safe, and no one can guarantee that anairbag will not deploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though it is turned off.We recommend that rear-facing childrestraints be secured in a rear seat, even ifthe airbags are off.


72



If your child restraint has the LATCH system, seeLower Anchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH) on page 61.

There is no top tether anchor at the right frontseating position. Do not secure a child seat in thisposition if a national or local law requires thatthe top tether be anchored or if the instructionsthat come with the child restraint say that the toptether must be anchored. See Lower Anchorsand Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 61 ifthe child restraint has a top tether.

You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to securethe child restraint in this position. Be sure to followthe instructions that came with the child restraint.Secure the child in the child restraint when and asthe instructions say.

Your vehicle has a right front passenger’s frontalairbag. See Passenger Sensing System onpage 86. We recommend that rear-facing childrestraints be secured in a rear seat, even ifthe airbags are off.

1. Move the seat as far back as it will go beforesecuring the forward-facing child restraint.See Manual Seats on page 9 or Power Seatson page 10.When the passenger sensing system hasturned off the right front passenger’s frontalairbag and seat-mounted side impactairbag, the off indicator on the passengerairbag status indicator should light and stay litwhen you start the vehicle. See PassengerAirbag Status Indicator on page 214.

2. Put the child restraint on the seat.

3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap andshoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety beltthrough or around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will show you how.

73

4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release buttonis positioned so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set the lock.

74

6. To tighten the belt, push down on the childrestraint, pull the shoulder portion of the beltto tighten the lap portion of the belt andfeed the shoulder belt back into the retractor.If you are using a forward-facing childrestraint, you may find it helpful to use yourknee to push down on the child restraintas you tighten the belt. You should not be ableto pull more of the belt from the retractoronce the lock has been set.


If the airbag is off, the off indicator will be lit and staylit when you start the vehicle.If a child restraint has been installed and the onindicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the childrestraint from the vehicle and reinstall the childrestraint.If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restartingthe vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to makesure that the vehicle’s seatback is not pressing thechild restraint into the seat cushion. If this happens,slightly recline the vehicle’s seatback and adjust theseat cushion if possible. Also make sure the childrestraint is not trapped under the vehicle headrestraint. If this happens, adjust the head restraint.If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in thechild restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicleand check with your dealer/retailer.To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle thevehicle’s safety belt and let it go back all the way.The safety belt will move freely again and be readyto work for an adult or larger child passenger. Whenthe safety belt is not in use, slide the latch plate upthe safety belt webbing. The latch plate should reston the stitching on the safety belt, near the upperanchor on the side wall.

75

Airbag SystemYour vehicle has the following airbags:

• A frontal airbag for the driver.

• A frontal airbag for the right front passenger.

• A seat-mounted side impact airbag for thedriver.

• A seat-mounted side impact airbag for theright front passenger.

• A roof-rail airbag for the driver, passengerdirectly behind the driver, and the thirdrow outboard passenger position.

• A roof-rail airbag for the right front passenger,passenger directly behind the right frontpassenger, and the third row outboardpassenger position.

All of the airbags in your vehicle will have theword AIRBAG embossed in the trim or onan attached label near the deployment opening.

For frontal airbags, the word AIRBAG willappear on the middle part of the steering wheelfor the driver and on the instrument panel forthe right front passenger.

With seat-mounted side impact airbags, the wordAIRBAG will appear on the side of the seatbackclosest to the door.

With roof-rail airbags, the word AIRBAG willappear along the headliner or trim.

Airbags are designed to supplement the protectionprovided by safety belts. Even though today’sairbags are also designed to help reduce the riskof injury from the force of an inflating bag, allairbags must inflate very quickly to do their job.

76

Here are the most important things to know aboutthe airbag system:

{CAUTION:

You can be severely injured or killed in acrash if you are not wearing your safetybelt — even if you have airbags. Wearingyour safety belt during a crash helpsreduce your chance of hitting thingsinside the vehicle or being ejected from it.Airbags are “supplemental restraints” tothe safety belts. All airbags are designedto work with safety belts, but do notreplace them.

{CAUTION:

Frontal airbags are designed to deploy inmoderate to severe frontal and nearfrontal crashes. They are not designed toinflate in rollover, rear crashes, or in manyside crashes.

Seat-mounted side impact airbags aredesigned to inflate in moderate to severecrashes where something hits the side ofyour vehicle. They are not designed toinflate in frontal, in rollover, or in rearcrashes. Rollover capable roof-rail airbagsare designed to inflate in moderate tosevere crashes where something hits theside of your vehicle, during a vehiclerollover, or in a severe frontal impact.They are not designed to inflate in rearcrashes.

Everyone in your vehicle should wear asafety belt properly — whether or notthere is an airbag for that person.

77

{CAUTION:

Airbags inflate with great force, fasterthan the blink of an eye. Anyone who isup against, or very close to, any airbagwhen it inflates can be seriously injuredor killed. Do not sit unnecessarily close tothe airbag, as you would be if you weresitting on the edge of your seat or leaningforward. Safety belts help keep you inposition before and during a crash.Always wear your safety belt, even withairbags. The driver should sit as far backas possible while still maintaining controlof the vehicle.

Occupants should not lean on or sleepagainst the door or side windows inseating positions with seat-mounted sideimpact airbags and/or roof-rail airbags.

{CAUTION:

Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer thebest protection for adults, but not foryoung children and infants. Neither thevehicle’s safety belt system nor its airbagsystem is designed for them. Youngchildren and infants need the protectionthat a child restraint system can provide.Always secure children properly in yourvehicle. To read how, see Older Childrenon page 48 or Infants and Young Childrenon page 51.

78

There is an airbagreadiness light on theinstrument panel cluster,which shows theairbag symbol.

The system checks the airbag electrical system formalfunctions. The light tells you if there is anelectrical problem. See Airbag Readiness Light onpage 212 for more information.

Where Are the Airbags?

The driver’s frontal airbag is in the middle of thesteering wheel.

79

The right front passenger’s frontal airbag is in theinstrument panel on the passenger’s side. The seat-mounted side impact airbags for the

driver and right front passenger are in the side ofthe seatbacks closest to the door.

Driver Side shown, Passenger Side similar

80

The roof-rail airbags for the driver, right frontpassenger, passengers behind the driver and rightfront passenger, and the third row outboardpassengers are in the ceiling above the sidewindows.

{CAUTION:

If something is between an occupant andan airbag, the airbag might not inflateproperly or it might force the object intothat person causing severe injury or evendeath. The path of an inflating airbag mustbe kept clear. Do not put anythingbetween an occupant and an airbag, anddo not attach or put anything on thesteering wheel hub or on or near anyother airbag covering.

Do not use seat accessories that blockthe inflation path of a seat-mounted sideimpact airbag.

If your vehicle has roof-rail airbags, neversecure anything to the roof of yourvehicle by routing the rope or tie downthrough any door or window opening. Ifyou do, the path of an inflating roof-railairbag will be blocked.

Driver Side shown, Passenger Side similar

81

When Should an Airbag Inflate?Frontal airbags are designed to inflate in moderateto severe frontal or near-frontal crashes to helpreduce the potential for severe injuries mainlyto the driver’s or right front passenger’s head andchest. However, they are only designed toinflate if the impact exceeds a predetermineddeployment threshold. Deployment thresholds areused to predict how severe a crash is likely tobe in time for the airbags to inflate and helprestrain the occupants.

Whether your frontal airbags will or should deployis not based on how fast your vehicle is traveling.It depends largely on what you hit, the directionof the impact, and how quickly your vehicleslows down.

Frontal airbags may inflate at different crashspeeds. For example:

• If the vehicle hits a stationary object, theairbags could inflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle hits a moving object.

• If the vehicle hits an object that deforms, theairbags could inflate at a different crashspeed than if the vehicle hits an object thatdoes not deform.

• If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole),the airbags could inflate at a different crashspeed than if the vehicle hits a wide object(like a wall).

• If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle,the airbags could inflate at a different crashspeed than if the vehicle goes straight into theobject.

Thresholds can also vary with specific vehicledesign.

Frontal airbags are not intended to inflate duringvehicle rollovers, rear impacts, or in manyside impacts.

In addition, your vehicle has dual-stage frontalairbags. Dual-stage airbags adjust the restraintaccording to crash severity. Your vehicle haselectronic frontal sensors, which help the sensingsystem distinguish between a moderate frontalimpact and a more severe frontal impact. Formoderate frontal impacts, dual-stage airbags inflateat a level less than full deployment. For moresevere frontal impacts, full deployment occurs.

82

Seat-mounted side impact and roof-rail airbagsare intended to inflate in moderate to severe sidecrashes. In addition, these roof-rail airbags areintended to inflate during a rollover or in a severefrontal impact. Seat-mounted side impact androof-rail airbags will inflate if the crash severity isabove the system’s designed threshold level.The threshold level can vary with specific vehicledesign.

Seat-mounted side impact airbags are notintended to inflate in frontal impacts, near-frontalimpacts, rollovers, or rear impacts. Roof-railairbags are not intended to inflate in rear impacts.A seat-mounted side impact airbag is intendedto deploy on the side of the vehicle that is struck.Both roof-rail airbags will deploy when eitherside of the vehicle is struck, or if the sensingsystem predicts that the vehicle is about toroll over, or in a severe frontal impact.

In any particular crash, no one can say whetheran airbag should have inflated simply becauseof the damage to a vehicle or because of what therepair costs were. For frontal airbags, inflation isdetermined by what the vehicle hits, the angleof the impact, and how quickly the vehicle slowsdown. For seat-mounted side impact and

roof-rail airbags, deployment is determined by thelocation and severity of the side impact. In arollover event, roof-rail airbag deploymentis determined by the direction of the roll.

What Makes an Airbag Inflate?In a deployment event, the sensing system sendsan electrical signal triggering a release of gasfrom the inflator. Gas from the inflator fillsthe airbag causing the bag to break out of thecover and deploy. The inflator, the airbag,and related hardware are all part of the airbagmodule.

Frontal airbag modules are located inside thesteering wheel and instrument panel. For vehicleswith seat-mounted side impact airbags, thereare airbag modules in the side of the frontseatbacks closest to the door. For vehicles withroof-rail airbags, there are airbag modules inthe ceiling of the vehicle, near the side windowsthat have occupant seating positions.

83

How Does an Airbag Restrain?In moderate to severe frontal or near frontalcollisions, even belted occupants can contact thesteering wheel or the instrument panel. Inmoderate to severe side collisions, even beltedoccupants can contact the inside of the vehicle.

Airbags supplement the protection providedby safety belts.

Frontal airbags distribute the force of the impactmore evenly over the occupant’s upper body,stopping the occupant more gradually.Seat-mounted side impact and roof-rail airbagsdistribute the force of the impact more evenly overthe occupant’s upper body.

Rollover capable roof-rail airbags are designed tohelp contain the head and chest of occupantsin the outboard seating positions in the first,second, and third rows. The rollover capableroof-rail airbags are designed to help reduce therisk of full or partial ejection in rollover events,although no system can prevent all such ejections.

But airbags would not help in many types ofcollisions, primarily because the occupant’s motionis not toward those airbags. See When Shouldan Airbag Inflate? on page 82 for more information.

Airbags should never be regarded as anythingmore than a supplement to safety belts.

What Will You See After an AirbagInflates?After the frontal airbags and seat-mounted sideimpact airbags inflate, they quickly deflate,so quickly that some people may not even realizean airbag inflated. Roof-rail airbags may still beat least partially inflated for some time afterthey deploy. Some components of the airbagmodule may be hot for several minutes. Forlocation of the airbag modules, see What Makesan Airbag Inflate? on page 83.

The parts of the airbag that come into contact withyou may be warm, but not too hot to touch.There may be some smoke and dust coming fromthe vents in the deflated airbags. Airbag inflationdoes not prevent the driver from seeing out of thewindshield or being able to steer the vehicle,nor does it prevent people from leaving the vehicle.

84

{CAUTION:

When an airbag inflates, there may bedust in the air. This dust could causebreathing problems for people with ahistory of asthma or other breathingtrouble. To avoid this, everyone in thevehicle should get out as soon as it issafe to do so. If you have breathingproblems but cannot get out of the vehicleafter an airbag inflates, then get fresh airby opening a window or a door. If youexperience breathing problems followingan airbag deployment, you should seekmedical attention.

Your vehicle has a feature that may automaticallyunlock the doors, turn the interior lamps on, andturn the hazard warning flashers on when theairbags inflate. You can lock the doors, turn theinterior lamps off, and turn the hazard warningflashers off by using the controls for those features.

In many crashes severe enough to inflate theairbag, windshields are broken by vehicledeformation. Additional windshield breakage mayalso occur from the right front passenger airbag.

• Airbags are designed to inflate only once. Afteran airbag inflates, you will need some newparts for the airbag system. If you do not getthem, the airbag system will not be there to helpprotect you in another crash. A new system willinclude airbag modules and possibly otherparts. The service manual for your vehiclecovers the need to replace other parts.

• Your vehicle has a crash sensing anddiagnostic module which records informationafter a crash. See Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacy on page 519 and Event Data Recorderson page 520.

• Let only qualified technicians work on theairbag systems. Improper service can meanthat an airbag system will not work properly.See your dealer/retailer for service.

85

Passenger Sensing SystemYour vehicle has a passenger sensing system forthe right front passenger’s position. The passengerairbag status indicator will be visible on theinstrument panel when you start your vehicle.

The words ON and OFF, or the symbol for on andoff, will be visible during the system check. Ifyou are using remote start to start your vehiclefrom a distance, if equipped, you may not see thesystem check. When the system check iscomplete, either the word ON or the word OFF, orthe symbol for on or the symbol for off, will bevisible. See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator onpage 214.

The passenger sensing system will turn off theright front passenger’s frontal airbag andseat-mounted side impact airbag under certainconditions. The driver’s airbags are not part of thepassenger sensing system.

The passenger sensing system works withsensors that are part of the right front passenger’sseat. The sensors are designed to detect thepresence of a properly-seated occupant anddetermine if the right front passenger’s frontalairbag and seat-mounted side impact airbagshould be enabled (may inflate) or not.

Accident statistics show that children are saferif they are restrained in the rear rather thanthe front seat.

We recommend that children be secured in a rearseat, including: an infant or a child riding in arear-facing child restraint; a child riding in aforward-facing child seat; an older child riding in abooster seat; and children, who are largeenough, using safety belts.

A label on your sun visor says, “Never put arear-facing child seat in the front.” This is becausethe risk to the rear-facing child is so great, if theairbag deploys.

United States Canada

86

{CAUTION:


Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off the rightfront passenger’s frontal and seat-mountedside impact airbag if the system detects arear-facing child restraint, no system isfail-safe, and no one can guarantee that anairbag will not deploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though it is turned off.We recommend that rear-facing childrestraints be secured in a rear seat, even ifthe airbags are off.




The passenger sensing system is designed to turnoff the right front passenger’s frontal airbag andseat-mounted side impact airbag if:

• The right front passenger seat is unoccupied.

• The system determines that an infant ispresent in a rear-facing infant seat.

• The system determines that a small child ispresent in a child restraint.

• The system determines that a small child ispresent in a booster seat.

• A right front passenger takes his/her weight offof the seat for a period of time.

87

• The right front passenger seat is occupied bya smaller person, such as a child who hasoutgrown child restraints.

• Or, if there is a critical problem with the airbagsystem or the passenger sensing system.

When the passenger sensing system has turnedoff the right front passenger’s frontal airbagand seat-mounted side impact airbag, the offindicator will light and stay lit to remind you thatthe airbags are off. See Passenger AirbagStatus Indicator on page 214.

If a child restraint has been installed and the onindicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Removethe child restraint from the vehicle and reinstall thechild restraint following the child restraintmanufacturer’s directions and refer to Securing aChild Restraint in the Right Front Seat Positionon page 72.

If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restartingthe vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check tomake sure that the vehicle’s seatback is notpressing the child restraint into the seat cushion. Ifthis happens, slightly recline the vehicle’sseatback and adjust the seat cushion if possible.Also make sure the child restraint is not trappedunder the vehicle head restraint. If this happens,adjust the head restraint. See Head Restraintson page 17.

Remove any additional material from the seatcushion before reinstalling or securing thechild restraint.

If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in thechild restraint in a rear seat position in thevehicle, and check with your dealer/retailer.

88

The passenger sensing system is designed toenable (may inflate) the right front passenger’sfrontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact airbaganytime the system senses that a person ofadult size is sitting properly in the right frontpassenger’s seat. When the passenger sensingsystem has allowed the airbags to be enabled, theon indicator will light and stay lit to remind youthat the airbags are active.

For some children who have outgrown childrestraints and for very small adults, the passengersensing system may or may not turn off the rightfront passenger’s frontal airbag and seat-mountedside impact airbag, depending upon the person’sseating posture and body build. Everyone in yourvehicle who has outgrown child restraints shouldwear a safety belt properly — whether or not thereis an airbag for that person.

If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right frontpassenger’s seat, but the off indicator is lit, itcould be because that person is not sitting properlyin the seat. If this happens, turn the vehicle offand ask the person to place the seatback inthe fully upright position, then sit upright in theseat, centered on the seat cushion, with theperson’s legs comfortably extended. Restart thevehicle and have the person remain in this positionfor two to three minutes. This will allow thesystem to detect that person and then enable theright front passenger’s frontal airbag andseat-mounted side impact airbag.

89

Safety belts help keep the passenger in positionon the seat during vehicle maneuvers and braking,which helps the passenger sensing systemmaintain the passenger airbag status. See “SafetyBelts” and “Child Restraints” in the Index foradditional information about the importance ofproper restraint use.

{CAUTION:

If the airbag readiness light in theinstrument panel cluster ever comes onand stays on, it means that something maybe wrong with the airbag system. If thisever happens, have the vehicle servicedpromptly, because an adult-size personsitting in the right front passenger’s seatmay not have the protection of theairbag(s). See Airbag Readiness Light onpage 212 for more on this, includingimportant safety information.

A thick layer of additional material, such as ablanket or cushion, or aftermarket equipment suchas seat covers, seat heaters, and seat massagerscan affect how well the passenger sensing systemoperates. Remove any additional material from theseat cushion before reinstalling or securing thechild restraint and before a small occupant,including a small adult, sits in the right frontpassenger’s seat. You may want to consider notusing seat covers or other aftermarket equipment.

90

See Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 92 for more information aboutmodifications that can affect how the systemoperates.

{CAUTION:

Stowing of articles under the passenger’sseat or between the passenger’s seatcushion and seatback may interfere withthe proper operation of the passengersensing system.

Servicing Your Airbag-EquippedVehicleAirbags affect how your vehicle should be serviced.There are parts of the airbag system in severalplaces around your vehicle. You do not want thesystem to inflate while someone is working on yourvehicle. Your dealer/retailer and the service manualhave information about servicing your vehicle andthe airbag system. To purchase a service manual,see Service Publications Ordering Information onpage 518.

{CAUTION:

For up to 10 seconds, after the ignition isturned off and the battery is disconnected,an airbag can still inflate during improperservice. You can be injured if you areclose to an airbag when it inflates. Avoidyellow connectors. They are probably partof the airbag system. Be sure to followproper service procedures, and make surethe person performing work for you isqualified to do so.

The airbag system does not need regularmaintenance.

91

Adding Equipment to YourAirbag-Equipped Vehicle

Q: Is there anything I might add to theexterior of the vehicle that could keep theairbags from working properly?

A: Yes. If you add things that change yourvehicle’s frame, bumper system, height,front end or side sheet metal, they may keepthe airbag system from working properly.Also, the airbag system may not work properlyif you relocate any of the airbag sensors. Ifyou have any questions about this, you shouldcontact Customer Assistance before youmodify your vehicle. The phone numbers andaddresses for Customer Assistance are inStep Two of the Customer SatisfactionProcedure in this manual. See CustomerSatisfaction Procedure on page 504.

If your vehicle has rollover roof-rail airbags,see Different Size Tires and Wheels onpage 442 for additional important information.

Q: Because I have a disability, I have to getmy vehicle modified. How can I find outwhether this will affect my airbag system?

A: Changing or moving any parts of thefront seats, safety belts, the airbag sensingand diagnostic module, steering wheel,instrument panel, roof-rail airbag modules,ceiling headliner, and pillar garnish trim, sideimpact sensors, rollover sensor module,or airbag wiring can affect the operation of theairbag system. If you have questions, callCustomer Assistance. The phone numbersand addresses for Customer Assistance are inStep Two of the Customer SatisfactionProcedure in this manual. See CustomerSatisfaction Procedure on page 504.

Your dealer/retailer and the service manual haveinformation about the location of the airbagsensors, sensing and diagnostic module andairbag wiring.

92

Restraint System Check

Checking the Restraint Systems

Safety BeltsNow and then, make sure the safety belt reminderlight and all your belts, buckles, latch plates,retractors, and anchorages are working properly.See Safety Belt Reminder Light on page 211for more information.

Look for any other loose or damaged safety beltsystem parts. If you see anything that might keep asafety belt system from doing its job, have itrepaired. Keep safety belts clean and dry. SeeCare of Safety Belts on page 467 for moreinformation.

Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you ina crash. They can rip apart under impact forces.If a belt is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.

Airbag SystemThe airbag system does not need regularlyscheduled maintenance or replacement. Makesure the airbag readiness light is working.See Airbag Readiness Light on page 212 for moreinformation.

Notice: If an airbag covering is damaged,opened, or broken, the airbag may not workproperly. Do not open or break the airbagcoverings. If there are any opened or brokenairbag covers, have the airbag covering and/orairbag module replaced. For the location ofthe airbag modules, see What Makes an AirbagInflate? on page 83. See your dealer/retailerfor service.

93

Replacing Restraint System PartsAfter a Crash

{CAUTION:

A crash can damage the restraint systemsin your vehicle. A damaged restraintsystem may not properly protect theperson using it, resulting in serious injuryor even death in a crash. To help make sureyour restraint systems are workingproperly after a crash, have them inspectedand any necessary replacements made assoon as possible.

If you have had a crash, do you need new belts orLATCH system parts?After a very minor collision, nothing may benecessary. But if the belts were stretched, as theywould be if worn during a more severe crash, thenyou need new parts.If the LATCH system was being used during amore severe crash, you may need new LATCHsystem parts.

If belts are cut or damaged, replace them.Collision damage also may mean you will need tohave LATCH system, safety belt or seat partsrepaired or replaced. New parts and repairs maybe necessary even if the belt or LATCH systemwas not being used at the time of the collision.

If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbagsystem parts. See the part on the airbag systemearlier in this section.

If any airbag inflates, you will also need to replacethe driver and front passenger’s safety beltassembly. Be sure to do so. Then the newassembly will be there to help protect you in acollision.

After a crash you may need to replace the driverand front passenger’s safety belt assemblies,even if the frontal airbags have not deployed. Thedriver and front passenger’s safety beltassemblies contain the safety belt pretensioners.Have your safety belt pretensioners checked ifyour vehicle has been in a collision, or if yourairbag readiness light stays on after you start yourvehicle or while you are driving. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 212.

94

Keys .............................................................. 97Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System .......... 98Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System

Operation ............................................... 100Doors and Locks ........................................ 106

Door Locks ................................................ 106Power Door Locks ..................................... 107Delayed Locking ........................................ 107Programmable Automatic Door Locks ........ 107Rear Door Security Locks ......................... 108Lockout Protection ..................................... 109Liftgate ...................................................... 109Power Liftgate ........................................... 110

Windows ...................................................... 115Power Windows ........................................ 116Sun Visors ................................................ 118

Theft-Deterrent Systems ............................. 119Content Theft-Deterrent ............................. 119PASS-Key® III+ ......................................... 121PASS-Key® III+ Operation ......................... 121

Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ......... 123New Vehicle Break-In ................................ 123Ignition Positions ....................................... 124Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ............. 125Starting the Engine .................................... 126Engine Coolant Heater .............................. 127Automatic Transmission Operation ............. 129Tow/Haul Mode ......................................... 132Parking Brake ........................................... 133Shifting Into Park (P) ................................. 134Shifting Out of Park (P) ............................. 136Parking Over Things That Burn ................. 136Engine Exhaust ......................................... 137Running the Engine While Parked ............. 138

Mirrors ......................................................... 139Manual Rearview Mirror with OnStar® ....... 139Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror

with OnStar® and Compass ................... 139Outside Power Mirrors ............................... 142Outside Power Foldaway Mirrors ............... 143Outside Convex Mirror ............................... 144Outside Heated Mirrors ............................. 145

Section 2 Features and Controls

95

OnStar® System .......................................... 145Universal Home Remote System ................ 149

System Identification .................................. 149Universal Home Remote System ............... 149Universal Home Remote System Operation

(With One Triangular LED) ...................... 150Universal Home Remote System

Operation (With Three Round LED) ....... 154Storage Areas ............................................. 161

Glove Box ................................................. 161Cupholder(s) .............................................. 161

Instrument Panel Storage Area .................. 161Center Console Storage Area .................... 161Floor Mats ................................................. 162Luggage Carrier ........................................ 162Rear Seat Armrest .................................... 163Convenience Net ....................................... 163Cargo Cover ............................................. 163Cargo Tie Downs ...................................... 163Cargo Management System ...................... 164

Sunroof ....................................................... 165

Section 2 Features and Controls

96

Keys

{CAUTION:

Leaving children in a vehicle with theignition key is dangerous for manyreasons, children or others could be badlyinjured or even killed. They could operatethe power windows or other controls oreven make the vehicle move. Thewindows will function with the keys in theignition and they could be seriouslyinjured or killed if caught in the path of aclosing window. Do not leave the keys ina vehicle with children.

97

One key is used for the ignition and all locks.

When a new vehicle is delivered to thedealer/retailer, the key has a key tag. This tag hasa bar-coded key code that tells your dealer/retailerhow to make extra keys. This tag may beremoved and kept by your dealer/retailer. If it hasnot been removed, keep the tag in a safeplace. If you lose your key, your dealer/retailer caneasily make another one by using the key code.See Roadside Assistance Program on page 509 formore information.

Notice: If you ever lock your keys in yourvehicle, you may have to damage the vehicleto get in. Be sure you have spare keys.

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)SystemYour Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) systemoperates on a radio frequency subject to FederalCommunications Commission (FCC) Rulesand with Industry Canada.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCCRules. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:

1. This device may not cause interference.

2. This device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.

98

This device complies with RSS-210 of IndustryCanada. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:



Changes or modifications to this system by otherthan an authorized service facility could voidauthorization to use this equipment.

At times you may notice a decrease in operatingrange. This is normal for any RKE system. Ifthe transmitter does not work or if you have tostand closer to your vehicle for the transmitter towork, try this:

• Check the distance. You may be too far fromyour vehicle. You may need to stand closerduring rainy or snowy weather.

• Check the location. Other vehicles or objectsmay be blocking the signal. Take a few stepsto the left or right, hold the transmitterhigher, and try again.

• Check to determine if battery replacement isnecessary. See “Battery Replacement”under Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 100.

• If you are still having trouble, see yourdealer/retailer or a qualified technicianfor service.

99

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System OperationThe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitterfunctions will work up to 195 feet (60 m) away.However, the operating range may be less whilethe vehicle is running.

There are other conditions which can affect theperformance of the transmitter. See RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) System on page 98.

The following functions may be available if yourvehicle has the RKE system:

/ (Remote Vehicle Start): If your vehicle hasthis feature, it may be started from outsidethe vehicle using the RKE transmitter. See“Remote Vehicle Start” following for more detailedinformation.

Q (Lock): Press the lock button to lock all thedoors. If enabled through the Driver InformationCenter (DIC), the parking lamps will flash once toindicate locking has occurred. If enabled throughthe DIC, the horn will chirp when the lock button ispressed again within five seconds of the previouspress of the lock button. See DIC VehicleCustomization (With DIC Buttons) on page 250 foradditional information. Pressing the lock buttonmay arm the content theft-deterrent system.See Content Theft-Deterrent on page 119.

" (Unlock): Press the unlock button to unlock thedriver’s door. If the button is pressed againwithin five seconds, all remaining doors will unlock.The interior lamps will come on and stay on for20 seconds or until the ignition is turned on.If enabled through the DIC, the parking lamps willflash once to indicate unlocking has occurred.

With Remote Start andLiftgate (Without

Remote Start or LiftgateSimilar)

100

See DIC Vehicle Customization (With DICButtons) on page 250. Pressing the unlock buttonon the RKE transmitter will disarm the contenttheft-deterrent system. See ContentTheft-Deterrent on page 119.

& (Power Liftgate): Press and hold this buttonon the RKE transmitter to open and close theliftgate. The taillamps will flash and a chime willsound to indicate when the liftgate is opening andclosing.

L (Vehicle Locator/Panic Alarm): Press andrelease this button to locate your vehicle. The turnsignal lamps will flash and the horn will soundthree times. Press and hold this button for morethan two seconds to activate the panic alarm. Theturn signal lamps will flash and the horn willsound repeatedly for 30 seconds. The alarm willturn off when the ignition is moved to ON orthe alarm button is pressed again. The ignitionmust be in OFF for the panic alarm to work.

Matching Transmitter(s) to YourVehicleEach RKE transmitter is coded to prevent anothertransmitter from unlocking your vehicle. If atransmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can bepurchased through your dealer/retailer. Rememberto bring any additional transmitters so they canalso be re-coded to match the new transmitter.Once your dealer/retailer has coded the newtransmitter, the lost transmitter will not unlock yourvehicle. The vehicle can have a maximum ofeight transmitters matched to it. See “RelearnRemote Key” under DIC Operation and Displays(With DIC Buttons) on page 229 or DIC Operationand Displays (Without DIC Buttons) on page 235for instructions on how to match RKE transmittersto your vehicle.

101

Battery ReplacementUnder normal use, the battery in the RKEtransmitter should last about four years.

The battery is weak if the transmitter will not workat the normal range in any location. If you haveto get close to your vehicle before the transmitterworks, it is probably time to change the battery.

The REPLACE BATTERY IN REMOTE KEYmessage in the vehicle’s DIC will display if theRKE transmitter battery is low. See “REPLACEBATTERY IN REMOTE KEY” under DIC Warningsand Messages on page 239 for additionalinformation.

Notice: When replacing the battery, use carenot to touch any of the circuitry. Staticfrom your body transferred to these surfacesmay damage the transmitter.

To replace the battery in the RKE transmitter dothe following:

1. Insert a flat object with a thin edge into thenotch on the side of the transmitter andseparate the bottom half from the top half.

2. Remove the old battery, but do not use ametal object to do this.

3. Slide the new battery into the transmitter withthe positive side of the battery facing down.Use a type CR2032 battery, or equivalenttype. Make sure the cover is on tightly,so water will not get in.

102

4. Snap the front and the back of the transmittertogether.

5. Test the operation of the transmitter with thevehicle.

Remote Vehicle StartYour vehicle may have a remote starting feature.This feature allows you to start the enginefrom outside of the vehicle. It may also start upthe vehicle’s heating or air conditioning systemsand rear window defogger. Normal operation of thesystem will return after the key is turned to theON position.

If your vehicle has an automatic climate controlsystem, during remote start, the climate controlsystem will default to a heating mode during colderoutside temperatures and a cooling mode duringwarmer outside temperatures. If your vehicledoes not have an automatic climate controlsystem, during remote start, the climate controlsystem will turn on at the setting the vehicle wasset to when the vehicle was last turned off.

During a remote start, if your vehicle has anautomatic climate control system and heatedseats, the heated seats will turn on during colderoutside temperatures and will shut off whenthe key is turned to RUN. If your vehicle does nothave an automatic climate control system,during remote start, you will need to manually turnthe heated seats on and off. See Heated Seatsfor additional information

Laws in some communities may restrict the use ofremote starters. For example, some laws mayrequire a person using the remote start to have thevehicle in view when doing so. Check localregulations for any requirements on remote startingof vehicles.

The RKE transmitter with the remote start button,provides an increased range of operation. However,the range may be less while the vehicle is running.As a result, you may need to be closer to yourvehicle to turn it off, than you were to turn it on.

There are other conditions which can affect theperformance of the transmitter, see RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) System on page 98 foradditional information.

103

/ (Remote Start): This button will be on theRKE transmitter if you have remote start.

To start the vehicle using the remote start feature,do the following:

1. Aim the transmitter at the vehicle.

2. Press and release the transmitter’s lockbutton, then immediately press and holdthe transmitter’s remote start button until theturn signal lights flash. If you cannot seethe vehicle’s lights, press and hold the remotestart button for at least four seconds. Thevehicle’s doors will lock. Pressing the remotestart button again, after the vehicle hasstarted, will turn off the ignition.When the vehicle starts, the parking lamps willturn on and remain on while the vehicle isrunning.

3. If it is the first remote start since the vehiclehas been driven, repeat these steps while theengine is still running, to extend the timeby 10 minutes for the engine to continue torun. Remote start can be extended one time.

After entering the vehicle during a remote start,insert and turn the key to the ON position to drivethe vehicle.

If the vehicle is left running it will automaticallyshut off after 10 minutes unless a time extensionhas been done.

To manually shut off a remote start, do any of thefollowing:

• Aim the RKE transmitter at the vehicle andpress the remote start button until theparking lamps turn off.

• Turn on the hazard warning flashers.

• Turn the ignition switch on and then off.

The vehicle can be remote started two separatetimes between driving sequences. The engine willrun for 10 minutes after each remote start.

Or, you can extend the engine run time by another10 minutes within the first 10 minute remotestart time frame, and before the engine stops.

For example, if the lock button and then theremote start buttons are pressed again after thevehicle has been running for five minutes,10 minutes are added, allowing the engine to runfor 15 minutes.

The additional 10 minutes are considered asecond remote vehicle start.

104

Once two remote starts, or a single remote startwith one time extension has been done, thevehicle must be started with the key.

After the key is removed from the ignition, thevehicle can be remote started again.

The vehicle cannot be remote started if the key isin the ignition, the hood is not closed, or ifthere is an emission control system malfunction.

Also, the engine will turn off during a remotevehicle start if the coolant temperature gets toohigh or if the oil pressure gets low.

Vehicles that have the remote vehicle start featureare shipped from the factory with the remotevehicle start system enabled. The system may beenabled or disabled through the DIC if yourvehicle has DIC buttons. See “REMOTE START”

under DIC Vehicle Customization (With DICButtons) on page 250 for additional information. Ifyour vehicle does not have DIC buttons, seeyour dealer/retailer to enable or disable the remotevehicle start system.

Remote Start ReadyIf your vehicle does not have the remote vehiclestart feature, it will have the remote start readyfeature. This feature allows your dealer/retailer toadd the manufacturer’s remote vehicle startfeature.

See your dealer/retailer if you would like to addthe manufacturer’s remote vehicle start feature toyour vehicle.

105

Doors and Locks

Door Locks

{CAUTION:

Unlocked doors can be dangerous.• Passengers, especially children, can

easily open the doors and fall out of amoving vehicle. When a door islocked, the handle will not open it.You increase the chance of beingthrown out of the vehicle in a crash ifthe doors are not locked. So, wearsafety belts properly and lock thedoors whenever you drive.

• Young children who get into unlockedvehicles may be unable to get out. Achild can be overcome by extreme



heat and can suffer permanent injuries oreven death from heat stroke. Always lockyour vehicle whenever you leave it.

• Outsiders can easily enter through anunlocked door when you slow downor stop your vehicle. Locking yourdoors can help prevent this fromhappening.

The vehicle’s doors can be manually locked orunlocked in the following ways:

• From the outside, use the key in thedriver’s door.

• From the inside, use the lock control onthe door.

106

Power Door LocksThe power door lock switches are located on thearmrest on the front doors.

K (Unlock): Press the side of the switch with theunlock symbol to unlock the doors.

Q (Lock): Press the side of the switch with thelock symbol to lock the doors.

Delayed LockingWhen locking the doors with the power lock switchand a door or the liftgate is open, the doors willlock five seconds after the last door is closed. Youwill hear three chimes to signal that the delayedlocking feature is in use.

Pressing the power lock switch twice or the lockbutton on the RKE transmitter twice will overridethe delayed locking feature and immediatelylock all the doors.

This feature will not operate if the key is in theignition.

You can program this feature using the DriverInformation Center (DIC). See DELAY DOORLOCK under DIC Vehicle Customization (With DICButtons) on page 250.

Programmable Automatic DoorLocksVehicles with an automatic lock/unlock featureenable you to program the vehicle’s powerdoor locks. You can program this feature throughthe Driver Information Center (DIC). See DICVehicle Customization (With DIC Buttons)on page 250 for more information on DICprogramming.

107

Rear Door Security LocksYour vehicle has rear door security locks. Theseprevent passengers from opening the reardoors from the inside.

The rear door securitylocks are located on theinside edge of eachrear door. Youmust open the reardoors to access them.The label showinglock and unlockpositions is located nearthe lock.

To set the locks, do the following:

1. Insert the key into the security lock slot andturn it so the slot is in the horizontal position.

2. Close the door.

When you want to open a rear door when thesecurity lock is on, do the following:

1. Unlock the door using the remote keylessentry transmitter, if the vehicle has one, thepower door lock switch, or by lifting therear door manual lock.

2. Open the door from the outside.

To cancel the rear door security lock, do thefollowing:

1. Unlock the door and open it from the outside.

2. Insert the key into the security lock slotand turn it so the slot is in the vertical position.

Lock Label shown

108

Lockout ProtectionThis feature protects you from locking the key in thevehicle when the key is in the ignition and a frontdoor is open.If the driver’s side power door lock switch ispressed when the driver’s door is open and the keyis in the ignition, all of the doors will lock and thenthe driver’s door will unlock.If the passenger’s side power door lock switch ispressed when the front passenger’s door is openand the key is in the ignition, all of the doors willlock and then the front passenger’s door will unlock.

Liftgate

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to drive with theliftgate open because carbon monoxide(CO) gas can come into your vehicle. Youcannot see or smell CO. It can causeunconsciousness and even death.



If you must drive with the liftgate open, orif electrical wiring or other cableconnections must pass through the sealbetween the body and the liftgate:

• Make sure all other windows are shut.• Turn the fan on your heating or

cooling system to its highest speedwith the recirculation mode off. Thatwill force outside air into your vehicle.See Climate Control System onpage 194.

• If you have air outlets on or underthe instrument panel, open them allthe way.

• If your vehicle has a power liftgate,disable the power liftgate function.

See Power Liftgate on page 110.

If your vehicle has a power liftgate, see PowerLiftgate on page 110.

109

To unlock the liftgate, use the power door lockswitch or press the door unlock button onthe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter twice.See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 100.

To open the liftgate, press the touchpad on theunderside of the liftgate handle. The vehicle mustbe in PARK (P) to open the liftgate. To closethe liftgate, use the pull cup or pull strap as an aid.

The liftgate has an electric latch. If the battery isdisconnected or has low voltage, the liftgatewill not open. The liftgate will resume operationwhen the battery is reconnected and charged.

If the battery is properly connected and hasadequate voltage, and the liftgate still will notfunction, your vehicle should be taken to adealership for service.

Power LiftgatePower Liftgate Operation

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to drive with theliftgate open because carbon monoxide(CO) gas can come into your vehicle. Youcannot see or smell CO. It can causeunconsciousness and even death.If you must drive with the liftgate open, or ifelectrical wiring or other cable connectionsmust pass through the seal between thebody and the liftgate:

• Make sure all other windows are shut.• Turn the fan on your heating or cooling

system to its highest speed with therecirculation mode off. That will forceoutside air into your vehicle. SeeClimate Control System on page 194.


110


• If you have air outlets on or underthe instrument panel, open them allthe way.

• If your vehicle has a power liftgate,disable the power liftgate function.

See Power Liftgate on page 110.

Your vehicle may have a power liftgate. Thevehicle must be in PARK (P) to use the powerfeature.

The taillamps will flash and a chime will soundwhen the power liftgate is used.

{CAUTION:

You or others could be injured if caught inthe path of the power liftgate. Make surethere is no one in the way of the liftgateas it is opening and closing.

Notice: If you open the liftgate withoutchecking for overhead obstructions such as agarage door, you could damage the liftgateor the liftgate glass. Always check to makesure the area above and behind the liftgate isclear before opening it.

111

The power liftgate can be power opened andclosed in the following ways:

• Press and hold the power liftgate button onthe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitteruntil the liftgate starts moving. Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System Operation on page 100for more information.

• Pressing the liftgate button on the centerconsole.

• Pressing the touchpad switch on the outsideliftgate handle.

Pressing the buttons, or touchpad switch asecond time while the liftgate is moving reversesthe direction.

The liftgate can also be closed by pressing thepower liftgate button next to the liftgate latch.Press the button a second time during liftgateoperation to reverse that operation.

The power liftgate may be temporarily disabledunder extreme temperatures, or under low batteryconditions. If this occurs, the liftgate can still beoperated manually.

Power Liftgate Buttonon Center Console

Power Liftgate Button Near Liftgate Latch

112

If you shift the transmission out of PARK (P) whilethe power function is in progress, the liftgatepower function will continue to completion. If youshift the transmission out of PARK (P) andaccelerate before the power liftgate latches closed,the liftgate may reverse to the open position.Cargo could fall out of the vehicle. Always makesure the power liftgate is closed and latched beforeyou drive away.

If you power open the liftgate and the liftgatesupport struts have lost pressure, the lights willflash and a chime will sound. The liftgate will stayopen temporarily, then slowly close. See yourdealer/retailer for service before using the liftgate.

Obstacle Detection FeaturesIf the liftgate encounters an obstacle during apower open or close cycle, a warning chime willsound and the liftgate will automatically reversedirection to the full closed or open position.After removing the obstruction, the power liftgateoperation can be used again. If the liftgate

encounters multiple obstacles on the same powercycle, the power function will deactivate, andyou must manually open or close the liftgate. TheLIFTGATE OPEN warning message in theDriver Information Center (DIC) will indicate thatthe liftgate is open. After removing theobstructions, manually open the liftgate to the fullopen position or close the liftgate to the fullyclosed and latched position. The liftgate will nowresume normal power operation.

Your vehicle has pinch sensors located on theside edges of the liftgate. If an object is caughtbetween the liftgate and the body and pressesagainst this sensor, the liftgate will reversedirection and open fully. The liftgate will remainopen until it is activated again or closed manually.Do not force the liftgate open or closed duringa power cycle.

113

Manual Operation of Power Liftgate

To change the liftgate tomanual operation, pressthe switch on thecenter console to theOFF position.

With the power liftgate disabled and all of thedoors unlocked, the liftgate can be manuallyopened and closed.

To open the liftgate, press the touchpad on thehandle on the outside of the liftgate, and liftthe gate open. To close the liftgate, use the pullcup to lower the liftgate and close. The liftgatelatch will power close. Always close the liftgatebefore driving.

If the RKE button or the power close button on theliftgate is pressed while power operation isdisabled, the lights will flash three times, but theliftgate will not move.

It is not recommended that you drive with theliftgate open, however, if you must drive with theliftgate open, the liftgate should be set tomanual operation by pressing the OFF switch onthe center console.

The liftgate has an electric latch. If the battery isdisconnected or has low voltage, the liftgatewill not open. The liftgate will resume operationwhen the battery is reconnected and charged.

If the battery is properly connected with adequatevoltage, the switch is not disabled, and theliftgate still will not function, your vehicle should betaken to a dealer/retailer for service.

114

Windows

{CAUTION:

Leaving children, helpless adults, or petsin a vehicle with the windows closed isdangerous. They can be overcome by theextreme heat and suffer permanentinjuries or even death from heat stroke.Never leave a child, a helpless adult, or apet alone in a vehicle, especially with thewindows closed in warm or hot weather.

115

Power Windows

{CAUTION:

Leaving children, helpless adults, or petsin a vehicle with the windows closed isdangerous. They can be overcome fromextreme heat in warm or hot weather andsuffer permanent injuries or even deathfrom heat stroke.

Leaving children in a vehicle with theignition key is dangerous for manyreasons, children or others could be badlyinjured or even killed. They could operatethe power windows or other controls oreven make the vehicle move. The windowswill function with the keys in the ignition



and they could be seriously injured orkilled if caught in the path of a closingwindow. Do not leave keys in a vehiclewith children.

When there are children in the rear seatuse the window lockout button to preventunintentional operation of the windows.

The power windowcontrols are located oneach of the side doors.

Driver’s Side shown

116

The driver’s door also has switches that controlthe passenger and rear windows. The powerwindows work when the ignition has been turnedto ACCESSORY or ON or when RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) is active. See RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) on page 125.

Press the switch to lower the window.

Pull up on the front edge of the switch to raise thewindow.

Express-Down WindowsWindows that have the express-down featureallow the windows to be lowered without holdingthe switch. Press the window switch fully andrelease it to activate the express-down feature.The express mode can be cancelled at any time bybriefly pressing, or pulling the switch.

Express-Up WindowWindows that have the express-up feature allowthe windows to be raised all the way withoutholding the switch up. Pull the switch up fully andrelease it to activate the express-up feature.The express-up mode can be canceled at any timeby briefly pressing, or pulling the switch.

Programming the Power WindowsIf the battery one your vehicle has been recharged,disconnected, or replaced, windows with theexpress-up feature need to be reprogrammed forthis feature to work. To program the window:

1. With the ignition in the ACCESSORY or RUNpositions, or when Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) is active, close all doors. SeeRetained Accessory Power (RAP) onpage 125.

2. Press and continue to hold the window switchuntil the window is fully open.

3. Pull up and hold the window switch to closethe window. Continue to hold it briefly afterthe window is fully closed.

4. Repeat for each window that has the expressup feature.

117

Anti-Pinch FeatureThe anti-pinch feature is on windows with theexpress-up feature. If an object is in the way of thewindow as it is express-closing, or in certainweather conditions like severe icing, the windowwill stop and open to a factory preset position. Thewindow functions normally once the obstructionis removed.

Window Lockout

o (Window Lockout): The window lockoutswitch is located with the power window switcheson the driver’s door armrest. This featureprevents the rear passenger windows fromoperating, except from the driver’s position. Pressthe switch to turn the lockout feature on or off.An indicator light will come on to show the lockoutfeature is on.

Sun VisorsPull the sun visor down to block glare. Detach thesun visor from the center mount and slide italong the rod from side-to-side to cover the driveror passenger side of the front window. Swingthe sun visor to the side to cover the side window.It can be moved along the rod from side-to-sidein this position also.

Lighted Visor Vanity MirrorYour vehicle has lighted visor vanity mirrors onboth the driver’s and passenger’s sun visors. Pullthe sun visor down and lift the mirror cover toturn the lamps on.

118

Theft-Deterrent SystemsVehicle theft is big business, especially in somecities. Although your vehicle has a number oftheft-deterrent features, we know that nothing weput on it can make it impossible to steal.

Content Theft-DeterrentYour vehicle may have a content theft-deterrentalarm system.

To activate the theft-deterrent system, do one ofthe following:

• Press the lock button on the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter when any door is open.The security light should come on and flash.When the door is closed, the security light willstop flashing and stay on solid and then go off

after approximately 30 seconds. The contenttheft deterrent alarm is not armed until thesecurity light goes off.If the delayed locking feature is active, thealarm will not be activated until all doors areclosed and the security light goes off.

• Press the lock button on the RKE transmitterwhen the driver door is closed.The security light will come on solid forapproximately 30 seconds and then go off. Thecontent theft deterrent alarm is not armed untilthe security light goes off.

If a locked door is opened without using the keyin the driver’s door key cylinder or the RKEtransmitter, a ten second pre-alarm will occur. Thehorn will chirp and the lights will flash. If the key isnot placed in the ignition and turned to START orthe door is not unlocked by pressing the unlockbutton on the RKE transmitter during theten second pre-alarm, the alarm will go off. Yourvehicle’s headlamps will flash and the horn willsound for about two minutes, then will turn off tosave the battery power.

119

The theft-deterrent system will not activate if thedoors are locked with the vehicle’s key or themanual door lock. It activates only if you use thepower door lock switch with the door open orthe RKE transmitter. You should also rememberthat you can start your vehicle with the correctignition key if the alarm has been set off.

Here is how to avoid setting off the alarm byaccident:

• If you do not want to activate thetheft-deterrent system, the vehicle should belocked with the door key after the doorsare closed.

• Always unlock a door with the RKE transmitter.Unlocking a door any other way will set off thealarm if the system has been armed.

If you set off the alarm by accident, turn off thealarm by pressing unlock on the RKE transmitter orby placing the key in the ignition and turning itto START.

Testing the AlarmTo test the alarm:

1. From inside the vehicle, lower the driver’swindow and open the driver’s door.

2. Activate the system by locking the doors withthe RKE transmitter.

3. Get out of the vehicle, close the door and waitfor the security light to go out.

4. Then reach in through the window, unlock thedoor with the manual door lock and open thedoor. This should set off the alarm.

If the alarm does not sound when it should, butthe vehicle’s headlamps flash, check to see if thehorn works. The horn fuse may be blown. Toreplace the fuse, see Fuses and Circuit Breakerson page 476.

If the alarm does not sound or the vehicle’sheadlamps do not flash, see your dealer/retailerfor service.

120

PASS-Key® III+The PASS-Key® III+ system operates on a radiofrequency subject to Federal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) Rules and with IndustryCanada.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCCRules. Operation is subject to the following twoconditions:

1. This device may not cause harmfulinterference.

2. This device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation.

This device complies with RSS-210 of IndustryCanada. Operation is subject to the following twoconditions:




PASS-Key® III+ uses a radio frequencytransponder in the key that matches a decoder inyour vehicle.

PASS-Key® III+ OperationYour vehicle has PASS-Key® III+ (PersonalizedAutomotive Security System) theft-deterrentsystem. PASS-Key® III+ is a passivetheft-deterrent system. This means you do nothave to do anything special to arm or disarm thesystem. It works when you insert or removethe key from the ignition.

When the PASS-Key® III+ system senses thatsomeone is using the wrong key, it prevents thevehicle from starting. Anyone using atrial-and-error method to start the vehicle will bediscouraged because of the high number ofelectrical key codes.

When trying to start the vehicle if the engine doesnot start and the security light on the instrumentpanel cluster comes on, the key may have adamaged transponder. Turn the ignition off andtry again.

121

If the engine still does not start, and the keyappears to be not damaged, try another ignitionkey. At this time, you may also want to check thefuse, see Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 476.If the engine still does not start with the other key,your vehicle needs service. If your vehicle doesstart, the first key may be faulty. See your dealer/retailer who can service the PASS-Key® III+ to havea new key made. In an emergency, contactRoadside Assistance. See Roadside AssistanceProgram on page 509.

It is possible for the PASS-Key® III+ decoder to“learn” the transponder value of a new orreplacement key. Up to 10 keys may beprogrammed for the vehicle. The followingprocedure is for programming additional keys only.If all the currently programmed keys are lost or donot operate, you must see your dealer/retailer or alocksmith who can service PASS-Key® III+ to havekeys made and programmed to the system.

See your dealer/retailer or a locksmith who canservice PASS-Key® III+ to get a new key blank thatis cut exactly as the ignition key that operatesthe system.

To program the new key:

1. Verify that the new key has a 1 stampedon it.

2. Insert the already programmed key in theignition and start the engine. If the enginewill not start, see your dealer/retailer forservice.

3. After the engine has started, turn the key toOFF, and remove the key.

4. Insert the key to be programmed and turn it tothe ON position within five seconds of theoriginal key being turned to the OFF position.The security light will turn off once the keyhas been programmed.

5. Repeat Steps 1 through 4 if additional keysare to be programmed.

If you are ever driving and the security light comeson and stays on, you may be able to restart yourengine if you turn it off. Your PASS-Key® III+system, however, is not working properly and mustbe serviced by your dealer/retailer. Your vehicleis not protected by the PASS-Key® III+ system atthis time.

122

If you lose or damage your PASS-Key® III+ key,see your dealer/retailer or a locksmith who canservice PASS-Key® III+ to have a new key made.

The SERVICE THEFT DETERRENT SYSTEMmessage displays on the Driver Information Center(DIC) when there is a problem with thetheft-deterrent system. See DIC Warnings andMessages on page 239 for additional information.

Do not leave the key or device that disarms ordeactivates the theft deterrent system in thevehicle.

Starting and Operating YourVehicle

New Vehicle Break-In

Notice: Your vehicle does not need anelaborate break-in. But it will perform better inthe long run if you follow these guidelines:• If you have all-wheel drive, keep your

speed at 55 mph (88 km/h) or less forthe first 500 miles (805 km).

• Do not drive at any one constant speed,fast or slow, for the first 500 miles(805 km). Do not make full-throttle starts.Avoid downshifting to brake, or slow,the vehicle.

• Avoid making hard stops for the first200 miles (322 km) or so. During this timethe new brake linings are not yet broken in.Hard stops with new linings can meanpremature wear and earlier replacement.Follow this breaking-in guideline every timeyou get new brake linings.

• Do not tow a trailer during break-in. SeeTowing a Trailer on page 362 for the trailertowing capabilities of your vehicle and moreinformation.

Following break-in, engine speed and load canbe gradually increased.

123

Ignition Positions

With the key in theignition, you can turn itto four differentpositions.

A (OFF): This is the only position in which youcan remove the key. This position locks the ignitionand transmission.

Notice: Using a tool to force the key from theignition switch could cause damage or breakthe key. Use the correct key and turn the keyonly with your hand. Make sure the key is all theway in. If none of this works, then your vehicleneeds service.

B (ACCESSORY): This position allows you to usethings like the radio and the windshield wiperswhile the engine is off. This position will also allowyou to turn off the engine. Use ACCESSORY ifyou must have your vehicle in motion whilethe engine is off, for example, if your vehicle isbeing pushed or towed.

C (ON): This is the position that the switchreturns to after you start your engine and releasethe key. The switch stays in ON when theengine is running. But even when the engine isnot running, you can use ON to operate yourelectrical power accessories, and to display someinstrument panel warning lights.

The battery could be drained if you leave the keyin the ACCESSORY or ON position with theengine off. You may not be able to start yourvehicle if the battery is allowed to drain foran extended period of time.

D (START): This position starts the engine. Whenthe engine starts, release the key. The ignitionswitch will return to ON for normal driving.

124

Key In the IgnitionNever leave your vehicle with the keys inside, as itis an easy target for joy riders or thieves. If youleave the key in the ignition and park your vehicle,a chime will sound when you open the driver’sdoor. Always remember to remove your key fromthe ignition and take it with you. This will lockyour ignition and transmission. Also, alwaysremember to lock the doors.

The battery could be drained if you leave the keyin the ignition while your vehicle is parked.You may not be able to start your vehicle after ithas been parked for an extended period of time.

Retained Accessory Power (RAP)These vehicle accessories can be used for up to10 minutes after the ignition key is turned off:

• Audio System

• Power Windows

• Sunroof (if equipped)

Power to the windows and sunroof will work up to10 minutes or until a door is opened.

The radio continues to work for 10 minutes or untilthe driver’s door is opened.

For an additional 10 minutes of operation, close allthe doors and turn the key to ON and then backto OFF.

All these features will work when the key is in theON or ACCESSORY positions.

125

Starting the EnginePlace the transmission in the proper gear.

Move your shift lever to PARK (P) orNEUTRAL (N). Your engine will not start inany other position – this is a safety feature. Torestart when you are already moving, useNEUTRAL (N) only.

Notice: Do not try to shift to PARK (P) if yourvehicle is moving. If you do, you coulddamage the transmission. Shift to PARK (P)only when your vehicle is stopped.

Starting Procedure1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn

the ignition key to START. When the enginestarts, let go of the key. The idle speed will godown as your engine gets warm. Do notrace the engine immediately after starting it.Operate the engine and transmission gently toallow the oil to warm up and lubricate allmoving parts.

Your vehicle has a Computer-ControlledCranking System. This feature assistsin starting the engine and protectscomponents. If the ignition key is turned to theSTART position, and then released whenthe engine begins cranking, the enginewill continue cranking for a few seconds oruntil the vehicle starts. If the engine does notstart and the key is held in START formany seconds, cranking will be stopped after15 seconds to prevent cranking motordamage. To prevent gear damage, this systemalso prevents cranking if the engine isalready running. Engine cranking can bestopped by turning the ignition switch to theACCESSORY or OFF position.

Notice: Cranking the engine for long periodsof time, by returning the key to the STARTposition immediately after cranking has ended,can overheat and damage the crankingmotor, and drain the battery. Wait at least15 seconds between each try, to let thecranking motor cool down.

126

2. If the engine does not start after 5-10 seconds,especially in very cold weather (below 0°F or−18°C), it could be flooded with too muchgasoline. Try pushing the accelerator pedal allthe way to the floor and holding it there asyou hold the key in START for up to amaximum of 15 seconds. Wait at least15 seconds between each try, to allow thecranking motor to cool down. When the enginestarts, let go of the key and accelerator. Ifthe vehicle starts briefly but then stops again,do the same thing. This clears the extragasoline from the engine. Do not race theengine immediately after starting it. Operatethe engine and transmission gently until the oilwarms up and lubricates all moving parts.

Notice: Your engine is designed to work withthe electronics in your vehicle. If you addelectrical parts or accessories, you couldchange the way the engine operates. Beforeadding electrical equipment, check withyour dealer/retailer. If you do not, your enginemight not perform properly. Any resultingdamage would not be covered by yourvehicle’s warranty.

Engine Coolant HeaterYour vehicle may have an engine coolant heater.

In very cold weather, 0°F (−18°C) or colder,the engine coolant heater can help. You will geteasier starting and better fuel economy duringengine warm-up.

Usually, the coolant heater should be plugged in aminimum of four hours prior to starting yourvehicle. At temperatures above 32°F (0°C), use ofthe coolant heater is not required. Your vehiclemay also have an internal thermostat in theplug end of the cord. This will prevent operation ofthe engine coolant heater when the temperatureis at or above 0°F (−18°C) as noted on the cord.

127

To Use the Engine Coolant Heater1. Turn off the engine.

2. Open the hood and unwrap the electricalcord. The cord is located on the driver’sside of the engine compartment, it is routedaround the windshield washer fluid reservoir.

3. Plug the cord into a normal, grounded 110-voltAC outlet.

{CAUTION:

Plugging the cord into an ungroundedoutlet could cause an electrical shock.Also, the wrong kind of extension cordcould overheat and cause a fire. Youcould be seriously injured. Plug the cordinto a properly grounded three-prong110-volt AC outlet. If the cord will notreach, use a heavy-duty three-prongextension cord rated for at least 15 amps.

4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplugand store the cord as it was before to keep itaway from moving engine parts. If you donot, it could be damaged.

How long should you keep the coolant heaterplugged in? The answer depends on the outsidetemperature, the kind of oil you have, andsome other things. Instead of trying to listeverything here, we ask that you contact yourdealer/retailer in the area where you will be parkingyour vehicle. The dealer/retailer can give youthe best advice for that particular area.

128

Automatic Transmission OperationYour vehicle has an electronic shift positionindicator within the instrument panel cluster.

When using the Electronic Range Select Mode anumber will display next to the L, indicatingthe current gear that has been selected.

See Electronic Range Select mode in this sectionfor more information.

Your automatic transmission has a shift leverlocated on the console between the seats.

PARK (P): This position locks your front wheels.It is the best position to use when you startyour engine because your vehicle cannot moveeasily.

{CAUTION:

It is dangerous to get out of your vehicleif the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P)with the parking brake firmly set. Yourvehicle can roll.

Do not leave your vehicle when the engineis running unless you have to. If you haveleft the engine running, the vehicle canmove suddenly. You or others could beinjured. To be sure your vehicle will notmove, even when you are on fairly levelground, always set your parking brakeand move the shift lever to PARK (P). SeeShifting Into Park (P) on page 134. If youare pulling a trailer, see Towing a Traileron page 362.

Make sure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P)before starting the engine. Your vehicle has anautomatic transmission shift lock control system.

129

You must fully apply your regular brake first andthen press the shift lever button before youcan shift from PARK (P) when the ignition key is inON. If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), easepressure on the shift lever, then push theshift lever all the way into PARK (P) as youmaintain brake application. Then press the shiftlever button and move the shift lever into anothergear. See Shifting Out of Park (P) on page 136.

REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.

Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while yourvehicle is moving forward could damagethe transmission. The repairs would not becovered by your warranty. Shift toREVERSE (R) only after your vehicle isstopped.

To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out ofsnow, ice or sand without damaging yourtransmission, see If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 352.

NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine doesnot connect with the wheels. To restart whenyou are already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.Also, use NEUTRAL (N) when your vehicle isbeing towed.

{CAUTION:

Shifting into a drive gear while the engineis running at high speed is dangerous.Unless your foot is firmly on the brakepedal, your vehicle could move veryrapidly. You could lose control and hitpeople or objects. Do not shift into a drivegear while your engine is running at highspeed.

Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) orNEUTRAL (N) with the engine running at highspeed may damage the transmission. Therepairs would not be covered by your warranty.Be sure the engine is not running at highspeed when shifting your vehicle.

130

DRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving. Itprovides the best fuel economy for your vehicle. Ifyou need more power for passing, and you are:

• Going less than 35 mph (56 km/h), pushyour accelerator pedal about halfway down.

• Going about 35 mph (56 km/h) or more, pushthe accelerator all the way down.

Notice: If your vehicle seems to accelerateslowly or not shift gears when you go faster,and you continue to drive your vehicle thatway, you could damage the transmission. Haveyour vehicle serviced right away. You candrive in LOW (L) when you are driving less than35 mph (56 km/h) and DRIVE (D) for higherspeeds until then.

LOW (L): This position gives you access to gearranges. This provides more engine braking butlower fuel economy than DRIVE (D). You can useit on very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud.

Electronic Range Select ModeElectronic Range Selector (ERS) mode allows youto choose the top-gear limit of the vehicle’stransmission and the vehicle’s speed while drivingdown hill or towing a trailer.

To use this feature, do the following:

1. Move the shift lever to LOW (L).2. Press the plus/minus

button located on theshift lever, toincrease or decreasethe gear rangeavailable basedupon your currentdriving conditionsand needs.

When you shift from DRIVE (D) to LOW (L), thetransmission will shift to a pre-determinedlower gear range. The highest gear available forthis pre-determined range is displayed next tothe L in the DIC. See Driver Information Center(DIC) on page 228 and DIC Operation andDisplays (With DIC Buttons) on page 229 or DICOperation and Displays (Without DIC Buttons)on page 235 for more information. The numberdisplayed in the DIC is the highest gear thatthe transmission will be allowed to operate in.

131

However, your vehicle can automatically shift tolower gears as required by various drivingconditions. This means that all gears below thatnumber are available. For example, whenFOURTH (4) is shown next to the L, FIRST (1)through FOURTH (4) gears are automaticallyshifted by the vehicle. You cannot shift intoFIFTH (5) until the plus (+) button is used or youshift back into DRIVE (D) mode.

While in LOW (L), the transmission will preventshifting to a lower gear range if the engine speedis too high for the gear range you are trying toselect. You have a brief period of time to slow thevehicle speed. If vehicle speed is not reducedwithin the timeframe allowed, the lower gear rangeattempted will not be available. The highestpossible gear that is allowed for that engine speedwill display next to the L in the DIC. Try againto slow the vehicle speed and press the minus (−)button to the desired lower gear range.

Automatic Engine Grade braking is not availablewhen the ERS is active. It is available inDRIVE (D) for both normal and Tow/Haul mode.While using the ERS, cruise control and thetow/haul mode can be used. See Tow/Haul Modeon page 132 for more information.

Tow/Haul ModeYour vehicle may have a Tow/Haul mode.

The button to turn it onor off is located oninstrument panel underthe climate controls.

Push the button to turn it on, push it again todeactivate the system. You can use this feature toassist when towing or hauling a heavy load.

When Tow/Haul is activated the Tow/Haul symbolwill come on the instrument panel cluster. SeeTow/Haul Mode under Towing a Trailer onpage 362 for more information.

132

Automatic Engine Grade BrakingAutomatic Engine Grade Braking assists whendriving on a downhill grade. It maintains thevehicle’s speed by automatically implementing ashift schedule that uses the engine and thetransmission to slow the vehicle. This reduceswear on the brakes system and increases controlof the vehicle. The system constantly monitorsthe vehicle’s speed, acceleration, throttle position,and whether the brake pedal is being pressed,and determines when to keep the current vehiclespeed or to slow down. The system will thenautomatically command downshifts that reducesthe vehicle’s speed, until the brake pedal isno longer being pressed. This indicates the desiredvehicle speed has been reached.

While in the Electronic Range Select (ERS) mode,grade braking is deactivated, allowing the driverto select a range and limiting the highest gearavailable. Grade braking is available for normaldriving and in Tow/Haul mode.

See Automatic Transmission Operation onpage 129.

Parking Brake

To set the parkingbrake, push down theparking brake pedaldown with your left foot.

If the ignition is on, the brake system warning lightwill come on. See Brake System Warning Lighton page 217.

Notice: Driving with the parking brake on canoverheat the brake system and causepremature wear or damage to brake systemparts. Make sure that the parking brake is fullyreleased and the brake warning light is offbefore driving.

133

To release the parking brake, hold the regularbrake pedal down with your right foot. Push downmomentarily on the parking brake pedal withyour left foot until you feel the pedal release, thenslowly pull your foot up off the park brakepedal. If the parking brake is not released whenyou begin to drive, the brake system warning lightwill be on and a chime will sound warning youthat the parking brake is still on.

If you are towing a trailer and are parking on a hill,see Towing a Trailer on page 362.

Shifting Into Park (P)

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to get out of yourvehicle if the shift lever is not fully inPARK (P) with the parking brake firmlyset. Your vehicle can roll. If you have left



the engine running, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could be injured.To be sure your vehicle will not move,even when you are on fairly level ground,use the steps that follow. If you arepulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer onpage 362.

1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right footand set the parking brake.

2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) by holdingin the button on the shift lever and pushingthe shift lever all the way toward the frontof the vehicle.

3. Turn the ignition key to OFF.

4. Remove the key and take it with you. If youcan leave your vehicle with the ignition key inyour hand, your vehicle is in PARK (P).

134

Leaving Your Vehicle With the EngineRunning

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to leave your vehiclewith the engine running. Your vehicle couldmove suddenly if the shift lever is not fullyin PARK (P) with the parking brake firmlyset. And, if you leave the vehicle with theengine running, it could overheat and evencatch fire. You or others could be injured.Do not leave your vehicle with the enginerunning.

If you have to leave your vehicle with the enginerunning, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) andyour parking brake is firmly set before you leave it.After you have moved the shift lever into PARK (P),hold the regular brake pedal down. Then, see if youcan move the shift lever away from PARK (P)without first pushing the button.If you can, it means that the shift lever was not fullylocked in PARK (P).

Torque LockIf you are parking on a hill and you do not shift yourtransmission into PARK (P) properly, the weight ofthe vehicle may put too much force on the parkingpawl in the transmission. You may find it difficult topull the shift lever out of PARK (P). This is called“torque lock.” To prevent torque lock, set theparking brake and then shift into PARK (P) properlybefore you leave the driver’s seat. To find out how,see Shifting Into Park (P) on page 134.

When you are ready to drive, move the shift leverout of PARK (P) before you release the parkingbrake.

If torque lock does occur, you may need to haveanother vehicle push your vehicle a little uphillto take some of the pressure from the parking pawlin the transmission, then you will be able to pullthe shift lever out of PARK (P).

135

Shifting Out of Park (P)Your vehicle has an automatic transmission shiftlock control system. You have to apply yourregular brake first and then press the shift leverbutton before you can shift from PARK (P).See Automatic Transmission Operation onpage 129.

If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressureon the shift lever and push the shift lever all theway into PARK (P) as you maintain brakeapplication. Then press the shift lever button andmove the shift lever into the gear you wish.

Parking Over Things That Burn

{CAUTION:

Things that can burn could touch hotexhaust parts under your vehicle andignite. Do not park over papers, leaves,dry grass, or other things that can burn.

136

Engine Exhaust

{CAUTION:

Engine exhaust can kill. It contains thegas carbon monoxide (CO), which youcannot see or smell. It can causeunconsciousness and death.

You might have exhaust coming in if:• The exhaust system sounds strange

or different.• Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.• Your vehicle was damaged in a

collision.



• Your vehicle was damaged whendriving over high points on the roador over road debris.

• Repairs were not done correctly.• Your vehicle or the exhaust system

has been modified improperly.

If you ever suspect exhaust is coming intoyour vehicle:

• Drive it only with all the windowsdown to blow out any CO; and

• Have your vehicle fixed immediately.

137

Running the Engine While ParkedIt is better not to park with the engine running. But ifyou ever have to, here are some things to know.

{CAUTION:

Idling the engine with the climate controlsystem off could allow dangerous exhaustinto your vehicle. See the earlier cautionunder Engine Exhaust on page 137.

Also, idling in a closed-in place can letdeadly carbon monoxide (CO) into yourvehicle even if the climate control fan is atthe highest setting. One place this canhappen is a garage. Exhaust — withCO — can come in easily. NEVER park ina garage with the engine running.

Another closed-in place can be a blizzard.See Winter Driving on page 347.

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to get out of yourvehicle if the shift lever is not fully inPARK (P) with the parking brake firmlyset. Your vehicle can roll. Do not leaveyour vehicle when the engine is runningunless you have to. If you have left theengine running, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could be injured.To be sure your vehicle will not move,even when you are on fairly level ground,always set the parking brake and movethe shift lever to PARK (P).

Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehiclewill not move. See Shifting Into Park (P) onpage 134.

If you are pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer onpage 362.

138

Mirrors

Manual Rearview Mirror withOnStar®

When you are sitting in a comfortable drivingposition, adjust the mirror so you can see clearlybehind your vehicle. Hold the mirror in thecenter to move it up or down and side to side. Theday/night adjustment allows you to adjust themirror to avoid glare from the lamps behind you.Move the lever to the right for nighttime use and tothe left for daytime use.

There may also be three OnStar® buttons locatedat the bottom of the mirror face. See yourdealer/retailer for more information on the systemand how to subscribe to OnStar®. See OnStar®

System on page 145 for more information onthe services OnStar® provides.

Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirrorwith OnStar® and CompassYour vehicle may have an automatic-dimmingrearview mirror with a compass.

There may be three additional buttons for theOnStar® system. See your dealer/retailer for moreinformation on the system and how to subscribeto OnStar®. See OnStar® System on page 145 formore information about the services OnStar®

provides.

O (On/Off): This is the on/off button.

Automatic Dimming Mirror OperationThe automatic dimming mirror comes on each timethe ignition is turned to start. To turn theautomatic dimming feature off or back on, pressthe on/off button. The indicator light on the mirror islit when the automatic dimming feature is on.

139

Compass OperationPress the on/off button once to turn the compasson or off.

There is a compass display in the window in theupper right corner of the mirror face.

Compass CalibrationPress and hold the on/off button to activate thecompass calibration mode. CAL will be displayedin the compass window on the mirror.

The compass can be calibrated by driving thevehicle in circles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less until thedisplay reads a direction.

If after a few seconds the display does not show acompass direction, (N for North for example),there may be a strong magnetic field interferingwith the compass. Such interference may becaused by a magnetic antenna mount, note padholder, or similar object. If the letter C or CALappears in the compass window, the compass mayneed to be reset or calibrated.

Compass VarianceCompass variance is the difference betweenearth’s magnetic north and true geographic north.The mirror is set to zone eight upon leavingthe factory. It will be necessary to adjust thecompass to compensate for compass variance ifyou live outside zone eight. Under certaincircumstances, such as during a long distancecross-country trip, it will be necessary to adjust forcompass variance. If not adjusted to accountfor compass variance, your compass could givefalse readings.

140

To adjust for compass variance:

1. Find your current location and variance zonenumber on the following zone map.

2. Press and hold the on/off button until the zonenumber is displayed. The number shown isthe current zone number.

3. Scroll through the zone numbers that appear inthe window on the mirror by pressing the on/offbutton. Once you find your zone number,release the button. After about four seconds,the mirror will return to the compass display,and the new zone number will be set. If C orCAL appears in the compass window, thecompass may need calibration. See “CompassCalibration” listed previously.

141

Outside Power Mirrors

If your vehicle isequipped with outsidepower mirrors, thecontrols are located onthe driver’s doorarmrest.

Press (A) to select the driver’s side mirror or (B) toselect the passenger’s side mirror. Press either(A) or (B) again to deselect the mirror.

To adjust each mirror, press one of the fourarrows located on the control pad to move themirror in the direction you want it to go. Adjusteach outside mirror so that you can see a little ofyour vehicle, and the area behind your vehicle.See Memory Seat and Mirrors on page 13 for moreinformation.

The mirrors can be manually folded inward toprevent damage when going through an automaticcar wash. To fold, push the mirror toward thevehicle. To return the mirror to its original position,push outward. Be sure to return both mirrors totheir original unfolded position before driving.

The use of hood-mounted air deflectors andadd-on convex mirror attachments may adverselyaffect mirror performance.

Turn Signal IndicatorYour vehicle may have a turn signal indicator onthe mirror. An arrow on the mirror will flash inthe direction of the turn or lane change.

142

Outside Power Foldaway Mirrors

If your vehicle isequipped with outsidepower foldaway mirrors,the controls arelocated on the driver’sdoor armrest.

• Press (A) to select the driver’s side mirror. Thenpress the arrows located on the four-waycontrol pad to adjust the mirror. Press (A) againto deselect the mirror.

• Press (B) to select the passenger’s side mirror.Then press the arrows located on the four-waycontrol pad to adjust the mirror. Press (B) againto deselect the mirror.

• Press (C), to fold the mirrors out to the drivingposition.

• Press (D) to fold the mirrors in to the foldedposition.

If the mirrors are accidentally folded/unfoldedmanually, they may shake or flutter at normaldriving speeds and may not stay in the unfoldedposition. If this happens, you will need to reset themirrors. See “Resetting the Power FoldawayMirrors” next.

Resetting the Power Foldaway MirrorsYou will need to reset the power foldaway mirrorsif the following occurs:

• The mirrors are accidentally obstructed whilefolding.

• They are accidentally manuallyfolded/unfolded.

• The mirrors will not stay in the unfoldedposition.

• The mirrors shake and flutter at normal drivingspeeds.

To reset the power foldaway mirrors, fold andunfold them one time using the mirror controls.This will reset them to their normal position.

This mirror has the following features.

143

Automatic DimmingThe driver’s outside mirror will adjust for the glareof the headlamps behind you. See AutomaticDimming Rearview Mirror with OnStar® andCompass on page 139.

Curb View AssistIf your vehicle has the memory package, theoutside mirrors are able to perform the curb viewassist mirror function. This feature may beuseful in allowing the driver to view the curb whenparallel parking. This feature will cause thepassenger’s and/or driver’s mirror to tilt to apreselected position when the vehicle is inREVERSE (R).

The passenger’s and/or driver’s mirror will returnto its original position when the vehicle isshifted out of REVERSE (R), or the ignition isturned off or to LOCK.

This feature can be turned on or off through theDriver Information Center (DIC). See DriverInformation Center (DIC) on page 228 and MemorySeat and Mirrors on page 13 for more information.

Turn Signal IndicatorYour vehicle may have a turn signal indicator onthe mirror. An arrow on the mirror will flash inthe direction of the turn or lane change.

Outside Convex Mirror

{CAUTION:

A convex mirror can make things (likeother vehicles) look farther away thanthey really are. If you cut too sharply intothe right lane, you could hit a vehicle onyour right. Check your inside mirror orglance over your shoulder beforechanging lanes.

The passenger’s side mirror may have convexglass. A convex mirror’s surface is curved so morecan be seen from the driver’s seat.

144

Outside Heated MirrorsPress the rear window defogger button, located onthe climate control panel, to also turn the outsideheated mirrors on or off. The mirrors will heatto help clear fog or frost from the surface of themirror.

See “Rear Window Defogger” under DualAutomatic Climate Control System on page 198for more information.

OnStar® System

OnStar® uses several innovative technologies andlive advisors to provide you with a wide range ofsafety, security, information, and convenienceservices. If your airbags deploy, the system isdesigned to make an automatic call to OnStar®

Emergency advisors who can request emergency

services be sent to your location. If you lockyour keys in the vehicle, call OnStar® at1-888-4-ONSTAR and they can send a signal tounlock your doors. If you need roadside assistance,press the OnStar® button and they can contactRoadside Service for you.

OnStar® service is provided to you subject to theOnStar® Terms and Conditions. You maycancel your OnStar® service at any time bycontacting OnStar®. A complete OnStar® Owner’sGuide and the OnStar® Terms and Conditionsare included in the vehicle’s OnStar® Subscriberglove box literature. For more information,visit onstar.com or onstar.ca, contact OnStar® at1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827) or TTY1-877-248-2080, or press the OnStar® button tospeak with an OnStar® advisor 24 hours aday, 7 days a week.

Not all OnStar® features are available on allvehicles. To check if your vehicle is equipped toprovide the services described below, or for afull description of OnStar® services and systemlimitations, see the OnStar® Owner’s Guide in yourglove box or visit onstar.com.

145

OnStar® ServicesFor new vehicles with OnStar®, the Safe & SoundPlan, or the Directions & Connections® Plan isincluded for one year from the date of purchase.You can extend this plan beyond the first year,or upgrade to the Directions & Connections® Plan.For more information, press the OnStar® buttonto speak with an advisor. Some OnStar® services(such as Remote Door Unlock or Stolen VehicleLocation Assistance) may not be availableuntil you register with OnStar®.

Available Services with Safe &Sound® Plan• Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment

• Advanced Automatic Crash Notification(AACN) (If equipped)

• Link to Emergency Services

• Roadside Assistance

• Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance

• AccidentAssist

• Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert

• OnStar® Vehicle Diagnostics

• GM Goodwrench® On Demand Diagnostics

• OnStar® Hands-Free Calling with30 complimentary minutes

• OnStar® Virtual Advisor (U.S. Only)

Available Services included with Directions& Connections® Plan• All Safe and Sound Plan Services

• Driving Directions - Advisor delivered orOnStar® Turn-by-Turn Navigation (If equipped)

• RideAssist

• Information and Convenience Services

OnStar® Hands-Free CallingOnStar® Hands-Free Calling allows eligibleOnStar® subscribers to make and receive callsusing voice commands. Hands-Free Calling is fullyintegrated into the vehicle, and can be usedwith OnStar® Pre-Paid Minute Packages.

146

Hands-Free Calling may also be linked to aVerizon Wireless service plan in the U.S. or a BellMobility service plan in Canada, depending oneligibility. To find out more, refer to the OnStar®

Owner’s Guide in the vehicle’s glove box, visitwww.onstar.com or www.onstar.ca, or speak withan OnStar® advisor by pressing the OnStar®

button or calling 1-888-4-ONSTAR(1-888-466-7827).

OnStar® Virtual AdvisorOnStar® Virtual Advisor is a feature of OnStar®

Hands-Free Calling that uses your minutes toaccess location-based weather, local traffic reports,and stock quotes. By pressing the phone buttonand giving a few simple voice commands, you canbrowse through the various topics. See the OnStar®

Owner’s Guide for more information (Only availablein the continental U.S.).

OnStar® Steering Wheel ControlsYour vehicle may have a Talk/Mute button thatcan be used to interact with OnStar® Hands-FreeCalling. See Audio Steering Wheel Controls onpage 317 for more information.

On some vehicles, you may have to hold thebutton for a few seconds and give the command“ONSTAR” in order to activate the OnStar®

Hands-Free Calling feature.

On some vehicles, the mute button can be used todial numbers into voicemail systems, or to dialphone extensions. See the OnStar® Owner’sGuide for more information.

How OnStar® Service WorksIn order to provide you with OnStar® services,your vehicle’s OnStar® system has the capabilityof recording and transmitting vehicle information.This information is automatically sent to anOnStar® Call Center at the time of an OnStar®

button press, Emergency button press or ifyour airbags or AACN system deploys. The vehicleinformation usually includes your GPS locationand, in the event of a crash, additional informationregarding the accident that your vehicle hasbeen involved in (e.g. the direction from whichyour vehicle was hit). When you use the VirtualAdvisor feature of OnStar® Hands-Free Calling,your vehicle also sends OnStar® your GPSlocation so that we can provide you withlocation-based services.

147

OnStar® service cannot work unless your vehicleis in a place where OnStar® has an agreementwith a wireless service provider for service in thatarea. OnStar® service also cannot work unlessyou are in a place where the wireless serviceprovider OnStar® has hired for that areahas coverage, network capacity and receptionwhen the service is needed, and technology thatis compatible with the OnStar® service. Not allservices are available everywhere, particularly inremote or enclosed areas, or at all times.

OnStar® service that involves location informationabout your vehicle cannot work unless GPSsatellite signals are unobstructed and available inthat place as well.

Your vehicle must have a working electricalsystem (including adequate battery power) for theOnStar® equipment to operate. There are otherproblems OnStar® cannot control that may preventOnStar® from providing OnStar® service to youat any particular time or place. Some examples aredamage to important parts of your vehicle in anaccident, hills, tall buildings, tunnels, weatheror wireless phone network congestion.

Your ResponsibilityYou may need to increase the volume of yourradio to hear the OnStar® advisor. If the light nextto the OnStar® buttons is red, this means thatyour system is not functioning properly and shouldbe checked by your dealer/retailer. If the lightappears clear (no light is appearing), your OnStar®

subscription has expired. You can always pressthe OnStar® button to confirm that your OnStar®

equipment is active.

148

Universal Home RemoteSystem

System IdentificationYour vehicle may have a Universal Home RemoteSystem.

Determine which Universal Home Remote yourvehicle has and then read the pages following forinstructions on programming your specificsystem.

If there is one triangular Light Emitting Diode(LED) indicator light above the Universal HomeRemote buttons, follow the instructions underUniversal Home Remote System Operation(With One Triangular LED).

If there are three round LED indicator lights abovethe Universal Home Remote buttons, follow theinstructions under Universal Home Remote SystemOperation (With Three Round LED).

For help or information on the Universal HomeRemote System, call the customer assistancephone number under Customer Assistance Officeson page 508.

Universal Home Remote SystemThe Universal Home Remote System provides away to replace up to three hand-heldRadio-Frequency (RF) transmitters used toactivate devices such as garage door openers,security systems, and home lighting.

149

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCCRules. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:



This device complies with RSS-210 of IndustryCanada. Operation is subject to the following twoconditions:




Universal Home Remote SystemOperation (With One Triangular LED)

If there is one triangular Light Emitting Diode(LED) indicator light above the Universal HomeRemote buttons, follow the instructions below.

Do not use the Universal Home Remote with anygarage door opener that does not have the stopand reverse feature. This includes any garage dooropener model manufactured before April 1, 1982. Ifyou have a newer garage door opener with rollingcodes, please be sure to follow Steps 6 through 8 tocomplete the programming of your Universal HomeRemote Transmitter.

150

Read the instructions completely before attemptingto program the Universal Home Remote.Because of the steps involved, it may be helpful tohave another person available to assist you inthe programming steps

Keep the original hand-held transmitter for use inother vehicles as well as for future UniversalHome Remote programming. It is alsorecommended that upon the sale of the vehicle,the programmed Universal Home Remote buttonsshould be erased for security purposes. See“Erasing Universal Home Remote Buttons” later insection.

When programming a garage door, it is advised topark outside of the garage. Be sure that peopleand objects are clear of the garage door orgate operator you are programming.

It is recommended that a new battery be installedin your hand-held transmitter for quicker andmore accurate transmission of the radio-frequencysignal.

Programming the Universal HomeRemote SystemTo program up to three devices:

1. Press and hold down the two outsideUniversal Home Remote buttons, releasingonly when the Universal Home Remoteindicator light begins to flash, after20 seconds. Do not hold down the buttons forlonger than 30 seconds and do not repeatthis step to program a second and/orthird hand-held transmitter to the remainingtwo Universal Home Remote buttons.

2. Hold the end of your hand-held transmitterabout 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away fromthe Universal Home Remote buttonswhile keeping the indicator light in view.

3. At the same time, press and hold both thedesired Universal Home Remote button andthe hand-held transmitter button. Do notrelease the buttons until Step 4 has beencompleted.Some entry gates and garage door openersmay require you to substitute Step 3 withthe procedure noted in “Gate Operator andCanadian Programming” later in this section.

151

4. The indicator light will flash slowly at first andthen rapidly after Universal Home Remotesuccessfully receives the frequency signalfrom the hand-held transmitter. Release bothbuttons.

5. Press and hold the newly-trained UniversalHome Remote button and observe theindicator light.If the indicator light stays on continuously,programming is complete and your deviceshould activate when the Universal HomeRemote button is pressed and released.To program the remaining two Universal HomeRemote buttons, begin with Step 2 under“Programming Universal Home Remote.” Donot repeat Step 1 as this will erase all ofthe programmed channels.If the indicator light blinks rapidly fortwo seconds and then turns to a constantlight, continue with Steps 6 through 8 followingto complete the programming of a rolling-codedevice, most commonly, a garage dooropener.

6. Locate in the garage, the garage door openerreceiver (motor-head unit). Locate the “Learn”or “Smart” button. This can usually befound where the hanging antenna wire isattached to the motor-head unit.

7. Firmly press and release the “Learn” or“Smart” button. The name and color ofthe button may vary by manufacturer.You will have 30 seconds to start Step 8.

8. Return to the vehicle. Firmly press and holdthe programmed Universal Home Remotebutton for two seconds, then release it.Immediately press and hold the same buttona second time for two seconds, thenrelease it. Immediately, press and hold thesame button a third time for two seconds, thenrelease.The Universal Home Remote should nowactivate the rolling-code device.

To program the remaining two Universal HomeRemote buttons, begin with Step 2 of“Programming Universal Home Remote.” Do notrepeat Step 1, as this will erase all previousprogramming from the Universal Home Remotebuttons.

152

Gate Operator and CanadianProgrammingCanadian radio-frequency laws require transmittersignals to time out or quit after several secondsof transmission. This may not be long enoughfor Universal Home Remote to pick up the signalduring programming. Similarly, some U.S. gateoperators are manufactured to time out inthe same manner.

If you live in Canada, or you are having difficultyprogramming a gate operator or garage dooropener by using the “Programming UniversalHome Remote” procedures, regardless of whereyou live, replace Step 3 under “ProgrammingUniversal Home Remote” with the following:

Continue to press and hold the Universal HomeRemote button while you press and release everytwo seconds (cycle) the hand-held transmitterbutton until the frequency signal has beensuccessfully accepted by the Universal HomeRemote. The Universal Home Remote indicatorlight will flash slowly at first and then rapidly.Proceed with Step 4 under “ProgrammingUniversal Home Remote” to complete.

Using Universal Home RemotePress and hold the appropriate Universal HomeRemote button for at least half of a second.The indicator light will come on while the signal isbeing transmitted.

Erasing Universal Home RemoteButtonsTo erase programming from the three UniversalHome Remote buttons:

1. Press and hold down the two outside buttonsuntil the indicator light begins to flash, after20 seconds. Do not hold the two outsidebuttons for longer than 30 seconds.

2. Release both buttons.

The Universal Home Remote is now in the training(learning) mode and can be programmed at anytime beginning with Step 2 under “ProgrammingUniversal Home Remote” shown earlier in thissection.

Individual buttons cannot be erased, but they canbe reprogrammed. See “Reprogramming aSingle Universal Home Remote Button” followingthis section.

153

Reprogramming a Single UniversalHome Remote ButtonTo program a device to Universal Home Remoteusing a Universal Home Remote buttonpreviously trained:

1. Press and hold the desired Universal HomeRemote button. Do not release the button.

2. The indicator light will begin to flash after20 seconds. While still holding the UniversalHome Remote button, proceed with Step2 under “Programming Universal HomeRemote” shown earlier in this section.


Universal Home Remote SystemOperation (With Three Round LED)

Your vehicle may have the Universal HomeRemote System. If there are three round LightEmitting Diode (LED) indicator lights abovethe Universal Home Remote buttons, follow theinstructions below.

This system provides a way to replace up to threeremote control transmitters used to activatedevices such as garage door openers, securitysystems, and home automation devices.

Do not use this system with any garage dooropener that does not have the stop and reversefeature. This includes any garage door openermodel manufactured before April 1, 1982.

154

Read the instructions completely before attemptingto program the transmitter. Because of the stepsinvolved, it may be helpful to have anotherperson available to assist you in programming thetransmitter.

Be sure to keep the original remote controltransmitter for use in other vehicles, as well as, forfuture programming. You only need the originalremote control transmitter for Fixed Codeprogramming. It is also recommended that uponthe sale or lease termination of the vehicle,the programmed buttons should be erased forsecurity purposes. See “Erasing Universal HomeRemote Buttons” later in this section.

When programming a garage door, it is advised topark outside of the garage. Be sure that peopleand objects are clear of the garage door orsecurity device you are programming.

Programming Universal HomeRemote — Rolling CodeMost garage door openers sold after 1996 areRolling Code units.

Programming a garage door opener involvestime-sensitive actions, so read the entire procedurebefore you begin. If you do not follow theseactions, the device will time out and you will haveto repeat the procedure.

To program up to three devices:

1. From inside the vehicle, press thetwo outside buttons at the same time forone to two seconds, and immediatelyrelease them.

155

2. Locate in the garage, the garage door openerreceiver (motor-head unit). Locate the “Learn”or “Smart” button. It can usually be foundwhere the hanging antenna wire is attached tothe motor-head unit and may be a coloredbutton. Press this button. After you press thisbutton, you will have 30 seconds to completethe following steps.

3. Immediately return to your vehicle. Press andhold the universal home remote button thatyou would like to use to control the garagedoor until the garage door moves. Theindicator light, above the selected button,should slowly blink. You may need to hold thebutton from five to 20 seconds.

4. Immediately, within one second, release thebutton when the garage door moves. Theindicator light will blink rapidly untilprogramming is complete.

5. Press and release the same button again.The garage door should move, confirmingthat programming is successful and complete.

To program another Rolling Code device such asan additional garage door opener, a securitydevice, or home automation device, repeat Steps1 through 5, choosing a different functionbutton in Step 3 than what you used for thegarage door opener.

If these instructions do not work, you probablyhave a Fixed Code garage door opener. Follow theProgramming instructions that follow for a FixedCode garage door opener.

156

Programming Universal HomeRemote — Fixed CodeMost garage door openers sold before 1996 areFixed Code units.

Programming a garage door opener involvestime-sensitive actions, so read the entire procedurebefore you begin. If you do not follow theseactions, the device will time out and you will haveto repeat the procedure.

To program up to three devices:

1. To verify if you have a Fixed Code garagedoor opener, remove the battery cover onyour hand held transmitter supplied bythe manufacturer of your garage door openermotor. If you see a row of dip switchessimilar to the graphic above, you have a FixedCode garage door opener. If you do not seea row of dip switches, return to the previoussection for Programming Universal HomeRemote – Rolling Code.

157

Your panel of switches may not appearexactly as they do in the examples above, butthey should be similar.The switch positions on your hand-heldtransmitter may be labeled, as follows:

• A switch in the up position may be labeledas “Up,” “+,” or “On.”

• A switch in the down position may belabeled as “Down,” “−,” or “Off.”

• A switch in the middle position may belabeled as “Middle,” “0,” or “Neutral.”

Example of Eight Dip Switches with Two Positions Example of Eight Dip Switches with Three Positions

158

2. Write down the eight to 12 switch settingsfrom left to right as follows:

• When a switch is in the up position,write “Left.”

• When a switch is in the down position,write “Right.”

• If a switch is set between the up and downposition, write “Middle.”The switch settings that you wrote down inStep 2 will now become the button strokesyou enter into the Universal Home Remote inStep 4. Be sure to enter the switch settingsthat you wrote down in Step 2, in order fromleft to right, into the Universal Home Remote,when completing Step 4.

3. From inside your vehicle, first firmly pressall three buttons at the same time forabout three seconds. Release the buttons toput the Universal Home Remote intoprogramming mode.

4. The indicator lights will blink slowly. Enter eachswitch setting from Step 2 into your vehicle’sUniversal Home Remote. You will have twoand one-half minutes to complete Step 4. Nowpress one button on the Universal HomeRemote for each switch setting as follows:• If you wrote “Left,” press the left button in the

vehicle.• If you wrote “Right,” press the right button in

the vehicle.

• If you wrote “Middle,” press the middlebutton in the vehicle.

159

5. After entering all of the switch positions,again, firmly press and release all threebuttons at the same time. The indicator lightswill turn on.

6. Press and hold the button you would like touse to control the garage door until thegarage door moves. The indicator light abovethe selected button should slowly blink.You may need to hold the button from five to55 seconds.

7. Immediately release the button when thegarage door moves. The indicator light willblink rapidly until programming is complete.

8. Press and release the same button again.The garage door should move, confirmingthat programming is successful and complete.

To program another Fixed Code device such as anadditional garage door opener, a security device,or home automation device, repeat Steps 1-8,choosing a different button in Step 6 than what youused for the garage door opener.

Using Universal Home RemotePress and hold the appropriate button for at leasthalf of a second. The indicator light will come onwhile the signal is being transmitted.

Reprogramming Universal HomeRemote ButtonsYou can reprogram any of the three buttons byrepeating the instructions.

Erasing Universal Home RemoteButtonsYou should erase the programmed buttons whenyou sell or terminate your lease.

To erase either Rolling Code or Fixed Code onthe Universal Home Remote device:

1. Press and hold the two outside buttons at thesame time for approximately 20 seconds, untilthe indicator lights, located directly abovethe buttons, begin to blink rapidly.

2. Once the indicator lights begin to blink,release both buttons. The codes from allbuttons will be erased.


160

Storage Areas

Glove BoxTo open, lift the handle up. Use the key to lockand unlock.

Cupholder(s)There are two cupholders, with removable liners,located in front of the center console. Thereare cupholders located in the second row seatarmrest. To access, pull the armrest down. Thereare additional cupholders located on each sideof the third row seat and in each door. There arecupholders located behind the center console.To access, pull down on the handle.

Instrument Panel Storage AreaYour vehicle has an instrument panel storage arealocated above the radio. To open the cover,press the button.

Center Console Storage Area

The armrest on the center console can slideforwards and backwards by holding up the leverlocated on the front of it. To open the armreststorage area, press the button located on the frontof the armrest. There is additional storageunder the armrest. Move the armrest all the wayto the rear position. The tray can be removedfor additional storage.

161

Floor MatsThere is a grommet in the driver side floor matthat attaches to a hook on the floor of the vehicle.This allows the mat to remain in position underyour feet and out of reach of the accelerator andbrake pedal. To remove the floor mat, pull themat towards the rear of the vehicle until thegrommet can be removed from the hook.

Make sure that the driver side floor mat is properlyplaced on the floor so that it does not block themovement of the accelerator and brake pedal.

Luggage Carrier

{CAUTION:

If you try to carry something on top ofyour vehicle that is longer or wider thanthe luggage carrier — like paneling,plywood, a mattress and so forth — thewind can catch it as you drive along. Thiscan cause you to lose control. What youare carrying could be violently torn off,and this could cause you or other driversto have a collision, and of course damageyour vehicle. You may be able to carrysomething like this inside. But, nevercarry something longer or wider than theluggage carrier on top of your vehicle.

If you have the luggage carrier, you can loadthings on top of your vehicle. Crossrails are notstandard on this vehicle and must be purchased atyour dealer/retailer.

162

Notice: Loading cargo on the luggage carrierthat weighs more than 200 lbs (91 kg) orhangs over the rear or sides of the vehiclemay damage your vehicle. Load cargo so thatit rests as far forward as possible andagainst the side rails, making sure to fasten itsecurely.

Do not exceed the maximum vehicle capacitywhen loading your vehicle. For more informationon vehicle capacity and loading, see Loading YourVehicle on page 353.

To prevent damage or loss of cargo as you aredriving, check to make sure the cargo is stillsecurely fastened.

Rear Seat ArmrestYour vehicle may have a rear seat armrest thatcontains two cupholders. To access thecupholders, pull the armrest down from the rearseatback.

Convenience NetYour vehicle may have a convenience net. Theconvenience net is designed to help keepsmall loads, like grocery bags, from falling over. Itis not designed to hold larger, heavier loads.To install the convenience net, attach both theupper and lower hooks to the loops on either sideof the liftgate opening.

Cargo CoverYour vehicle may have a cargo cover. It can beused to cover items in the rear of the vehicle.To install the cover, place the loops found on eachcorner of the cover on the four hooks in the rearof the vehicle. When not in use, the cover canbe stored in the cargo management system.

Cargo Tie DownsYour vehicle has eight cargo tie-downs located inthe rear of the vehicle. These are used tosecure small loads.

163

Cargo Management SystemYour vehicle has a cargo management systemlocated in the rear of the vehicle. To open, pull thehandle toward the rear of the vehicle and lift thecover up.

There is an additional storage compartment oneach side of the system. To open, unsnap and liftthe panel up.

To remove the cargo management system:

1. Open the lid.

2. Remove the side panels and place insidethe bin.

3. Loosen the retaining nuts on each side of thesystem by turning them counterclockwise.

4. Close the lid.

5. Pull up on the system by using the built inhandles and remove it from the vehicle.

164

SunroofThe vehicle may have a sunroof over the frontseats, and a rear sunroof over the secondrow seats. The rear sunroof does not open. Theswitches to operate the front sunroof and rearsunshade are located on the headliner above therearview mirror. The ignition must be in ON orACCESSORY to operate the sunroof. See IgnitionPositions on page 124.

Vent: From the closed position, press and holdthe front of the driver’s side switch to ventthe sunroof. Press and hold the rear of the driver’sside switch to close the sunroof.

Express-open/Express-close: From the closedposition, press and release the rear of thedriver’s side switch to express-open the sunroof.Press and release the front of the driver’s sideswitch to express-close the sunroof.

The front sunshade must be opened and closedmanually. Push up on the sunshade handleto open the sunshade.

Notice: The rear sunshade could be damagedif you attempt to open or close it manually.Do not manually open or close the rearsunshade.

To open the rear sunshade, located over thesecond row seats, press and release the rear ofthe passenger’s side switch. Press and release thefront of the switch to close the sunshade.

165

✍ NOTES

166

Instrument Panel Overview ........................ 170Hazard Warning Flashers .......................... 172Other Warning Devices ............................. 172Horn .......................................................... 172Tilt and Telescopic Steering Wheel ............ 172Power Tilt Wheel and Telescopic

Steering Column .................................... 173Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .................. 174Turn and Lane-Change Signals ................. 174Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer .......... 175Flash-to-Pass ............................................ 176Windshield Wipers ..................................... 176Windshield Washer .................................... 177Rear Window Wiper/Washer ...................... 178Cruise Control ........................................... 179Exterior Lamps .......................................... 182Delayed Headlamps .................................. 183Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)/

Automatic Headlamp System .................. 183Fog Lamps ................................................ 184Instrument Panel Brightness ...................... 184Courtesy Lamps ........................................ 184

Dome Lamps ............................................. 185Dome Lamp Override ................................ 185Entry Lighting ............................................ 185Delayed Entry Lighting .............................. 186Delayed Exit Lighting ................................. 186Parade Dimming ........................................ 186Reading Lamps ......................................... 187Electric Power Management ...................... 187Battery Run-Down Protection ..................... 188Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) ...... 188Accessory Power Outlet(s) ........................ 192Power Outlet 115 Volt Alternating

Current .................................................. 193Climate Controls ......................................... 194

Climate Control System ............................. 194Dual Automatic Climate Control System ..... 198Outlet Adjustment ...................................... 205Rear Air Conditioning and

Heating System ...................................... 206Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System

and Electronic Climate Controls ............... 207

Section 3 Instrument Panel

167

Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ..... 209Instrument Panel Cluster ........................... 210Speedometer and Odometer ...................... 211Tachometer ............................................... 211Safety Belt Reminder Light ........................ 211Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light ....... 212Airbag Readiness Light ............................. 212Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............. 214Charging System Light .............................. 216Voltmeter Gage ......................................... 216Brake System Warning Light ..................... 217Antilock Brake System Warning Light ........ 218StabiliTrak® Indicator Light ......................... 219Engine Coolant Temperature

Warning Light ........................................ 220Engine Coolant Temperature Gage ............ 220Tire Pressure Light .................................... 221

Malfunction Indicator Lamp ........................ 222Oil Pressure Light ..................................... 225Security Light ............................................ 226Fog Lamp Light ......................................... 226Cruise Control Light .................................. 226Highbeam On Light ................................... 227Tow/Haul Mode Light ................................ 227Fuel Gage ................................................. 227

Driver Information Center (DIC) .................. 228DIC Operation and Displays

(With DIC Buttons) ................................. 229DIC Operation and Displays

(Without DIC Buttons) ............................ 235DIC Warnings and Messages .................... 239DIC Vehicle Customization

(With DIC Buttons) ................................. 250


168

Audio System(s) ......................................... 260Setting the Time ........................................ 261Radio with CD ........................................... 263Radio with CD and DVD ........................... 273Using an MP3 (Radio with CD or

Six-Disc CD Player) ............................... 290Using an MP3 (Radio with CD and

DVD Player) ........................................... 296XM Radio Messages ................................. 303

Navigation/Radio System ........................... 305Rear Seat Entertainment System ............... 305Rear Seat Audio (RSA) ............................. 315Theft-Deterrent Feature ............................. 317Audio Steering Wheel Controls .................. 317Radio Reception ........................................ 318Care of Your CDs and DVDs .................... 320Care of the CD and DVD Player ............... 320Multi-Band Antenna ................................... 320


169

Instrument Panel Overview

170

The main components of your instrument panel are listed here:

A. Air Vent. See Outlet Adjustment on page 205.B. Multifunction Lever. See Turn

Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 174.Windshield Wipers. See TurnSignal/Multifunction Lever on page 174.

C. Instrument Panel Cluster. See Instrument PanelCluster on page 210.

D. Driver Information Center (DIC) Buttons. SeeDriver Information Center (DIC) on page 228.

E. Storage Area. See Instrument Panel StorageArea on page 161.

F. Audio System. See Audio System(s) onpage 260. Navigation/Radio System(If Equipped). See Navigation/Radio Systemon page 305.

G. Exterior Lamps Control. See Exterior Lampson page 182.

H. Hood Release. See Hood Release onpage 385.

I. Dome Lamp Override Button. See Dome LampOverride on page 185. Instrument PanelBrightness Control. See Instrument PanelBrightness on page 184.

J. Cruise Control Buttons. See Cruise Controlon page 179.

K. Tilt and Telescopic Steering Wheel. See Tiltand Telescopic Steering Wheel on page 172.Power Tilt Wheel and Telescopic Steering(If Equipped). See Power Tilt Wheel andTelescopic Steering Column on page 173.

L. Horn. See Horn on page 172.M. Audio Steering Wheel Control Buttons. See

Audio Steering Wheel Controls on page 317.N. Hazard Warning Flasher Button. See

Hazard Warning Flashers on page 172.O. Center Console Shift Lever. See “Console Shift

Lever” under Shifting Into Park (P) onpage 134.

P. Traction Control System (TCS) Disable Button(If Equipped). See StabiliTrak® System onpage 329. Tow/Haul Selector Button(If Equipped). See Tow/Haul Mode onpage 132. Power Liftgate Button (If Equipped).See Power Liftgate on page 110.

Q. Accessory Power Outlets. See AccessoryPower Outlet(s) on page 192.

171

R. Heated Seats Button. See Heated Seats onpage 12.

S. Dual Automatic Climate Controls. See DualAutomatic Climate Control System onpage 198.

T. Passenger Air Bag Status Indicator. SeePassenger Sensing System on page 86.

U. Glove Box. See Glove Box on page 161.

Hazard Warning FlashersThe hazard warning flashers let you warn others.They also let police know you have a problem. Thefront and rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off.

The hazard warningflasher button is locatedin the center of theinstrument panel, belowthe audio system.

The hazard warning flashers work no matter whatposition the key is in, and even if the key is notin the ignition.

Press the button to make the front and rear turnsignal lamps flash on and off. Press the buttonagain to turn the flashers off.

When the hazard warning flashers are on, the turnsignals will not work.

Other Warning DevicesIf you carry reflective triangles, you can set themup at the side of the road about 300 feet(100 m) behind your vehicle.

HornPress near or on the horn symbols on the steeringwheel pad to sound the horn.

Tilt and Telescopic Steering WheelA tilt and telescope wheel lets you adjust thesteering wheel before you drive. The steeringwheel can be raised to the highest level to giveyour legs more room when you enter and exit thevehicle.

172

The lever that lets you tilt and telescope thesteering wheel is located on the left side of thesteering column.

To tilt and telescope the steering wheel, pull downthe lever. Then move the steering wheel up ordown or backward or forward into a comfortableposition. Pull the lever up to lock the steeringwheel in place.

Do not adjust the tilt and telescope lever whiledriving.

Power Tilt Wheel and TelescopicSteering Column

If your vehicle has thisfeature, the power tiltwheel control is locatedon the left side of thesteering column.

To operate the power tilt feature, push the controlup and the steering wheel will tilt up. Push thecontrol down and the steering wheel will go down.

Push the control forward and the steering wheelmoves toward the front of the vehicle. Pushthe control rearward and the steering wheel movestoward the rear of the vehicle.

173

Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever

The lever on the left side of the steering columnincludes the following:

• G Turn and Lane Change Signals. SeeTurn and Lane-Change Signals on page 174.

• 2 Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer. SeeHeadlamp High/Low-Beam Changer onpage 175.

• Flash-to-Pass. See Flash-to-Pass onpage 176.

• N Windshield Wipers. See WindshieldWipers on page 176.

• LQ Windshield Washer. See WindshieldWasher on page 177.

• 5Z Rear Wiper/Washer. See Rear WindowWiper/Washer on page 178.

For information on the headlamps, see ExteriorLamps on page 182.

Turn and Lane-Change SignalsThe turn signal has two upward (for right) and twodownward (for left) positions. These positionsallow you to signal a turn or a lane change.

To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up ordown. When the turn is finished, the lever willreturn automatically.

An arrow on theinstrument panel clusterwill flash in the directionof the turn or lanechange.

174

To signal a lane change, raise or lower the leveruntil the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until youcomplete your lane change. The lever will returnby itself when you release it. If you momentarilypress and release the lever, the turn signalwill flash three times.

If the arrow flashes faster than normal as yousignal a turn or a lane change, a signal bulb maybe burned out and other drivers will not seeyour turn signal.

If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid anaccident. If the arrows do not go on at all whenyou signal a turn, check for burned-out bulbs andthen check the fuse. See Fuses and CircuitBreakers on page 476.

Turn Signal On ChimeIf you leave either one of your turn signals on anddrive more than 3/4 mile (1.2 km), a chime willsound to alert you.

Headlamp High/Low-Beam ChangerTo change the headlamps from low beam tohigh beam, push the turn signal/multifunction levertoward the front of the vehicle.

This light on theinstrument panel clustercomes on if the highbeam lamps are turnedon while the ignitionis on.

To change the headlamps from high beam to lowbeam, pull the turn signal lever toward the rearof the vehicle.

175

Flash-to-PassWith the turn signal lever in the low-beam position,pull the lever toward you momentarily to switchto high-beam (to signal that you are going to pass).

If the headlamps are on, they will return tolow-beam when the lever is released.

This feature operates even when the headlampsare off.

Windshield WipersClear ice and snow from the wiper blades beforeusing them. If they are frozen to the windshield,gently loosen or thaw them. Damaged wiperblades may not clear the windshield well, makingit harder to see and drive safely. If the bladesdo become damaged, install new blades or bladeinserts. For more information, see WindshieldWiper Blade Replacement on page 424.

Heavy snow or ice can overload the wiper motor. Acircuit breaker will stop the motor until it cools down.Clear away snow or ice to prevent an overload.

Turn the band with the wiper symbol to control thewindshield wipers.

8 (Mist): Turn the band to mist for a singlewiping cycle. Hold it there until the wipersstart. Then let go. The wipers stop after one wipe.Hold the band on mist longer, for more wipecycles.

9 (Off): To stop the wipers, move the bandto off.

6 (Delay): Turn the band to adjust the delay time.The delay between wiping cycles becomesshorter as the band is moved to the top of thelever. This can be very useful in light rain or snow.

6 (Low Speed): Turn the band away fromyou to the first solid band past the delay settings,for steady wiping at low speed.

? (High Speed): Turn the band further, to thesecond solid band past the delay settings, forhigh-speed wiping.

176

Windshield Washer

J (Washer Fluid): Press and release thispaddle, located at the top of the turnsignal/multifunction lever, to spray washer fluid onthe windshield. The wipers clear the windshieldand either stop or return to the preset speed. Theignition key must be in ACCESSORY or ON forthis to work. See Windshield Washer Fluidon page 409 Windshield Washer Fluid.

{CAUTION:

In freezing weather, do not use yourwasher until the windshield is warmed.Otherwise the washer fluid can form iceon the windshield, blocking your vision.

WASHER FLUID LOW ADD FLUID is displayedon the Driver Information Center (DIC) whenthe washer fluid is low. See DIC Warnings andMessages on page 239.

Heated Windshield WasherIf your vehicle has the heated windshield washerfluid system it can be used to help clear ice,snow, tree sap, or bugs from the windshield. Thisfeature only works with the front wiper system,not the rear wiper system.

The button is located tothe left of the steeringcolumn on theinstrument panel.

Push the heated washer fluid button to activatethe heated windshield washer fluid system.This activation begins four heated wash/wipecycles. The first heated wash/wipe cycle can takeup to 40 seconds to occur, depending onoutside temperature. After the first wash/wipecycle, it can take up to 20 seconds for each of theremaining cycles. Press the button again to turnoff the heated windshield washer fluid system or itwill automatically turn off after four wipe cycleshave been completed.

177

When the heated windshield washer fluid systemis activated under certain outside temperatureconditions, steam might flow out of the washernozzles for a short period of time before washerfluid is sprayed. This is a normal condition.

WASHER FLUID LOW ADD FLUID is displayedon the DIC when the washer fluid is low. See DICWarnings and Messages on page 239.

Rear Window Wiper/Washer

{CAUTION:

In freezing weather, do not use yourwasher until the windshield is warmed.Otherwise the washer fluid can form iceon the windshield, blocking your vision.

The rear wiper control is located on the turnsignal/multifunction lever.

To turn the rear wiper on, slide the lever to awiper position.

9 (Off): Slide the lever to this setting to turn thewiper off.

5 (Rear Wiper Delay): Slide the lever to thissetting to turn on the rear wiper delay.

Z (Rear Wiper): Slide the lever to this setting toturn on the rear wiper.

= (Rear Wiper Wash): Push the button on theend of the turn signal/multifunction lever tospray washer fluid on the rear window. The wiperswill clear the rear window and either stop orreturn to your preset speed. For more washercycles, press and hold the button.

178

Cruise ControlWith cruise control, you can maintain a speed ofabout 25 mph (40 km/h) or more withoutkeeping your foot on the accelerator. This canreally help on long trips. Cruise control does notwork at speeds below about 25 mph (40 km/h).

When you apply your brakes, cruise controlis turned off.

{CAUTION:

Cruise control can be dangerous whereyou cannot drive safely at a steady speed.So, do not use your cruise control onwinding roads or in heavy traffic.

Cruise control can be dangerous onslippery roads. On such roads, fastchanges in tire traction can causeexcessive wheel slip, and you could losecontrol. Do not use cruise control onslippery roads.

The cruise controlbuttons are located onleft side of thesteering wheel.

T (On/Off): Press this button to turn cruisecontrol on and off. The indicator comes on whencruise control is on.

+ RES (Resume/Accelerate): Press this buttonto make the vehicle accelerate or resume toa previously set speed.

SET–: Press this button to set the speed or makethe vehicle decelerate.

[ (Cancel): Press this button to cancel cruisecontrol.

179

Setting Cruise ControlCruise control will not work if your parking brake isset, or if the master cylinder brake fluid level is low.The cruise control light on the instrument panelcluster comes on after the cruise control has beenset to the desired speed.

{CAUTION:

If you leave your cruise control on whenyou are not using cruise, you might hit abutton and go into cruise when you donot want to. You could be startled andeven lose control. Keep the cruise controlswitch off until you want to use cruisecontrol.

1. Press the cruise control on/off button.

2. Get up to the speed desired.

3. Press and release the SET– button located onthe steering wheel.

4. Take your foot off the accelerator.

Resuming a Set SpeedSuppose you set your cruise control at a desiredspeed and then you apply the brake. Thisshuts off the cruise control. But you do not needto reset it.

Once you are driving about 25 mph (40 km/h) ormore, press the +RES button on your steeringwheel. The vehicle will go back to the previouslychosen speed and stay there.

Increasing Speed While Using CruiseControlTo increase the cruise speed while using cruisecontrol:

• Press and hold the +RES button on thesteering wheel until you reach the desiredspeed, then release it.

• To increase vehicle speed in small increments,press the +RES button.

180

Reducing Speed While Using CruiseControlTo reduce your speed while using cruise control:

• Press and hold the SET– button on thesteering wheel until you reach the lower speeddesired, then release it.

• To slow down in very small amounts, pressthe SET– button on the steering wheelbriefly. Each time this is done, the vehicle willgo about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.

Passing Another Vehicle While UsingCruise ControlUse the accelerator pedal to increase vehiclespeed. When you take your foot off the pedal, yourvehicle will slow down to the previously setcruise speed.

Using Cruise Control on HillsHow well your cruise control will work on hillsdepends upon the vehicle speed, load, and thesteepness of the hills. When going up steep hills,you might have to step on the accelerator pedalto maintain the vehicle speed. When goingdownhill, you might have to brake or shift to alower gear to keep the vehicle speed down.Of course, applying the brake turns off the cruisecontrol. Many drivers find this to be too muchtrouble and do not use cruise control on steep hills.

Ending Cruise ControlThere are three ways to end cruise control:

• Step lightly on the brake pedal.

• Press the [ (cancel) button on the steeringwheel.

• Press the T (on/off) button on the steeringwheel.

Erasing Speed MemoryThe cruise control set speed memory is erased byturning off the cruise control or the ignition.

181

Exterior Lamps

The exterior lampscontrol is located on theinstrument panel tothe left of the steeringwheel.

It controls the following systems:

• Headlamps

• Taillamps

• Parking Lamps

• License Plate Lamps

• Instrument Panel Lights

• Fog Lamps (if equipped)

The exterior lamps control has four positions:

O (Off): Briefly turn the control to this position toturn off the automatic light control. Briefly turnto this position again to turn automatic light controlon again.

AUTO (Automatic): Turn the control to thisposition to automatically turn on the headlamps atnormal brightness, together with the following:

• Parking Lamps

• Taillamps



; (Parking Lamps): Turn the control to thisposition to turn on the parking lamps together withthe following:

• Taillamps



2 (Headlamps): Turn the control to this positionto turn on the headlamps together with thefollowing lamps listed below. A warning chime willsound if you open the driver’s door when theignition switch is off and the headlamps are on.

• Parking Lamps

• Taillamps



182

- (Fog Lamps) (If your vehicle has them):Push the fog lamps control in to turn on thefog lamps.

See Fog Lamps on page 184.

Delayed HeadlampsThe delayed headlamps feature provides a periodof exterior lighting as you leave the area aroundyour vehicle. The feature is activated whenthe headlamps are on due to the automaticheadlamps control feature described previously inthis section, and when the ignition is turned off.Your headlamps will then remain on until theexterior lamps control is moved to the parkinglamps position or until the pre-selected delayedheadlamp lighting period has ended.

If you turn off the ignition with the headlampsswitch in the parking lamps or headlamps position,the delayed headlamps cycle will not occur.

To disable the delayed headlamps feature orchange the time of delay, see DIC VehicleCustomization (With DIC Buttons) on page 250.

Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)/Automatic Headlamp SystemDaytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easierfor others to see the front of your vehicle during theday. DRL can be helpful in many different drivingconditions, but they can be especially helpful in theshort periods after dawn and before sunset. Fullyfunctional daytime running lamps are required on allvehicles first sold in Canada.

A light sensor on top of the instrument panelmakes the DRL work, so be sure it is not covered.

The DRL system’s automatic headlamp controlwill make the low-beam headlamps come on at areduced brightness when the following conditionsare met:

• The ignition is in the ON position.

• The exterior lamps control is in AUTO.

• The engine is running.

When the DRL are on, only the low-beamheadlamps, at a reduced level of brightness, willbe on. The headlamps, taillamps, sidemarker, andother lamps will not be on. The instrumentpanel and cluster will also not be lit.

183

When it is dark enough outside, the low-beamheadlamps will turn off and the headlampsand parking lamps will turn on. The other lampsthat come on with the headlamps will alsocome on.

When it is bright enough outside, the headlampswill go off and the DRL will come on.

As with any vehicle, you should turn on theregular headlamp system when it is needed.

Fog Lamps

- (Fog Lamps): If your vehicle has fog lamps,the control is located on the exterior lamps control.The exterior lamps control is located on theinstrument panel to the left of the steering column.

The ignition must be in the ON position for the foglamps to come on.

To turn the fog lamps on, press the exterior lampsbutton. A light will come on in the instrumentpanel cluster. Press the exterior lamps buttonagain to turn the fog lamps off.

When the headlamps are changed to high-beam,the fog lamps also go off.

Some localities have laws that require theheadlamps to be on along with the fog lamps.

Instrument Panel Brightness

D (Instrument Panel Brightness): The knobwith this symbol on it is located next to the exteriorlamps control. Push the knob in all the way untilit extends out and then turn the knob clockwise tobrighten or counterclockwise to dim the lights.Push the knob back in when finished.

Courtesy LampsWhen a door is opened, the courtesy lampsautomatically come on. They make it easy for youto enter and leave your vehicle. You can alsomanually turn these lamps on by fully turning theinstrument panel brightness control clockwise.

The reading lamps, located on the headliner abovethe rearview mirror, can be turned on or offindependent of the automatic courtesy lamps,when the doors are closed.

184

Dome LampsThe dome lamps automatically come on when adoor is opened, unless the dome lamp overridebutton is pressed in.

The lamps can also be turned on by turning theinstrument panel brightness control clockwiseto the farthest position. In this position, the domelamps will remain on until they are turned off.

Dome Lamp OverrideThe dome lamp override button is located next tothe exterior lamps control.

The dome lamp override is used to set the domelamps to remain off or come on automaticallywhen a door is opened.

E (Dome Lamp Override): Press the button inand the dome lamps remain off when a dooris opened. Press the button again to return it tothe extended position so that the dome lampscome on when a door is opened.

Entry LightingYour vehicle may have courtesy lamps that willcome on and stay on for a set time whenever theunlock symbol is pressed on the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter, if the vehiclehas one.

If a door is opened, the lamps will stay on while it isopen and then turn off automatically about25 seconds after the door is closed. If the unlocksymbol is pressed and you do not open a door, thelamps will turn off after about 20 seconds.

Entry lighting includes a feature called theaterdimming. With theater dimming, the lamps do notturn off at the end of the delay time. Instead,they slowly dim after the delay time until they goout. The delay time is canceled if you turn theignition key to ON or press the power doorlock switch. The lamps will dim right away.

When the ignition is on, illuminated entry isinactive, which means the courtesy lamps will notcome on unless a door is opened.

185

Delayed Entry LightingDelayed entry lighting illuminates the interior for aperiod of time after all the doors have been closed.

The ignition must be off for delayed entry lightingto work. Immediately after all the doors have beenclosed, the delayed entry lighting feature willcontinue to work until one of the following occurs:

• The ignition is in ON.

• The doors are locked.

• An illumination period of 25 seconds haselapsed.

If during the illumination period a door is opened,the timed illumination period will be canceledand the interior lamps will remain on because adoor is open.

Delayed Exit LightingThis feature illuminates the interior for a period oftime after the key is removed from the ignition.

The ignition must be off for delayed exit lighting towork. When the key is removed, interiorillumination will activate and remain on until one ofthe following occurs:

• The ignition is in ON.

• The power door locks are activated.

• An illumination period of 20 seconds haselapsed.

If during the illumination period a door is opened,the timed illumination period will be canceledand the interior lamps will remain on because adoor is open.

Parade DimmingThe instrument panel has an added feature calledparade mode. It automatically prohibits thedimming of the instrument panel displays duringthe daylight while the headlamps are on sothat you will still be able to see the displays.

186

Reading LampsThe vehicle has reading lamps that also act as thedome lamp. Press the button to turn them onand off.

Electric Power ManagementThe vehicle has Electric Power Management(EPM) that estimates the battery’s temperature andstate of charge. It then adjusts the voltage forbest performance and extended life of the battery.

When the battery’s state of charge is low, thevoltage is raised slightly to quickly put the chargeback in. When the state of charge is high, thevoltage is lowered slightly to prevent overcharging.If the vehicle has a voltmeter gage or a voltagedisplay on the Driver Information Center (DIC), youmay see the voltage move up or down. This isnormal. If there is a problem, an alert will bedisplayed.

The battery can be discharged at idle if theelectrical loads are very high. This is true for allvehicles. This is because the generator (alternator)may not be spinning fast enough at idle toproduce all the power that is needed for very highelectrical loads.

A high electrical load occurs when several of thefollowing loads are on: headlamps, high beams,fog lamps, rear window defogger, climatecontrol fan at high speed, heated seats, enginecooling fans, trailer loads, and loads plugged intoaccessory power outlets.

EPM works to prevent excessive discharge of thebattery. It does this by balancing the generator’soutput and the vehicle’s electrical needs. Itcan increase engine idle speed to generate morepower, whenever needed. It can temporarilyreduce the power demands of some accessories.

Normally, these actions occur in steps or levels,without being noticeable. In rare cases at thehighest levels of corrective action, this action maybe noticeable to the driver. If so, a DriverInformation Center (DIC) message might bedisplayed, such as Battery Saver Active or ServiceBattery Charging System. If this message isdisplayed, it is recommended that the driverreduce the electrical loads as much as possible.See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 239.

187

Battery Run-Down ProtectionThis vehicle has a feature to help prevent thebattery from being drained, if the interior courtesylamps, reading/map lamps, visor vanity lampsor trunk lamp are accidentally left on. If anyof these lamps are left on, they will automaticallyturn off after 10 minutes, if the ignition is off.The lamps will not come back on again until oneof the following occurs:

• The ignition is turned on.

• The exterior lamps control is turned off, thenon again.

The headlamps will timeout after 10 minutes, ifthey are manually turned on before the ignitionis off.

Ultrasonic Rear ParkingAssist (URPA)If your vehicle has the Ultrasonic Rear ParkingAssist (URPA) system it is designed to helpyou park while in Reverse (R). It operates only atspeeds less than 5 mph (8 km/h). URPA helpsmake parking easier and helps you avoid collidingwith objects such as parked vehicles. TheURPA system detects objects that are close to therear of the vehicle which are at least 10 inches(25.4 cm) off the ground and below hood or trunklevel. The system detects objects up to 8 feet(2.5 m) behind your vehicle. The URPA sensorsdetermine how close these objects are fromyour bumper within this area.

188

{CAUTION:

The Ultrasonic Rear Park Assist (URPA)system does not replace driver vision.URPA does not:

• Operate above speeds of 5 mph(8 km/h).

• Detect objects more than 8 feet(2.5 meters) behind the vehicle. Thisdistance may be less during warmeror humid weather.

• Detect objects that are below thebumper, underneath the vehicle, orthat are very close to the vehicle.

• Detect children, pedestrians,bicyclists, or pets.

So if you do not use proper care beforebacking up, you could hit a vehicle, child,pedestrian, bicyclist, or pet, resulting invehicle damage, injury, or death. Eventhough the vehicle has the URPA system,always check carefully before backing upby checking behind your vehicle.

The URPA display islocated in the headlinerand can be seen bylooking over your rightshoulder.

The URPA display has three color-coded lights.The lights are used to provide distance and systeminformation, along with beeps that will be heardthrough the speakers.

If the vehicle has a Driver Information Center(DIC), and PARK ASSIST OFF has been selected,then the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE (R),PARK ASSIST OFF will display on the DIC andone red light in the URPA display will be lit.See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 239 formore information.

URPA automatically turns back on each time thevehicle is started.

189

How the System WorksWhen the shift lever is moved into REVERSE (R),the rear display will briefly come on to let youknow the display is operating correctly. URPAcomes on automatically when the shift leveris moved into REVERSE (R).

The system does not work at a reverse speedgreater than 5 mph (8 km/h). To remind you of this,the red light on the rear display will flash.

To disable URPA, see DIC Operation and Displays(With DIC Buttons) on page 229 or DIC Operationand Displays (Without DIC Buttons) on page 235for more information.

How the System Works when BackingIf the shift lever is in REVERSE (R), URPAdetects objects close to the rear bumper. The firsttime an object is detected a single beep willsound. If an object is detected at a REVERSE (R)speed between 0 mph (0 km/h) and 5 mph(8 km/h), the following describes what will occurbased on your distance to a detected objectlocated behind the vehicle:

• At distances between 40 inches (1 m) and8 ft (2.5 m), a single amber light will come on.

• At distances between 23 inches (0.6 m) and40 inches (1 m), both amber lights will be on.

• At distances between 12 inches (0.3 m) and23 inches (0.6 m), all three lights (amber/amber/red) will be on.

• At distances less than 12 inches (0.3 m), abeeping sound will repeat for a short time andall three lights (amber/amber/red) will flash.

When the System Does Not Seem toWork ProperlyIf the URPA system will not activate due to atemporary condition, the message PARK ASSISTOFF will display on the DIC screen and a red

190

light will come on the URPA display when the shiftlever is moved into REVERSE (R). This occursunder the following conditions:

• The parking brake pedal is depressed.

• A trailer was attached to your vehicle, or abicycle or an object was hanging out of yourtrunk during your last drive when you turned offthe vehicle. If the attached objects are removedfrom your vehicle before the start of your nextdrive, the system will return to normal operationunless an object is detected when the vehicle isshifted into REVERSE (R). If this occurs, URPAassumes the object is still attached, so you willhave to wait until the vehicle is driven forwardabove 15 mph (25 km/h) before URPA willreturn to normal operation.

• The ultrasonic sensors need to be kept clean.So, be sure to keep your vehicle’s rear bumperfree of mud, dirt, snow, ice, and slush. Forcleaning instructions, see Washing YourVehicle on page 468. If the DIC still displays thePARK ASSIST OFF message after cleaning thebumper and driving forward at a speed of atleast 15 mph (25 km/h), see yourdealer/retailer.

• Other conditions that may affect systemperformance include vibrations from ajackhammer or the compression of air brakeson a very large truck or other mechanicaldevices that interfere with URPA performance.

As always, drivers should use care when backingup a vehicle. Always look behind you, beingsure to check for other vehicles, obstructions andblind spots.

If the vehicle bumper is damaged, the URPAsystem may not work properly. Take the vehicle toyour dealer/retailer to repair the system.

191

Accessory Power Outlet(s)The accessory power outlets can be used toconnect electrical equipment such as a cellularphone or CB radio.

Your vehicle may have four accessory poweroutlets. They are located on the instrument panelbelow the climate controls, inside the frontcenter console storage bin, at the rear of thecenter console, and in the rear cargo area.

To use the outlets, remove the cover. When not inuse, always cover the outlet with the protective cap.

Notice: Leaving electrical equipment on forextended periods will drain the battery. Alwaysturn off electrical equipment when not inuse and do not plug in equipment that exceedsthe maximum amperage rating of 20 amperes.

Certain electrical accessories may not becompatible with the accessory power outlets andcould result in blown vehicle or adapter fuses.If you experience a problem, see yourdealer/retailer for additional information on theaccessory power outlet.

Notice: Adding any electrical equipment toyour vehicle may damage it or keep othercomponents from working as they should. Therepairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Do not use equipment exceedingmaximum amperage rating of 20 amperes.Check with your dealer/retailer before addingelectrical equipment.

When adding electrical equipment, be sure tofollow the installation instructions included with theequipment.

Notice: Improper use of the power outlet cancause damage not covered by your warranty.Do not hang any type of accessory oraccessory bracket from the plug because thepower outlets are designed for accessorypower plugs only.

192

Power Outlet 115 Volt AlternatingCurrentYour vehicle may have a power outlet that can beused to plug in auxiliary electrical equipmentwith a maximum limit of 150 watts. If you try touse equipment that requires more than the limit, aprotection circuit will cut the power supply. Toreset the outlet, unplug the item and plug it backin or turn the ignition to LOCK or ACCESSORYand then back on. The power will automaticallyrestart when equipment that operates withinthe limit is plugged into the outlet.

The power outlet islocated on the rear ofthe center console.

The indicator on the inner outlet face will come onwhen 115 volt AC power is available. The ACpower is available when the ignition is turned toACCESSORY or ON, and electrical equipmentis plugged into the outlet. The AC power isnot available in the outlet when the ignition isturned to OFF.

The power outlet is not designed for the followingelectrical equipment and may not work properlyif these items are plugged into the power outlet:

• Equipment with high initial peak wattagesuch as: compressor-driven refrigeratorsand electric power tools.

• Other equipment requiring an extremely stablepower supply such as:microcomputer-controlled electric blankets,touch sensor lamps, etc.

See High Voltage Devices and Wiring onpage 475.

193

Climate Controls

Climate Control SystemWith this system you can control the heating,cooling, defrost, defog, and ventilation ofthe vehicle.

Manual Operation

9 (Fan): Turn the left knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase or decrease the fanspeed. Turn the knob all the way counterclockwiseto turn the front system off.

Temperature Control: Turn the center knobclockwise or counterclockwise to increaseor decrease the temperature of the air flowingfrom the system.

Airflow Mode Control: Turn the right knobclockwise or counterclockwise to direct the airflowinside of the vehicle.

To change the current mode, select one of thefollowing:

H (Vent): This mode directs air to the instrumentpanel outlets.

) (Bi-Level): This mode directs about half ofthe air to the instrument panel outlets andhalf to the floor outlets. A little air is directedtowards the windshield and side window outlets.Cooler air is directed to the upper outlets andwarmer air to the floor outlets.

194

6 (Floor): This mode directs most of the air tothe floor outlets, with some of the air directedto the windshield, side window outlets, andsecond row floor outlets. In this mode, the systemautomatically selects outside air. Recirculationcannot be selected when in Floor Mode.

The right knob can also be used to select defog ordefrost mode. For more information, see“Defogging and Defrosting” later in this section.

By positioning the right knob between two modes,a combination of those two modes is selected.

@ (Recirculation): Press this button to turn therecirculation mode on or off. The indicator lighton the button turns on when this mode is selected.

This mode keeps outside air from entering thevehicle. It can be used to reduce the outside airand odors entering the vehicle. Recirculationmay also help cool the air inside the vehicle morequickly once the temperature inside the vehicleis less than the outside temperature.

The recirculation mode can be turned off in ventand bi-level modes by pressing the buttonagain. Recirculation mode automatically turns offwhen the engine is turned off and must bere-selected when the engine is turned on again.

The recirculation mode cannot be used with floor,defrost, or defogging modes. If you try to selectrecirculation in one of those modes, the indicatorflashes three times and turns off. The airconditioning compressor also comes on when thismode is activated unless the outside airtemperature is less than 40°F (4°C). While inrecirculation mode the windows may fog when theweather is cold and damp. To clear the fog,select either the defog or defrost mode andincrease the fan speed.

195

# (Air Conditioning): Press this button on theleft knob to turn the air conditioning system onor off. When A/C is pressed, an indicatorlight comes on to show that the air conditioninghas been activated. The air conditioningcompressor does not operate when outsidetemperatures fall below 40°F (4°C). The indicatorlight flashes three times and turns off whenoutside conditions affect air conditioning operation.This is normal.

For quicker cool down on hot days, do thefollowing:

1. Open the windows to let hot air escape.

2. Select the vent mode.

3. Select the air conditioner.

4. Select the coolest temperature.

5. Select the highest fan speed.

6. Close the windows after the hot air hasescaped.

7. Once the vehicle’s interior temperature isbelow the outside temperature, selectrecirculation mode for better cooling.

This helps to reduce the time it takes for thevehicle to cool down. It also helps the system tooperate more efficiently.

Using recirculation for long periods of time maycause the air inside of the vehicle to becometoo dry. To prevent this from happening, after theinside of the vehicle has cooled, turn therecirculation mode off.

The air conditioning system removes moisturefrom the air, so you might notice a small amountof water dripping underneath the front centerand right rear of the vehicle while idling or afterturning off the engine. This is normal.

Defogging and DefrostingFog on the inside of the windows is a result ofhigh humidity (moisture) condensing on thecool window glass. This can be minimized if theclimate control system is used properly. There aretwo modes to clear fog or frost from thewindshield. Turn the right knob clockwise to selectthe defog or defrost mode.

196

- (Defog): The defog mode is used to clear thewindows of fog or moisture and warm thepassengers. This mode directs air to thewindshield, floor outlets, and side window vents.When you select this mode, the system turnsoff recirculation and runs the air conditioningcompressor unless the outside temperature is lessthan 40°F (4°C). The recirculation mode cannotbe selected while in the defog mode. Do not drivethe vehicle until all the windows are clear.

0 (Defrost): The defrost mode is used toremove fog or frost from the windshield morequickly. This mode directs most of the air to thewindshield and side window vents and some to thefloor vents. In this mode, the system willautomatically force outside air into your vehicle.The recirculation mode cannot be selected while inthe defrost mode. The air conditioning compressorwill run automatically in this setting, unless theoutside temperature is less than 40°F (4°C). Do notdrive the vehicle until all the windows are clear.

AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to turn the rearheating and air conditioning on. See Rear AirConditioning and Heating System on page 206 orRear Air Conditioning and Heating System andElectronic Climate Controls on page 207.

Rear Window DefoggerThe rear window defogger uses a warming grid toremove fog from the rear window.

< (Rear Window Defogger): Press this buttonon the right knob to turn the rear windowdefogger on or off. The rear window defoggerstays on about 10 minutes after the buttonis pressed, before turning off. The defogger canalso be turned off by pressing the button again orby turning off the engine. Do not drive thevehicle until all the windows are clear.

If your vehicle has heated outside rearviewmirrors, the mirrors heat to help clear fog or frostfrom the surface of the mirror when the rearwindow defog button is pressed.

Notice: Do not use anything sharp on theinside of the rear window. If you do, you couldcut or damage the warming grid, and therepairs would not be covered by your warranty.Do not attach a temporary vehicle license,tape, a decal or anything similar to thedefogger grid.

197

Dual Automatic Climate ControlSystemWith this system, you can control the heating,cooling, and ventilation in your vehicle. Yourvehicle also has a flow-through ventilation systemdescribed later in this section.

You can select different temperature settings forthe driver and all passengers.

Display FunctionEach time the temperature, mode, or fan controlbuttons are pressed the display shows thatfunction along with the inside temperature setting.The display automatically reverts back to theoutside temperature display after a short delay.

Driver’s Side Temperature ControlThe driver side temperature buttons are used toadjust the temperature of the air coming throughthe system on the driver side. The temperature canbe adjusted even if the system is turned off.This is possible since outside air will always flowthrough the system as the vehicle is movingforward unless it is set to recirculation mode. See“Recirculation” later in this section.

Press the + or − buttons to increase or decreasethe temperature. The driver side temperaturedisplay will show the temperature settingdecreasing or increasing.

198

Passenger’s Side Temperature ControlThe passenger’s temperature buttons can be usedto change the temperature of the air comingthrough the system on the passenger side of thevehicle. The temperature can be adjustedeven if the system is turned off. This is possiblesince outside air will always flow through thesystem as the vehicle is moving forward unless itis set to recirculation mode. See “Recirculation”later in this section.

Press the + or − buttons to increase or decreasethe temperature. The passenger side displaywill show the temperature setting decreasing orincreasing.

The passenger’s temperature setting can be set tomatch the driver’s temperature setting bypressing the PASS button and turning off thePASS indicator. When the passenger’stemperature setting is set different than thedriver’s setting, the indicator on the PASS buttoncomes on and both the driver side andpassenger side temperature displays are shown.

Automatic Operation

AUTO (Automatic): When automatic operation isactive the system controls the inside temperature,the air delivery, and the fan speed.

Use the steps below to place the entire system inautomatic mode:

1. Press the AUTO button.When AUTO is selected, the display showsthe current temperature(s) selected and AUTOis on the display. The current delivery modeand fan speed also display for approximately5 seconds.When AUTO is selected, the air conditioningoperation and air inlet are automaticallycontrolled. The air conditioning compressorruns when the outside temperature isover about 40°F (4°C). The air inlet is normallyset to outside air. If it is hot outside, the airinlet can automatically switch to recirculateinside air to help quickly cool down yourvehicle. The light comes on the recirculationbutton while in recirculation.

199

2. Set the driver’s and passenger’s temperature.To find your comfort setting, start with a 73°F(22.5°C) temperature setting and allowabout 20 minutes for the system to regulate.Use the driver’s or passenger’s temperaturebuttons to adjust the temperature settingas necessary. If you choose the temperaturesetting of 60°F (15°C), the system remainsat the maximum cooling setting. If you choosethe temperature setting of 90°F (32°C), thesystem remains at the maximum heat setting.Choosing either maximum setting will notcause the vehicle to heat or cool any faster.

Do not cover the solar sensor located on the topof the instrument panel near the windshield.This sensor regulates air temperature based onsun load and also turns on your vehicle’sheadlamps. For more information on the solarsensor, see “Sensors” later in this section.

To avoid blowing cold air in cold weather, thesystem delays turning on the fan until warm air isavailable. The length of delay depends on theengine coolant temperature. Press the fan switchto override this delay and change the fan to aselected speed.

O (On/Off): Press this button to turn off theclimate control system. Outside air still enters thevehicle, and is directed to the floor. Thisdirection can be changed by pressing the modebutton. Recirculation can only be selected invent or bi-level mode. The temperature can alsobe adjusted using either temperature button. If youadjust the air delivery mode or temperaturesettings with the system off, the display comes onbriefly to show the settings and then turns off.Press the on/off button or the up down arrows onthe fan switch, the defrost button, AUTO button,or the air conditioning button to turn the system onwhen it is off.

200

Manual OperationThe air delivery mode or fan speed can bemanually adjusted.

DC (Fan): The buttons with the fan symbols letyou manually adjust the fan speed. Press the uparrow to increase fan speed and the down arrow todecrease fan speed.

Pressing a fan button while the system is off willturn the system on. Pressing a fan button while inautomatic control places the fan under manualcontrol. The fan setting remains displayed and theAUTO button light turns off. The air delivery moderemains in automatic control.

yNz (Mode): Press the mode up and downbuttons to manually change the direction of theairflow in the vehicle. Repeatedly press the buttonuntil the desired mode appears on the display.Pressing a mode button while the system is off willchange air delivery mode without turning thesystem on. Pressing one of these buttons while inautomatic control to place the mode under manualcontrol.

The air delivery mode setting displays and theAUTO button light turns off. The fan remains underautomatic control.

H (Vent): This setting delivers air to theinstrument panel outlets.

) (Bi-Level): This mode directs air to theinstrument panel outlets and to the floor outlets. Alittle air is directed towards the windshield andside window outlets. Cooler air is directed to theupper outlets and warmer air to the floor outlets.

6 (Floor): This mode directs most of the airto the floor outlets, with some of the air directed tothe windshield, side window outlets, and secondrow floor outlets. In this mode, the systemautomatically selects outside air. Recirculationcannot be selected in floor mode.

- (Defog): See “Defogging and Defrosting” laterin this section.

@ (Recirculation): Press this button to turn therecirculation mode on. When the button ispressed, an indicator light comes on.

This mode keeps outside air from entering thevehicle. It can be used to reduce outside air andprevent odors from entering your vehicle.Recirculation also helps to quickly cool the warmerair inside your vehicle.

201

The recirculation mode cannot be used with floor,defrost, or defogging modes. If you try to selectrecirculation in one of those modes, the indicatorflashes three times and turns off. The airconditioning compressor also comes on when thismode is activated. While in recirculation modethe windows may fog when the weather is cold anddamp. To clear the fog, select either the defogor defrost mode and increase the fan speed.

Press the button again to turn off the recirculationmode. It automatically turns off when the engineis turned off and must be re-selected whenthe engine is turned on again.

Air Conditioning

# (Air Conditioning): Press this button to turnthe air conditioning (A/C) compressor on andoff. When air conditioning is selected, an indicatorlight comes on to let you know that the airconditioning has been activated.

The air conditioning compressor does not workwhen outside temperatures fall below 40°F (4°C).Pressing this button when the outside temperatureis too cool makes the air conditioning indicatorflash three times and turn off to let you know theair conditioning mode is not available. If theair conditioning is on and the outside temperaturedrops below a temperature which is too coolfor air conditioning to be effective, the airconditioning light turns off to show that the airconditioning mode has been canceled.

On hot days, open the windows long enough to lethot inside air escape. This helps to reduce thetime it takes for your vehicle to cool down. It alsohelps the system to operate more efficiently.

The air conditioning system removes moisture fromthe air, so you may sometimes notice a smallamount of water dripping underneath your vehiclewhile idling or after turning off the engine. Thisis normal.

202

Sensors

The solar sensor, located in the defrost grille inthe middle of the instrument panel, monitorsthe solar radiation. Do not cover the solar sensoror the system will not work properly.

The interior temperature sensor located on theinstrument panel to the right of the steeringcolumn, measures the temperature of the air insidethe vehicle.

There is also an exterior temperature sensorlocated behind the front grille. This sensor readsthe outside air temperature and helps maintain thetemperature inside the vehicle. Any cover onthe front of the vehicle could cause a false readingin the displayed temperature.

203

The climate control system uses the informationfrom these sensors to maintain your comfortsetting by adjusting the outlet temperature, fanspeed, and the air delivery mode. The system mayalso supply cooler air to the side of the vehiclefacing the sun. The recirculation mode will also beused as needed to maintain cool outlettemperatures.

Defogging and DefrostingFog on the inside of the windows is a result ofhigh humidity (moisture) condensing on thecool window glass. This can be minimized if theclimate control system is used properly. There aretwo modes to clear fog or frost from yourwindshield.

Use the mode up and down arrows to select thedefog mode. Use the defrost button to selectthe defrost mode.

- (Defog): The defog mode is used to clear thewindows of fog or moisture and warm thepassengers. This mode directs air to thewindshield, floor outlets, and side window vents.

When you select this mode, the system turns offrecirculation and runs the air conditioningcompressor unless the outside temperature is closeto freezing. The recirculation mode cannot beselected while in the defog mode. Do not drive thevehicle until all the windows are clear.

0 (Defrost): Press this button to remove fog orfrost from the windshield more quickly. This modedirects most of the air to the windshield and sidewindow vents and some to the floor vents. In thismode, the system automatically forces outside airinto your vehicle. The recirculation mode cannot beselected while in the defrost mode. The airconditioning compressor runs automatically in thissetting, unless the outside temperature is close tofreezing. Do not drive the vehicle until all thewindows are clear.

AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to turn the rearheating and air conditioning on. See Rear AirConditioning and Heating System on page 206 orRear Air Conditioning and Heating System andElectronic Climate Controls on page 207.

204

Rear Window DefoggerThe rear window defogger uses a warming grid toremove fog from the rear window.

< (Rear Window Defogger): Press this buttonto turn the rear window defogger on or off. The rearwindow defogger stays on for about 10 minutesafter the button is pressed, before turning off. Thedefogger can also be turned off by pressing thebutton again or by turning off the engine. Do notdrive the vehicle until all the windows are clear.

If your vehicle has heated outside rearview mirrors,the mirrors will heat to help clear fog or frostfrom the surface of the mirror when the rearwindow defog button is pressed.

Notice: Do not use a razor blade or sharpobject to clear the inside rear window. Do notadhere anything to the defogger grid linesin the rear glass. These actions may damagethe rear defogger. Repairs would not becovered by your warranty.

Outlet AdjustmentUse the slider switch in the center of the outlet, tochange the direction of the air flow. Use thethumbwheel near the outlet to control the amountof air flow or to shut off the airflow completely.

Keep all outlets open whenever possible for bestsystem performance.

Operation Tips• Clear away any ice, snow, or leaves from the

air inlets at the base of the windshield thatcan block the flow of air into the vehicle.

• Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors canadversely affect the performance of thesystem.

• Keep the path under all seats clear of objectsto help circulate the air inside the vehiclemore effectively.

• If fogging reoccurs while in vent or bi-levelmodes with mild temperature throughoutthe vehicle, turn on the air conditionerto reduce windshield fogging.

205

Rear Air Conditioning and HeatingSystemIf your vehicle has this system, the rear controlsare three knobs located on the rear of thecenter console. The system can be controlled fromthe front controls as well as the rear controls.

To turn the system on, press the AUX button onthe front climate control system, an indicator will belit. Pressing the AUX button the first time willturn the rear system on in a mimic mode. In thismode, the airflow in the rear will be approximatelythe same direction, temperature, and fan speedas the front. Pressing the AUX button againwill turn the rear system and the indicator off.

If the rear controls are adjusted, the system turnson in a rear independent mode. Airflow in the rearwill then be directed according to the settings of therear controls. The rear system can be turned off bypressing the AUX button on the front climate controlsystem and the indicator will turn off. The systemcan be turned back on, by adjusting any of the rearair conditioning control knobs.

Fan KnobTurn the left knob clockwise or counterclockwiseto increase or decrease the fan speed. Turnthe knob all the way counterclockwise to turn therear system off.

Temperature KnobThe middle knob on the control panel lets youselect the temperature of the air flowing into thepassenger area. Turn the knob clockwise orcounterclockwise for warmer or cooler air.

206

Mode KnobThe right knob on the control panel lets youchoose the direction of the air flow.

H (Vent): This setting directs the air through theheadliner outlets.

) (Bi-Level): This setting directs the air throughthe rear floor outlets under the third row seat,as well as the headliner outlets. The flow can bedivided between headliner and floor outletsdepending upon where the knob is placed betweenthe settings.

6 (Floor): This setting directs the air through thefloor outlets. The rear system floor outlets arelocated under the third row seats.

Rear Air Conditioning and HeatingSystem and Electronic ClimateControlsIf your vehicle has this rear climate control systemthere are rear seat audio controls located in thecenter console.

The rear system can be controlled through theAUX button on the front climate control panel.Press the AUX button to turn the rear climatecontrol system on or off. An indicator light in theAUX button comes on when the rear climatecontrol system is on. The direction, temperature,and speed of the airflow for the rear of the vehiclewill be the same as those set for the front of thevehicle.

Use the controls located in the rear of the frontconsole, to independently control the air flowfor the rear of the vehicle separately from that ofthe front of the vehicle. To turn the systemon, press any of the rear air conditioning controlbuttons, except the fan down button. To turnthe system off, press and hold the C button.

207

Manual Operation

DC (Fan): The fan buttons on the rear seat audiocontrol panel let you manually adjust the fanspeed. Press D to increase airflow and C

to decrease airflow.

+/− (Increase/Decrease Temperature): Thesebuttons select the temperature of the air flowing intothe rear passenger area. Press the + button forwarmer air and press the − button for cooler air.The temperature settings will display in 0-12increments, going from the coolest (0) to thewarmest (12) setting.

N (Mode): Press the mode button to manuallychange the direction of the airflow in the vehicle.Repeatedly press the button until the desired modeappears on the display. Multiple presses cyclesthrough the delivery selections.

H (Vent): This mode directs air through theheadliner outlets.

) (Bi-Level): This mode directs air through thefloor outlets as well as the headliner outlets.The rear system floor outlets are located underthe third row seats.

6 (Floor): This mode directs air through thefloor outlets. The rear system floor outletsare located under the third row seats.

Rear Climate Control with Rear Seat Audio Controls

208

Warning Lights, Gages, andIndicatorsThis part describes the warning lights and gages onyour vehicle. The pictures help to locate them.

Warning lights and gages can signal that somethingis wrong before it becomes serious enough tocause an expensive repair or replacement. Payingattention to the warning lights and gages could alsosave you or others from injury.

Warning lights come on when there may be or is aproblem with one of your vehicle’s functions. Asthe details show on the next few pages, somewarning lights come on briefly when you start theengine just to let you know they are working. Ifyou are familiar with this section, you shouldnot be alarmed when this happens.

Gages can indicate when there may be or is aproblem with one of your vehicle’s functions. Oftengages and warning lights work together to letyou know when there is a problem with yourvehicle.

When one of the warning lights comes on andstays on as you are driving, or when one ofthe gages shows there may be a problem, checkthe section that tells you what to do about it.Please follow this manual’s advice. Waiting to dorepairs can be costly and even dangerous. Soplease get to know your vehicle’s warninglights and gages. They can be a big help.

209

Instrument Panel ClusterThe instrument cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how the vehicle is running. You will knowhow fast you are going, about how much fuel you have used, and many other things you will need toknow to drive safely and economically.

United States version shown, Canada similar

210

Speedometer and OdometerThe speedometer lets you see your speedin both miles per hour (mph) and kilometersper hour (km/h).

The odometer shows how far your vehicle hasbeen driven, in either miles or kilometers.

Your vehicle has a tamper-resistant odometer. Ifyour vehicle needs a new odometer installed,the new one will be set to the mileage total of theold odometer. If this is not possible, it will beset at zero and a label must be put on the driver’sdoor to show the old mileage reading when thenew odometer was installed. If the mileageis unknown, the label should then indicate“previous mileage unknown”.

TachometerThe tachometer displays the engine speed inrevolutions per minute (rpm).

Safety Belt Reminder LightWhen the key is turned to ON or START, a chimewill come on for several seconds to remindpeople to fasten their safety belts, unless thedriver’s safety belt is already buckled.

The safety belt light willalso come on and stayon for several seconds,then it will flash forseveral more.

This chime and light is repeated if the driverremains unbuckled and the vehicle is in motion.

If the driver’s belt is already buckled, neitherthe chime nor the light will come on.

211

Passenger Safety Belt ReminderLightSeveral seconds after the key is turned to ON orSTART, a chime will sound for several seconds toremind the front passenger to buckle their safetybelt. This would only occur if the passenger airbagis enabled. See Passenger Sensing System onpage 86 for more information. The passengersafety belt light will also come on and stay on forseveral seconds, then it will flash for several more.

This chime and light arerepeated if thepassenger remainsunbuckled andthe vehicle is in motion.

If the passenger’s safety belt is buckled, neitherthe chime nor the light will come on.

Airbag Readiness LightThere is an airbag readiness light on the instrumentpanel cluster, which shows the airbag symbol. Thesystem checks the airbag’s electrical system formalfunctions. The light tells you if there is anelectrical problem. The system check includes theairbag sensor, the pretensioners, the airbagmodules, the wiring and the crash sensing anddiagnostic module. For more information on theairbag system, see Airbag System on page 76.

This light will come onwhen you start yourvehicle, and it will flashfor a few seconds.Then the light should goout. This means thesystem is ready.

212

If the airbag readiness light stays on after youstart the vehicle or comes on when you are driving,your airbag system may not work properly.Have your vehicle serviced right away.

{CAUTION:

If the airbag readiness light stays on afteryou start your vehicle, it means the airbagsystem may not be working properly. Theairbags in your vehicle may not inflate ina crash, or they could even inflate withouta crash. To help avoid injury to yourselfor others, have your vehicle serviced rightaway if the airbag readiness light stays onafter you start your vehicle.

The airbag readiness light should flash for afew seconds when you turn the ignition key to ON.If the light does not come on then, have it fixedso it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.

213

Passenger Airbag Status IndicatorYour vehicle has the passenger sensing system.Your instrument panel has a passenger airbagstatus indicator.

When you start the vehicle, the passenger airbagstatus indicator will light ON and OFF, or thesymbol for on and off, for several seconds as asystem check. If you use remote start to start yourvehicle from a distance, if your vehicle has thisfeature, you may not see the system check. Then,after several more seconds, the status indicatorwill light either ON or OFF, or either the onor off symbol to let you know the status of theright front passenger’s frontal and seat-mountedside impact airbags.

If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on thepassenger airbag status indicator, it means thatthe right front passenger’s frontal airbag andseat-mounted side impact airbag are enabled (mayinflate).

{CAUTION:

If the on indicator comes on when youhave a rear-facing child restraint installedin the right front passenger’s seat, it meansthat the passenger sensing system has notturned off the passenger’s frontal airbagand seat-mounted side impact airbag (ifequipped). A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injured or killed ifthe right front passenger’s airbag inflates.This is because the back of the rear-facingchild restraint would be very close to theinflating airbag. Do not use a rear-facingchild restraint in the right front passenger’sseat if the airbag is turned on.


214

{CAUTION:

Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off the rightfront passenger’s frontal airbag andseat-mounted side impact airbag (ifequipped) if the system detects arear-facing child restraint, no system isfail-safe, and no one can guarantee thatan airbag will not deploy under someunusual circumstance, even though it isturned off. We recommend that rear-facingchild restraints be secured in a rear seat,even if the airbag is or airbags are off.

If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on thepassenger airbag status indicator, it means thatthe passenger sensing system has turned offthe right front passenger’s frontal airbag andseat-mounted side impact airbag. See PassengerSensing System on page 86 for more on this,including important safety information.

If, after several seconds, both status indicatorlights remain on, or if there are no lights atall, there may be a problem with the lights or thepassenger sensing system. See yourdealer/retailer for service.

{CAUTION:

If the airbag readiness light in theinstrument panel cluster ever comes onand stays on, it means that somethingmay be wrong with the airbag system. Ifthis ever happens, have the vehicleserviced promptly, because an adult-sizeperson sitting in the right frontpassenger’s seat may not have theprotection of the airbag(s). See AirbagReadiness Light on page 212 for more onthis, including important safetyinformation.

215

Charging System Light

The charging systemlight will come on brieflywhen you turn on theignition, but the engine isnot running, as a checkto show you it is working.

It should go out once the engine is running. If itstays on, or comes on while you are driving,you may have a problem with the charging system.It could indicate that you have problems with agenerator drive belt, or another electrical problem.Have it checked right away. Driving while thislight is on could drain your battery.

When this light comes on, the Driver InformationCenter (DIC) will also display the SERVICEBATTERY CHARGING SYSTEM message. SeeDIC Warnings and Messages on page 239for more information.

If you must drive a short distance with the light on,be certain to turn off all your accessories, suchas the radio and air conditioner.

Voltmeter Gage

When the engine is notrunning, but the ignitionis turned to ON, thisgage shows thebattery’s state of chargein DC volts.

When the engine is running, this gage shows thecondition of the charging system. The vehicle’scharging system regulates voltage based onthe state of charge of the battery. The voltmetermay fluctuate. This is normal. Readings betweenthe low and high warning zones indicate thenormal operating range.

216

Readings in the low warning zone may occurwhen a large number of electrical accessories areoperating in the vehicle and the engine is leftidling for an extended period.

If there is a problem with the battery chargingsystem, a SERVICE BATTERY CHARGINGSYSTEM message will appear in the DriverInformation Center (DIC) and/or the chargingsystem light will come on. See DIC Warnings andMessages on page 239 and Charging SystemLight on page 216 for more information.

However, readings in either warning zone mayindicate a possible problem in the electricalsystem. Have the vehicle serviced as soon aspossible.

Brake System Warning LightYour vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is dividedinto two parts. If one part is not working, the otherpart can still work and stop you. For goodbraking, though, you need both parts working well.

If the warning light comes on, there is a brakeproblem. Have your brake system inspectedright away.

This light should come on briefly when you turnthe ignition key to ON. If it does not come on then,have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you ifthere is a problem.

This light may also come on due to low brakefluid. See Brakes on page 410 for moreinformation.


217

When the ignition is on, the brake system warninglight will also come on when you set yourparking brake. The light will stay on if your parkingbrake does not release fully. If it stays on afteryour parking brake is fully released, it means youhave a brake problem.If the light comes on while you are driving, pull offthe road and stop carefully. Make sure the parkingbrake is fully released. You may notice that thepedal is harder to push or, the pedal may go closerto the floor. It may take longer to stop. If the light isstill on, have the vehicle towed for service. SeeTowing Your Vehicle on page 358.

{CAUTION:

Your brake system may not be workingproperly if the brake system warning lightis on. Driving with the brake systemwarning light on can lead to an accident.If the light is still on after you have pulledoff the road and stopped carefully, havethe vehicle towed for service.

Antilock Brake System WarningLightYour vehicle has the Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS).

This light will come onwhen your engine isstarted and may stay onfor several seconds.This is normal.

If the light stays on, turn the ignition to off. If thelight comes on and the chime sounds whenyou are driving, pull your vehicle over to a safelocation and stop as soon as possible.

218

Turn the ignition off. Then start the engine againto reset the system. If the light still stays on,or comes on again while you are driving, yourvehicle needs service. If the regular brake systemwarning light is not on, you still have brakes,but you do not have antilock brakes. If the regularbrake system warning light is also on, you donot have antilock brakes and there is a problemwith your regular brakes. See Brake SystemWarning Light on page 217 earlier in this section.

The ABS warning light will come on brieflywhen you turn the ignition key to ON. This isnormal. If the light does not come on then, have itfixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is aproblem.

StabiliTrak® Indicator Light

This warning lightshould come on brieflywhen the engine isstarted.

If the warning light does not come on then, have itfixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is aproblem. If it stays on, or comes on when you aredriving, there may be a problem with yourStabiliTrak® system and your vehicle may needservice. When this warning light is on, the systemis off and will not limit wheel spin. Adjust yourdriving accordingly.

This light will also flash when the StabiliTrak®

system is active.

If the StabiliTrak® system warning light comes onand stays on for an extended period of timewhen the system is turned on, your vehicle needsservice. See StabiliTrak® System on page 329for more information.

219

Engine Coolant TemperatureWarning Light

The engine coolanttemperature warninglight will come on whenthe engine hasoverheated.

If this happens you should pull over and turn offthe engine as soon as possible. See EngineOverheating on page 400 for more information.

Notice: Driving with the engine coolanttemperature warning light on could cause yourvehicle to overheat. See Engine Overheatingon page 400. Your vehicle could be damaged,and it might not be covered by your warranty.Never drive with the engine coolanttemperature warning light on.

This light will also come on briefly when startingyour vehicle. If it does not, have your vehicleserviced.

Engine Coolant Temperature Gage

This gage shows the engine coolant temperature.Under normal driving conditions the gage willread 210°F (100 °C) or less. If the gage pointer isnear 260°F (125 °C), the engine is too hot.

It means that your engine coolant has overheated.If you have been operating your vehicle undernormal driving conditions, you should pull off theroad, stop your vehicle and turn off the engineas soon as possible.

See Engine Overheating on page 400 for moreinformation.


220

Tire Pressure Light

This light comes onbriefly when you turnthe ignition to ON.

It will also come on when one or more of yourtires are significantly underinflated.

A CHECK TIRE PRESSURE Driver InformationCenter (DIC) message will accompany thelight. See DIC Warnings and Messages onpage 239 for more information.

Stop and check your tires as soon as it is safe todo so. If underinflated, inflate to the properpressure. See Tires on page 425 for moreinformation.

This light will flash for about 70 seconds and thenstay on if a problem is detected with the TirePressure Monitor system.

See Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 433for more information.

221

Malfunction Indicator Lamp

Check Engine Light

Your vehicle has acomputer whichmonitors operation ofthe fuel, ignition,and emission controlsystems.

This system is called OBD II (On-BoardDiagnostics-Second Generation) and is intendedto make sure that emissions are at acceptablelevels for the life of the vehicle, helping to producea cleaner environment. The check engine lightcomes on to indicate that there is a problem andservice is required. Malfunctions often will beindicated by the system before any problem isapparent. This can prevent more serious damageto your vehicle. This system is also designedto assist your service technician in correctlydiagnosing any malfunction.

Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle withthis light on, after a while, the emissioncontrols might not work as well, your vehicle’sfuel economy might not be as good, and theengine might not run as smoothly. Thiscould lead to costly repairs that might not becovered by your warranty.

Notice: Modifications made to the engine,transmission, exhaust, intake, or fuel systemof your vehicle or the replacement of theoriginal tires with other than those of the sameTire Performance Criteria (TPC) can affectyour vehicle’s emission controls and can causethis light to come on. Modifications to thesesystems could lead to costly repairs notcovered by your warranty. This could alsoresult in a failure to pass a required EmissionInspection/Maintenance test. See Accessoriesand Modifications on page 377.

222

This light should come on, as a check to showyou it is working, when the ignition is on and theengine is not running. If the light does notcome on, have it repaired. This light will alsocome on during a malfunction in one of two ways:

• Light Flashing — A misfire condition hasbeen detected. A misfire increases vehicleemissions and could damage the emissioncontrol system on your vehicle. Diagnosis andservice might be required.

• Light On Steady — An emission controlsystem malfunction has been detected on yourvehicle. Diagnosis and service might berequired.

If the Light is FlashingThe following can prevent more serious damageto your vehicle:

• Reduce vehicle speed.

• Avoid hard accelerations.

• Avoid steep uphill grades.

• If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amountof cargo being hauled as soon as it ispossible.

If the light stops flashing and remains on steady,see “If the Light Is On Steady” following.

If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to doso, stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to parkthe vehicle. Turn the key off, wait at least10 seconds, and restart the engine. If the lightremains on steady, see “If the Light Is On Steady”following. If the light is still flashing, follow theprevious steps and see your dealer/retailerfor service as soon as possible.

223

If the Light Is On SteadyYou might be able to correct the emission systemmalfunction by considering the following:

Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?

If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fullyinstall the cap. See Filling the Tank on page 381.The diagnostic system can determine if thefuel cap has been left off or improperly installed. Aloose or missing fuel cap allows fuel to evaporateinto the atmosphere. A few driving trips withthe cap properly installed should turn the light off.

Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?

If so, your vehicle’s electrical system might bewet. The condition is usually corrected when theelectrical system dries out. A few driving tripsshould turn the light off.

Have you recently changed brands of fuel?

If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel.See Gasoline Octane on page 379. Poor fuelquality causes the engine not to run as efficientlyas designed. You might notice this as stallingafter start-up, stalling when you put the vehicle intogear, misfiring, hesitation on acceleration, orstumbling on acceleration — these conditionsmight go away once the engine is warmed up. Thiswill be detected by the system and cause thelight to turn on.

If you experience one or more of these conditions,change the fuel brand you use. It will require atleast one full tank of the proper fuel to turn thelight off.

If none of the above steps have made the lightturn off, your dealer/retailer can check the vehicle.Your dealer/retailer has the proper test equipmentand diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical orelectrical problems that might have developed.

224

Emissions Inspection and MaintenanceProgramsSome state/provincial and local governments haveor might begin programs to inspect the emissioncontrol equipment on your vehicle. Failure to passthis inspection could prevent you from getting avehicle registration.

Here are some things you need to know to helpyour vehicle pass an inspection:

Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if thecheck engine light is on or not working properly.

Your vehicle will not pass this inspection ifthe OBD (on-board diagnostic) system determinesthat critical emission control systems have notbeen completely diagnosed by the system.The vehicle would be considered not ready forinspection. This can happen if you have recentlyreplaced the battery or if the battery has rundown. The diagnostic system is designedto evaluate critical emission control systemsduring normal driving. This can take several daysof routine driving. If you have done this andyour vehicle still does not pass the inspection forlack of OBD system readiness, your dealer/retailercan prepare the vehicle for inspection.

Oil Pressure Light

{CAUTION:

Do not keep driving if the oil pressure islow. If you do, your engine can become sohot that it catches fire. You or otherscould be burned. Check your oil as soonas possible and have your vehicleserviced.

Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenancemay damage the engine. The repairs wouldnot be covered by your warranty. Always followthe maintenance schedule in this manual forchanging engine oil.

This light tells you ifthere could be aproblem with yourengine oil pressure.

225

The light comes on when you turn your key to ONor START. It goes off once you start your engine.That is a check to be sure the light works. If it doesnot come on, be sure to have it fixed so it will bethere to warn you if something goes wrong.

When the light comes on and stays on, it meansthat oil is not flowing through your engine properly.You could be low on oil and you might havesome other system problem.

Security Light

This light flashes whenthe security system isactivated.

For more information, see Theft-Deterrent Systemson page 119.

Fog Lamp Light

The fog lamp light willcome on when the foglamps are in use.

The light will go out when the fog lamps areturned off. See Fog Lamps on page 184 for moreinformation.

Cruise Control Light

This light comes onwhenever you set thecruise control.

The light goes out when the cruise control isturned off. See Cruise Control on page 179 formore information.

226

Highbeam On Light

This light comes onwhen the high-beamheadlamps are in use.

See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer onpage 175 for more information.

Tow/Haul Mode Light

This light comes onwhen the Tow/Haulmode has beenactivated.

For more information, see Tow/Haul Mode onpage 132.

Fuel Gage

When the ignition is on, the fuel gage tells youabout how much fuel you have left in the fuel tank.

The gage will first indicate empty before you areout of fuel, and you should get more fuel assoon as possible.

When the fuel tank is low on fuel, the FUELLEVEL LOW message will appear on the DriverInformation Center (DIC). For more information seeDIC Warnings and Messages on page 239.


227

Here are some situations you may experience withyour fuel gage. None of these indicate a problemwith the fuel gage.

• At the gas station, the fuel pump shuts offbefore the gage reads full.

• It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up thanthe fuel gage indicated. For example, thegage may have indicated the tank was half full,but it actually took a little more or less thanhalf the tank’s capacity to fill the tank.

• The gage goes back to empty when you turnoff the ignition.

Driver Information Center (DIC)Your vehicle has a Driver Information Center (DIC).

The DIC displays information about your vehicle. Italso displays warning messages if a systemproblem is detected.

All messages will appear in the DIC displaylocated at the top of the instrument panel cluster.

The DIC comes on when the ignition is on.After a short delay, the DIC will display theinformation that was last displayed before theengine was turned off.

The DIC also displays a shift lever positionindicator on the bottom line of the display. SeeAutomatic Transmission Operation on page 129 formore information.

The outside air temperature also displays on theDIC when viewing the trip and fuel information.The outside air temperature automatically appearsin the top right corner of the DIC display. Ifthere is a problem with the system that controlsthe temperature display, the numbers will bereplaced with dashes. If this occurs, havethe vehicle serviced.

If your vehicle has DIC buttons, see “DICOperation and Displays (With DIC Buttons)” laterin this section and DIC Vehicle Customization(With DIC Buttons) on page 250 for the displaysavailable.

If your vehicle does not have DIC buttons, see“DIC Operation and Displays (Without DICButtons)” later in this section for the displaysavailable.

228

DIC Operation and Displays(With DIC Buttons)If your vehicle has DIC buttons, the informationbelow explains the operation of this system.

The DIC has different displays which can beaccessed by pressing the DIC buttons located onthe instrument panel. See Instrument PanelOverview on page 170 for more information.

The DIC displays trip, fuel, and vehicle systeminformation, and warning messages if a systemproblem is detected.

The DIC also allows some features to becustomized. See DIC Vehicle Customization (WithDIC Buttons) on page 250 for more information.

If your vehicle has DIC buttons, you can also usethe trip odometer reset stem to view theodometer and trip odometers.

DIC Buttons

The buttons are the set/reset, customization,vehicle information, and trip/fuel buttons. Thebutton functions are detailed in the following pages.

V (Set/Reset): Press this button to set or resetcertain functions and to turn off or acknowledgemessages on the DIC.

U (Customization): Press this button tocustomize the feature settings on your vehicle.See DIC Vehicle Customization (With DIC Buttons)on page 250 for more information.

229

T (Vehicle Information): Press this button todisplay the oil life, park assist on vehicles with thisfeature, units, tire pressure readings, TirePressure Monitor (TPM) system programming, andRemote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitterprogramming.

3 (Trip/Fuel): Press this button to display theodometer, trip odometers, fuel range, averageeconomy, timer, fuel used, and average speed.

Vehicle Information Menu Items

T (Vehicle Information): Press this button toscroll through the following menu items:

OIL LIFEPress the vehicle information button until OIL LIFEREMAINING displays. This display shows anestimate of the oil’s remaining useful life. If yousee 99% OIL LIFE REMAINING on the display,that means 99% of the current oil life remains. Theengine oil life system will alert you to changethe oil on a schedule consistent with your drivingconditions.

When the remaining oil life is low, the CHANGEENGINE OIL SOON message will appear on thedisplay. See “CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON” underDIC Warnings and Messages on page 239. Youshould change the oil as soon as you can. SeeEngine Oil on page 387. In addition to the engine oillife system monitoring the oil life, additionalmaintenance is recommended in the MaintenanceSchedule in this manual. See ScheduledMaintenance on page 488 for more information.

Remember, you must reset the OIL LIFE displayyourself after each oil change. It will not resetitself. Also, be careful not to reset the OIL LIFEdisplay accidentally at any time other thanwhen the oil has just been changed. It cannot bereset accurately until the next oil change. Toreset the engine oil life system, see Engine OilLife System on page 390.

230

PARK ASSISTIf your vehicle has the Ultrasonic Rear ParkingAssist (URPA) system, press the vehicleinformation button until PARK ASSIST displays.This display allows the system to be turned on oroff. Once in this display, press the set/reset buttonto select between ON or OFF. If you choose ON,the system will be turned on. If you choose OFF,the system will be turned off. The URPA systemautomatically turns back on after each vehicle start.When the URPA system is turned off and thevehicle is shifted out of PARK (P), the DIC willdisplay the PARK ASSIST OFF message as areminder that the system has been turned off. SeeDIC Warnings and Messages on page 239 andUltrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) onpage 188 for more information.

UNITSPress the vehicle information button until UNITSdisplays. This display allows you to select betweenEnglish or Metric units of measurement. Once inthis display, press the set/reset button to selectbetween ENGLISH or METRIC units. All ofthe vehicle information will then be displayed inthe unit of measurement selected.

FRONT TIRES or REAR TIRESThe pressure for each tire can be viewed in theDIC. The tire pressure will be shown in eitherpounds per square inch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa).Press the vehicle information button until the DICdisplays FRONT TIRES PSI (kPa)LEFT ## RIGHT ##. Press the vehicle informationbutton again until the DIC displays REAR TIRESPSI (kPa) LEFT ## RIGHT ##.

If a low or high tire pressure condition is detectedby the system while driving, a message advisingyou to check the pressure in a specific tirewill appear in the display. See Inflation - TirePressure on page 432 and DIC Warningsand Messages on page 239 for more information.

If the tire pressure display shows dashesinstead of a value, there may be a problem withyour vehicle. If this consistently occurs, seeyour dealer/retailer for service.

231

RELEARN TIRE POSITIONSAfter rotating the tires or after replacing a tire orsensor, the Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) systemmust re-learn the tire positions. To re-learn the tirepositions, see Tire Pressure Monitor System onpage 433. See Tire Inspection and Rotation onpage 438 and DIC Warnings and Messages onpage 239 for more information.

RELEARN REMOTE KEYThis display allows you to match Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitters to your vehicle. To matcha RKE transmitter to your vehicle, do the following:

1. Press the vehicle information button untilPRESS V TO RELEARN REMOTE KEYdisplays.

2. Press the set/reset button until REMOTE KEYLEARNING ACTIVE is displayed.

3. Press and hold the lock and unlock buttonson the first transmitter at the same time forabout 15 seconds.On vehicles with memory recall seats, the firsttransmitter learned will match driver 1 andthe second will match driver 2.

A chime will sound indicating that thetransmitter is matched.

4. To match additional transmitters at this time,repeat Step 3.Each vehicle can have a maximum of eighttransmitters matched to it.

5. To exit the programming mode, you mustcycle the key to OFF.

Blank DisplayThis display shows no information.

Trip/Fuel Menu Items

3 (Trip/Fuel): Press this button to scrollthrough the following menu items:

ODOMETERPress the trip/fuel button until ODOMETERdisplays. This display shows the distance thevehicle has been driven in either miles (mi)or kilometers (km). Pressing the trip odometerreset stem will also display the odometer.

To switch between English and metricmeasurements, see “UNITS” later in this section.

232

TRIP A and TRIP BPress the trip/fuel button until TRIP A or TRIP Bdisplays. This display shows the current distancetraveled in either miles (mi) or kilometers (km)since the last reset for each trip odometer. Bothtrip odometers can be used at the same time.Pressing the trip odometer reset stem willalso display the trip odometers.

Each trip odometer can be reset to zero separatelyby pressing the set/reset button or the tripodometer reset stem while the desired tripodometer is displayed.

The trip odometer has a feature called theretro-active reset. This can be used to set the tripodometer to the number of miles (kilometers)driven since the ignition was last turned on. Thiscan be used if the trip odometer is not reset at thebeginning of the trip.

To use the retro-active reset feature, press andhold the set/reset button for at least four seconds.The trip odometer will display the number ofmiles (mi) or kilometers (km) driven since theignition was last turned on and the vehiclewas moving. Once the vehicle begins moving, thetrip odometer will accumulate mileage.

For example, if the vehicle was driven 5 miles(8 km) before it is started again, and thenthe retro-active reset feature is activated, thedisplay will show 5 miles (8 km). As the vehiclebegins moving, the display will then increaseto 5.1 miles (8.2 km), 5.2 miles (8.4 km), etc.

If the retro-active reset feature is activated afterthe vehicle is started, but before it begins moving,the display will show the number of miles (mi)or kilometers (km) that were driven during the lastignition cycle.

RANGEPress the trip/fuel button until RANGE displays.This display shows the approximate number ofremaining miles (mi) or kilometers (km) the vehiclecan be driven without refueling. The display willshow LOW if the fuel level is low.

The fuel range estimate is based on an average ofthe vehicle’s fuel economy over recent drivinghistory and the amount of fuel remaining in the fueltank. This estimate will change if driving conditionschange.

233

For example, if driving in traffic and making frequentstops, this display may read one number, but if thevehicle is driven on a freeway, the number maychange even though the same amount of fuel is inthe fuel tank. This is because different drivingconditions produce different fuel economies.Generally, freeway driving produces better fueleconomy than city driving. Fuel range cannotbe reset.

AVG (Average) ECONOMYPress the trip/fuel button until AVG ECONOMYdisplays. This display shows the approximateaverage miles per gallon (mpg) or liters per100 kilometers (L/100 km). This number iscalculated based on the number of mpg (L/100 km)recorded since the last time this menu item wasreset. To reset AVG ECONOMY, press and holdthe set/reset button.

TIMERPress the trip/fuel button until TIMER displays.This display can be used as a timer.

To start the timer, press the set/reset button whileTIMER is displayed. The display will show theamount of time that has passed since the timer waslast reset, not including time the ignition is off. Timewill continue to be counted as long as the ignition ison, even if another display is being shown on theDIC. The timer will record up to 99 hours,59 minutes and 59 seconds (99:59:59) after whichthe display will return to zero.

To stop the timer, press the set/reset button brieflywhile TIMER is displayed.

To reset the timer to zero, press and hold theset/reset button while TIMER is displayed.

FUEL USEDPress the trip/fuel button until FUEL USEDdisplays. This display shows the number ofgallons (gal) or liters (L) of fuel used since the lastreset of this menu item. To reset the fuel usedinformation, press and hold the set/reset buttonwhile FUEL USED is displayed.

234

AVG (Average) SPEEDPress the trip/fuel button until AVG SPEEDdisplays. This display shows the average speed ofthe vehicle in miles per hour (mph) or kilometersper hour (km/h). This average is calculatedbased on the various vehicle speeds recordedsince the last reset of this value. To reset the valueto zero, press and hold the set/reset button.

Blank DisplayThis display shows no information.

DIC Operation and Displays(Without DIC Buttons)If your vehicle does not have DIC buttons, theinformation below explains the operation ofthis system.

The DIC has different displays which can beaccessed by pressing the trip odometer reset stemlocated on the instrument panel cluster. Pressingthe trip odometer reset stem will also turn off,or acknowledge, DIC messages.

The DIC displays trip and vehicle systeminformation, and warning messages if a systemproblem is detected.

If your vehicle does not have DIC buttons, youcan use the trip odometer reset stem to view thefollowing displays: odometer, trip odometers,oil life, park assist menu for vehicles withthe Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) system,Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) system programming,Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitterprogramming, units, and display language.

If your vehicle has DIC buttons, you can use thetrip odometer reset stem to view the followingdisplays: odometer and trip odometers.

Trip Odometer Reset Stem Menu ItemsODOMETERPress the trip odometer reset stem untilODOMETER displays. This display shows thedistance the vehicle has been driven in eithermiles (mi) or kilometers (km).

To switch between English and metricmeasurements, see “UNITS” later in this section.

235

TRIP A or TRIP BPress the trip odometer reset stem until TRIP A orTRIP B displays. This display shows the currentdistance traveled in either miles (mi) orkilometers (km) since the last reset for each tripodometer. Both trip odometers can be used at thesame time.

Each trip odometer can be reset to zero separatelyby pressing and holding the trip odometer resetstem while the desired trip odometer is displayed.

The trip odometer has a feature called theretro-active reset. This can be used to set the tripodometer to the number of miles (kilometers)driven since the ignition was last turned on. Thiscan be used if the trip odometer is not reset at thebeginning of the trip.

To use the retro-active reset feature, press andhold the trip odometer reset stem for at leastfour seconds. The trip odometer will display thenumber of miles (mi) or kilometers (km) drivensince the ignition was last turned on and thevehicle was moving. Once the vehicle beginsmoving, the trip odometer will accumulate mileage.

For example, if the vehicle was driven 5 miles(8 km) before it is started again, and thenthe retro-active reset feature is activated, thedisplay will show 5 miles (8 km). As the vehiclebegins moving, the display will then increaseto 5.1 miles (8.2 km), 5.2 miles (8.4 km), etc.

If the retro-active reset feature is activated afterthe vehicle is started, but before it begins moving,the display will show the number of miles (mi)or kilometers (km) that were driven during the lastignition cycle.

OIL LIFETo access this display, the vehicle must be inPARK (P). Press the trip odometer reset stem untilOIL LIFE REMAINING displays. This displayshows an estimate of the oil’s remaining usefullife. If you see 99% OIL LIFE REMAINING on thedisplay, that means 99% of the current oil liferemains. The engine oil life system will alert you tochange the oil on a schedule consistent withyour driving conditions.

236

When the remaining oil life is low, the CHANGEENGINE OIL SOON message will appear on thedisplay. See “CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON” underDIC Warnings and Messages on page 239. Youshould change the oil as soon as you can. SeeEngine Oil on page 387. In addition to the engine oillife system monitoring the oil life, additionalmaintenance is recommended in the MaintenanceSchedule in this manual. See ScheduledMaintenance on page 488 for more information.

Remember, you must reset the OIL LIFE displayyourself after each oil change. It will not resetitself. Also, be careful not to reset the OIL LIFEdisplay accidentally at any time other thanwhen the oil has just been changed. It cannot bereset accurately until the next oil change. Toreset the engine oil life system, see Engine OilLife System on page 390.

PARK ASSISTTo access this display, the vehicle must be inPARK (P). If your vehicle has the Ultrasonic RearParking Assist (URPA) system, press the tripodometer reset stem until PARK ASSIST displays.This display allows the system to be turned onor off. Once in this display, press and hold the tripodometer reset stem to select between ON orOFF. If you choose ON, the system will be turnedon. If you choose OFF, the system will beturned off. The URPA system automatically turnsback on after each vehicle start. When theURPA system is turned off and the vehicle isshifted out of PARK (P), the DIC will display thePARK ASSIST OFF message as a reminderthat the system has been turned off. See DICWarnings and Messages on page 239 andUltrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) onpage 188 for more information.

237

RELEARN TIRE POSITIONSTo access this display, the vehicle must be inPARK (P). After rotating the tires or after replacinga tire or sensor, the Tire Pressure Monitor(TPM) system must re-learn the tire positions. Tore-learn the tire positions, see Tire PressureMonitor System on page 433. See Tire Inspectionand Rotation on page 438 and DIC Warningsand Messages on page 239 for more information.

RELEARN REMOTE KEYTo access this display, the vehicle must be inPARK (P). This display allows you to matchRemote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters to yourvehicle. To match an RKE transmitter to yourvehicle, do the following:1. Press the trip odometer reset stem until

RELEARN REMOTE KEY displays.2. Press and hold the trip odometer reset stem

until REMOTE KEY LEARNING ACTIVE isdisplayed.

3. Press and hold the lock and unlock buttons onthe first transmitter at the same time for about15 seconds.On vehicles with memory recall seats, the firsttransmitter learned will match driver 1 and thesecond will match driver 2.A chime will sound indicating that thetransmitter is matched.

4. To match additional transmitters at this time,repeat Step 3.Each vehicle can have a maximum ofeight transmitters matched to it.

5. To exit the programming mode, you mustcycle the key to OFF.

UNITSTo access this display, the vehicle must be inPARK (P). Press the trip odometer reset stem untilUNITS displays. This display allows you toselect between English or Metric units ofmeasurement. Once in this display, press andhold the trip odometer reset stem to selectbetween ENGLISH or METRIC units. All of thevehicle information will then be displayed inthe unit of measurement selected.

238

DISPLAY LANGUAGETo access this display, the vehicle must be inPARK (P). This display allows you to selectthe language in which the DIC messages willappear. To select a language, do the following:

1. Press the trip odometer reset stem untilDISPLAY LANGUAGE, LANGUE AFFICHAGE(French), or MOSTRAR IDIOMA (Spanish)displays.

2. Continue to press and hold the trip odometerreset stem to scroll through all of the availablelanguages.The available languages are ENGLISH(default), FRANCAIS (French), and ESPANOL(Spanish).

3. Once the desired language is displayed,release the trip odometer reset stem toset your choice.

DIC Warnings and MessagesMessages are displayed on the DIC to notify thedriver that the status of the vehicle has changedand that some action may be needed by the driverto correct the condition. Multiple messages mayappear one after another.

Some messages may not require immediateaction, but you can press any of the DIC buttonson the instrument panel or the trip odometerreset stem on the instrument panel clusterto acknowledge that you received the messagesand to clear them from the display.

Some messages cannot be cleared from the DICdisplay because they are more urgent. Thesemessages require action before they can becleared. You should take any messages thatappear on the display seriously and remember thatclearing the messages will only make themessages disappear, not correct the problem.

The following are the possible messages that canbe displayed and some information about them.

239

ALL WHEEL DRIVE OFFIf your vehicle has the All-Wheel Drive (AWD)system, this message displays when thereis a compact spare tire on the vehicle, when theAnti-lock Brake System (ABS) warning light comeson, or when the rear differential fluid isoverheating. This message turns off when thedifferential fluid cools.

The AWD system is disabled until the compactspare tire is replaced by a full-size tire. If thewarning message is still on after putting on thefull-size tire, you need to reset the warningmessage. To reset the warning message, turn theignition off and then back on again after30 seconds. If the message stays on, see yourdealer/retailer right away. See All-Wheel Drive(AWD) System on page 332 for more information.

AUTOMATIC LIGHT CONTROL OFFThis message displays when the automaticheadlamps are turned off. This message clearsitself after 10 seconds.

AUTOMATIC LIGHT CONTROL ONThis message displays when the automaticheadlamps are turned on. This message clearsitself after 10 seconds.

BATTERY SAVER ACTIVEThis message displays when the system detectsthat the battery voltage is dropping below expectedlevels. The battery saver system starts reducingcertain features of the vehicle that you maybe able to notice. At the point that the features aredisabled, this message is displayed. It meansthat the vehicle is trying to save the charge in thebattery.

Turn off all unnecessary accessories to allow thebattery to recharge.

The normal battery voltage range is11.5 to 15.5 volts.

240

CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONThis message displays when the engine oil needsto be changed. When you change the engineoil, be sure to reset the CHANGE ENGINE OILSOON message. See Engine Oil Life Systemon page 390 for information on how to reset themessage. See Engine Oil on page 387 andScheduled Maintenance on page 488 for moreinformation.

CHECK TIRE PRESSUREThis message displays when the pressure in oneor more of the vehicle’s tires need to bechecked. This message also displays LEFTFRONT, RIGHT FRONT, LEFT REAR, or RIGHTREAR to indicate which tire needs to bechecked. You can receive more than one tirepressure message at a time. To read the othermessages that may have been sent at thesame time, press the set/reset button or the tripodometer reset stem. If a tire pressure messageappears on the DIC, stop as soon as you can.Have the tire pressures checked and set to thoseshown on the Tire Loading Information label.

See Tires on page 425, Loading Your Vehicle onpage 353, and Inflation - Tire Pressure onpage 432. The DIC display also shows the tirepressure values for the front and rear tiresby pressing the vehicle information button. See“DIC Operation and Displays (With DIC Buttons)”earlier in this section. If the tire pressure islow, the low tire pressure warning light comes on.See Tire Pressure Light on page 221.

CRUISE SET TO XXXThis message displays whenever the cruisecontrol is set. See Cruise Control on page 179 formore information.

DRIVER DOOR OPENThis message displays and a chime sounds if thedriver’s door is not fully closed and the vehicleis in a drive gear. Stop and turn off the vehicle,check the door for obstructions, and close the dooragain. Check to see if the message still appearson the DIC.

241

ENGINE HOT A/C(Air Conditioning) OFFThis message displays when the engine coolantbecomes hotter than the normal operatingtemperature. See Engine Coolant TemperatureGage on page 220. To avoid added strain ona hot engine, the air conditioning compressorautomatically turns off. When the coolanttemperature returns to normal, the air conditioningcompressor turns back on. You can continue todrive your vehicle.

If this message continues to appear, have thesystem repaired by your dealer/retailer as soon aspossible to avoid damage to the engine.

ENGINE OIL LOW ADD OILIf your vehicle has an oil level sensor, thismessage displays if the oil level in the vehicle islow. Check the oil level and correct it asnecessary. You may need to let the vehicle coolor warm up and cycle the ignition to be surethis message clears. See Engine Oil on page 387for additional information.

ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE

Notice: If you drive your vehicle while theengine is overheating, severe engine damagemay occur. If an overheat warning appearson the instrument panel cluster and/orDIC, stop the vehicle as soon as possible. Donot increase the engine speed above normalidling speed. See Engine Overheating onpage 400 for more information.

This message displays when the engine coolanttemperature is too hot. Stop and allow the vehicleto idle until it cools down. See Engine CoolantTemperature Gage on page 220.

See Overheated Engine Protection OperatingMode on page 402 for information on driving to asafe place in an emergency.

242

ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE

Notice: If you drive your vehicle while theengine is overheating, severe engine damagemay occur. If an overheat warning appearson the instrument panel cluster and/orDIC, stop the vehicle as soon as possible. SeeEngine Overheating on page 400 for moreinformation.

This message displays and a chime sounds if theengine cooling system reaches unsafetemperatures for operation. Stop and turn off thevehicle as soon as it is safe to do so to avoidsevere damage. This message clears when theengine has cooled to a safe operating temperature.

ENGINE POWER IS REDUCEDThis message displays and a chime sounds whenthe cooling system temperature gets too hotand the engine further enters the engine coolantprotection mode. See Engine Overheating onpage 400 for further information.

This message also displays when the vehicle’sengine power is reduced. Reduced engine powercan affect the vehicle’s ability to accelerate. Ifthis message is on, but there is no reduction in

performance, proceed to your destination. Theperformance may be reduced the next timethe vehicle is driven. The vehicle may be driven ata reduced speed while this message is on, butacceleration and speed may be reduced. Anytimethis message stays on, the vehicle should betaken to your dealer/retailer for service as soon aspossible.

FUEL LEVEL LOWThis message displays and a chime sounds if thefuel level is low. Refuel as soon as possible.See Fuel Gage on page 227 and Fuel on page 379for more information.

HEATED WASH (Washer) FLUIDSYSTEM OFFIf your vehicle has this feature, this messagedisplays when you manually turn off the heatedwindshield washer fluid system or when thesystem automatically turns off. See “HeatedWindshield Washer” under Windshield Washer onpage 177 for more information. This messageclears itself after 10 seconds.

243

HEATING WASH (Washer) FLUIDWASH (Washer) WIPES PENDINGIf your vehicle has this feature, this messagedisplays when you turn on the heated windshieldwasher fluid system. See “Heated WindshieldWasher” under Windshield Washer on page 177 formore information.

HOOD OPENThis message displays and a chime sounds if thehood is not fully closed. Stop and turn off thevehicle, check the hood for obstructions, and closethe hood again. Check to see if the message stillappears on the DIC.

ICE POSSIBLE DRIVE WITH CAREThis message displays when the outside airtemperature is cold enough to create icy roadconditions. Adjust your driving accordingly.

LEFT REAR DOOR OPENThis message displays and a chime sounds if thedriver’s side rear door is not fully closed and thevehicle is in a drive gear. Stop and turn off thevehicle, check the door for obstructions, and closethe door again. Check to see if the message stillappears on the DIC.

LIFTGATE OPENThis message displays and a chime sounds if theliftgate is open while the ignition is in ON. Turn offthe vehicle and check the liftgate. Restart thevehicle and check for the message on the DICdisplay.

OIL PRESSURE LOW STOP ENGINENotice: If you drive your vehicle while theengine oil pressure is low, severe enginedamage may occur. If a low oil pressurewarning appears on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC), stop the vehicle as soon aspossible. Do not drive the vehicle until thecause of the low oil pressure is corrected. SeeEngine Oil on page 387 for more information.This message displays if low oil pressure levelsoccur. Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possibleand do not operate it until the cause of the low oilpressure has been corrected. Check the oil as soonas possible and have your vehicle serviced by yourdealer/retailer. See Engine Oil on page 387.

244

PARK ASSIST OFFIf your vehicle has the Ultrasonic Rear ParkingAssist (URPA) system, after the vehicle has beenstarted and shifted out of PARK (P), thismessage displays to remind the driver that theURPA system has been turned off. Pressthe set/reset button or the trip odometer resetstem to acknowledge this message and clear itfrom the DIC display. To turn the URPA systemback on, see Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist(URPA) on page 188.

PASSENGER DOOR OPENThis message displays and a chime sounds if thepassenger’s door is not fully closed and thevehicle is in a drive gear. Stop and turn off thevehicle, check the door for obstructions, and closethe door again. Check to see if the messagestill appears on the DIC.

REMOTE KEY LEARNING ACTIVEThis message displays while you are matching aRemote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter toyour vehicle. See “Matching Transmitter(s) to YourVehicle” under Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 100 and DIC Operationand Displays (With DIC Buttons) on page 229 orDIC Operation and Displays (Without DIC Buttons)on page 235 for more information.

REPLACE BATTERY IN REMOTE KEYThis message displays if a Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter battery is low. The batteryneeds to be replaced in the transmitter. See“Battery Replacement” under Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System Operation on page 100.

RIGHT REAR DOOR OPENThis message displays and a chime sounds if thepassenger’s side rear door is not fully closedand the vehicle is in a drive gear. Stop and turnoff the vehicle, check the door for obstructions, andclose the door again. Check to see if themessage still appears on the DIC.

245

SERVICE A/C (Air Conditioning)SYSTEMThis message displays when the electronicsensors that control the air conditioning andheating systems are no longer working. Have theclimate control system serviced by yourdealer/retailer if you notice a drop in heating andair conditioning efficiency.

SERVICE AIR BAGThis message displays if there is a problem withthe airbag system. Have your dealer/retailerinspect the system for problems. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 212 and Airbag Systemon page 76 for more information.

SERVICE ALL WHEEL DRIVEIf your vehicle has the All-Wheel Drive (AWD)system, this message displays if there is a problemwith this system. If this message appears, stopas soon as possible and turn off the vehicle.Restart the vehicle after 30 seconds and check forthe message on the DIC display. If the messageis still displayed or appears again when you begindriving, the AWD system needs service. Seeyour dealer/retailer.

SERVICE BATTERY CHARGINGSYSTEMOn some vehicles, this message displays if thereis a problem with the battery charging system.Under certain conditions, the charging system lightmay also turn on in the instrument panel cluster.See Charging System Light on page 216.Driving with this problem could drain the battery.Turn off all unnecessary accessories. Havethe electrical system checked as soon as possible.See your dealer/retailer.

SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEMThis message displays along with the brakesystem warning light if there is a problem with thebrake system. See Brake System WarningLight on page 217. If this message appears, stopas soon as possible and turn off the vehicle.Restart the vehicle and check for the message onthe DIC display. If the message is still displayedor appears again when you begin driving, thebrake system needs service as soon as possible.See your dealer/retailer.

246

SERVICE PARK ASSISTIf your vehicle has the Ultrasonic Rear ParkingAssist (URPA) system, this message displaysif there is a problem with the URPA system. Donot use this system to help you park. SeeUltrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) onpage 188 for more information. See yourdealer/retailer for service.

SERVICE POWER STEERINGThis message displays when a problem isdetected with the power steering system. Whenthis message is displayed, you may notice that theeffort required to steer the vehicle increases orfeels heavier, but you will still be able to steer thevehicle. Have your vehicle serviced by yourdealer/retailer immediately.

SERVICE STABILITRAKThis message displays if there is a problem withthe StabiliTrak® system. If this message appears,try to reset the system. Stop; turn off the enginefor at least 15 seconds; then start the engineagain. If this message still comes on, it meansthere is a problem. See your dealer/retailer

for service. The vehicle is safe to drive, however,you do not have the benefit of StabiliTrak®, soreduce your speed and drive accordingly.

SERVICE THEFT DETERRENT SYSTEMThis message displays when there is a problemwith the theft-deterrent system. The vehicle may ormay not restart so you may want to take thevehicle to your dealer/retailer before turning off theengine. See PASS-Key® III+ Operation onpage 121 for more information.

SERVICE TIRE MONITOR SYSTEMThis message displays if a part on the TirePressure Monitor (TPM) system is not workingproperly. If you drive your vehicle while any of thefour sensors are missing or inoperable, thewarning comes on in about 20 minutes. A sensorwould be missing, for example, if you putdifferent wheels on your vehicle withouttransferring the sensors. If the warning comes onand stays on, there may be a problem with theTPM. See your dealer/retailer.

247

SERVICE TRACTION CONTROLThis message displays when there is a problemwith the Traction Control System (TCS). When thismessage is displayed, the system will not limitwheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.See your dealer/retailer for service. SeeStabiliTrak® System on page 329 for moreinformation.

SERVICE TRANSMISSIONThis message displays when there is a problemwith the transmission. See your dealer/retailerfor service.

SERVICE VEHICLE SOONThis message displays when a non-emissionsrelated malfunction occurs. Have the vehicleserviced by your dealer/retailer as soon aspossible.

SPEED LIMITED TO XXX MPH (KM/H)This message displays when your vehicle speed islimited to 80 mph (128 km/h) because thevehicle detects a problem in the speed variableassist steering system. Have your vehicle servicedby your dealer/retailer.

STARTING DISABLED SERVICETHROTTLEThis message displays when your vehicle’s throttlesystem is not functioning properly. Have yourvehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer.

THEFT ATTEMPTEDThis message displays if the content theft-deterrentsystem has detected a break-in attempt whileyou were away from your vehicle. See ContentTheft-Deterrent on page 119 for more information.

TIGHTEN GAS CAPThis message may display along with the checkengine light on the instrument panel cluster ifthe vehicle’s fuel cap is not tightened properly. SeeMalfunction Indicator Lamp on page 222.Reinstall the fuel cap fully. See Filling the Tank onpage 381. The diagnostic system can determineif the fuel cap has been left off or improperlyinstalled. A loose or missing fuel cap allows fuel toevaporate into the atmosphere. A few drivingtrips with the cap properly installed should turn thislight and message off.

248

TIRE LEARNING ACTIVEThis message displays when the Tire PressureMonitor (TPM) system is re-learning the tirepositions on your vehicle. See DIC Operation andDisplays (With DIC Buttons) on page 229 orDIC Operation and Displays (Without DIC Buttons)on page 235 for more information. The tirepositions must be re-learned after rotating the tiresor after replacing a tire or sensor. See TireInspection and Rotation on page 438, TirePressure Monitor System on page 433, andInflation - Tire Pressure on page 432 for moreinformation.

TRACTION CONTROL OFFThis message displays when the Traction ControlSystem (TCS) is turned off. Adjust your drivingaccordingly. See StabiliTrak® System on page 329for more information. This message clears itselfafter 10 seconds.

TRANSMISSION HOT IDLE ENGINENotice: If you drive your vehicle while thetransmission fluid is overheating and thetransmission temperature warning is displayedon the instrument panel cluster and/or DIC, youcan damage the transmission. This could leadto costly repairs that would not be covered byyour warranty. Do not drive your vehicle withoverheated transmission fluid or while thetransmission temperature warning is displayed.

This message displays along with a continuouschime if the transmission fluid in the vehiclegets hot. Driving with the transmission fluidtemperature high can cause damage to thevehicle. Stop the vehicle and let it idle to allow thetransmission to cool. This message clears andthe chime stops when the fluid temperaturereaches a safe level.

TURN SIGNAL ONThis message displays and a chime sounds if aturn signal is left on for 3/4 of a mile (1.2 km).Move the turn signal/multifunction lever to the offposition.

249

WASHER FLUID LOW ADD FLUIDThis message displays when the windshieldwasher fluid is low. Fill the windshield washer fluidreservoir as soon as possible. See EngineCompartment Overview on page 386 for thelocation of the windshield washer fluid reservoir.Also, see Windshield Washer Fluid on page 409for more information.

DIC Vehicle Customization (WithDIC Buttons)Your vehicle may have customization capabilitiesthat allow you to program certain features toone preferred setting. Customization features canonly be programmed to one setting on thevehicle and cannot be programmed to a preferredsetting for two different drivers.

All of the customization options may not beavailable on your vehicle. Only the optionsavailable will be displayed on the DIC.

The default settings for the customization featureswere set when your vehicle left the factory, butmay have been changed from their defaultstate since then.

The customization preferences are automaticallyrecalled.

To change customization preferences, use thefollowing procedure.

Entering the Feature Settings Menu1. Turn the ignition on and place the vehicle in

PARK (P).To avoid excessive drain on the battery, it isrecommended that the headlamps areturned off.

2. Press the customization button to enter thefeature settings menu. If the menu is notavailable, FEATURE SETTINGS AVAILABLEIN PARK will display. Before entering themenu, make sure the vehicle is in PARK (P).

250

Feature Settings Menu ItemsThe following are customization features that allowyou to program settings to the vehicle:

DISPLAY IN ENGLISHThis feature will only display if a language otherthan English has been set. This feature allows youto change the language in which the DICmessages appear to English.

Press the customization button until the PRESS V

TO DISPLAY IN ENGLISH, APPUYER V POURAFFICHAGE ANGLAIS in French, or PULSEV PARA MOSTRAR INGLES in Spanish screenappears on the DIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to display all DIC messages inEnglish.

DISPLAY LANGUAGEThis feature allows you to select the language inwhich the DIC messages will appear.

Press the customization button until the DISPLAYLANGUAGE screen appears on the DIC display.Press the set/reset button once to access thesettings for this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scroll through the followingsettings:

ENGLISH (default): All messages will appear inEnglish.

FRANCAIS: All messages will appear in French.

ESPANOL: All messages will appear inSpanish.

NO CHANGE: No change will be made to thisfeature. The current setting will remain.

Choose one of the available settings and pressthe set/reset button while it is displayed on the DICto select it.

You can also change the language by pressingthe trip odometer reset stem. See “Language”under DIC Operation and Displays (Without DICButtons) earlier in this section for more information.

251

AUTO DOOR LOCKThis feature allows you to select when thevehicle’s doors will automatically lock. SeeProgrammable Automatic Door Locks on page 107for more information.

Press the customization button until AUTO DOORLOCK appears on the DIC display. Press theset/reset button once to access the settings for thisfeature. Then press the customization button toscroll through the following settings:

SHIFT OUT OF PARK (default): The doors willautomatically lock when the vehicle is shifted out ofPARK (P).

AT VEHICLE SPEED: The doors willautomatically lock when the vehicle speed isabove 8 mph (13 km/h) for three seconds.



AUTO DOOR UNLOCKThis feature allows you to select whether or not toturn off the automatic door unlocking feature. Italso allows you to select which doors andwhen the doors will automatically unlock. SeeProgrammable Automatic Door Locks on page 107for more information.

Press the customization button until AUTO DOORUNLOCK appears on the DIC display. Pressthe set/reset button once to access the settings forthis feature. Then press the customizationbutton to scroll through the following settings:

OFF: None of the doors will automatically unlock.

DRIVER AT KEY OUT: Only the driver’s doorwill unlock when the key is taken out of theignition.

DRIVER IN PARK: Only the driver’s door willunlock when the vehicle is shifted into PARK (P).

ALL AT KEY OUT: All of the doors will unlockwhen the key is taken out of the ignition.

ALL IN PARK (default): All of the doors willunlock when the vehicle is shifted into PARK (P).

252



REMOTE DOOR LOCKThis feature allows you to select the type offeedback you will receive when locking the vehiclewith the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.You will not receive feedback when lockingthe vehicle with the RKE transmitter if the doorsare open. See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 100 for moreinformation.

Press the customization button until REMOTEDOOR LOCK appears on the DIC display. Pressthe set/reset button once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press the customizationbutton to scroll through the following settings:

OFF: There will be no feedback when you pressthe lock button on the RKE transmitter.

LIGHTS ONLY: The exterior lamps will flashwhen you press the lock button on the RKEtransmitter.

HORN ONLY: The horn will sound on the secondpress of the lock button on the RKE transmitter.

HORN & LIGHTS (default): The exterior lampswill flash when you press the lock button on theRKE transmitter, and the horn will sound when thelock button is pressed again within five seconds ofthe previous command.



REMOTE DOOR UNLOCKThis feature allows you to select the type offeedback you will receive when unlocking thevehicle with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter. You will not receive feedback whenunlocking the vehicle with the RKE transmitterif the doors are open. See Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System Operation on page 100 for moreinformation.

253

Press the customization button until REMOTEDOOR UNLOCK appears on the DIC display.Press the set/reset button once to accessthe settings for this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scroll through the followingsettings:

LIGHTS OFF: The exterior lamps will not flashwhen you press the unlock button on theRKE transmitter.

LIGHTS ON (default): The exterior lamps willflash when you press the unlock button onthe RKE transmitter.



DELAY DOOR LOCKThis feature allows you to select whether or notthe locking of the vehicle’s doors and liftgatewill be delayed. When locking the doors andliftgate with the power door lock switch and a dooror the liftgate is open, this feature will delaylocking the doors and liftgate until five seconds

after the last door is closed. You will hear threechimes to signal that the delayed locking feature isin use. The key must be out of the ignition forthis feature to work. You can temporarily overridedelayed locking by pressing the power doorlock switch twice or the lock button on the RKEtransmitter twice. See Delayed Locking onpage 107 for more information.

Press the customization button until DELAYDOOR LOCK appears on the DIC display. Pressthe set/reset button once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press the customizationbutton to scroll through the following settings:

OFF: There will be no delayed locking ofthe vehicle’s doors.

ON (default): The doors will not lock untilfive seconds after the last door or the liftgate isclosed.



254

EXIT LIGHTINGThis feature allows you to select the amount oftime you want the exterior lamps to remainon when it is dark enough outside. This happensafter the key is turned from ON to OFF.

Press the customization button until EXITLIGHTING appears on the DIC display. Press theset/reset button once to access the settings forthis feature. Then press the customization buttonto scroll through the following settings:

OFF: The exterior lamps will not turn on.

30 SECONDS (default): The exterior lamps willstay on for 30 seconds.

1 MINUTE: The exterior lamps will stay on forone minute.

2 MINUTES: The exterior lamps will stay on fortwo minutes.



APPROACH LIGHTINGThis feature allows you to select whether or not tohave the exterior lights turn on briefly duringlow light periods after unlocking the vehicle usingthe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.

Press the customization button until APPROACHLIGHTING appears on the DIC display. Pressthe set/reset button once to access the settings forthis feature. Then press the customizationbutton to scroll through the following settings:

OFF: The exterior lights will not turn on when youunlock the vehicle with the RKE transmitter.

ON (default): If it is dark enough outside, theexterior lights will turn on briefly when you unlockthe vehicle with the RKE transmitter.

The lights will remain on for 20 seconds or untilthe lock button on the RKE transmitter is pressed,or the vehicle is no longer off. See RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) System Operation onpage 100 for more information.

255



CHIME VOLUMEThis feature allows you to select the volume levelof the chime.

Press the customization button until CHIMEVOLUME appears on the DIC display. Press theset/reset button once to access the settings for thisfeature. Then press the customization button toscroll through the following settings:

NORMAL (default): The chime volume will be setto a normal level.

LOUD: The chime volume will be set to a loudlevel.



PARK TILT MIRRORSIf your vehicle has this feature, it allows you toselect whether or not the outside mirror(s)will automatically tilt down when the vehicle isshifted into REVERSE (R). See Outside PowerFoldaway Mirrors on page 143 for moreinformation.

Press the customization button until PARK TILTMIRRORS appears on the DIC display. Press theset/reset button once to access the settings forthis feature. Then press the customization buttonto scroll through the following settings:

OFF (default): Neither outside mirror will be tilteddown when the vehicle is shifted intoREVERSE (R).

DRIVER MIRROR: The driver’s outside mirror willbe tilted down when the vehicle is shifted intoREVERSE (R).

PASSENGER MIRROR: The passenger’s outsidemirror will be tilted down when the vehicle isshifted into REVERSE (R).

BOTH MIRRORS: The driver’s and passenger’soutside mirrors will be tilted down when the vehicleis shifted into REVERSE (R).

256



EASY EXIT SEATIf your vehicle has this feature, it allows you toselect your preference for the automatic easy exitseat feature. See Memory Seat and Mirrors onpage 13 for more information.

Press the customization button until EASY EXITSEAT appears on the DIC display. Press theset/reset button once to access the settings for thisfeature. Then press the customization button toscroll through the following settings:

OFF (default): No automatic seat exit recall willoccur.

ON: The driver’s seat will move back when thekey is removed from the ignition.

The automatic easy exit seat movement will onlyoccur one time after the key is removed fromthe ignition.

If the automatic movement has already occurred,and you put the key back in the ignition andremove it again, the seat will stay in the originalexit position, unless a memory recall tookplace prior to removing the key again.



MEMORY SEAT RECALLIf your vehicle has this feature, it allows you toselect your preference for the remote memory seatrecall feature. See Memory Seat and Mirrors onpage 13 for more information.

Press the customization button until MEMORYSEAT RECALL appears on the DIC display. Pressthe set/reset button once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press the customizationbutton to scroll through the following settings:

OFF (default): No remote memory seat recall willoccur.

257

ON: The driver’s seat and outside mirrors willautomatically move to the stored driving positionwhen the unlock button on the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter is pressed. See “RelearnRemote Key” under DIC Operation and Displays(With DIC Buttons) on page 229 or DIC Operationand Displays (Without DIC Buttons) on page 235for more information on matching transmittersto driver ID numbers.



REMOTE STARTIf your vehicle has this feature, it allows you toturn the remote start off or on. The remotestart feature allows you to start the engine fromoutside of the vehicle using the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter. See ″Remote VehicleStart″ under Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 100 for more information.

Press the customization button until REMOTESTART appears on the DIC display. Pressthe set/reset button once to access the settings forthis feature. Then press the customizationbutton to scroll through the following settings:

OFF: The remote start feature will be disabled.

ON (default): The remote start feature willbe enabled.



FACTORY SETTINGSThis feature allows you to set all of thecustomization features back to their factory defaultsettings.

258

Press the customization button until FACTORYSETTINGS appears on the DIC display. Press theset/reset button once to access the settings forthis feature. Then press the customization buttonto scroll through the following settings:

RESTORE ALL (default): The customizationfeatures will be set to their factory default settings.

DO NOT RESTORE: The customization featureswill not be set to their factory default settings.

Choose one of the available settings and press theset/reset button while it is displayed on the DICto select it.

EXIT FEATURE SETTINGSThis feature allows you to exit the featuresettings menu.

Press the customization button until FEATURESETTINGS PRESS V TO EXIT appears inthe DIC display. Press the set/reset button once toexit the menu.

If you do not exit, pressing the customizationbutton again will return you to the beginning of thefeature settings menu.

Exiting the Feature Settings MenuThe feature settings menu will be exited when anyof the following occurs:

• The vehicle is shifted out of PARK (P).

• The vehicle is no longer in ON.

• The trip/fuel or vehicle information DIC buttonsare pressed.

• The end of the feature settings menu isreached and exited.

• A 40 second time period has elapsed with noselection made.

259

Audio System(s)Determine which radio your vehicle has and thenread the pages following to familiarize yourselfwith its features.

Driving without distraction is a necessity for asafer driving experience. See Defensive Driving onpage 322. By taking a few moments to read thismanual and get familiar with your vehicle’saudio system, you can use it with less effort, aswell as take advantage of its features. While yourvehicle is parked, set up your audio system bypresetting your favorite radio stations, setting thetone and adjusting the speakers. Then, whendriving conditions permit, you can tune toyour favorite stations using the presets andsteering wheel controls if the vehicle has them.

{CAUTION:

This system provides you with far greateraccess to audio stations and song listings.Giving extended attention to entertainmenttasks while driving can cause a crash andyou or others can be injured or killed.Always keep your eyes on the road andyour mind on the drive — avoid engagingin extended searching while driving.

Keeping your mind on the drive is important for safedriving. Here are some ways in which you can helpavoid distraction while driving.While your vehicle is parked:• Familiarize yourself with all of its controls.• Familiarize yourself with its operation.• Set up your audio system by presetting your

favorite radio stations, setting the tone, andadjusting the speakers. Then, when drivingconditions permit, you can tune to your favoriteradio stations using the presets and steeringwheel controls if the vehicle has them.

260

Notice: Before adding any sound equipment toyour vehicle, such as an audio system, CDplayer, CB radio, mobile telephone, or two-wayradio, make sure that it can be added bychecking with your dealer/retailer. Also, checkfederal rules covering mobile radio andtelephone units. If sound equipment can beadded, it is very important to do it properly.Added sound equipment may interfere with theoperation of your vehicle’s engine, radio, orother systems, and even damage them. Yourvehicle’s systems may interfere with theoperation of sound equipment that has beenadded.

Your vehicle has a feature called RetainedAccessory Power (RAP). With RAP, the audiosystem can be played even after the ignitionis turned off. See Retained Accessory Power(RAP) on page 125 for more information.

Setting the TimeMP3 Radios with a Single CD or a SingleCD and DVD PlayerIf your vehicle has a radio with a single CD or a CDand DVD player, it has a H (clock) button for settingthe time and date.1. Turn the ignition key to ACC (accessory) or

RUN. Press the power knob, located in thecenter of the radio, to turn the radio on.

2. Press the clock button and the HR, MIN, MM,DD, YYYY (hour, minute, month, day, andyear) displays.

3. Press the pushbutton located under any one ofthe labels that you want to change. Every timethe pushbutton is pressed again, the time orthe date if selected, increases by one.• Another way to increase the time or date,

is to press the right ¨ SEEK arrow orthe \ FWD (forward) button.

• To decrease the time or date, press theleft © SEEK arrow or s REV (reverse)button, or turn the f knob, located on theupper right side of the radio, to adjust theselected setting.

261

Changing the Time and Date DefaultSettingsTo change the time default setting from 12 hour to24 hour or to change the date default settingfrom month/day/year to day/month/year, followthese instructions:

1. Press the clock button and then thepushbutton located under the forward arrowthat is currently displayed on the radio screenuntil the time 12H (hour) and 24H (hour),and the date MM/DD (month and day)and DD/MM (day and month) displays.

2. Press the pushbutton located under thedesired option.

3. Press the clock button again to apply theselected default, or let the screen time out.

MP3 Radio with a Six-Disc CD PlayerIf your vehicle has a radio with a six-disc CDplayer, the radio has a MENU button instead ofthe H (clock) button to set the time and date.

To set the time and date, follow these instructions:

1. Press the MENU button.

2. Once the clock option displays, press thepushbutton located under that label. TheHR, MIN, MM, DD, YYYY displays.

3. Press the pushbutton located under any oneof the labels that you want to change. Everytime the pushbutton is pressed again, the timeor the date if selected, increases by one.

• Another way to increase the time or date,is to press the right ¨ SEEK arrow orthe \ FWD (forward) button.

• To decrease the time or date, press the leftSEEK arrow or the REV (reverse) button.You can also turn the tune knob, located onthe upper right side of the radio, to adjustthe selected setting.

262

Changing the Time and Date DefaultSettingsTo change the time default setting from 12 hour to24 hour or to change the date default settingfrom month/day/year to day/month/year, followthese instructions:

1. Press the MENU button. Once the clockoption displays, press the pushbuttonlocated under the forward arrow that iscurrently displayed on the radio screen untilthe 12H (hour) and 24H (hour), and thedate MM/DD (month and day) and DD/MM(day and month) displays.

2. Press the pushbutton located under thedesired option.

3. Press the MENU button again to apply theselected default, or let the screen time out.

Radio with CD

Radio Data System (RDS)The audio system has a Radio Data System(RDS). The RDS feature is available for use onlyon FM stations that broadcast RDS information.

Radio with CD shown, Radio with Six-Disc CD (MP3)similar

263

This system relies upon receiving specificinformation from these stations and only workswhen the information is available. While the radio istuned to an FM-RDS station, the station name orcall letters appear on the display. In rare cases, aradio station can broadcast incorrect informationthat causes the radio features to work improperly. Ifthis happens, contact the radio station.

XM™ Satellite Radio ServiceXM™ is a satellite radio service that is based inthe 48 contiguous United States and Canada.XM™ offers a large variety of coast-to-coastchannels including music, news, sports, talk,traffic/weather (U.S. subscribers), and children’sprogramming. XM™ provides digital qualityaudio and text information that includes song titleand artist name. A service fee is required inorder to receive the XM™ service. For moreinformation, contact XM™; In the U.S. atwww.xmradio.com or call 1-800-852-XMXM (9696)or in Canada at www.xmradio.ca or call1-877-GET-XMSR (438-9677).

Playing the Radio

O (Power/Volume): Press this knob to turn thesystem on and off.

Turn this knob clockwise or counterclockwise toincrease or decrease the volume.

Speed Compensated Volume (SCV): The radiohas Speed Compensated Volume (SCV). WhenSCV is on, the radio volume automatically adjuststo compensate for road and wind noise as youspeed up or slow down while driving. That way, thevolume level should sound about the same asyou drive.

To activate SCV:

1. Set the radio volume to the desired level.

2. Press the MENU button to display the radiosetup menu.

3. Press the pushbutton under the AUTOVOLUM (volume) label on the radio display.

264

4. Press the pushbutton under the desiredSpeed Compensated Volume setting(OFF, Low, Med, or High) to select the levelof radio volume compensation. Press thepushbutton located below the BACK label onthe MENU SETUP display or let the displaytime out after approximately 10 seconds. Eachhigher setting allows for more radio volumecompensation at faster vehicle speeds.

Finding a StationBAND: Press this button to switch between AM,FM, or XM™ (if equipped). The selectiondisplays.

f (Tune): Turn this knob to select radio stations.

© SEEK ¨: Press the right or left SEEKarrow to go to the next or to the previous stationand stay there.

To scan stations, press and hold either SEEKarrow for a few seconds until a beep sounds. Theradio goes to a station, plays for a few seconds,then goes to the next station. Press eitherSEEK arrow again to stop scanning.

The radio seeks and scans only stations with astrong signal that are in the selected band.

4 (Information) (XM™ Satellite Radio Service,MP3, and RDS Features): Press the informationbutton to display additional text informationrelated to the current FM-RDS or XM™ station, orMP3 song. A choice of additional informationsuch as: Channel, Song, Artist, and CAT(category) can appear. Continue pressing theinformation button to highlight the desired label, orpress the pushbutton positioned under any oneof the labels and the information about thatlabel displays.

When information is not available, No Infodisplays.

Storing a Radio Station as a FavoriteDrivers are encouraged to set up their radio stationfavorites while the vehicle is parked. Tune toyour favorite stations using the presets, favoritesbutton, and steering wheel controls, if thevehicle has this feature. See Defensive Driving onpage 322.

265

FAV (Favorites): A maximum of 36 stations canbe programmed as favorites using thesix pushbuttons positioned below the radio stationfrequency labels and by using the radio favoritespage button (FAV button). Press the FAV button togo through up to six pages of favorites, eachhaving six favorite stations available per page.Each page of favorites can contain anycombination of AM, FM, or XM™ (if equipped)stations. To store a station as a favorite, performthe following steps:

1. Tune to the desired radio station.

2. Press the FAV button to display the pagewhere you want the station stored.

3. Press and hold one of the six pushbuttonsuntil a beep sounds. When that pushbuttonis pressed and released, the station that wasset, returns.

4. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton radiostation you want stored as a favorite.

The number of favorites pages can be setup usingthe MENU button. To setup the number offavorites pages, perform the following steps:


2. Press the pushbutton located below theFAV 1-6 label.

3. Select the desired number of favorites pagesby pressing the pushbutton located below thedisplayed page numbers.

4. Press the FAV button, or let the menu timeout, to return to the original main radioscreen showing the radio station frequencylabels and to begin the process ofprogramming your favorites for the chosenamount of numbered pages.

266

Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)

BASS/MID/TREB (Bass, Midrange, orTreble): To adjust bass, midrange, or treble,press the tune knob until the tone control labelsdisplay. Continue pressing to highlight the desiredlabel, or press the pushbutton positioned underthe desired label. Turn the tune knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to adjust the highlightedsetting. You can also adjust the highlighted settingby pressing either the SEEK, FWD or REVbutton until the desired levels are obtained. If astation’s frequency is weak or if there is static,decrease the treble.

To quickly adjust bass, midrange, or treble to themiddle position, press the pushbutton positionedunder the BASS, MID, or TREB label for more thantwo seconds. A beep sounds and the leveladjusts to the middle position.

To quickly adjust all tone and speaker controls tothe middle position, press the tune knob formore than two seconds until a beep sounds.

EQ (Equalization): Press this button to selectpreset equalization settings.

To return to the manual mode, press the EQbutton until Manual displays or start to manuallyadjust the bass, midrange, or treble by pressingthe tune knob.

Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)

BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade): To adjust balanceor fade, press the tune knob until the speakercontrol labels display. Continue pressing tohighlight the desired label, or press the pushbuttonpositioned under the desired label. Turn thetune knob clockwise or counterclockwise to adjustthe highlighted setting. You can also adjust thehighlighted setting by pressing either the SEEK,FWD (forward), or REV (reverse) button untilthe desired levels are obtained.

To quickly adjust balance or fade to the middleposition, press the pushbutton positioned under theBAL or FADE label for more than two seconds.A beep sounds and the level adjusts to the middleposition.

To quickly adjust all speaker and tone controls tothe middle position, press the tune knob formore than two seconds until a beep sounds.

267

Finding a Category (CAT) Station

CAT (Category): The CAT button is used to findXM™ stations when the radio is in the XM™mode. To find XM™ channels within a desiredcategory, perform the following:

1. Press the BAND button until the XM™frequency displays. Press the CAT button todisplay the category labels on the radiodisplay. Continue pressing the CAT buttonuntil the desired category name displays.

2. Press either of the two buttons below thedesired category label to immediately tuneto the first XM™ station associated with thatcategory.

3. Rotate the tune knob, press the buttons belowthe right or left arrows displayed, or press theright or left SEEK buttons to go to the nextor previous XM™ station within the selectedcategory.

4. To exit the category search mode, press theFAV button or BAND button to display yourfavorites again.

Undesired XM™ categories can be removedthrough the setup menu. To remove an undesiredcategory, perform the following:


2. Press the pushbutton located below the XMCAT label.

3. Rotate the tune knob to display the categoryyou want removed.

4. Press the pushbutton located under theRemove label until the category namealong with the word Removed displays.

5. Repeat the steps to remove more categories.

Removed categories can be restored by pressingthe pushbutton under the Add label when aremoved category is displayed or by pressing thepushbutton under the Restore All label.

You cannot remove or add categories while thevehicle is moving faster than 5 mph (8 km/h).

268

Radio Messages

Calibration Error: The audio system has beencalibrated for your vehicle from the factory. IfCalibration Error displays, it means that the radiohas not been configured properly for yourvehicle and it must be returned to yourdealer/retailer for service.

Locked: This message displays when theTHEFTLOCK® system has locked up the radio.Take the vehicle to your dealer/retailer for service.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an errorcannot be corrected, contact your dealer/retailer.

Radio Messages for XM™ OnlySee XM Radio Messages on page 303 later in thissection for further detail.

Playing a CD (Single CD Player)Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.The player pulls it in and the CD should beginplaying.

Playing a CD(s) (Six-Disc CD Player)

LOAD ^: Press this button to load CDs into theCD player. This CD player holds up to six CDs.

To insert one CD, do the following:

1. Press and release the load button.

2. Wait for the message to insert the disc.

3. Load a CD. Insert the CD partway intothe slot, label side up. The player pulls theCD in.

To insert multiple CDs, do the following:

1. Press and hold the load button fortwo seconds. A beep sounds and LoadAll Discs displays.

2. Follow the displayed instruction on when toinsert the discs. The CD player takes up tosix CDs.

3. Press the Load button again to cancel loadingmore CDs.

If the ignition or radio is turned off, with a CD in theplayer, it stays in the player. When the ignition orradio is turned on, the CD starts playing where itstopped, if it was the last selected audio source.

269

When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol displays.As each new track starts to play, the track numberdisplays.

If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can be reduceddue to CD-R quality, the method of recording, thequality of the music that has been recorded, and theway the CD-R has been handled. There can be anincrease in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks,and/or difficulty in loading and ejecting. If theseproblems occur, check the bottom surface of theCD. If the surface of the CD is damaged, such ascracked, broken, or scratched, the CD does notplay properly. If the surface of the CD is soiled, seeCare of Your CDs and DVDs on page 320 for moreinformation.

If there is no apparent damage, try a knowngood CD.

Notice: If a label is added to a CD, or more thanone CD is inserted into the slot at a time, or anattempt is made to play scratched or damagedCDs, the CD player could be damaged. Whileusing the CD player, use only CDs in goodcondition without any label, load one CD at atime, and keep the CD player and the loadingslot free of foreign materials, liquids, anddebris.

Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caughtin the CD player. If a CD is recorded on apersonal computer and a description label isneeded, try labeling the top of the recorded CDwith a marking pen.

If an error displays, see “CD Messages” later inthis section.

Z EJECT: Press the CD eject button to ejectCD(s). To eject the CD that is currently playing,press and release this button. A beep sounds andEjecting Disc displays. Once the disc is ejected,Remove Disc displays. The CD can be removed. Ifthe CD is not removed, after several seconds,the CD is automatically pulled back into the playerand begins playing.

For the Six-Disc CD player, press and hold theeject button for two seconds to eject all discs.

f (Tune): Turn this knob to select tracks on theCD that is currently playing.

270

© SEEK ¨: Press the left SEEK arrow togo to the start of the current track, if more thanten seconds on the CD have been played. Pressthe right SEEK arrow to go to the next track. Ifeither SEEK arrow is held, or pressed multipletimes, the player continues moving backward orforward through the tracks on the CD.

s REV (Reverse): Press and hold this button toreverse playback quickly within a track. You willhear sound at a reduced volume. Release thispushbutton to resume playing the track. Theelapsed time of the track displays.

\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold thisbutton to advance playback quickly within a track.You will hear sound at a reduced volume. Releasethis button to resume playing the track. The elapsedtime of the track displays.

RDM (Random): With the random setting, thetracks can be listened to in random, rather thansequential order, on one CD or all CDs in a six-discCD player. To use random, do one of the following:

• Press the CD/AUX button, or for a single CDplayer, insert a disc partway into the slot of theCD player. A RDM label displays.

To play the tracks from the single CD in randomorder, press the pushbutton positioned underthe RDM label until Random Current Disc isdisplayed. Press the pushbutton again to turnoff random play.

• Press the CD/AUX button, or for a six-disc CDplayer, press and hold the LOAD button. Abeep sounds and Load All Discs displays.Insert one or more discs partway into the slot ofthe CD player.To play tracks from all CDs loaded in a six-discCD player in random order, press thepushbutton positioned under the RDM labeluntil Randomize All Discs displays. Press thesame pushbutton again to turn off random play.

BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio whena CD is playing. The CD remains inside the radio forfuture listening.

CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to playa CD when listening to the radio. The CD icon and amessage showing disc and/or track numberdisplays when a CD is in the player. Press thisbutton again and the system automaticallysearches for an auxiliary input device, such as aportable audio player. If a portable audio player isnot connected, “no input device found” displays.

271

Playing an MP3/WMA CD-R orCD-RW DiscIf you have a radio with a six-disc CD player, ithas the capability of playing an MP3/WMA CD-Ror CD-RW disc. For more information on howto play an MP3/WMA CD-R or CD-RW disc, see“Using an MP3” in the index.

CD Messages

CHECK DISC: If this message displays and/orthe CD comes out, it could be for one of thefollowing reasons:

• It is very hot. When the temperature returns tonormal, the CD should play.

• You are driving on a very rough road.When the road becomes smoother, the CDshould play.

• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, orupside down.

• The air is very humid. If so, wait about anhour and try again.

• There could have been a problem whileburning the CD.

• The label could be caught in the CD player.

If the CD is not playing correctly, for any otherreason, try a known good CD.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannotbe corrected, contact your dealer/retailer. If theradio displays an error message, write it down andprovide it to your dealer/retailer when reportingthe problem.

Using the Auxiliary Input JackYour radio system has an auxiliary input jacklocated on the lower right side of the faceplate.This is not an audio output; do not plug theheadphone set into the front auxiliary input jack.You can however, connect an external audiodevice such as an iPod, laptop computer, MP3player, CD changer, or cassette tape player, etc. tothe auxiliary input jack for use as another sourcefor audio listening.

Drivers are encouraged to set up any auxiliarydevice while the vehicle is in PARK (P). SeeDefensive Driving on page 322 for moreinformation on driver distraction.

272

To use a portable audio player, connect a 3.5 mm(1/8 inch) cable to the radio’s front auxiliaryinput jack. When a device is connected, press theradio CD/AUX button to begin playing audiofrom the device over the vehicle speakers.

O (Power/Volume): Turn this knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase or decrease thevolume of the portable player. You might need todo additional volume adjustments from theportable device if the volume does not go loud orsoft enough.

BAND: Press this button to listen to the radiowhen a portable audio device is playing. Theportable audio device continues playing, so youmight want to stop it or turn it off.

CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to playa CD when a portable audio device is playing.Press this button again and the system beginsplaying audio from the connected portable audioplayer. If a portable audio player is notconnected, “No input device found” displays.

Radio with CD and DVD

If your vehicle has a Rear Seat Entertainment(RSE) system, it has a CD/DVD radio. See RearSeat Entertainment System on page 305 formore information on the vehicle’s RSE system.

273

The DVD player is the top slot on the radiofaceplate. The player is capable of reading the DTSprogrammed DVD Audio or DVD Video media (DTSand DTS Digital Surround are registeredtrademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc.).Manufactured under license fromDolby® Laboratories. Dolby® and the double-Dsymbol are trademarks of Dolby® Laboratories.

Radio Data System (RDS)The audio system has a Radio Data System(RDS). The RDS feature is available for use onlyon FM stations that broadcast RDS information.This system relies upon receiving specificinformation from these stations and only workswhen the information is available. While the radiois tuned to an FM-RDS station, the stationname or call letters display. In rare cases, a radiostation can broadcast incorrect information thatcauses the radio features to work improperly. If thishappens, contact the radio station.

XM™ Satellite Radio ServiceXM™ is a satellite radio service that is based inthe 48 contiguous United States and Canada.XM™ offers a large variety of coast-to-coastchannels including music, news, sports, talk,traffic/weather (U.S. subscribers), and children’sprogramming. XM™ provides digital qualityaudio and text information that includes song titleand artist name. A service fee is required inorder to receive the XM™ service. For moreinformation, contact XM™; In the U.S. atwww.xmradio.com or call 1-800-852-XMXM (9696)or in Canada at www.xmradio.ca or call1-877-GET-XMSR (438-9677).

Playing the Radio

O (Power/Volume): Press this knob to turn thesystem on and off.

Turn this knob clockwise or counterclockwise toincrease or decrease the volume.

274

Speed Compensated Volume (SCV): The radiohas Speed Compensated Volume (SCV). WhenSCV is on, the radio volume automatically adjuststo compensate for road and wind noise as youspeed up or slow down while driving. That way, thevolume level should sound about the same asyou drive. To activate SCV:

1. Set the radio volume to the desired level.


3. Press the pushbutton under the AUTOVOLUM (volume) label on the radio display.

4. Press the pushbutton under the desired SCVsetting (OFF, Low, Med, or High) to select thelevel of radio volume compensation. Pressthe pushbutton located below the BACK labelon the MENU SETUP display or let thedisplay time out after approximately10 seconds. Each higher setting allows formore radio volume compensation atfaster vehicle speeds.

Finding a Station

BAND: Press this button to switch between AM,FM, or XM™ (if equipped). The display showsthe selection.

f (Tune): Turn this knob to select radio stations.

© SEEK ¨: Press the right or left SEEKarrow to go to the next or to the previous stationand stay there.

To scan stations, press and hold either SEEKarrow for a few seconds until a beep sounds. Theradio goes to a station, plays for a few seconds,then goes to the next station. Press eitherSEEK arrow again to stop scanning.

The radio seeks and scans only stations with astrong signal that are in the selected band.

275

4 (Information) (XM™ Satellite Radio Service,MP3, and RDS Features): Press the informationbutton to display additional text informationrelated to the current FM-RDS or XM™ station, orMP3 song. A choice of additional informationsuch as: Channel, Song, Artist, and CAT(category) can appear. Continue pressing theinformation button to highlight the desired label, orpress the pushbutton positioned under any oneof the labels and the information about thatlabel displays.

When information is not available, No Infodisplays.

Storing a Radio Station as a FavoriteDrivers are encouraged to set up their radio stationfavorites while the vehicle is parked. Tune toyour favorite stations using the presets, favoritesbutton, and steering wheel controls, if thevehicle has them. See Defensive Driving onpage 322.

FAV (Favorites): A maximum of 36 stations canbe programmed as favorites using thesix pushbuttons positioned below the radio stationfrequency labels and by using the radio favoritespage button (FAV button).

Press the FAV button to go through up tosix pages of favorites, each having six favoritestations available per page. Each page of favoritescan contain any combination of AM, FM, orXM™ (if equipped) stations. To store a station asa favorite, perform the following steps:

1. Tune to the desired radio station.

2. Press the FAV button to display the pagewhere you want the station stored.

3. Press and hold one of the six pushbuttonsuntil a beep sounds. When that pushbuttonis pressed and released, the station that wasset, returns.

4. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton radiostation you want stored as a favorite.

The number of favorites pages can be setup usingthe MENU button. To setup the number offavorites pages, perform the following steps:


2. Press the pushbutton located below theFAV 1-6 label.

276

3. Select the desired number of favorites pagesby pressing the pushbutton located below thedisplayed page numbers.

4. Press the FAV button, or let the menu timeout, to return to the original main radioscreen showing the radio station frequencylabels and to begin the process ofprogramming your favorites for the chosenamount of numbered pages.

Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)

BASS/MID/TREB (Bass, Midrange, orTreble): To adjust bass, midrange, or treble,press the tune knob until the tone control labelsdisplay. Continue pressing to highlight the desiredlabel, or press the pushbutton positioned underthe desired label. Turn the tune knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to adjust the highlightedsetting. If a station’s frequency is weak or if thereis static, decrease the treble.

To quickly adjust bass, midrange, or treble to themiddle position, press the pushbutton positionedunder the BASS, MID, or TREB label for more thantwo seconds. A beep sounds and the leveladjusts to the middle position.

To quickly adjust all tone and speaker controls tothe middle position, press the tune knob formore than two seconds until a beep sounds.

EQ (Equalization): Press this button to choosebass and treble equalization settings designed fordifferent types of music. The choices are pop,rock, country, talk, jazz, and classical. SelectingMANUAL or changing bass or treble, returnsthe EQ to the manual bass and treble settings.

Unique EQ settings can be saved for each source.

If your radio has a Bose® audio system, the EQsettings are either MANUAL or TALK.

Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)

BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade): To adjust balanceor fade, press the tune knob until the speakercontrol labels display. Press the pushbuttonpositioned under the desired label. Turn the tuneknob clockwise or counterclockwise to adjustthe highlighted setting. You can also adjust thehighlighted setting by pressing either the SEEK,FWD, or REV button until the desired levelsare obtained.

277

To quickly adjust balance or fade to the middleposition, press the pushbutton positioned under theBAL or FADE label for more than two seconds.A beep sounds and the level adjusts to the middleposition.

To quickly adjust both the balance and fade to themiddle position at one time, press the tuneknob for more than two seconds until a beepsounds.

If the Rear Seat Audio (RSA) is turned on, theradio disables FADE and mutes the rear speakers.

Finding a Category (CAT) Station

CAT (Category): The CAT button is used to findXM™ stations when the radio is in the XM™mode. To find XM™ channels within a desiredcategory, perform the following:

1. Press the BAND button until the XM™frequency displays. Press the CAT button todisplay the category labels on the radiodisplay. Continue pressing the CAT buttonuntil the desired category name displays.Another way to navigate the category list is topress the REV button or the FWD button.

2. Press either of the two buttons below thedesired category label to immediately tune tothe first XM™ station associated with thatcategory.

3. Turn the tune knob, press the buttons belowthe right or left arrows displayed, or press theright or left SEEK buttons to go to the next orprevious XM™ station within the selectedcategory.

4. To exit the category search mode, press theFAV button or BAND button to display yourfavorites again.

Undesired XM™ categories can be removedthrough the setup menu. To remove an undesiredcategory, perform the following:1. Press the MENU button to display the radio

setup menu.2. Press the pushbutton located below the XM

CAT label.3. Turn the tune knob to display the category you

want removed.

4. Press the pushbutton located under theRemove label until the category namealong with the word Removed displays.

5. Repeat the steps to remove more categories.

278

Removed categories can be restored by pressingthe pushbutton under the Add label when aremoved category is displayed or by pressing thepushbutton under the Restore All label.

You cannot remove or add categories while thevehicle is moving faster than 5 mph (8 km/h).

Radio Messages

Calibration Error: The audio system has beencalibrated for your vehicle from the factory. IfCalibration Error displays, it means that the radiohas not been configured properly for yourvehicle and it must be returned to yourdealer/retailer for service.

Locked: This message displays when theTHEFTLOCK® system has locked up the radio.Take the vehicle to your dealer/retailer for service.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an errorcannot be corrected, contact your dealer/retailer.

Radio Messages for XM™ OnlySee XM Radio Messages on page 303 later in thissection for further detail.

Playing a CD (In Either the DVD orCD Slot)Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. Theplayer pulls it in and the CD should begin playing(loading a disc into the system, depending onmedia type and format ranges from 5 to 20 secondsfor a CD, and up to 30 seconds for a DVD to beginplaying).

If the ignition or radio is turned off, with a CD inthe player, it stays in the player. When the ignitionor radio is turned on, the CD starts playingwhere it stopped, if it was the last selected audiosource. The CD is controlled by the buttonson the radio faceplate or by the RSA unit. SeeRear Seat Audio (RSA) on page 315 for moreinformation. The DVD/CD decks, (upper slot is theDVD deck and the lower slot is the CD deck) ofthe radio are compatible with most audio CDs,CD-R, CD-RW, and MP3s.

When a CD is inserted, the text label DVD or CDsymbol appears on the left side of the radiodisplay. As each new track starts to play, the tracknumber displays.

279

If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can bereduced due to CD-R quality, the method ofrecording, the quality of the music that has beenrecorded, and the way the CD-R has beenhandled. There can be an increase in skipping,difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in loadingand ejecting. If these problems occur, check thebottom surface of the CD. If the surface of the CDis damaged, such as cracked, broken, orscratched, the CD does not play properly. If thesurface of the CD is soiled, see Care of Your CDsand DVDs on page 320 for more information.


Notice: If a label is added to a CD, or morethan one CD is inserted into the slot at a time,or an attempt is made to play scratched ordamaged CDs, the CD player could bedamaged. While using the CD player, use onlyCDs in good condition without any label,load one CD at a time, and keep the CD playerand the loading slot free of foreign materials,liquids, and debris.



Z CD (Eject): Press and release the CD ejectbutton to eject the CD that is currently playingin the bottom slot. A beep sounds and EjectingDisc displays. Once the disc is ejected, RemoveDisc displays. The CD can be removed. If theCD is not removed, after several seconds, the CDis automatically pulled back into the player.

If loading and reading of a CD cannot becompleted, such as unknown format, etc., and thedisc fails to eject, press and hold the DVD ejectbutton for more than five seconds to force the discto eject.

280

Z DVD (Eject): Press and release the DVDeject button to eject the CD that is currently playingin the top slot. You will hear a beep and EjectingDisc will be displayed. Once the disc is ejected,Remove Disc will appear on display. The CD canbe removed. If the CD is not removed, afterseveral seconds, the CD will be automaticallypulled back into the player.

If loading and reading of a CD cannot becompleted, such as unknown format, etc., and thedisc fails to eject, press and hold the DVD ejectbutton for more than five seconds to force the discto eject.

f (Tune): Turn this knob to select tracks on theCD that is currently playing.

© SEEK ¨: Press the left SEEK arrow to go tothe start of the current track, if more thanfive seconds on the CD have been played. If lessthan five seconds on the CD has played, theprevious track plays. Press the right SEEK arrowto go to the next track. If either SEEK arrow isheld, or pressed multiple times, the playercontinues moving backward or forward through thetracks on the CD.

s REV (Reverse): Press and hold this buttonto reverse playback quickly within a track. You willhear sound at a reduced volume. Release thispushbutton to resume playing the track. Theelapsed time of the track displays.

\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold thisbutton to advance playback quickly within a track.You will hear sound at a reduced volume.Release this button to resume playing the track.The elapsed time of the track displays.

RDM (Random): With the random setting, thetracks can be listened to in random, ratherthan sequential order. To play the tracks from theCD, press the DVD/CD AUX button when notsourced to the CD, or insert a disc partway intothe slot. A RDM label displays. Press thepushbutton positioned under the RDM label untilRandom Current Disc displays. Press thepushbutton again to turn off random play.

BAND: Press this button to listen to the radiowhen a CD or DVD is playing. The CD orDVD remains inside the radio for future listeningor viewing entertainment.

281

DVD/CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button tocycle through DVD, CD, or Auxiliary when listeningto the radio. The DVD/CD text label and a messageshowing the track or chapter number displays whena disc is in either slot. Press this button again andthe system automatically searches for an auxiliaryinput device, such as a portable audio player. If aportable audio player is not connected, “No auxinput device” displays. If a disc is in both the DVDslot and the CD slot the DVD/CD AUX button cyclesbetween the two sources and not indicate “No auxinput device”. If a front auxiliary device isconnected, the DVD/CD AUX button cycles throughall available options, such as: DVD slot, CD slot,Front Auxiliary, and Rear Auxiliary (if available).See “Using the Auxiliary Input Jack(s)” later in thissection, or “Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks” under, RearSeat Entertainment System on page 305 for moreinformation.

If a disc is inserted into top DVD slot, the rear seatoperator can turn on the video screen and use theremote control to navigate the CD (tracks only)through the remote control.

Audio OutputOnly one audio source can be heard through thespeakers at one time. An audio source isdefined as DVD slot, CD slot, XM™, FM/AM,Front Auxiliary Jack, or Rear Auxiliary Jack.

Press the power button to turn the radio on. Theradio can be heard through all of the vehiclespeakers.

Front seat passengers can listen to the radio (AM,FM, or XM) by pressing the BAND button or theDVD/CD AUX button to select CD slot, DVDslot, front or rear auxiliary input (if available).

If a playback device is plugged into the radio’sfront auxiliary input jack or the rear auxiliary jack,the front seat passengers are able to listen toplayback from this source through the vehiclespeakers. See “Using the Auxiliary Input Jack(s)”later in this section, or “Audio/Video (A/V)Jacks” under, Rear Seat Entertainment System onpage 305 for more information.

In some vehicles, depending on audio options, therear speakers can be muted when the RSApower is turned on. See Rear Seat Audio (RSA)on page 315 for more information.

282

Playing an MP3/WMA CD-R orCD-RW DiscYour radio with CD and DVD has the capability ofplaying an MP3/WMA CD-R or CD-RW disc.For more information on how to play an MP3/WMACD-R or CD-RW disc, see “Using an MP3” inthe index.

CD MessagesIf these messages display and/or the CD comesout, it could be for one of the following reasons:

Optical Error: If the disc was insertedupside down.

Disk Read Error: If a disc was inserted with aninvalid or unknown format.

Player Error: If there are disc LOAD or discEJECT problems.

• It is very hot. When the temperature returns tonormal, the CD should play.

• You are driving on a very rough road.When the road becomes smoother, the CDshould play.

• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, orupside down.

• The air is very humid. If so, wait about anhour and try again.

• There could have been a problem whileburning the CD.

• The label could be caught in the CD player.

If the CD is not playing correctly, for anyother reason, try a known good CD.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannotbe corrected, contact your dealer/retailer. If theradio displays an error message, write it down andprovide it to your dealer/retailer when reportingthe problem.

Using the DVD PlayerThe DVD player is controlled by the buttons onthe remote control, or by the RSA system,or by the buttons on the radio faceplate. See“Remote Control”, under Rear Seat EntertainmentSystem on page 305 and Rear Seat Audio(RSA) on page 315 for more information.

The DVD player is only compatible with DVDs ofthe appropriate region code that is printed onthe jacket of most DVDs.

283

The DVD slot of the radio is compatible with mostaudio CDs, CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-Video,DVD-Audio, DVD-R/RW, DVD+R/RW media alongwith MP3 and WMA formats.

If an error message appears on the video screenor the radio, see “DVD Display Error Messages”under, Rear Seat Entertainment System onpage 305 and “DVD Radio Error Messages” in thissection for more information.

Playing a DVD

DVD/CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button tocycle through DVD, CD, or Auxiliary when listeningto the radio. The DVD/CD text label and a messageshowing track or chapter number displays when adisc is in either slot. Press this button again and thesystem automatically searches for an auxiliary inputdevice, such as a portable audio player. If aportable audio player is not connected, “No auxinput device” displays. If a disc is in both the DVDslot and the CD slot the DVD/CD AUX button cyclesbetween the two sources and not indicate “No auxinput device”. If a front auxiliary device isconnected, the DVD/CD AUX button cycles throughall available options, such as: DVD slot, CD slot,Front Auxiliary, and Rear Auxiliary (if available).

See “Using the Auxiliary Input Jack(s)” later in thissection, or “Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks” under, RearSeat Entertainment System on page 305 for moreinformation.

O (Power): Press this knob to turn the radio onor off. Turn this knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase or decrease thevolume. Press and hold the knob for more thantwo seconds to turn off the entire radio andRear Seat Entertainment (RSE) system and tostart the parental control feature. Parental controlprevents the rear seat occupant from operatingthe Rear Seat Audio (RSA) system or remotecontrol.

A lock symbol appears next to the clock display.The parental control feature remains on untilyou press and hold this button for more thantwo seconds again, or until the driver turnsthe ignition off and exits the vehicle.

284

f (Tune): Turn this knob to change tracks on aCD or DVD, to manually tune a radio station, or tochange clock or date settings, while in the clockor date setting mode. See the informationgiven earlier in this section specific to the radio,CD, and the DVD. Also, see Setting the Timeon page 261, for setting the clock and date.

© SEEK (Previous Track/Chapter): Press thisbutton to return to the start of the current trackor chapter. Press this button again to go tothe previous track or chapter. This button mightnot work when the DVD is playing the copyrightinformation or the previews.

SEEK ¨ (Next Track/Chapter): Press thisbutton to go to the next track or chapter. Thisbutton might not work when the DVD is playing thecopyright information or the previews.

s REV (Reverse): Press this button to quicklyreverse the CD or DVD, at five times the normalspeed. The radio displays the elapsed time while infast reverse. To stop fast reversing, press thisbutton again. This button might not work when theDVD is playing the copyright information or thepreviews.

\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press this button tofast forward the CD or DVD. The radio displays theelapsed time and fast forwards five times thenormal speed. To stop fast forwarding, press thisbutton again. This button might not work whenthe DVD is playing the copyright information or thepreviews.

Z (Eject): Press this button to eject a CD orDVD. If a CD or DVD is ejected, but not removed,the player automatically pulls it back in after15 seconds.

If loading and reading of a CD cannot becompleted, because of an unknown format, etc.,and the disc fails to eject, press and hold theCD eject button for more than five seconds to forcethe disc to eject.

DVD-V (Video) Display ButtonsOnce a DVD-V is inserted, the radio display menushows several tag options for DVD playing.Press the pushbuttons located under any desiredtag option during DVD playback. See the tagoptions listed below for more information.

285

The rear seat passenger can navigate the DVD-Vmenus and controls through the remote control.See “Remote Control”, under Rear SeatEntertainment System on page 305 for moreinformation. The Video Screen automatically turnson when the DVD-V is inserted into the DVD slot.

r / j (Play/Pause): Press either the play orpause icon displayed on the radio system,to toggle between pausing or restarting playbackof a DVD. If the forward arrow is showing ondisplay, the system is in pause mode. If the pauseicon is showing on display, the system is inplayback mode. If the DVD screen is off, press theplay button to turn the screen on.

Some DVDs begin playing after the previews havefinished, although there could be a delay of upto 30 seconds. If the DVD does not begin playingthe movie automatically, press the pushbuttonlocated under the play/pause symbol tag displayedon the radio. If the DVD still does not play, referto the on-screen instructions, if available.

c (Stop): Press this button to stop playing,rewinding, or fast forwarding a DVD.

r (Enter): Press this button to select thechoices that are highlighted in any menu.

y (Menu): Press this button to access the DVDmenu. The DVD menu is different on everyDVD. Use the pushbuttons located under thenavigation arrows to navigate the cursor throughthe DVD menu. After making a selection press theenter button. This button only operates whenusing a DVD.

Nav (Navigate): Press this button to displaydirectional arrows for navigating through themenus.

q (Return): Press this button to exit the currentactive menu and return to the previous menu.This button operates only when a DVD is playingand a menu is active.

286

DVD-A (Audio) Display ButtonsOnce a DVD-A is inserted, radio display menushows several tag options for DVD playing. Pressthe pushbuttons located under any desired tagoption during DVD playback. See the tag optionslisted below for more information.

The rear seat operator can navigate the DVD-Amenus and controls through the remote control.See “Remote Control”, under Rear SeatEntertainment System on page 305 for moreinformation. The Video Screen does notautomatically power on when the DVD-A isinserted into the DVD slot. It must be manuallyturned on by the rear seat occupant throughthe remote control power button.

r / j (Play/Pause): Press either the play orpause icon displayed on the radio system,to toggle between pausing or restarting playbackof a DVD. If the forward arrow is showing ondisplay, the system is in pause mode. If the pauseicon is showing on display, the system is inplayback mode.

q Group r: Press this button to cycle throughmusical groupings on the DVD-A disc.

Nav (Navigate): Press this button to displaydirectional arrows for navigating through themenus.

e (Audio Stream): Press this button to cyclethrough audio steam formats located on a DVD-Adisc. There is not any type of notification for thecustomer to see through the radio display, but VSMhas a text field that shows audio stream changing.

Inserting a DiscTo play a disc, gently insert the disc, with the labelside up, into the loading slot. The DVD player mightnot accept some paper labeled media. The playerstarts loading the disc into the system and display“Loading Disc” on the radio display. At the sametime, the radio displays a softkey menu of option(s).Some discs automatically play the movie whileothers default to the softkey menu display whichrequires the Play, Enter, or Navigation softkeys tobe pressed; either by softkey or by the rear seatpassenger using the remote control.Loading a disc into the system, dependingon media type and format, ranges from5 to 20 seconds for a CD, and up to 30 secondsfor a DVD.

287

Stopping and Resuming PlaybackTo stop playing a DVD without turning off thesystem, press the stop button on the remotecontrol, or press the pushbutton located under thestop or the play/pause symbol tags displayedon the radio. If the radio head is sourced tosomething other than DVD-V, press the DVD/CDAUX button to make DVD-V the active source.

To resume DVD playback, press the play/pausebutton on the remote control, or press thepushbutton located under the play/pause symboltag displayed on the radio. The DVD should resumeplay from where it last stopped if the disc has notbeen ejected and the stop button has not beenpressed twice on the remote control. If the disc hasbeen ejected or the stop button has been pressedtwice on the remote control, the disc resumesplaying at the beginning of the disc.

Ejecting a DiscPress the eject button on the radio to eject thedisc. If a disc is ejected from the radio, butnot removed, the radio reloads the disc after ashort period of time. The disc is stored in the radio.The radio does not resume play of the discautomatically. If the RSA system is sourced to the

DVD, the movie when reloaded into the DVDplayer begins to play again. In case loading andreading of a DVD or CD cannot be completed(unknown format, etc.), and the disc fails to eject,press and hold the DVD Eject button morethan 5 seconds to force the disc to eject.

DVD Radio Error Messages

Player Error: This message displays when thereare disc load or eject problems.

Disc Format Error: This message displays, if thedisc is inserted with the disc label wrong sideup, or if the disc is damaged.

Disc Region Error: This message displays, if thedisc is not from a correct region.

No Disc Inserted: This message displays, if nodisc is present when the EJECT or DVD/CD AUXbutton is pressed on the radio.

Using the Auxiliary Input Jack(s)Your radio system has an auxiliary input jacklocated on the lower right side of the faceplate.This is not an audio output; do not plug theheadphone set into the front auxiliary input jack.You can however, connect an external audio

288

device such as an iPod, laptop computer, MP3player, CD player, or cassette tape player, etc. tothe auxiliary input jack for use as anothersource for audio listening.Drivers are encouraged to set up any auxiliarydevice while the vehicle is in PARK (P). SeeDefensive Driving on page 322 for moreinformation on driver distraction.To use a portable audio player, connect a 1/8 inch(3.5 mm) cable to the radio’s front auxiliaryinput jack. When a device is connected, the radioautomatically begins playing audio from thedevice over the vehicle speakers.

To listen to a device through the rear auxiliary inputover the speakers, cycle the DVD/CD Aux buttonon the radio faceplate until “Rear Aux Input”displays on the radio. The RSA or DVD Screenmust be on in order for the radio to source to rearauxiliary.

O (Power/Volume): Turn this knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase or decrease thevolume of the portable player. You might need to doadditional volume adjustments from the portabledevice if the volume does not go loud or softenough.

BAND: Press this button to listen to the radiowhen a portable audio device is playing. Theportable audio device continues playing, so youmight want to stop it or power it off.

DVD/CD AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button tocycle through DVD, CD, or Auxiliary when listeningto the radio. The DVD/CD text label and a messageshowing track or chapter number displays when adisc is in either slot. Press this button again and thesystem automatically searches for an auxiliary inputdevice, such as a portable audio player. If aportable audio player is not connected, “No auxinput device” displays. If a disc is in both the DVDslot and the CD slot the DVD/CD AUX button cyclesbetween the two sources and not indicate “No auxinput device”. If a front auxiliary device isconnected, the DVD/CD AUX button cycles throughall available options, such as: DVD slot, CD slot,Front Auxiliary, and Rear Auxiliary (if available).See “Using the Auxiliary Input Jack(s)” later in thissection, or “Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks” under, RearSeat Entertainment System on page 305 for moreinformation.

289

Using an MP3 (Radio with CD orSix-Disc CD Player)

MP3/WMA CD-R or CD-RW DiscThe radio plays MP3/WMA files that were recordedon a CD-R or CD-RW disc. The files can berecorded with the following fixed bit rates: 32 kbps,40 kbps, 56 kbps, 64 kbps, 80 kbps, 96 kbps,112 kbps, 128 kbps, 160 kbps, 192 kbps,224 kbps, 256 kbps, and 320 kbps or a variablebit rate. Song title, artist name, and albumare available for display by the radio whenrecorded using ID3 tags version 1 and 2.

Compressed AudioThe radio also plays discs that contain bothuncompressed CD audio (.CDA files) andMP3/WMA files. By default the radio shows theMP3 label on the left side of the screen but playsboth file formats in the order in which theywere recorded to the disc.

MP3/WMA FormatIf you burn your own MP3/WMA disc on apersonal computer:

• Make sure the MP3/WMA files are recordedon a CD-R or CD-RW disc.

• Do not mix standard audio and MP3/WMAfiles on one disc.

• The CD player is able to read and play amaximum of 50 folders, 15 playlists, anda combined total of 512 folders and files.

• Create a folder structure that makes it easyto find songs while driving. Organize songsby albums using one folder for each album.Each folder or album should contain 18 songsor less.

• Avoid subfolders. The system can support upto eight subfolders deep, however, keep thetotal number of folders to a minimum inorder to reduce the complexity and confusionin trying to locate a particular folder duringplayback.

• Make sure playlists have a .mp3 or .wplextension (other file extensions mightnot work).

290

• Minimize the length of the file, folder, or playlistnames. Long file, folder, or playlist names, or acombination of a large number of files andfolders, or playlists can cause the player to beunable to play up to the maximum number offiles, folders, playlists, or sessions. If you wishto play a large number of files, folders, playlistsor sessions, minimize the length of the file,folder, or playlist name. Long names also takeup more space on the display, potentiallygetting cut off.

• Finalize the audio disc before you burn it.Trying to add music to an existing disc mightcause the disc not to function in the player.

Playlists can be changed by using the previous andnext folder buttons, the tuner knob, or the seekbuttons. An MP3/WMA CD-R or CD-RW that wasrecorded can also be played using no file folders.If a CD-R or CD-RW contains more than themaximum of 50 folders, 15 playlists, and acombined total of 512 folders and files, the playerlets you access and navigate up to the maximum,but all items over the maximum are not accessible.

Root DirectoryThe root directory of the CD-R or CD-RW istreated as a folder. If the root directory hascompressed audio files, the directory is displayedas the CD label. All files contained directlyunder the root directory are accessed prior to anyroot directory folders. However, playlists (Px)are always accessed before root folders or files.

If a disc contains both uncompressed CDaudio (.CDA) and MP3/WMA files, a folder underthe root directory called CD accesses all ofthe CD audio tracks on the disc.

Empty Directory or FolderIf a root directory or a folder exists somewhere inthe file structure that contains onlyfolders/subfolders and no compressed files directlybeneath them, the player advances to the nextfolder in the file structure that contains compressedaudio files. The empty folder does not display.

291

No FolderWhen the CD-R or CD-RW contains onlycompressed files, the files are located under theroot folder. The next and previous folder functiondoes not display on a CD-R or CD-RW thatwas recorded without folders or playlists.

When the CD-R or CD-RW contains only playlistsand compressed audio files, but no folders, allfiles are located under the root folder. The folderdown and the folder up buttons search playlists(Px) first and then goes to the root folder.

Order of PlayTracks recorded to the CD-R or CD-RW areplayed in the following order:

• Play begins from the first track in the firstplaylist and continues sequentially throughall tracks in each playlist. When the last trackof the last playlist has played, play continuesfrom the first track of the first playlist.

• Play begins from the first track in the firstfolder and continues sequentially throughall tracks in each folder. When the last track ofthe last folder has played, play continuesfrom the first track of the first folder.

When play enters a new folder, the display doesnot automatically show the new folder name unlessyou have chosen the folder mode as the defaultdisplay. The new track name displays.

File System and NamingThe song name that displays is the song namethat is contained in the ID3 tag. If the song name isnot present in the ID3 tag, then the radio displaysthe file name without the extension (suchas .mp3) as the track name.

Track names longer than 32 characters or fourpages are shortened. Parts of words on thelast page of text and the extension of the filenamedoes not display.

Preprogrammed PlaylistsPreprogrammed playlists that were created usingWinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™software can be accessed, however, they cannotbe edited using the radio. These playlists aretreated as special folders containing compressedaudio song files.

292

Playing an MP3/WMAInsert a CD-R or CD-RW partway into the slot(Single CD Player), or press the load button andwait for the message to insert disc (Six-DiscCD Player), label side up. The player pulls it in,and the CD-R or CD-RW should begin playing.

If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD-R orCD-RW in the player, it stays in the player.When the ignition or radio is turned on, the CD-Ror CD-RW starts to play where it stopped, if itwas the last selected audio source.

As each new track starts to play, the track numberand song title displays.

If playing a CD-R or CD-RW, the sound qualitycan be reduced due to CD-R or CD-RW quality,the method of recording, the quality of themusic that has been recorded, and the way theCD-R or CD-RW has been handled. There can bean increase in skipping, difficulty in findingtracks, and/or difficulty in loading and ejecting. Ifthese problems occur, check the bottom surface ofthe CD. If the surface of the CD is damaged,such as cracked, broken, or scratched, the CD

does not play properly. If the surface of the CD issoiled, see Care of Your CDs and DVDs onpage 320 for more information.


Notice: If a label is added to a CD, or morethan one CD is inserted into the slot at a time,or an attempt is made to play scratched ordamaged CDs, the CD player could bedamaged. While using the CD player, use onlyCDs in good condition without any label,load one CD at a time, and keep the CD playerand the loading slot free of foreign materials,liquids, and debris.



293

Z EJECT: Press the CD eject button to ejectCD-R(s) or CD-RW(s). To eject the CD-R orCD-RW that is currently playing, press and releasethis button. A beep sounds and Ejecting Discdisplays. Once the disc is ejected, Remove Discdisplays. The CD-R or CD-RW can be removed.If the CD-R or CD-RW is not removed, afterseveral seconds, the CD-R or CD-RW automaticallypulls back into the player and begins playing. Forthe Six-Disc CD player, press and hold the ejectbutton for two seconds to eject all discs.

f (Tune): Turn this knob to select MP3/WMAfiles on the CD-R or CD-RW currently playing.

© SEEK ¨: Press the left SEEK arrow to go tothe start of the current MP3/WMA file, if morethan ten seconds have played. Press theright SEEK arrow to go to the next MP3/WMA file.If either SEEK arrow is held or pressed multipletimes, the player continues moving backwardor forward through MP3/WMA files on the CD.

S c (Previous Folder): Press the pushbuttonpositioned under the Folder label to go to thefirst track in the previous folder.

c T (Next Folder): Press the pushbuttonpositioned under the Folder label to go to the firsttrack in the next folder.

s REV (Reverse): Press and hold this buttonto reverse playback quickly within an MP3/WMAfile. Sound is heard at a reduced volume. Releasethis button to resume playing the file. Theelapsed time of the file displays.

\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold thisbutton to advance playback quickly within anMP3/WMA file. Sound is heard at a reducedvolume. Release this button to resume playing thefile. The elapsed time of the file displays.

RDM (Random): With the random setting,MP3/WMA files on the CD-R or CD-RW can belistened to in random, rather than sequential order,on one CD-R or CD-RW, or all discs in a six-discCD player. To use random, do one of the following:• To play MP3/WMA files from the CD-R or

CD-RW in random order, press the pushbuttonpositioned under the RDM label until RandomCurrent Disc displays. Press the samepushbutton again to turn off random play.

294

• To play songs from all CDs loaded in a six-discCD player in random order, press thepushbutton positioned under the RDM labeluntil Randomize All Discs displays. Press thesame pushbutton again to turn off random play.

h (Music Navigator): Use the musicnavigator feature to play MP3/WMA files on theCD-R or CD-RW in order by artist or album. Pressthe pushbutton located below the music navigatorlabel. The player scans the disc to sort the files byartist and album ID3 tag information. It might takeseveral minutes to scan the disc depending on thenumber of MP3/WMA files recorded to the CD-R orCD-RW. The radio can begin playing while it isscanning the disc in the background. When thescan is finished, the CD-R or CD-RW beginsplaying again.Once the disc has scanned, the player defaults toplaying MP3/WMA files in order by artist. Thecurrent artist playing is shown on the second line ofthe display between the arrows. Once all songs bythat artist are played, the player moves to the nextartist in alphabetical order on the CD-R or CD-RWand begins playing MP3/WMA files by that artist.

To listen to MP3/WMA files by another artist, pressthe pushbutton located below either arrow button.The CD goes to the next or previous artist inalphabetical order. Continue pressing either buttonuntil the desired artist is displayed.

To change from playback by artist to playback byalbum, press the pushbutton located below the SortBy label. From the sort screen, push one of thebuttons below the album button. Press thepushbutton below the back label to return to themain music navigator screen. Now the album namedisplays on the second line between the arrows andsongs from the current album begins to play. Onceall songs from that album are played, the playermoves to the next album in alphabetical order onthe CD-R or CD-RW and begins playing MP3/WMAfiles from that album.

To exit music navigator mode, press the pushbuttonbelow the Back label to return to normal MP3/WMAplayback.

295

BAND: Press this button to listen to the radiowhen a CD is playing. The CD remains inside theradio for future listening.

CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to playa CD when listening to the radio. The CD iconand a message showing disc and/or track numberdisplays when a CD is in the player. Press thisbutton again and the system automaticallysearches for an auxiliary input device such as aportable audio player. If a portable audio player isnot connected, “No Input Device Found” displays.

Using an MP3 (Radio with CDand DVD Player)

MP3/WMA CD-R or CD-RW DiscThe radio plays MP3/WMA files that were recordedon a CD-R or CD-RW disc. The files can berecorded with the following fixed bit rates: 32 kbps,40 kbps, 56 kbps, 64 kbps, 80 kbps, 96 kbps,112 kbps, 128 kbps, 160 kbps, 192 kbps,224 kbps, 256 kbps, and 320 kbps or a variablebit rate. Song title, artist name, and album displaywhen recorded using ID3 tags version 1 and 2.

Compressed Audio or Mixed Mode DiscsThe radio also plays discs that contain bothuncompressed CD audio (.CDA files) andMP3/WMA files depending on which slot the discis loaded into. By default the radio reads onlythe uncompressed audio (.CDA) and ignores theMP3/WMA files on the DVD deck. On the CDdeck, pressing the CAT button toggles betweencompressed and uncompressed audio format, thedefault being the uncompressed format (.CDA).

MP3/WMA FormatIf an MP3/WMA disc is burned on a personalcomputer:

• Make sure the MP3/WMA files are recordedon a CD-R or CD-RW disc.

• Do not mix standard audio and MP3/WMAfiles on one disc.

• Make sure the CD player (lower slot) is ableto read and play a maximum combination of512 files and folders. The DVD player(upper slot) is able to read 255 folders,15 playlists and 40 sessions.

296

• Create a folder structure that makes iteasy to find songs while driving. Organizesongs by albums using one folder for eachalbum. Each folder or album should contain18 songs or less.

• Avoid subfolders. The system can support up toeight subfolders deep, however, keep the totalnumber of folders to a minimum in order toreduce the complexity and confusion in trying tolocate a particular folder during playback.

• Make sure playlists have a .m3u, .wpl or .plsextension as other file extensions maynot work.

• Minimize the length of the file, folder or playlistnames. Long file, folder, or playlist names, or acombination of a large number of files andfolders, or playlists can cause the player to beunable to play up to the maximum number offiles, folders, playlists, or sessions. If you wishto play a large number of files, folders, playlists,or sessions, minimize the length of the file,folder, or playlist name. Long names also takeup more space on the display, potentiallygetting cut off.

• Finalize the audio disc before burning it. Tryingto add music to an existing disc can cause thedisc not to function in the player.

Root DirectoryThe root directory of the CD-R or CD-RW istreated as a folder. If the root directory hascompressed audio files, the directory is displayedas F1 ROOT. All files contained directly underthe root directory are accessed prior to any rootdirectory folders. However, playlists (Px) arealways accessed before root folders or files.

Empty Directory or FolderIf a root directory or a folder exists somewhere inthe file structure that contains onlyfolders/subfolders and no compressed files directlybeneath them, the player advances to the nextfolder in the file structure that contains compressedaudio files. The empty folder does not display.

297

No FolderWhen the CD-R or CD-RW contains onlycompressed files, the files are located under theroot folder. The next and previous folder functiondoes not function on a CD-R or CD-RW that wasrecorded without folders or playlists. Whendisplaying the name of the folder the radiodisplays ROOT.When the CD-R or CD-RW contains only playlistsand compressed audio files, but no folders, all filesare located under the root folder. The folder downand the folder up buttons search playlists (Px)first and then goes to the root folder. When theradio displays the name of the folder the radiodisplays ROOT.

Order of PlayTracks recorded to the CD-R or CD-RW areplayed in the following order:

• Play begins from the first track in the firstplaylist and continues sequentially throughall tracks in each playlist. After the last track ofthe last playlist has played, play continuesfrom the first track of the first playlist.

• Play begins from the first track in the first folderand continues sequentially through all tracks ineach folder. After the last track of the last folderhas played, play continues from the first track ofthe first folder.

When play enters a new folder, the display does notautomatically show the new folder name unless thefolder mode was chosen as the default display. Thenew track name displays.

File System and NamingThe song name that displays is the song name thatis contained in the ID3 tag. If the song name is notpresent in the ID3 tag, then the radio displays thefile name without the extension (such as .mp3) asthe track name.

Track names longer than 32 characters or fourpages are shortened. Parts of words on the lastpage of text and the extension of the filenamedisplays.

298

Preprogrammed PlaylistsPreprogrammed playlists that were created usingWinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™software can be accessed, however, they cannotbe edited using the radio. These playlists aretreated as special folders containing compressedaudio song files.

Playing an MP3/WMA (In Either the DVDor CD Slot)Insert a CD-R or CD-RW partway into eitherthe top or bottom slot, label side up. The playerpulls it in, and the CD-R or CD-RW shouldbegin playing.

Depending on the format of the disc, a softkeymenu appears and allows navigation of the disc.The menu reads left to right as RDM (Randomizesong play order), a Folder icon with left and rightarrows (to move up or down through availablefolders), a PL tag if the disc has a Playlist available,and a Music Navigator tag. If a Playlist tag isshown, toggling this key brings up a Folder softkeyonly or the menu as previously described.

If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD-R orCD-RW in the player, it stays in the player.When the ignition or radio is turned on, the CD-Ror CD-RW starts to play where it stopped, if itwas the last selected audio source.

As each new track starts to play, the track numberand song title displays.

Z CD (Eject): Press and release this button toeject the CD-R or CD-RW that is currentlyplaying in the bottom slot. A sound is heard andEjecting Disc displays. Once the disc is ejected,Remove Disc displays. The CD-R can be removed.If the CD-R or CD-RW is not removed, afterseveral seconds, the CD-R or CD-RWautomatically pulls back into the player.

If loading and reading of a CD cannot becompleted, such as unknown format, etc., and thedisc fails to eject, press and hold this button formore than five seconds to force the disc to eject.

299

Z DVD (Eject): Press and release thisbutton to eject the CD-R or CD-RW that is currentlyplaying in the top slot. A sound is heard andEjecting Disc displays. Once the disc is ejected,Remove Disc displays. The CD-R or CD-RW canbe removed. If the CD-R or CD-RW is not removed,after several seconds, the CD-R or CD-RWautomatically pulls back into the player. If loadingand reading of a CD cannot be completed, such asunknown format, etc., and the disc fails to eject,press and hold this button for more thanfive seconds to force the disc to eject.

f (Tune): Turn this knob to select MP3/WMA fileson the CD-R or CD-RW that is currently playing.

© SEEK ¨: Press the left SEEK arrow to go tothe start of the current MP3/WMA file, if more thanfive seconds have played. If less than five secondshave played, the previous MP3/WMA file plays.Press the right SEEK arrow to go to the nextMP3/WMA file. If either SEEK arrow is held, orpressed multiple times, the player continuesmoving backward or forward through the MP3/WMAfiles on the CD.

Sc (Previous Folder): Press the pushbuttonpositioned under the Folder label to go to the firsttrack in the previous folder.

cT (Next Folder): Press the pushbuttonpositioned under the Folder label to go to the firsttrack in the next folder.

s REV (Reverse): Press and hold this button toreverse playback quickly within an MP3/WMA file. Asound is heard at a reduced volume. Release thisbutton to resume playing the file. The elapsed timeof the file displays.

\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold thisbutton to advance playback quickly within anMP3/WMA file. A sound is heard at a reducedvolume. Release this button to resume playing thefile. The elapsed time of the file displays.

300

RDM (Random): With the random setting,MP3/WMA files on the CD-R or CD-RW can belistened to in random, rather than sequential order.To play MP3/WMA files from the CD-R or CD-RWyou are listening to in random order, press thepushbutton positioned under the RDM label untilRandom Current Disc displays. Press the samepushbutton again to turn off random play.

h (Music Navigator): Use the music navigatorfeature to play MP3/WMA files on the CD-R orCD-RW in order by artist or album. Press thepushbutton located below the music navigator label.The player scans the disc to sort the files by artistand album ID3 tag information. It might takeseveral minutes to scan the disc depending on thenumber of MP3/WMA files recorded to the CD-R orCD-RW.

To cancel music navigator while the player isscanning, press the pushbutton located below themusic navigator label or eject the disc.

The radio can begin playing while it isscanning the disc in the background. When thescan is finished, the CD-R or CD-RW beginsplaying again.

Once the disc has been scanned, the playerdefaults to playing MP3/WMA files in order by artist.The current artist playing is shown on the secondline of the display between the arrows. If you wantto listen to MP3/WMA files by another artist, pressthe pushbutton located below either arrow button.The disc goes to the next or previous artist inalphabetical order. Continue pressing either buttonuntil the desired artist is displayed.

To change from playback by artist to playback byalbum, press the pushbutton located below the SortBy label. From the sort screen, push one of thebuttons below the album button. Press thepushbutton below the back label to return to themain music navigator screen. Now the album nameis displayed on the second line between the arrowsand songs from the current album begin to play.Once all songs from that album are played, theplayer moves to the next album in alphabeticalorder on the CD-R or CD-RW and begins playingMP3/WMA files from that album.

301

To exit music navigator mode, press the pushbuttonbelow the Back label to return to normal MP3/WMAplayback.

BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio whena CD or a DVD is playing. The CD or DVD remainsinside the radio for future listening or viewingentertainment.

DVD/CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button tocycle through DVD, CD, or Auxiliary when listeningto the radio. The DVD/CD text label and amessage showing track or chapter numberdisplays when a disc is in either slot. Press thisbutton again and the system automaticallysearches for an auxiliary input device, such as aportable audio player. If a portable audio player isnot connected, “No Aux Input Device” displays.

If a disc is in both the DVD slot and the CD slotthe DVD/CD AUX button cycles between thetwo sources and not indicate “No Aux InputDevice”. If a front auxiliary device is connected,the DVD/CD AUX button cycles through allavailable options, such as: DVD slot, CD slot,Front Auxiliary, and Rear Auxiliary (if available).See “Using the Auxiliary Input Jack(s)” later in thissection, or “Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks” under,Rear Seat Entertainment System on page 305 formore information.

If a MP3/WMA is inserted into top DVD slot, therear seat operator can turn on the video screenand use the remote control to navigate theCD (tracks only) through the remote control.

302

XM Radio Messages

Radio Display Message Condition Action RequiredXL (Explicit LanguageChannels)

XL on the radio display,after the channel name,indicates content withexplicit language.

These channels, or any others, can be blocked at acustomer’s request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).

XM Updating Updating encryption code The encryption code in the receiver is being updated, andno action is required. This process should take no longerthan 30 seconds.

No XM Signal Loss of signal The system is functioning correctly, but the vehicle is in alocation that is blocking the XM™ signal. When you moveinto an open area, the signal should return.

Loading XM Acquiring channel audio(after four second delay)

The audio system is acquiring and processing audio andtext data. No action is needed. This message shoulddisappear shortly.

Channel Off Air Channel not in service This channel is not currently in service. Tune to anotherchannel.

Channel Unavail Channel no longeravailable

This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned.Tune to another station. If this station was one of thepresets, choose another station for that preset button.

No Artist Info Artist Name/Feature notavailable

No artist information is available at this time on this channel.The system is working properly.

No Title Info Song/Program Title notavailable

No song title information is available at this time on thischannel. The system is working properly.

No CAT Info Category Name notavailable

No category information is available at this time on thischannel. The system is working properly.

No Information No Text/Informationalmessage available

No text or informational messages are available at this timeon this channel. The system is working properly.

303

Radio Display Message Condition Action RequiredCAT Not Found No channel available for

the chosen categoryThere are no channels available for the selected category.The system is working properly.

XM Theftlocked Theft lock active The XM™ receiver in the vehicle may have previously beenin another vehicle. For security purposes, XM™ receiverscannot be swapped between vehicles. If this messageappears after having your vehicle serviced, check with yourdealer/retailer.

XM Radio ID Radio ID label(channel 0)

If tuned to channel 0, this message will alternate with theXM™ Radio eight digit radio ID label. This label is neededto activate the service.

Unknown Radio ID not known(should only be ifhardware failure)

If this message is received when tuned to channel 0, therecould be a receiver fault. Consult with your dealer/retailer.

Check XM Receivr Hardware failure If this message does not clear within a short period of time,the receiver could have a fault. Consult with yourdealer/retailer.

XM Not Available XM™ Not Available If this message does not clear within a short period of time,the receiver could have a fault. Consult with yourdealer/retailer.

304

Navigation/Radio SystemYour vehicle may have a navigation radio system.

The navigation system has built-in featuresintended to minimize driver distraction. Technologyalone, no matter how advanced, can neverreplace your own judgment. See the NavigationSystem manual for some tips to help youreduce distractions while driving.

Rear Seat Entertainment SystemYour vehicle may have a DVD Rear SeatEntertainment (RSE) system. The RSE systemworks with the vehicle’s audio system. TheDVD player is part of the front radio. The RSEsystem includes a radio with a DVD player, a videodisplay screen, audio/video jacks, two wirelessheadphones, and a remote control. See Radio withCD and DVD on page 273 for more informationon the vehicle’s audio/DVD system.

Before You DriveThe RSE is designed for rear seat passengersonly. The driver cannot safely view the videoscreen while driving and should not try to do so.

In severe or extreme weather conditions theRSE system might not work until the temperatureis within the operating range. The operatingrange for the RSE system is above −4°F (−20°C)or below 140°F (60°C). If the temperature ofyour vehicle is outside of this range, heat or coolthe vehicle until the temperature is within theoperating range of the RSE system.

Parental ControlThe RSE system may have a Parental Controlfeature, depending on which radio you have.To enable Parental Control, press and hold theradio power button for more than two seconds tostop all system features such as: radio, videoscreen, RSA, DVD and/or CD. While ParentalControl is on, a padlock icon displays.

When the radio is turned back on, ParentalControl is unlocked.

305

Headphones

The RSE includes two 2-channel wirelessheadphones that are dedicated to this system.These headphones are used to listen to mediasuch as CDs, DVDs, MP3s, DVDAs, radio,any auxiliary source connected to A/V jacks, orthe auxiliary input jack, if your vehicle hasthis feature. The wireless headphones have anOn/Off button, channel 1/2 switch, and a volumecontrol.

Push the power button to turn on the headphones.An indicator light located on the headphones comeson. If the light does not come on, the batteries mightneed to be replaced. See “Battery Replacement”later in this section for more information. Switch theheadphones to Off when not in use. Channel 1 isdedicated to the video screen, while Channel 2 isdedicated to RSA selections.

Infrared transmitters are located at the rear of theRSE overhead console. The headphones shutoff automatically to save the battery power if theRSE system and RSA are shut off or if theheadphones are out of range of the transmittersfor more than three minutes. If you move toofar forward or step out of the vehicle, theheadphones lose the audio signal.

The headphones automatically turns off afterfour hours of continuous use.

To adjust the volume on the headphones, use thevolume control located on the right side.

306

For optimal audio performance, the headphonesmust be worn correctly. The symbol L (Left)appears on the upper left side, above the ear padand should be positioned on the left ear. Thesymbol R (Right) appears on the upper right side,above the ear pad and should be positioned onthe right ear.

Notice: Do not store the headphones in heator direct sunlight. This could damage theheadphones and repairs will not be covered byyour warranty. Keep the headphones storedin a cool, dry place.

If the foam ear pads attached to the headphonesbecome worn or damaged, the pads can bereplaced separately from the headphone setthrough your dealer/retailer for more information.

Headphones should be stored in the front floorconsole and not in the front seat back pocket.Headphone damage can occur when thesecond row seats are folded forward.

Battery ReplacementTo change the batteries on the headphones, dothe following:

1. Turn the screw with a coin or screw driver toloosen the battery door located on the leftside of the headphones. Slide the batterydoor open.

2. Replace the two batteries in the compartment.Make sure that they are installed correctly,using the diagram on the inside of the batterycompartment.

3. Replace the battery door and tighten thedoor screw.

If the headphones are to be stored for a longperiod of time, remove the batteries and keep themin a cool, dry place.

307

Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks

The A/V jacks located on the rear of the floorconsole, allow audio or video signals to beconnected from an auxiliary device such as acamcorder or a video game unit to the RSE system.Adapter connectors or cables may be required toconnect the auxiliary device to the A/V jacks. Referto the manufacturer’s instructions for proper usage.

The A/V jacks are color coded to match typicalhome entertainment system equipment. The yellowjack (A) is for the video input. The white jack (B) isfor the left audio input. The red jack (C) is for theright audio input.

Power for auxiliary devices is not supplied by theradio system.

To use the auxiliary inputs of the RSE system,connect an external auxiliary device to thecolor-coded A/V jacks and turn both the auxiliarydevice and the video screen power on. If thevideo screen is in the DVD player mode, pressingthe AUX (auxiliary) button on the remote controlswitches the video screen from the DVDplayer mode to the auxiliary device. The radio canlisten to the audio of the connected auxiliarydevice by sourcing to auxiliary. See Radio with CDand DVD on page 273 for more information.

How to Change the RSE Video ScreenSettingsThe screen display mode (normal, full, and zoom),screen brightness, and setup menu languagecan be changed from the on screen setup menu.To change any feature, do the following:

1. Press the display menu button on the remotecontrol.

2. Use the remote control menu navigationarrows and the enter button to use thesetup menu.

3. Press the display menu button again toremove the setup menu from the screen.

308

Audio OutputAudio from the DVD player or auxiliary inputs canbe heard through the following possible sources:

• Wireless Headphones

• Vehicle Speakers

• Vehicle wired headphone jacks on the rearseat audio system, if your vehicle has thisfeature.

The RSE system always transmits the audiosignal to the wireless headphones, if there is audioavailable. See “Headphones” earlier in thissection for more information.

When a device is connected to the A/V jacks, orthe radio’s auxiliary input jack, if your vehiclehas this feature, the rear seat passengers are ableto hear audio from the auxiliary device throughthe wireless or wired headphones. The front seatpassengers are able to listen to playback fromthis device through the vehicle speakers byselecting AUX as the source on the radio.

Video ScreenThe video screen is located in the RSE overheadconsole.

To use the video screen, do the following:

1. Push the release button located on the RSEoverhead console.

2. Move the screen to the desired position.

When the video screen is not in use, push it upinto its locked position.

If a DVD is playing and the screen is raised to itslocked position, the screen remains on. This isnormal. The DVD continues to play through theprevious audio source. Use the remote controlpower button or eject the disc to turn off the screen.

The RSE overhead console contains the IRtransmitters for the wireless headphones and theIR receivers for the remote control. They arelocated at the rear of the console.

Notice: Avoid directly touching the videoscreen, as damage may occur. See “Cleaningthe Video Screen” later in this section formore information.

309

Remote ControlTo use the remote control, aim it at the transmitterwindow at the rear of the RSE overhead consoleand press the desired button. Direct sunlightor very bright light can affect the ability of the RSEtransmitter to receive signals from the remotecontrol. If the remote control does not seem to beworking, the batteries might need to be replaced.See “Battery Replacement” later in this section.Objects blocking the line of sight can alsoaffect the function of the remote control.

If a CD or DVD is in the Radio DVD slot, theremote control power button can be used to turnon the video screen display and start the disc. Theradio can also turn on the video screen display.See Radio with CD and DVD on page 273for more information.

Notice: Storing the remote control in a hotarea or in direct sunlight can damage it,and the repairs will not be covered by yourwarranty. Keep the remote control stored in acool, dry place.

Remote Control Buttons

O (Power): Press this button to turn the videoscreen on and off.

P (Illumination): Press this button to turnon the remote control backlight. The backlightautomatically times out after 7 to 10 seconds if noother button is pressed while the backlight is on.

v (Title): Press this button to return the DVD tothe main menu of the DVD. This function canvary for each disc.

310

y (Main Menu): Press this button to access theDVD menu. The DVD menu is different on everyDVD. Use the up, down, left, and right arrowbuttons to move the cursor around the DVD menu.After making a selection, press the enter button.This button only operates when using a DVD.

n, q, p, o (Menu Navigation Arrows): Usethe arrow buttons to navigate through a menu.

r (Enter): Press this button to select the choicethat is highlighted in any menu.

z (Display Menu): Press this button to adjustthe brightness, screen display mode (normal,full, or zoom), and display the language menu.

q (Return): Press this button to exit the currentactive menu and return to the previous menu.This button operates only when the display menuor a DVD menu is active.

c (Stop): Press this button to stop playing,rewinding, or fast forwarding a DVD. Press thisbutton twice to return to the beginning of the DVD.

s (Play/Pause): Press this button to startplaying a DVD. Press this button while a DVD isplaying to pause it. Press it again to continueplaying the DVD.

When the DVD is playing, depending on the radio,you might be able to do slow play by pressingthe pause button then pressing the fast forwardbutton. The DVD continues playing in a slow playmode. Depending on the radio, you might alsoperform reverse slow play by pressing the pausebutton and then pressing the fast reversebutton. To cancel slow play mode, press theplay/pause button.

t (Previous Track/Chapter): Press this buttonto return to the start of the current track orchapter. Press this button again to go to theprevious track or chapter. This button might notwork when the DVD is playing the copyrightinformation or the previews.

u (Next Track/Chapter): Press this button to goto the beginning of the next chapter or track. Thisbutton might not work when the DVD is playing thecopyright information or the previews.

311

r (Fast Reverse): Press this button to fastreverse the DVD or CD. To stop fast reversing aDVD video, press the play button. To stop fastreversing a DVD audio or CD, release the fastreverse button. This button might not work when theDVD is playing the copyright information or thepreviews.

[ (Fast Forward): Press this button to fastforward the DVD or CD. To stop fast forwarding aDVD video, press the play button. To stop fastforwarding a DVD audio or CD, release thefast forward button. This button might not workwhen the DVD is playing the copyright informationor the previews.

e (Audio): Press this button to change audiotracks on DVDs that have this feature whenthe DVD is playing. The format and content of thisfunction vary for each disc.

{ (Subtitles): Press this button to turn ON/OFFsubtitles and to move through subtitle optionswhen a DVD is playing. The format and content ofthis function vary for each disc.

AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to switch thesystem between the DVD player and an auxiliarysource.

d (Camera): Press this button to change cameraangles on DVDs that have this feature when aDVD is playing. The format and content ofthis function vary for each disc.

1 through 0 (Numeric Keypad): The numerickeypad provides the capability of direct chapter ortrack number selection.

\ (Clear): Press this button within three secondsafter entering a numeric selection, to clear allnumeric inputs.

} 10 (Double Digit Entries): Press this button toselect chapter or track numbers greater thannine. Press this button before entering the number.

If the remote control becomes lost or damaged,a new universal remote control can be purchased.If this happens, make sure the universal remotecontrol uses a code set of Toshiba®.

312

Battery ReplacementTo change the remote control batteries, do thefollowing:

1. Remove the battery compartment doorlocated on the bottom of the remote control.

2. Replace the two AA batteries in thecompartment. Make sure that they areinstalled correctly, using the diagram on theinside of the battery compartment.

3. Close the battery door securely.

If the remote control is to be stored for a longperiod of time, remove the batteries and keep themin a cool, dry place.

Problem Recommended ActionNo power. The ignition might not be

turned on or in accessory.The picture does not fill thescreen. There are blackborders on the top andbottom or on both sides orit looks stretched out.

Check the display modesettings in the setup menuby pressing the displaymenu button on the remotecontrol.

In auxiliary mode, thepicture moves or scrolls.

Check the auxiliary inputconnections at bothdevices.

Problem Recommended ActionThe remote control doesnot work.

Check to make sure thereis no obstruction betweenthe remote control and thetransmitter window.Check the batteries tomake sure they are notdead or installedincorrectly.

After stopping the player, Ipush Play but sometimesthe DVD starts where Ileft off and sometimes atthe beginning.

If the stop button waspressed one time, theDVD player resumesplaying where the DVDwas stopped. If the stopbutton was pressed twotimes the DVD playerbegins to play from thebeginning of the DVD.

The auxiliary source isrunning but there is nopicture or sound.

Check that the RSE videoscreen is in the auxiliarysource mode.Check the auxiliary inputconnections at bothdevices.

313

Problem Recommended ActionSometimes the wirelessheadphone audio cuts outor buzzes.

Check for obstructions,low batteries, receptionrange, and interferencefrom cellular telephonetowers or by using yourcellular telephone in thevehicle.Check that theheadphones are oncorrectly using the L (left)and R (right) on theheadphones.

I lost the remote and/or theheadphones.

See your dealer/retailer forassistance.

The DVD is playing, butthere is no picture orsound.

Check that the RSE videoscreen is sourced to theDVD player.

DVD Display Error MessagesThe DVD display error message depends onwhich radio you have. The video screen maydisplay one of the following:

Disc Load/Eject Error: This message displayswhen there are disc load or eject problems.

Disc Format Error: This message displays, if thedisc is inserted with the disc label wrong sideup, or if the disc is damaged.

Disc Region Error: This message displays, if thedisc is not from a correct region.

No Disc Inserted: This message displays, if nodisc is present when the EJECT button is pressedon the radio.

314

DVD DistortionVideo distortion may occur when operating cellularphones, scanners, CB radios, Global PositionSystems (GPS)*, two-way radios, mobile fax, orwalkie talkies.

It may be necessary to turn off the DVD playerwhen operating one of these devices in or near thevehicle.

*Excludes the OnStar® System.

Cleaning the RSE Overhead ConsoleWhen cleaning the RSE overhead console surface,use only a clean cloth dampened with clean water.

Cleaning the Video ScreenWhen cleaning the video screen, use only a cleancloth dampened with clean water. Use carewhen directly touching or cleaning the screen, asdamage could result.

Rear Seat Audio (RSA)This feature allows rear seat passengers to listen toand control any of the music sources: radio, CDs,DVDs, or other auxiliary sources. However, the rearseat passengers can only control the music sourcesthe front seat passengers are not listening to(except on some radios where dual control isallowed). For example, rear seat passengers canlisten to and control a CD through the headphones,while the driver listens to the radio through the frontspeakers. The rear seat passengers have control ofthe volume for each set of headphones.

You can operate the RSA functions even whenthe main radio is off.

Audio can be heard through wired headphones(not included) plugged into the jacks on the RSA.If your vehicle has this feature, audio can alsobe heard on Channel 2 of the wirelessheadphones.

The audio system mutes the rear speakers whenthe RSA audio is active through the headphones.

315

P (Power): Press this button to turn the RSA onor off.

Volume: Turn this knob to increase or todecrease the volume of the wired headphones.The left knob controls the left headphones and theright knob controls the right headphones.

SRCE (Source): Press this button to switchbetween the radio (AM/FM), XM (if equipped), CD,and if your vehicle has these features, DVD,front auxiliary, and rear auxiliary.

©¨ (Seek): When listening to FM, AM, orXM™ (if equipped), press the left seek arrow orthe right seek arrow to go to the previous or to thenext station or channels and stay there. Thisfunction is inactive, with some radios, if the frontseat passengers are listening to the radio.

Press and hold the left seek arrow or right seekarrow until the display flashes, to tune to anindividual station. The display stops flashing afterthe buttons have not been pushed for morethan two seconds. This function is inactive, withsome radios, if the front seat passengers arelistening to the radio.

While listening to a disc, press the right seekarrow to go to the next track or chapter on the disc.Press the left seek arrow to go back to the startof the current track or chapter (if more thanten seconds have played). This function is inactive,with some radios, if the front seat passengersare listening to the disc.

When a DVD video menu is being displayed,press the left seek arrow or right seek arrow toperform a cursor up or down on the menu.Hold the left seek arrow or right seek arrow toperform a cursor left or right on the menu.

316

PROG (Program): Press this button to go to thenext preset radio station or channel set on themain radio. This function is inactive, withsome radios, if the front seat passengers arelistening to the radio.

When a CD or DVD audio is playing, press thisbutton to go to the beginning of the CD or DVDaudio. This function is inactive, with some radios, ifthe front seat passengers are listening to the disc.

When a disc audio is playing in the CD or DVDchanger, press this button to select the next disc, ifmultiple discs are loaded. This function is inactive,with some radios, if the front seat passengers arelistening to the disc.

When a DVD video menu is being displayed, pressthe PROG button to perform the menu function,enter.

Theft-Deterrent FeatureTHEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft ofyour vehicle’s radio. The feature worksautomatically by learning a portion of the VehicleIdentification Number (VIN). If the radio ismoved to a different vehicle, it does not operateand LOCKED displays.

Audio Steering Wheel Controls

If your vehicle has audiosteering wheel controls,they could differdepending on thevehicle’s options. Someaudio controls canbe adjusted atthe steering wheel.They include thefollowing:

xw (Next/Previous): Press the up or the downarrow to go to the next or to the previous radiostation stored as a favorite.

While a CD/DVD is playing, press the up or thedown arrow to go to the next or previous track orchapter.

317

g (Mute/Voice Recognition): Press and releasethis button to silence the vehicle speakers only.The audio of the wireless and wired headphones, ifyour vehicle has these features, does not mute.Press and release this button again, to turnthe sound on.

If your vehicle has the navigation system, pressand hold this button briefly to initiate voicerecognition. See “Voice Recognition” in theNavigation System manual for more information.

If your vehicle has OnStar®, press and holdthis button briefly to interact with the OnStar®

system. If your vehicle also has the navigationsystem, press and hold this button briefly to initiatevoice recognition and say “OnStar” to enterOnStar® mode. See the OnStar® System onpage 145 in this manual for more information.

SRCE (Source): Press this button to switchbetween the radio (AM, FM), XM™ (if equipped),CD, and if your vehicle has these features,DVD, front auxiliary, and rear auxiliary.

+ e − e (Volume): Press the plus or minusbutton to increase or to decrease the radio volume.

¨ (Seek): Press the seek arrow to go to thenext radio station while in AM, FM, or XM™(if equipped). Press this button to go to the nexttrack or chapter while sourced to the CD orDVD slot.

Radio ReceptionFrequency interference and static can occurduring normal radio reception if items such as cellphone chargers, vehicle convenience accessories,and external electronic devices are pluggedinto the accessory power outlet. If there isinterference or static, unplug the item from theaccessory power outlet.

318

AMThe range for most AM stations is greater than forFM, especially at night. The longer range can causestation frequencies to interfere with each other. Forbetter radio reception, most AM radio stationsboosts the power levels during the day, and thenreduce these levels during the night. Static can alsooccur when things like storms and power linesinterfere with radio reception. When this happens,try reducing the treble on your radio.

FM StereoFM stereo gives the best sound, but FM signalsonly reach about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km). Tallbuildings or hills can interfere with FM signals,causing the sound to fade in and out.

XM™ Satellite Radio ServiceXM™ Satellite Radio Service gives digital radioreception from coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguousUnited States, and in Canada. Just as with FM,tall buildings or hills can interfere with satelliteradio signals, causing the sound to fade in and out.In addition, traveling or standing under heavyfoliage, bridges, garages, or through tunnels couldcause loss of the XM™ signal for a period oftime. The radio might display NO XM SIGNAL toindicate interference.

319

Care of Your CDs and DVDsHandle CDs carefully. Store them in their originalcases or other protective cases and away fromdirect sunlight and dust. The CD player scans thebottom surface of the disc. If the surface of aCD is damaged, such as cracked, broken,or scratched, the CD does not play properly or notat all. If the surface of a CD is soiled, take asoft, lint free cloth or dampen a clean, soft cloth ina mild, neutral detergent solution mixed withwater, and clean it. Make sure the wiping processstarts from the center to the edge.

Do not touch the bottom side of a CD whilehandling it; this could damage the surface. Pick upCDs by grasping the outer edges or the edge ofthe hole and the outer edge.

Care of the CD and DVD PlayerThe use of CD lens cleaners for CDs is notadvised, due to the risk of contaminating the lensof the CD optics with lubricants internal to theCD mechanism.

Multi-Band AntennaThe multi-band antenna is located on the roof ofyour vehicle. This type of antenna is used with theAM/FM radio, as well as OnStar® and the XM™Satellite Radio Service System, if your vehicle hasthese features. Keep this antenna clear of snowand ice build up for clear radio reception. Ifyour vehicle has a sunroof, the performance of theradio system may be affected if the sunroof isopen. Loading items onto the roof of your vehiclecan interfere with the performance of the radiosystem and, if your vehicle has this feature,OnStar®. Make sure the multi-band antenna is notobstructed.

320

Your Driving, the Road,and Your Vehicle ..................................... 322Defensive Driving ...................................... 322Drunken Driving ........................................ 323Control of a Vehicle .................................. 326Braking ...................................................... 326Antilock Brake System (ABS) .................... 327Braking in Emergencies ............................. 329StabiliTrak® System ................................... 329All-Wheel Drive (AWD) System .................. 332Steering .................................................... 332Off-Road Recovery .................................... 334Passing ..................................................... 335Loss of Control .......................................... 336Driving at Night ......................................... 337

Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads ............ 339City Driving ............................................... 342Freeway Driving ........................................ 342Before Leaving on a Long Trip .................. 343Highway Hypnosis ..................................... 344Hill and Mountain Roads ........................... 345Winter Driving ........................................... 347If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud,

Ice, or Snow .......................................... 352Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out ........... 352Loading Your Vehicle ................................ 353

Towing ........................................................ 358Towing Your Vehicle ................................. 358Recreational Vehicle Towing ...................... 358Towing a Trailer ........................................ 362

Section 4 Driving Your Vehicle

321

Your Driving, the Road, andYour Vehicle

Defensive DrivingThe best advice anyone can give about driving is:Drive defensively.

Please start with a very important safety device inyour vehicle: Buckle up. See Safety Belts: TheyAre for Everyone on page 24.

{CAUTION:

Defensive driving really means “Be readyfor anything.” On city streets, rural roads,or expressways, it means “Always expectthe unexpected.” Assume that pedestriansor other drivers are going to be carelessand make mistakes. Anticipate what theymight do and be ready. Rear-end collisionsare about the most preventable ofaccidents. Yet they are common. Allowenough following distance. Defensivedriving requires that a driver concentrateon the driving task. Anything that distractsfrom the driving task makes properdefensive driving more difficult and caneven cause a collision, with resultinginjury. Ask a passenger to help do thesethings, or pull off the road in a safe place todo them. These simple defensive drivingtechniques could save your life.

322

Drunken DrivingDeath and injury associated with drinking anddriving is a national tragedy. It is the number onecontributor to the highway death toll, claimingthousands of victims every year.

Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs todrive a vehicle:

• Judgment

• Muscular Coordination

• Vision

• Attentiveness

Police records show that almost half of all motorvehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In mostcases, these deaths are the result of someone whowas drinking and driving. In recent years, morethan 16,000 annual motor vehicle-related deathshave been associated with the use of alcohol, withmore than 300,000 people injured.

Many adults — by some estimates, nearly half theadult population — choose never to drink alcohol,so they never drive after drinking. For personsunder 21, it is against the law in every U.S.state to drink alcohol. There are good medical,psychological, and developmental reasons forthese laws.

The obvious way to eliminate the leading highwaysafety problem is for people never to drinkalcohol and then drive. But what if people do?How much is “too much” if someone plansto drive? It is a lot less than many might think.Although it depends on each person and situation,here is some general information on the problem.

The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) ofsomeone who is drinking depends uponfour things:

• The amount of alcohol consumed

• The drinker’s body weight

• The amount of food that is consumed beforeand during drinking

• The length of time it has taken the drinker toconsume the alcohol

323

According to the American Medical Association, a180 lb (82 kg) person who drinks three 12 ounce(355 ml) bottles of beer in an hour will end up witha BAC of about 0.06 percent. The person wouldreach the same BAC by drinking three 4 ounce(120 ml) glasses of wine or three mixed drinks ifeach had 1-1/2 ounces (45 ml) of liquors likewhiskey, gin, or vodka.

It is the amount of alcohol that counts. Forexample, if the same person drank three doublemartinis (3 ounces or 90 ml of liquor each)within an hour, the person’s BAC would be closeto 0.12 percent. A person who consumes foodjust before or during drinking will have a somewhatlower BAC level.

There is a gender difference, too. Womengenerally have a lower relative percentage of bodywater than men. Since alcohol is carried in bodywater, this means that a woman generally willreach a higher BAC level than a man of her samebody weight will when each has the samenumber of drinks.

The law in most U.S. states, and throughoutCanada, sets the legal limit at 0.08 percent. Insome other countries, the limit is even lower. Forexample, it is 0.05 percent in both France andGermany. The BAC limit for all commercial driversin the United States is 0.04 percent.

The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three tosix drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we haveseen, it depends on how much alcohol is in thedrinks, and how quickly the person drinks them.

324

But the ability to drive is affected well below a BACof 0.10 percent. Research shows that the drivingskills of many people are impaired at a BACapproaching 0.05 percent, and that the effects areworse at night. All drivers are impaired at BAClevels above 0.05 percent. Statistics show that thechance of being in a collision increases sharply fordrivers who have a BAC of 0.05 percent or above.A driver with a BAC level of 0.06 percent hasdoubled his or her chance of having a collision. At aBAC level of 0.10 percent, the chance of this driverhaving a collision is 12 times greater; at a level of0.15 percent, the chance is 25 times greater!

The body takes about an hour to rid itself of thealcohol in one drink. No amount of coffee or numberof cold showers will speed that up. “I will be careful”is not the right answer. What if there is anemergency, a need to take sudden action, as whena child darts into the street? A person with even amoderate BAC might not be able to react quicklyenough to avoid the collision.

There is something else about drinking and drivingthat many people do not know. Medical researchshows that alcohol in a person’s system can makecrash injuries worse, especially injuries to thebrain, spinal cord, or heart. This means that whenanyone who has been drinking — driver orpassenger — is in a crash, that person’s chanceof being killed or permanently disabled ishigher than if the person had not been drinking.

{CAUTION:

Drinking and then driving is verydangerous. Your reflexes, perceptions,attentiveness, and judgment can beaffected by even a small amount ofalcohol. You can have a serious — or evenfatal — collision if you drive after drinking.Please do not drink and drive or ride with adriver who has been drinking. Ride home ina cab; or if you are with a group, designatea driver who will not drink.

325

Control of a VehicleThe following three systems help to control yourvehicle while driving — brakes, steering, andaccelerator. At times, as when driving on snow orice, it is easy to ask more of those controlsystems than the tires and road can provide.Meaning, you can lose control of your vehicle. SeeStabiliTrak® System on page 329.

Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories canaffect your vehicle’s performance. See Accessoriesand Modifications on page 377.

BrakingSee Brake System Warning Light on page 217.

Braking action involves perception time andreaction time. First, you have to decide to push onthe brake pedal. That is perception time. Thenyou have to bring up your foot and do it. That isreaction time.

Average reaction time is about three-fourths ofa second. But that is only an average. It might beless with one driver and as long as two orthree seconds or more with another. Age, physicalcondition, alertness, coordination, and eyesightall play a part. So do alcohol, drugs, andfrustration. But even in three-fourths of a second,a vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels66 feet (20 m). That could be a lot of distance in anemergency, so keeping enough space betweenyour vehicle and others is important.

And, of course, actual stopping distances varygreatly with the surface of the road, whether it ispavement or gravel; the condition of the road,whether it is wet, dry, or icy; tire tread; thecondition of the brakes; the weight of the vehicle;and the amount of brake force applied.

326

Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drivein spurts — heavy acceleration followed byheavy braking — rather than keeping pace withtraffic. This is a mistake. The brakes mightnot have time to cool between hard stops. Thebrakes will wear out much faster if you do a lot ofheavy braking. If you keep pace with the trafficand allow realistic following distances, youwill eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking. Thatmeans better braking and longer brake life.

If your vehicle’s engine ever stops while you aredriving, brake normally but do not pump thebrakes. If you do, the pedal could get harder topush down. If the engine stops, you will still havesome power brake assist. But you will use itwhen you brake. Once the power assist is usedup, it can take longer to stop and the brake pedalwill be harder to push.


Antilock Brake System (ABS)Your vehicle has the Antilock Brake System(ABS), an advanced electronic braking system thatwill help prevent a braking skid.

When you start the engine and begin to driveaway, ABS will check itself. You might heara momentary motor or clicking noise while this testis going on, and you might even notice that thebrake pedal moves a little. This is normal.

If there is a problemwith ABS, this warninglight will stay on.See Antilock BrakeSystem Warning Lighton page 218.

327

Let us say the road is wet and you are drivingsafely. Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front ofyou. You slam on the brakes and continue braking.Here is what happens with ABS:

A computer senses that wheels are slowing down.If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, thecomputer will separately work the brakes at eachwheel.

ABS can change the brake pressure faster than anydriver could. The computer is programmed to makethe most of available tire and road conditions. Thiscan help you steer around the obstacle whilebraking hard.

As you brake, the computer keeps receivingupdates on wheel speed and controls brakingpressure accordingly.

328

Remember: ABS does not change the time youneed to get your foot up to the brake pedalor always decrease stopping distance. If you gettoo close to the vehicle in front of you, you will nothave time to apply the brakes if that vehiclesuddenly slows or stops. Always leave enoughroom up ahead to stop, even though youhave ABS.

Using ABSDo not pump the brakes. Just hold the brakepedal down firmly and let antilock work for you.You might hear the antilock pump or motoroperate, and feel the brake pedal pulsate, but thisis normal.

Braking in EmergenciesWith ABS, you can steer and brake at the sametime. In many emergencies, steering can help youmore than even the very best braking.

StabiliTrak® SystemYour vehicle has the StabiliTrak® system whichcombines antilock brake, traction and stabilitycontrol systems and helps the driver maintaindirectional control of the vehicle in most drivingconditions.

When you first start your vehicle and begin todrive away, the system performs several diagnosticchecks to ensure there are no problems. Youmay hear or feel the system working. Thisis normal and does not mean there is a problemwith your vehicle. The system should initializebefore the vehicle reaches 20 mph (32 km/h).In some cases, it may take approximatelytwo miles of driving before the system initializes.

If the system fails to turn on or activate, theStabiliTrak® light along with one of the followingmessages will be displayed on the DriverInformation Center (DIC): TRACTION CONTROLOFF, SERVICE TRACTION CONTROL,SERVICE STABILITRAK. If you see theseconditions, turn the vehicle off, wait 15 seconds,and then turn it back on again to reset the system.

329

If any of these messages still appear on the DriverInformation Center (DIC), your vehicle shouldbe taken in for service. For more information onthe DIC messages, see Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 228.

The StabiliTrak® lightwill flash on theinstrument panel clusterwhen the system isboth on and activated.

You may also feel or hear the system working;this is normal.

The traction controldisable button is locatedon the instrumentpanel below the climatecontrols.

The traction control part of StabiliTrak® can beturned off by pressing and releasing the tractioncontrol disable button.

Traction control can be turned on by pressing andreleasing the traction control disable button ifnot automatically shut off for any other reason.

When the traction control system is turned off, theStabiliTrak® light and the appropriate tractioncontrol off message will be displayed on the DICto warn the driver. Your vehicle will still havebrake-traction control when traction control is off,but will not be able to use the engine speedmanagement system. See “Traction ControlOperation” next for more information.

When the traction control system has been turnedoff, you may still hear system noises as a resultof the brake-traction control coming on.

It is recommended to leave the system on fornormal driving conditions, but it may be necessaryto turn the system off if your vehicle is stuck insand, mud, ice or snow, and you want to“rock” your vehicle to attempt to free it. It may alsobe necessary to turn off the system when drivingin extreme off-road conditions where highwheel spin is required. See If Your Vehicle isStuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 352.

330

Traction Control OperationThe traction control system is part of theStabiliTrak® system. Traction control limits wheelspin by reducing engine power to the wheels(engine speed management) and by applyingbrakes to each individual wheel (brake-tractioncontrol) as necessary.

The traction control system is enabledautomatically when you start your vehicle. It willactivate and the StabiliTrak® light will flash ifit senses that any of the wheels are spinning orbeginning to lose traction while driving. If you turnoff traction control, only the brake-tractioncontrol portion of traction control will work. Theengine speed management will be disabled. In thismode, engine power is not reduced automaticallyand the driven wheels can spin more freely.This can cause the brake-traction control toactivate constantly.

Notice: If you allow the wheel(s) of one axleto spin excessively while the StabiliTrak®, ABSand brake warning lights and the SERVICESTABILITRAK message are displayed,you could damage the transfer case. Therepairs would not be covered by your warranty.

Reduce engine power and do not spin thewheel(s) excessively while these lights and thismessage are displayed.

The traction control system may activate ondry or rough roads or under conditions such asheavy acceleration while turning or abruptupshifts/downshifts of the transmission. Whenthis happens, you may notice a reduction inacceleration, or may hear a noise or vibration.This is normal.

If your vehicle is in cruise control when the systemactivates, the StabiliTrak® light will flash and thecruise control will automatically disengage.When road conditions allow you to use cruiseagain, you may re-engage the cruise control. SeeCruise Control on page 179.

StabiliTrak® may also turn off automatically if itdetermines that a problem exists with the system.If the problem does not clear itself after restartingthe vehicle, you should see your dealer/retailerfor service.

331

All-Wheel Drive (AWD) SystemIf your vehicle has this feature, engine power issent to all four wheels when extra traction isneeded. This is like four-wheel drive, but there isno separate lever or switch to engage ordisengage the front axle. It is fully automatic, andadjusts itself as needed for road conditions.

When using a compact spare tire on your AWDequipped vehicle, the AWD system automaticallydetects the presence of the compact spare and theAWD is disabled. To restore the AWD operationand prevent excessive wear on the clutch in yourAWD system, replace the compact spare with afull-size tire as soon as possible. See CompactSpare Tire on page 463 for more information.

Steering

Power SteeringIf you lose power steering assist because theengine stops or the system is not functioning, youcan steer but it will take much more effort.

Steering TipsIt is important to take curves at a reasonablespeed.

A lot of the “driver lost control” accidentsmentioned on the news happen on curves.Here is why:

Experienced driver or beginner, each of us issubject to the same laws of physics when drivingon curves. The traction of the tires against theroad surface makes it possible for the vehicle tochange its path when you turn the front wheels. Ifthere is no traction, inertia will keep the vehiclegoing in the same direction. If you have evertried to steer a vehicle on wet ice, you willunderstand this.

The traction you can get in a curve depends onthe condition of the tires and the road surface, theangle at which the curve is banked, and yourspeed. While you are in a curve, speed is the onefactor you can control.

Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve.Then you suddenly accelerate. Both controlsystems — steering and acceleration — have todo their work where the tires meet the road.

332

Adding the sudden acceleration can demand toomuch of those places. You can lose control.See StabiliTrak® System on page 329.

What should you do if this ever happens? Ease upon the accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle theway you want it to go, and slow down.

Speed limit signs near curves warn that youshould adjust your speed. Of course, the postedspeeds are based on good weather and roadconditions. Under less favorable conditions you willwant to go slower.

If you need to reduce your speed as you approacha curve, do it before you enter the curve, whilethe front wheels are straight ahead.

Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive”through the curve. Maintain a reasonable, steadyspeed. Wait to accelerate until you are out ofthe curve, and then accelerate gently intothe straightaway.


Steering in EmergenciesThere are times when steering can be moreeffective than braking. For example, you comeover a hill and find a truck stopped in your lane, ora car suddenly pulls out from nowhere, or achild darts out from between parked cars andstops right in front of you. You can avoid theseproblems by braking — if you can stop in time. Butsometimes you cannot; there is not room. Thatis the time for evasive action — steering aroundthe problem.

Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencieslike these. First, apply the brakes. See Brakingon page 326. It is better to remove as much speedas you can from a possible collision. Then steeraround the problem, to the left or right dependingon the space available.

333

An emergency like this requires close attentionand a quick decision. If you are holding thesteering wheel at the recommended 9 and3 o’clock positions, you can turn it a full180 degrees very quickly without removing eitherhand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly,and just as quickly straighten the wheel once youhave avoided the object.

The fact that such emergency situations arealways possible is a good reason to practicedefensive driving at all times and wear safety beltsproperly.

Off-Road RecoveryYou may find that your vehicle’s right wheels havedropped off the edge of a road onto the shoulderwhile you are driving.

If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below thepavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease offthe accelerator and then, if there is nothing in theway, steer so that your vehicle straddles the edgeof the pavement. You can turn the steering wheelup to one-quarter turn until the right front tirecontacts the pavement edge. Then turn the steeringwheel to go straight down the roadway.

334

PassingThe driver of a vehicle about to pass another on atwo-lane highway waits for just the right moment,accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, thengoes back into the right lane again. A simplemaneuver?

Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on atwo-lane highway is a potentially dangerous move,since the passing vehicle occupies the samelane as oncoming traffic for several seconds. Amiscalculation, an error in judgment, or abrief surrender to frustration or anger can suddenlyput the passing driver face to face with theworst of all traffic accidents — the head-oncollision.

So here are some tips for passing:

• Drive ahead. Look down the road, to thesides, and to crossroads for situationsthat might affect your passing patterns. If youhave any doubt whatsoever about makinga successful pass, wait for a better time.

• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings,and lines. If you can see a sign up aheadthat might indicate a turn or an intersection,delay your pass. A broken center line

usually indicates it is all right to pass, providingthe road ahead is clear. Never cross a solidline on your side of the lane or a double solidline, even if the road seems empty ofapproaching traffic.

• Do not get too close to the vehicle you wantto pass while you are awaiting an opportunity.For one thing, following too closely reducesyour area of vision, especially if you arefollowing a larger vehicle. Also, you will nothave adequate space if the vehicle aheadsuddenly slows or stops. Keep back areasonable distance.

• When it looks like a chance to pass is comingup, start to accelerate but stay in the rightlane and do not get too close. Time your moveso you will be increasing speed as the timecomes to move into the other lane. If the wayis clear to pass, you will have a runningstart that more than makes up for the distanceyou would lose by dropping back. And ifsomething happens to cause you to cancelyour pass, you need only slow down and dropback again and wait for another opportunity.

335

• If other vehicles are lined up to pass a slowvehicle, wait your turn. But take care thatsomeone is not trying to pass you as you pullout to pass the slow vehicle. Remember toglance over your shoulder and check theblind spot.

• Check your vehicle’s mirrors, glance over yourshoulder, and start your left lane change signalbefore moving out of the right lane to pass.When you are far enough ahead of the passedvehicle to see its front in your vehicle’s insidemirror, activate the right lane change signal andmove back into the right lane. Remember thatan outside convex mirror makes the vehicle youjust passed seem farther away from you than itreally is.

• Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a timeon two-lane roads. Reconsider before passingthe next vehicle.

• Do not overtake a slowly moving vehicle toorapidly. Even though the brake lamps are notflashing, it might be slowing down or startingto turn.

• If you are being passed, make it easy for thefollowing driver to get ahead of you. Perhapsyou can ease a little to the right.

Loss of ControlLet us review what driving experts sayabout what happens when the three controlsystems — brakes, steering, andacceleration — do not have enough frictionwhere the tires meet the road to do what thedriver has asked.

In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying tosteer and constantly seek an escape route orarea of less danger.

SkiddingIn a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.Defensive drivers avoid most skids by takingreasonable care suited to existing conditions, andby not overdriving those conditions. But skidsare always possible.

The three types of skids correspond to yourvehicle’s three control systems. In the braking skid,the wheels are not rolling. In the steering orcornering skid, too much speed or steering in acurve causes tires to slip and lose cornering force.And in the acceleration skid, too much throttlecauses the driving wheels to spin.

336

A cornering skid is best handled by easing yourfoot off the accelerator pedal.

If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off theaccelerator pedal and quickly steer the way youwant the vehicle to go. If you start steering quicklyenough, your vehicle may straighten out. Always beready for a second skid if it occurs.

Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow,ice, gravel, or other material is on the road. Forsafety, you want to slow down and adjust yourdriving to these conditions. It is important to slowdown on slippery surfaces because stoppingdistance is longer and vehicle control more limited.

While driving on a surface with reduced traction,try your best to avoid sudden steering,acceleration, or braking, including reducing vehiclespeed by shifting to a lower gear. Any suddenchanges could cause the tires to slide. You mightnot realize the surface is slippery until yourvehicle is skidding. Learn to recognizewarning clues — such as enough water, ice, orpacked snow on the road to make a mirroredsurface — and slow down when you haveany doubt.

Remember: Any Antilock Brake System (ABS)helps avoid only the braking skid.

Driving at NightNight driving is more dangerous than day driving.One reason is that some drivers are likely tobe impaired — by alcohol or drugs, with nightvision problems, or by fatigue.

Here are some tips on night driving.

• Drive defensively.

• Do not drink and drive.

• Adjust the inside rearview mirror to reduce theglare from headlamps behind you.

• Since you cannot see as well, slow down andkeep more space between you and othervehicles.

• Slow down, especially on higher speed roads.Your vehicle’s headlamps can light up only somuch road ahead.

• In remote areas, watch for animals.

• If you are tired, pull off the road in a safeplace and rest.

337

No one can see as well at night as in the daytime.But as we get older these differences increase.A 50-year-old driver might require at least twice asmuch light to see the same thing at night as a20-year-old.

What you do in the daytime can also affect yournight vision. For example, if you spend theday in bright sunshine you are wise to wearsunglasses. Your eyes will have less troubleadjusting to night. But if you are driving, do notwear sunglasses at night. They might cut down onglare from headlamps, but they also make a lotof things invisible.

You can be temporarily blinded by approachingheadlamps. It can take a second or two, oreven several seconds, for your eyes to re-adjustto the dark. When you are faced with severe glare,as from a driver who does not lower the highbeams, or a vehicle with misaimed headlamps,slow down a little. Avoid staring directly intothe approaching headlamps.

Keep the windshield and all the glass on yourvehicle clean — inside and out. Glare at night ismade much worse by dirt on the glass. Eventhe inside of the glass can build up a film causedby dust. Dirty glass makes lights dazzle andflash more than clean glass would, making thepupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.

Remember that the headlamps light up far less of aroadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep youreyes moving; that way, it is easier to pick out dimlylighted objects. Just as the headlamps should bechecked regularly for proper aim, so should youreyes be examined regularly. Some drivers sufferfrom night blindness — the inability to see in dimlight — and are not even aware of it.

338

Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads

Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. Ona wet road, you cannot stop, accelerate, orturn as well because your vehicle’s tire-to-roadtraction is not as good as on dry roads. And, if thetires do not have much tread left, you get evenless traction.

It is always wise to go slower and be cautious ifrain starts to fall while you are driving. The surfacemay get wet suddenly when your reflexes aretuned for driving on dry pavement.

The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Evenif the windshield wiper blades are in goodshape, a heavy rain can make it harder to seeroad signs and traffic signals, pavement markings,the edge of the road, and even people walking.

It is wise to keep windshield wiping equipment ingood shape and keep the windshield washerfluid reservoir filled with washer fluid. Replacewindshield wiper inserts when they show signs ofstreaking or missing areas on the windshield,or when strips of rubber start to separate from theinserts.

339

{CAUTION:

Wet brakes can cause accidents. Theymay not work as well in a quick stop andmay cause pulling to one side. You couldlose control of the vehicle.

After driving through a large puddle ofwater or a car wash, apply the brake pedallightly until the brakes work normally.

Driving too fast through large water puddles oreven going through some car washes can causeproblems, too. The water may affect the brakes.Try to avoid puddles. But if you cannot, try to slowdown before you hit them.

HydroplaningHydroplaning is dangerous. So much water canbuild up under the tires that they can actually rideon the water. This can happen if the road iswet enough and you are going fast enough. Whenyour vehicle is hydroplaning, it has little or nocontact with the road.

Hydroplaning does not happen often. But it can ifthe tires do not have much tread or if thepressure in one or more is low. It can happen if alot of water is standing on the road. If you cansee reflections from trees, telephone poles,or other vehicles, and raindrops dimple the water’ssurface, there could be hydroplaning.

Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds.There just is not a hard and fast rule abouthydroplaning. The best advice is to slow downwhen it is raining.

340

Driving Through Deep Standing Water

Notice: If you drive too quickly throughdeep puddles or standing water, water cancome in through the engine’s air intakeand badly damage the engine. Never drivethrough water that is slightly lower than theunderbody of your vehicle. If you cannot avoiddeep puddles or standing water, drivethrough them very slowly.

Driving Through Flowing Water

{CAUTION:

Flowing or rushing water creates strongforces. If you try to drive through flowingwater, as you might at a low watercrossing, your vehicle can be carriedaway. As little as six inches of flowing



water can carry away a smaller vehicle. Ifthis happens, you and other vehicleoccupants could drown. Do not ignorepolice warning signs, and otherwise bevery cautious about trying to drivethrough flowing water.

Some Other Rainy Weather Tips• Besides slowing down, allow some extra

following distance. And be especially carefulwhen you pass another vehicle. Allow yourselfmore clear room ahead, and be prepared tohave your view restricted by road spray.

• Have good tires with proper tread depth. SeeTires on page 425.

341

City DrivingOne of the biggest problems with city streets isthe amount of traffic on them. Watch out for whatthe other drivers are doing and pay attentionto traffic signals.

Here are ways to increase your safety in citydriving:

• Know the best way to get to where you aregoing. Get a city map and plan your tripinto an unknown part of the city just as youwould for a cross-country trip.

• Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscrossmost large cities. You will save time andenergy. See Freeway Driving on page 342.

• Treat a green light as a warning signal. Atraffic light is there because the corner isbusy enough to need it. When a light turnsgreen, and just before you start to move,check both ways for vehicles that have notcleared the intersection or may be running thered light.

Freeway DrivingMile for mile, freeways — also called thruways,parkways, expressways, turnpikes, orsuperhighways — are the safest of all roads. Butthey have their own special rules.

The most important advice on freeway driving is:Keep up with traffic and keep to the right.Drive at the same speed most of the other driversare driving. Too-fast or too-slow driving breaksa smooth traffic flow. Treat the left lane ona freeway as a passing lane.

At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leadsto the freeway. If you have a clear view of thefreeway as you drive along the entrance ramp, youshould begin to check traffic. Try to determinewhere you expect to blend with the flow. Try tomerge into the gap at close to the prevailing speed.Switch on the turn signal, check the mirrors, andglance over your shoulder as often as necessary.Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow.

Once you are on the freeway, adjust yourspeed to the posted limit or to the prevailingrate if it is slower. Stay in the right lane unless youwant to pass.

342

Before changing lanes, check the mirrors. Then,use the turn signal.

Just before you leave the lane, glance quicklyover your shoulder to make sure there is notanother vehicle in your blind spot.

Once you are moving on the freeway, make sureyou allow a reasonable following distance.

Expect to move slightly slower at night.

When you want to leave the freeway, move to theproper lane well in advance. If you miss yourexit, do not, under any circumstances, stop andback up. Drive on to the next exit.

The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quitesharply. The exit speed is usually posted. Reduceyour speed according to the speedometer, notto your sense of motion. After driving for anydistance at higher speeds, you might tend to thinkyou are going slower than you actually are.

Before Leaving on a Long TripMake sure you are ready. Try to be well rested. Ifyou must start when you are not fresh — suchas after a day’s work — do not plan to make toomany miles that first part of the journey. Wearcomfortable clothing and shoes you can easilydrive in.

Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep itserviced and maintained, it is ready to go. If itneeds service, have it done before starting out. Ofcourse, you will find experienced and ableservice experts at dealers/retailers all across NorthAmerica. They are ready and willing to help youif needed.

343

Here are some things you can check before a trip:

• Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoirfull? Are all windows clean inside and outside?

• Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?

• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have youchecked all levels?

• Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lensesclean?

• Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enoughfor long-distance driving? Are the tiresall inflated to the recommended pressure?

• Weather Forecasts: What is the weatheroutlook along your route? Should youdelay your trip a short time to avoid a majorstorm system?

• Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?

Highway HypnosisIs there actually such a condition as highwayhypnosis? Or is it just plain falling asleep at thewheel? Call it highway hypnosis, lack ofawareness, or whatever.

There is something about an easy stretch of roadwith the same scenery, along with the hum ofthe tires on the road, the drone of the engine, andthe rush of the wind against the vehicle thatcan make you sleepy. Do not let it happen to you!If it does, your vehicle can leave the road inless than a second, and you could crash and beinjured.

What can you do about highway hypnosis? First,be aware that it can happen.

344

Then here are some tips:

• Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, witha comfortably cool interior.

• Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road aheadand to the sides. Check your vehicle’s mirrorsand instruments frequently.

• If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest,service, or parking area and take a nap, getsome exercise, or both. For safety, treatdrowsiness on the highway as an emergency.

Hill and Mountain Roads

Driving on steep hills or mountains is differentfrom driving in flat or rolling terrain.

345

If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you areplanning to visit there, here are some tips thatcan make your trips safer and more enjoyable.

• Keep your vehicle in good shape. Checkall fluid levels and also the brakes, tires,cooling system, and transmission. These partscan work hard on mountain roads.

{CAUTION:

If you do not shift down, the brakes couldget so hot that they would not work well.You would then have poor braking oreven none going down a hill. You couldcrash. Shift down to let the engine assistthe brakes on a steep downhill slope.

{CAUTION:

Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or withthe ignition off is dangerous. The brakeswill have to do all the work of slowingdown. They could get so hot that theywould not work well. You would then havepoor braking or even none going down ahill. You could crash. Always have theengine running and your vehicle in gearwhen you go downhill.

• Know how to go down hills. The most importantthing to know is this: let the engine do some ofthe slowing down. Shift to a lower gear whenyou go down a steep or long hill.

346

• Stay in your own lane when driving on two-laneroads in hills or mountains. Do not swing wideor cut across the center of the road. Drive atspeeds that let you stay in your own lane.

• As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. Therecould be something in your lane, like a stalledcar or an accident.

• You might see highway signs on mountains thatwarn of special problems. Examples are longgrades, passing or no-passing zones, a fallingrocks area, or winding roads. Be alert to theseand take appropriate action.

Winter DrivingHere are some tips for winter driving:

• Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.

• You might want to put winter emergencysupplies in your vehicle.

Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, asupply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, somewinter outer clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, ared cloth, and a couple of reflective warningtriangles. And, if you will be driving under severeconditions, include a small bag of sand, apiece of old carpet, or a couple of burlap bags tohelp provide traction. Be sure you properlysecure these items in your vehicle.

Also see Tires on page 425.

347

Driving on Snow or IceMost of the time, those places where the tiresmeet the road probably have good traction.

However, if there is snow or ice between the tiresand the road, you can have a very slipperysituation. You have a lot less traction, or grip, andneed to be very careful.

What is the worst time for this? Wet ice. Very coldsnow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on.But wet ice can be even more trouble because itcan offer the least traction of all. You can getwet ice when it is about freezing, 32°F (0°C), andfreezing rain begins to fall. Try to avoid drivingon wet ice until salt and sand crews can get there.

348

Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed,blowing, or loose snow — drive with caution.

StabiliTrak® improves your ability to acceleratewhen driving on a slippery road. Even withStabiliTrak®, slow down and adjust your driving tothe road conditions. Under certain conditions,you might want to turn the traction control part ofthe StabiliTrak® System off, such as whendriving through deep snow and loose gravel, tohelp maintain vehicle motion at lower speeds. SeeStabiliTrak® System on page 329 and If YourVehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow onpage 352.

The Antilock Brake System (ABS) improves yourvehicle’s stability when you make a hard stopon a slippery road. Even though you have ABS,begin stopping sooner than you would on drypavement. See Antilock Brake System (ABS) onpage 327.

• Allow greater following distance on anyslippery road.

• Watch for slippery spots. The road might befine until you hit a spot that is covered withice. On an otherwise clear road, ice patchescan appear in shaded areas where thesun cannot reach, such as around clumps oftrees, behind buildings, or under bridges.Sometimes the surface of a curve or anoverpass can remain icy when the surroundingroads are clear. If you see a patch of iceahead of you, brake before you are on it. Trynot to brake while you are actually on theice, and avoid sudden steering maneuvers.

349

If You Are Caught in a BlizzardIf you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be ina serious situation. You should probably staywith your vehicle unless you know for sure that youare near help and you can hike through thesnow. Here are some things to do to summonhelp and keep yourself and your passengers safe:

• Turn on the hazard warning flashers.

• Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert policethat you have been stopped by the snow.

• Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket aroundyou. If you do not have blankets or extraclothing, make body insulators fromnewspapers, burlap bags, rags, floor mats —anything you can wrap around yourself ortuck under your clothing to keep warm. You can run the engine to keep warm, but be

careful.

350

{CAUTION:

Snow can trap exhaust gases under yourvehicle. This can cause deadly CO(carbon monoxide) gas to get inside. COcould overcome you and kill you. Youcannot see it or smell it, so you might notknow it is in your vehicle. Clear awaysnow from around the base of yourvehicle, especially any that is blocking theexhaust pipe. And check around againfrom time to time to be sure snow doesnot collect there.

Open a window just a little on the side ofthe vehicle that is away from the wind.This will help keep CO out.

Run the engine only as long as you must. Thissaves fuel. When you run the engine, make it go alittle faster than just idle. That is, push theaccelerator slightly. This uses less fuel for theheat that you get and it keeps the battery charged.You will need a well-charged battery to restartthe vehicle, and possibly for signaling later on withthe headlamps. Let the heater run for a while.

Then, shut the engine off and close the windowalmost all the way to preserve the heat. Startthe engine again and repeat this only when youfeel really uncomfortable from the cold. But do it aslittle as possible. Preserve the fuel as long asyou can. To help keep warm, you can get out ofthe vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercisesevery half hour or so until help comes.

351

If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,Mud, Ice, or SnowIn order to free your vehicle when it is stuck, youneed to spin the wheels, but you do not wantto spin the wheels too fast. The method known asrocking can help you get out when you arestuck, but you must use caution.

{CAUTION:

If you let your vehicle’s tires spin at highspeed, they can explode, and you orothers could be injured. And, thetransmission or other parts of the vehiclecan overheat. That could cause an enginecompartment fire or other damage. Whenyou are stuck, spin the wheels as little aspossible. Do not spin the wheels above35 mph (55 km/h) as shown on thespeedometer.

Notice: Spinning the wheels can destroy partsof your vehicle as well as the tires. If youspin the wheels too fast while shiftingthe transmission back and forth, you candestroy the transmission.

For information about using tire chains on yourvehicle, see Tire Chains on page 445.

Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It OutFirst, turn the steering wheel left and right to clearthe area around the front wheels. Turn thetraction control part of the StabiliTrak® System off.See StabiliTrak® System on page 329. Thenshift back and forth between REVERSE (R) and aforward gear, spinning the wheels as little aspossible. To prevent transmission wear, wait untilthe wheels stop spinning before shifting gears.Release the accelerator pedal while you shift, andpress lightly on the accelerator pedal when thetransmission is in gear. By slowly spinningthe wheels in the forward and reverse directions,you will cause a rocking motion that could freeyour vehicle. If that does not get your vehicle outafter a few tries, it might need to be towedout. If your vehicle does need to be towed out,see Towing Your Vehicle on page 358.

352

Loading Your VehicleIt is very important to know how much weight yourvehicle can carry. This weight is called the vehiclecapacity weight and includes the weight of alloccupants, cargo, and all nonfactory-installedoptions. Two labels on your vehicle show how muchweight it may properly carry, the Tire and LoadingInformation label and the Certification/Tire label.

{CAUTION:

Do not load your vehicle any heavier thanthe Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),or either the maximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,parts on your vehicle can break, and itcan change the way your vehicle handles.These could cause you to lose controland crash. Also, overloading can shortenthe life of your vehicle.

Tire and Loading Information Label

A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Informationlabel is attached to the center pillar (B-pillar) of yourvehicle. With the driver’s door open, you will find thelabel attached below the door lock post (striker).The tire and loading information label shows thenumber of occupant seating positions (A), and themaximum vehicle capacity weight (B) in kilogramsand pounds.

Example Label

353

The Tire and Loading Information label also showsthe size of the original equipment tires (C) andthe recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D).For more information on tires and inflation seeTires on page 425 and Inflation - Tire Pressure onpage 432.

There is also important loading information on thevehicle Certification/Tire label. It tells you theGross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) andthe Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for thefront and rear axle. See “Certification/Tire Label”later in this section.

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit1. Locate the statement “The combined

weight of occupants and cargo should neverexceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on yourvehicle’s placard.

2. Determine the combined weight of the driverand passengers that will be riding in yourvehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the driverand passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equals the availableamount of cargo and luggage load capacity.For example, if the “XXX” amount equals1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lbpassengers in your vehicle, the amount ofavailable cargo and luggage load capacity is650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).

5. Determine the combined weight of luggageand cargo being loaded on the vehicle. Thatweight may not safely exceed the availablecargo and luggage load capacity calculated inStep 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the loadfrom your trailer will be transferred to yourvehicle. Consult this manual to determine howthis reduces the available cargo and luggageload capacity for your vehicle.

See Towing a Trailer on page 362 for importantinformation on towing a trailer, towing safety rules,and trailering tips.

354

Item Description Total

A Vehicle Capacity Weightfor Example 1 = 1,000 lbs (453 kg)

BSubtract OccupantWeight 150 lbs(68 kg) × 2 =

300 lbs (136 kg)

C Available Occupant andCargo Weight = 700 lbs (317 kg)




750 lbs (340 kg)

C Available CargoWeight = 250 lbs (113 kg)

Example 1 Example 2

355




1,000 lbs (453 kg)

C Available CargoWeight = 0 lbs (0 kg)

Refer to your vehicle’s tire and loading informationlabel for specific information about your vehicle’scapacity weight and seating positions. Thecombined weight of the driver, passengers, andcargo should never exceed your vehicle’s capacityweight.

Certification/Tire Label

A vehicle specific Certification/Tire label isattached to the rear edge of the driver’s door.

The label shows the gross weight capacity of yourvehicle. This is called the Gross Vehicle WeightRating (GVWR). The GVWR includes the weight ofthe vehicle, all occupants, fuel, and cargo.

The Certification/Tire label also tells you themaximum weights for the front and rear axles,called the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).

Example 3

356

To find out the actual loads on your front and rearaxles, you need to go to a weigh station andweigh your vehicle. Your dealer/retailer can helpyou with this. Be sure to spread out your loadequally on both sides of the centerline.

Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle or theRating GAWR for either the front or rear axle.

{CAUTION:

Do not load your vehicle any heavier thanthe Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),or either the maximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,parts on your vehicle can break, and itcan change the way your vehicle handles.These could cause you to lose controland crash. Also, overloading can shortenthe life of your vehicle.

Notice: Overloading your vehicle may causedamage. Repairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Do not overload your vehicle.

If you put things inside your vehicle — likesuitcases, tools, packages, or anything else, theywill go as fast as the vehicle goes. If you haveto stop or turn quickly, or if there is a crash, theywill keep going.

{CAUTION:

Things you put inside your vehicle canstrike and injure people in a sudden stopor turn, or in a crash.

• Put things in the cargo area of yourvehicle. Try to spread the weightevenly.

• Never stack heavier things, likesuitcases, inside the vehicle so thatsome of them are above the tops ofthe seats.

• Do not leave an unsecured childrestraint in your vehicle.

• When you carry something inside thevehicle, secure it whenever you can.

• Do not leave a seat folded downunless you need to.

357

Towing

Towing Your VehicleConsult your dealer/retailer or a professionaltowing service if you need to have your disabledvehicle towed. See Roadside Assistance Programon page 509.

If you want to tow your vehicle behind anothervehicle for recreational purposes (such as behinda motorhome), see “Recreational VehicleTowing” following.

Recreational Vehicle TowingRecreational vehicle towing means towing yourvehicle behind another vehicle – such as behind amotorhome. The two most common types ofrecreational vehicle towing are known as “dinghytowing” (towing your vehicle with all four wheelson the ground) and “dolly towing” (towingyour vehicle with two wheels on the ground andtwo wheels up on a device known as a “dolly”).

With the proper preparation and equipment, manyvehicles can be towed in these ways. See“Dinghy Towing” and “Dolly Towing” following inthis section.

Here are some important things to consider beforeyou do recreational vehicle towing:

• What’s the towing capacity of the towingvehicle? Be sure you read the tow vehiclemanufacturer’s recommendations.

• How far will you tow? Some vehicles haverestrictions on how far and how long theycan tow.

• Do you have the proper towing equipment?See your dealer/retailer or traileringprofessional for additional advice andequipment recommendations.

• Is your vehicle ready to be towed? Just asyou would prepare your vehicle for a longtrip, you’ll want to make sure your vehicle isprepared to be towed. See Before Leaving ona Long Trip on page 343.

358

Dinghy TowingIf you have a front-wheel-drive vehicle, it can bedinghy towed from the front. These vehiclesmay also be towed by putting the front wheels ona dolly. See “Dolly Towing” later in this section.

If you have an all-wheel-drive vehicle, it canbe dinghy towed from the front. You can also towthese vehicles by placing them on a platformtrailer with all four wheels off of the ground. Thesevehicles cannot be towed using a dolly.

For vehicles being dinghy towed, the vehicleshould be run at the beginning of each day and ateach RV fuel stop for about five minutes. Thiswill ensure proper lubrication of transmissioncomponents. Put the IGN (Ignition) fuse in to startthe vehicle.

To tow your vehicle from the front with all fourwheels on the ground:

1. Position the vehicle to tow and then secure it.

2. Turn the ignition to OFF.

3. Set the parking brake.

4. To prevent your battery from draining whilethe vehicle is being towed, remove the IGN(Ignition) fuse from the underhood fuse block.See Underhood Fuse Block on page 479.

5. Turn the ignition to ACCESSORY.

359

6. Shift your transmission to NEUTRAL (N).

7. Release the parking brake.

Notice: If you tow your vehicle withoutperforming each of the steps listed under“Dinghy Towing,” you could damage theautomatic transmission. Be sure to follow allsteps of the dinghy towing procedure priorto and after towing your vehicle.

Notice: If you exceed 65 mph (105 km/h) whiletowing your vehicle, it could be damaged.Never exceed 65 mph (105 km/h) while towingyour vehicle.

Once you have reached your destination, do thefollowing:


2. Turn the ignition key to OFF and remove thekey from the ignition.

3. Reinstall the IGN (Ignition) fuse.

Notice: Don’t tow a vehicle with the frontdrive wheels on the ground if one of the fronttires is a compact spare tire. Towing withtwo different tire sizes on the front of thevehicle can cause severe damage to thetransmission.

Dolly Towing (All-Wheel-Drive Vehicles)

All-wheel-drive vehicles must not be towed withtwo wheels on the ground. To properly towthese vehicles, they should be placed on aplatform trailer with all four wheels off of theground or dinghy towed from the front.

360

Dolly Towing (Front-Wheel-DriveVehicles Only)

To tow your front-wheel-drive vehicle from thefront with two wheels on the ground:

1. Put the front wheels on a dolly.

2. Move the shift lever to PARK (P).

3. Set the parking brake and then remove the key.

4. Clamp the steering wheel in a straight-aheadposition with a clamping device designed fortowing.

5. Release the parking brake.

Towing Your Vehicle From the Rear

Notice: Towing your vehicle from the rearcould damage it. Also, repairs would notbe covered by the warranty. Never have yourvehicle towed from the rear.

Do not tow your vehicle from the rear.

361

Towing a Trailer

{CAUTION:

If you do not use the correct equipmentand drive properly, you can lose controlwhen you pull a trailer. For example, if thetrailer is too heavy, the brakes may notwork well — or even at all. You and yourpassengers could be seriously injured.You may also damage your vehicle; theresulting repairs would not be covered byyour warranty. Pull a trailer only if youhave followed all the steps in this section.Ask your dealer/retailer for advice andinformation about towing a trailer withyour vehicle.

To identify the trailering capacity of your vehicle,you should read the information in “Weight ofthe Trailer” that appears later in this section. Buttrailering is different than just driving yourvehicle by itself. Trailering means changes inhandling, acceleration, braking, durability and fueleconomy. Successful, safe trailering takescorrect equipment, and it has to be used properly.

That’s the reason for this part. In it are manytime-tested, important trailering tips and safetyrules. Many of these are important for your safetyand that of your passengers. So please readthis section carefully before you pull a trailer.

Load-pulling components such as the engine,transmission, rear axle, wheel assemblies and tiresare forced to work harder against the drag ofthe added weight. The engine is requiredto operate at relatively higher speeds and undergreater loads, generating extra heat. What’s more,the trailer adds considerably to wind resistance,increasing the pulling requirements.

362

If You Do Decide to Pull a TrailerIf you do, here are some important points:

• There are many different laws, including speedlimit restrictions, having to do with trailering.Make sure your rig will be legal, not only whereyou live but also where you’ll be driving. Agood source for this information can be stateor provincial police.

• Consider using a sway control. You can ask ahitch dealer/retailer about sway controls.

• Don’t tow a trailer at all during the first500 miles (805 km) your new vehicle is driven.Your engine, axle or other parts could bedamaged.

• Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) thatyou tow a trailer, don’t drive over 50 mph(80 km/h) and don’t make starts at full throttle.This helps your engine and other parts ofyour vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.

• Obey speed limit restrictions when towing atrailer. Don’t drive faster than the maximumposted speed for trailers, or no more than55 mph (90 km/h), to save wear on yourvehicle’s parts.

• You can tow in DRIVE (D). You may want toshift the transmission to THIRD (3) or, ifnecessary, a lower gear selection if thetransmission shifts too often (e.g., under heavyloads and/or hilly conditions). See “Tow/HaulMode” later in this section.

Three important considerations have to do withweight:

• The weight of the trailer

• The weight of the trailer tongue

• And the total weight on your vehicle’s tires

363

Tow/Haul ModeTow/Haul is a feature that assists when pulling aheavy trailer or a large or heavy load. Thepurpose of the Tow/Haul mode is to:

• Reduce the frequency and improve thepredictability of transmission shifts whenpulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load.

• Provide the same solid shift feel when pulling aheavy trailer or a large or heavy load as whenthe vehicle is unloaded.

• Improve control of vehicle speed whilerequiring less throttle pedal activity whenpulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load.

• Increase the charging system voltage to assistin recharging a battery installed in a trailer.

Press this buttonon the console toenable/disable thetow/haul mode.

A light on the instrumentpanel will come on toindicate that tow/haulmode has beenselected.

Tow/Haul may be turned off by pressing thebutton again, at which time the indicator light onthe instrument panel will turn off. The vehiclewill automatically turn off Tow/Haul every time it isstarted.

364

Tow/Haul is designed to be most effective whenthe vehicle and trailer combined weight is atleast 75 percent of the vehicle’s Gross CombinedWeight Rating (GCWR). See Weight of theTrailer later in this section. Tow/Haul is most usefulunder the following driving conditions:

• When pulling a heavy trailer or a large orheavy load through rolling terrain.

• When pulling a heavy trailer or a large orheavy load in stop and go traffic.

• When pulling a heavy trailer or a large orheavy load in busy parking lots whereimproved low speed control of the vehicle isdesired.

Operating the vehicle in tow/haul when lightlyloaded or with no trailer at all will not causedamage. However, there is no benefit to theselection of Tow/Haul when the vehicle isunloaded. Such a selection when unloaded mayresult in unpleasant engine and transmissiondriving characteristics and reduced fuel economy.Tow/Haul is recommended only when pulling aheavy trailer or a large or heavy load.

Weight of the TrailerHow heavy can a trailer safely be?

It depends on how you plan to use your rig. Forexample, speed, altitude, road grades, outsidetemperature and how much your vehicle is used topull a trailer are all important. It can also dependon any special equipment that you have onyour vehicle, and the amount of tongue weight thevehicle can carry. See “Weight of the TrailerTongue” later in this section for more information.

Maximum trailer weight is calculated assumingonly the driver is in the tow vehicle and it has allthe required trailering equipment. The weightof additional optional equipment, passengers andcargo in the tow vehicle must be subtractedfrom the maximum trailer weight.

365

Look in the following chart to find the maximumtrailer weight for your vehicle.

Package MaximumTrailer Weight *GCWR

Front-WheelDrive

4,500 lbs(2 041 kg)

9,500 lbs(4 309 kg)

All-Wheel Drive 4,500 lbs(2 041 kg)

9,700 lbs(4 400 kg)

*The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) isthe total allowable weight of the completely loadedvehicle and trailer including any passengers, cargo,

equipment and conversions. The GCWR for yourvehicle should not be exceeded.

Ask your dealer/retailer for our traileringinformation or advice, or write us at our CustomerAssistance Offices. See Customer AssistanceOffices on page 508 for more information.

Weight of the Trailer TongueThe tongue load (A) of any trailer is an importantweight to measure because it affects the totalor gross weight of your vehicle. The Gross VehicleWeight (GVW) includes the curb weight of thevehicle, any cargo you may carry in it, andthe people who will be riding in the vehicle. If youhave a lot of options, equipment, passengersor cargo in the vehicle, it will reduce the tongueweight your vehicle can carry, which will alsoreduce the trailer weight your vehicle can tow. Andif you tow a trailer, you must add the tongueload to the GVW because your vehicle willbe carrying that weight, too. See Loading YourVehicle on page 353 for more informationabout your vehicle’s maximum load capacity.

366

If you’re using a weight-carrying hitch or aweight-distributing hitch, the trailer tongue (A)should weigh 10-15 percent of the total loadedtrailer weight (B).After you’ve loaded your trailer, weigh the trailerand then the tongue, separately, to see if theweights are proper. If they aren’t, you may be ableto get them right simply by moving some itemsaround in the trailer.Trailering may also be limited by the vehicle’s abilityto carry tongue weight. Tongue weight cannotcause the vehicle to exceed the GVWR (GrossVehicle Weight Rating) or the RGAWR (Rear GrossAxle Weight Rating). The effect of additional weightmay reduce your trailering capacity more than thetotal of the additional weight.

Consider the following example:A vehicle model base weight is 5,500 lbs(2 495 kg); 2,800 lbs (1 270 kg) at the front axleand 2,700 lbs (1 225 kg) at the rear axle. It has aGVWR of 7,200 lbs (3 266 kg), a RGAWR of4,000 lbs (1 814 kg) and a GCWR (GrossCombination Weight Rating) of 14,000 lbs(6 350 kg). The trailer rating should be:

You can expect tongue weight to be at least10 percent of trailer weight (850 lbs (386 kg)) andbecause the weight is applied well behind the rearaxle, the effect on the rear axle will be greater thanjust the weight itself, as much as 1.5 times as much.The weight at the rear axle could be 850 lbs(386 kg) X 1.5 = 1,275 lbs (578 kg). Since the rearaxle already weighs 2,700 lbs (1 225 kg), adding1,275 lbs (578 kg) brings the total to 3,975 lbs(1 803 kg). This is very close to, but within the limitfor RGAWR as well. The vehicle is set to trailer upto 8,500 lbs (3 856 kg).

367

But let’s say your specific vehicle is equipped withsome of the latest options and you have a frontseat passenger and two rear seat passengers withsome luggage and gear in the vehicle as well.You may add 300 lbs (136 kg) to the frontaxle weight and 400 lbs (181 kg) to the rear axleweight. Your vehicle now weighs:

Weight is still below 7,200 lbs (3 266 kg) and youmay think that you should subtract 700 additionalpounds (318 kg) from your trailering capacity tostay within GCWR limits. Your maximum trailerwould only be 7,800 lbs (3 538 kg). You may gofurther and think you must limit tongue weight toless than 1,000 lbs (454 kg) to avoid exceedingGVWR. But, you must still consider the effect on therear axle. Because your rear axle now weighs3,100 lbs (1 406 kg), you can only put 900 lbs(408 kg) on the rear axle without exceedingRGAWR. The effect of tongue weight is about

1.5 times the actual weight. Dividing the 900 lbs(408 kg) by 1.5 leaves you with being able tohandle only 600 lbs (272 kg) of tongue weight.Since tongue weight is usually at least 10 percent oftotal loaded trailer weight, you can expect that thelargest trailer your vehicle can properly handle is6,000 lbs (2 721 kg).

It is important that you make sure your vehicledoes not exceed any of its ratings — GCWR,GVWR, RGAWR, Maximum Trailer Ratingor Tongue Weight. The only way to be sure youare not exceeding any of these ratings is to weighyour vehicle and trailer.

Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s TiresBe sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to theupper limit for cold tires. You’ll find these numberson the Certification/Tire label. See LoadingYour Vehicle on page 353. Then be sure you don’tgo over the GVW limit for your vehicle, includingthe weight of the trailer tongue.

368

HitchesIt’s important to have the correct hitch equipment.Crosswinds, large trucks going by and roughroads are a few reasons why you’ll need the righthitch. Here are some rules to follow:

• The rear bumper on your vehicle is notintended for hitches. Do not attach rentalhitches or other bumper-type hitches to it. Useonly a frame-mounted hitch that does notattach to the bumper.

• Will you have to make any holes in the bodyof your vehicle when you install a trailerhitch? If you do, then be sure to seal the holeslater when you remove the hitch. If youdon’t seal them, deadly carbon monoxide (CO)from your exhaust can get into your vehicle.See Engine Exhaust on page 137. Dirtand water can, too.

Safety ChainsYou should always attach chains between yourvehicle and your trailer. Cross the safety chainsunder the tongue of the trailer so that the tongue willnot drop to the road if it becomes separated fromthe hitch. Instructions about safety chains may beprovided by the hitch manufacturer or by the trailermanufacturer. Follow the manufacturer’srecommendation for attaching safety chains and donot attach them to the bumper. Always leave justenough slack so you can turn with your rig. And,never allow safety chains to drag on the ground.

Trailer BrakesIf you tow more than 1,000 lbs (450 kg), use trailerbrakes. Because your vehicle has anti-lockbrakes, don’t try to tap into your vehicle’s hydraulicbrake system. If you do, both brake systemswon’t work well, or at all.

Be sure to read and follow the instructions for thetrailer brakes so you’ll be able to install, adjustand maintain them properly.

369

Driving with a TrailerTowing a trailer requires a certain amount ofexperience. Before setting out for the open road,you’ll want to get to know your rig. Acquaintyourself with the feel of handling and braking withthe added weight of the trailer. And alwayskeep in mind that the vehicle you are driving isnow a good deal longer and not nearly asresponsive as your vehicle is by itself.

Before you start, check all trailer hitch parts andattachments, safety chains, electrical connector,lamps, tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailer haselectric brakes, start your vehicle and trailermoving and then apply the trailer brake controllerby hand to be sure the brakes are working.This lets you check your electrical connection atthe same time.

During your trip, check occasionally to be surethat the load is secure, and that the lamps and anytrailer brakes are still working.

Following DistanceStay at least twice as far behind the vehicle aheadas you would when driving your vehicle withouta trailer. This can help you avoid situationsthat require heavy braking and sudden turns.

PassingYou’ll need more passing distance up ahead whenyou’re towing a trailer. And, because you’re agood deal longer, you’ll need to go much fartherbeyond the passed vehicle before you canreturn to your lane.

Backing UpHold the bottom of the steering wheel with onehand. Then, to move the trailer to the left,just move that hand to the left. To move the trailerto the right, move your hand to the right. Alwaysback up slowly and, if possible, have someoneguide you.

370

Making Turns

Notice: Making very sharp turns whiletrailering could cause the trailer to come incontact with the vehicle. Your vehicle could bedamaged. Avoid making very sharp turnswhile trailering.

When you’re turning with a trailer, make widerturns than normal. Do this so your trailerwon’t strike soft shoulders, curbs, road signs,trees or other objects. Avoid jerky or suddenmaneuvers. Signal well in advance.

Turn Signals When Towing a TrailerWhen you tow a trailer, your vehicle may need adifferent turn signal flasher and/or extra wiring.Check with your dealer/retailer. The arrows on yourinstrument panel will flash whenever you signal aturn or lane change. Properly hooked up, the trailerlamps will also flash, telling other drivers you’reabout to turn, change lanes or stop.

When towing a trailer, the arrows on yourinstrument panel will flash for turns even if thebulbs on the trailer are burned out. Thus, you maythink drivers behind you are seeing your signal

when they are not. It’s important to checkoccasionally to be sure the trailer bulbs are stillworking.

Driving on GradesYour vehicle is designed primarily as a passengerand load carrying vehicle. If you tow a trailer,your vehicle will require more frequentmaintenance due to the additional load. Becauseof the added load of the trailer, your vehicle’sengine may overheat on hot days, when going upa long or steep grade with a trailer. If the enginecoolant temperature gage indicates overheating,turn off the air conditioning to reduce engine load,pull off the road and stop in a safe spot.

Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear beforeyou start down a long or steep downgrade. If youdon’t shift down, you might have to use yourbrakes so much that they would get hot and nolonger work well.

On a long uphill grade, shift down and reduceyour speed to around 55 mph (88 km/h) to reducethe possibility of the engine and the transmissionoverheating.

371

Parking on Hills

{CAUTION:

You really should not park your vehicle,with a trailer attached, on a hill. Ifsomething goes wrong, your rig couldstart to move. People can be injured, andboth your vehicle and the trailer can bedamaged.

But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill,here’s how to do it:

1. Apply your regular brakes, but don’t shift intoPARK (P).When parking uphill, turn your wheels awayfrom the curb. When parking downhill,turn your wheels into the curb.

2. Have someone place chocks behind the trailerwheels.

3. When the chocks are in place, releasethe regular brakes until the chocks absorbthe load.

4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply yourparking brake and shift into PARK (P).

5. Release the regular brakes.

When You Are Ready to Leave AfterParking on a Hill1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal

down while you:

• start your engine,

• shift into a gear, and

• release the parking brake.

2. Let up on the brake pedal.

3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of thechocks.

4. Stop and have someone pick up and store thechocks.

372

Maintenance When Trailer TowingYour vehicle will need service more often whenyou’re pulling a trailer. See ScheduledMaintenance on page 488 for more information.Things that are especially important in traileroperation are automatic transmission fluid (don’toverfill), engine oil, axle lubricant, drive belt,cooling system and brake system. Each of theseis covered in this manual, and the Index willhelp you find them quickly. If you’re trailering, it’sa good idea to review this information beforeyou start your trip.

Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts andbolts are tight.

Trailer Wiring HarnessYour vehicle is equipped with the following wiringharness for towing a trailer.

Basic Trailer WiringThe trailer wiring harness, with a seven-pinconnector, is located at the rear of the vehicle andis tied to the vehicle’s frame. The harnessconnector can be plugged into a seven-pinuniversal heavy-duty trailer connector availablethrough your dealer/retailer.

373

The seven-wire harness contains the followingtrailer circuits:

• Yellow: Left Stop/Turn Signal

• Dark Green: Right Stop/Turn Signal

• Brown: Taillamps

• White: Ground

• Light Green: Back-up Lamps

• Red: Battery Feed*

• Dark Blue: Trailer Brake*

*The fuses for these two circuits are installed inthe underhood electrical center, but the wiresare not connected. They should be connected byyour dealer/retailer or a qualified service center.

If you are charging a remote (non-vehicle) battery,press the tow/haul mode button located at theend of the shift lever. This will boost the vehiclesystem voltage and properly charge the battery. Ifthe trailer is too light for tow/haul mode, youcan turn on the headlamps (Non-HID only) as asecond way to boost the vehicle system andcharge the battery.

Engine Cooling When Trailer TowingYour cooling system may temporarily overheatduring severe operating conditions. See EngineOverheating on page 400.

374

Service ........................................................ 377Accessories and Modifications ................... 377California Proposition 65 Warning .............. 378Doing Your Own Service Work .................. 378Adding Equipment to the Outside of

Your Vehicle .......................................... 379Fuel ............................................................. 379

Gasoline Octane ........................................ 379Gasoline Specifications .............................. 379California Fuel ........................................... 380Additives ................................................... 380Fuels in Foreign Countries ........................ 381Filling the Tank ......................................... 381Filling a Portable Fuel Container ............... 384

Checking Things Under the Hood .............. 384Hood Release ........................................... 385Engine Compartment Overview .................. 386Engine Oil ................................................. 387Engine Oil Life System .............................. 390Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ............................ 392Automatic Transmission Fluid .................... 394Engine Coolant .......................................... 396Radiator Pressure Cap .............................. 399Engine Overheating ................................... 400

Overheated Engine ProtectionOperating Mode ..................................... 402

Cooling System ......................................... 402Power Steering Fluid ................................. 408Windshield Washer Fluid ........................... 409Brakes ...................................................... 410Battery ...................................................... 413Jump Starting ............................................ 414

All-Wheel Drive ........................................... 420Headlamp Aiming ........................................ 421Bulb Replacement ....................................... 422

High Intensity Discharge (HID) Lighting ..... 422Halogen Bulbs ........................................... 422License Plate Lamp ................................... 423Replacement Bulbs ................................... 423

Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ....... 424Tires ............................................................ 425

Tire Sidewall Labeling ............................... 426Tire Terminology and Definitions ............... 429Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................. 432Tire Pressure Monitor System ................... 433Tire Inspection and Rotation ...................... 438When It Is Time for New Tires .................. 440

Section 5 Service and Appearance Care

375

Buying New Tires ...................................... 440Different Size Tires and Wheels ................ 442Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..................... 442Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ............ 444Wheel Replacement .................................. 444Tire Chains ............................................... 445If a Tire Goes Flat .................................... 446Changing a Flat Tire ................................. 447Removing the Spare Tire and Tools .......... 448Removing the Flat Tire and Installing

the Spare Tire ....................................... 451Secondary Latch System ........................... 456Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ...... 459Compact Spare Tire .................................. 463

Appearance Care ........................................ 464Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle .......... 464Fabric/Carpet ............................................. 465Leather ...................................................... 466Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other

Plastic Surfaces ..................................... 467Care of Safety Belts .................................. 467Weatherstrips ............................................ 467Washing Your Vehicle ............................... 468Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses ................ 468

Finish Care ............................................... 468Windshield, Backglass, and

Wiper Blades .......................................... 469Aluminum or Chrome-Plated

Wheels and Trim ................................... 470Tires ......................................................... 471Sheet Metal Damage ................................. 471Finish Damage .......................................... 471Underbody Maintenance ............................ 472Chemical Paint Spotting ............................ 472Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ............ 473

Vehicle Identification .................................. 474Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ........... 474Service Parts Identification Label ............... 474

Electrical System ........................................ 475High Voltage Devices and Wiring .............. 475Add-On Electrical Equipment ..................... 475Windshield Wiper Fuses ............................ 475Power Windows and Other

Power Options ....................................... 476Fuses and Circuit Breakers ....................... 476Instrument Panel Fuse Block ..................... 476Underhood Fuse Block .............................. 479

Capacities and Specifications .................... 483

Section 5 Service and Appearance Care

376

ServiceYour dealer/retailer knows your vehicle best andwants you to be happy with it. We hope you will goto your dealer/retailer for all your service needs.You will get genuine Saturn parts andSaturn-trained and supported service people.

We hope you will want to keep your Saturn vehicleall Saturn. Genuine Saturn parts have one ofthese marks.

Accessories and ModificationsWhen you add non-Saturn accessories to yourvehicle they can affect your vehicle’s performanceand safety, including such things as, airbags,braking, stability, ride and handling, emissionssystems, aerodynamics, durability, and electronicsystems like anti-lock brakes, traction control,and stability control. Some of these accessoriesmay even cause malfunction or damage notcovered by warranty.

Saturn accessories are designed to complementand function with other systems on your vehicle.Your Saturn retailer can accessorize your vehicleusing genuine Saturn accessories. When you go toyour Saturn retailer and ask for Saturn accessories,you will know that Saturn-trained and supportedservice technicians will perform the work usinggenuine Saturn accessories.

377

California Proposition 65 WarningMost motor vehicles, including this one, containand/or emit chemicals known to the State ofCalifornia to cause cancer and birth defects or otherreproductive harm. Engine exhaust, many parts andsystems (including some inside the vehicle), manyfluids, and some component wear by-productscontain and/or emit these chemicals.

Doing Your Own Service Work

{CAUTION:

You can be injured and your vehicle couldbe damaged if you try to do service workon a vehicle without knowing enoughabout it.

• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,experience, the proper replacementparts, and tools before you attempt anyvehicle maintenance task.



• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts,and other fasteners. English and metricfasteners can be easily confused. If youuse the wrong fasteners, parts can laterbreak or fall off. You could be hurt.

If you want to do some of your own service work,you should use the proper service manual. Ittells you much more about how to service yourvehicle than this manual can. To order the properservice manual, see Service PublicationsOrdering Information on page 518.

Your vehicle has an airbag system. Beforeattempting to do your own service work, seeServicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 91.

You should keep a record with all parts receiptsand list the mileage and the date of any servicework you perform. See Maintenance Recordon page 500.

378

Adding Equipment to the Outside ofYour VehicleThings you might add to the outside of yourvehicle can affect the airflow around it. This cancause wind noise and can affect fuel economy andwindshield washer performance. Check withyour dealer/retailer before adding equipment to theoutside of your vehicle.

FuelUse of the recommended fuel is an important partof the proper maintenance of your vehicle. Tohelp keep the engine clean and maintain optimumvehicle performance, we recommend the use ofgasoline advertised as TOP TIER DetergentGasoline.

Gasoline OctaneUse regular unleaded gasoline with a postedoctane rating of 87 or higher. For best performanceor trailer towing, you could choose to use middlegrade 89 octane unleaded gasoline. If the octanerating is less than 87, you might notice an audibleknocking noise when you drive, commonly referredto as spark knock. If this occurs, use a gasolinerated at 87 octane or higher as soon as possible. Ifyou are using gasoline rated at 87 octane or higherand you hear heavy knocking, the engine needsservice.

Gasoline SpecificationsAt a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTMspecification D 4814 in the United States orCAN/CGSB-3.5 or 3.511 in Canada. Somegasolines contain an octane-enhancing additivecalled methylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT). We recommend against theuse of gasolines containing MMT. See Additiveson page 380 for additional information.

379

California FuelIf your vehicle is certified to meet CaliforniaEmissions Standards, it is designed to operate onfuels that meet California specifications. Seethe underhood emission control label. If this fuel isnot available in states adopting Californiaemissions standards, your vehicle will operatesatisfactorily on fuels meeting federalspecifications, but emission control systemperformance might be affected. The malfunctionindicator lamp could turn on and your vehicle mightfail a smog-check test. See Malfunction IndicatorLamp on page 222. If this occurs, return toyour authorized dealer/retailer for diagnosis. If it isdetermined that the condition is caused by thetype of fuel used, repairs might not be covered byyour warranty.

AdditivesTo provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the UnitedStates are now required to contain additivesthat help prevent engine and fuel system depositsfrom forming, allowing the emission controlsystem to work properly. In most cases, youshould not have to add anything to the fuel.

However, some gasolines contain only theminimum amount of additive required to meet U.S.Environmental Protection Agency regulations.To help keep fuel injectors and intake valves clean,or if your vehicle experiences problems due todirty injectors or valves, look for gasoline that isadvertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline. Also,your dealer/retailer has additives that will helpcorrect and prevent most deposit-related problems.

Gasolines containing oxygenates, such asethers and ethanol, and reformulated gasolinesmight be available in your area. We recommendthat you use these gasolines, if they complywith the specifications described earlier. However,E85 (85% ethanol) and other fuels containingmore than 10% ethanol must not be usedin vehicles that were not designed for those fuels.

Notice: Your vehicle was not designed forfuel that contains methanol. Do not usefuel containing methanol. It can corrode metalparts in the fuel system and also damageplastic and rubber parts. That damage wouldnot be covered under your warranty.

380

Some gasolines that are not reformulated for lowemissions can contain an octane-enhancingadditive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant where youbuy gasoline whether the fuel contains MMT.We recommend against the use of such gasolines.Fuels containing MMT can reduce the life ofspark plugs and the performance of the emissioncontrol system could be affected. The malfunctionindicator lamp might turn on. If this occurs,return to your dealer/retailer for service.

Fuels in Foreign CountriesIf you plan on driving in another country outside theUnited States or Canada, the proper fuel might behard to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any otherfuel not recommended in the previous text on fuel.Costly repairs caused by use of improper fuel wouldnot be covered by your warranty.

To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, orcontact a major oil company that does businessin the country where you will be driving.

Filling the Tank

{CAUTION:

Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel firecan cause bad injuries. To help avoidinjuries to you and others, read and followall the instructions on the pump island.Turn off your engine when you arerefueling. Do not smoke if you are nearfuel or refueling your vehicle. Do not usecellular phones. Keep sparks, flames, andsmoking materials away from fuel. Do notleave the fuel pump unattended whenrefueling your vehicle. This is against thelaw in some places. Do not re-enter thevehicle while pumping fuel. Keep childrenaway from the fuel pump; never letchildren pump fuel.

The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hingedfuel door on the driver’s side of the vehicle.

381

To open the fuel door, push the rearward centeredge in and release. The door will pop open.

To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowlycounterclockwise. The fuel cap has a spring in it; ifthe cap is released too soon, it will spring backto the right.

While refueling, hang the tethered fuel cap fromthe hook on the fuel door.

382

{CAUTION:

Fuel can spray out on you if you open thefuel cap too quickly. If you spill fuel andthen something ignites it, you could bebadly burned. This spray can happen ifyour tank is nearly full, and is more likelyin hot weather. Open the fuel cap slowlyand wait for any hiss noise to stop. Thenunscrew the cap all the way.

Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfillthe tank and wait a few seconds after you havefinished pumping before removing the nozzle.Clean fuel from painted surfaces as soonas possible. See Washing Your Vehicle onpage 468.

When replacing the fuel cap, turn it clockwise untilit clicks. Make sure the cap is fully installed.The diagnostic system can determine if the fuelcap has been left off or improperly installed.This would allow fuel to evaporate into theatmosphere. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp onpage 222.

If your vehicle has a Driver Information Center(DIC), the TIGHTEN GAS CAP message will bedisplayed if the fuel cap is not properly installed.

{CAUTION:

If a fire starts while you are refueling, donot remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow offuel by shutting off the pump or bynotifying the station attendant. Leave thearea immediately.

Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure toget the right type. Your dealer/ retailer canget one for you. If you get the wrong type, itmay not fit properly. This may cause yourmalfunction indicator lamp to light and maydamage your fuel tank and emissions system.See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 222.

383

Filling a Portable Fuel Container

{CAUTION:

Never fill a portable fuel container while itis in your vehicle. Static electricitydischarge from the container can ignite thegasoline vapor. You can be badly burnedand your vehicle damaged if this occurs.To help avoid injury to you and others:

• Dispense gasoline only into approvedcontainers.

• Do not fill a container while it is inside avehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickupbed, or on any surface other than theground.

• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with theinside of the fill opening beforeoperating the nozzle. Contact shouldbe maintained until the filling iscomplete.

• Do not smoke while pumping gasoline.• Do not use a cellular phone while

pumping gasoline.

Checking Things Underthe Hood

{CAUTION:

An electric fan under the hood can start upand injure you even when the engine is notrunning. Keep hands, clothing, and toolsaway from any underhood electric fan.

{CAUTION:

Things that burn can get on hot engineparts and start a fire. These includeliquids like fuel, oil, coolant, brake fluid,windshield washer and other fluids, andplastic or rubber. You or others could beburned. Be careful not to drop or spillthings that will burn onto a hot engine.

384

Hood ReleaseTo open the hood, do the following:

1. Pull the hoodrelease handle withthis symbol on it.It is locatedunder the instrumentpanel on thedriver’s side of thevehicle.

2. At the front of the vehicle, pull up on thecenter of the hood, and push the secondaryhood release to the right.

3. After you have partially lifted the hood, gasstruts will automatically take over to lift andhold the hood in the fully open position.

Before closing the hood, be sure all filler caps areon properly.

Pull the hood down to close. Lower the hood untilthe lifting pressure of the strut is reduced. Thenallow the hood to fall and latch into place under itsown weight. Check to make sure the hood isclosed. If the hood does not fully latch, gently pushthe hood down at the front and center of thehood until it is completely latched.

385

Engine Compartment OverviewWhen you lift the hood, here is what you will see:

386

A. Radiator Pressure Cap (Out of View). SeeRadiator Pressure Cap on page 399.

B. Engine Coolant Recovery Cap. See CoolingSystem on page 402.

C. Underhood Fuse Block. See Underhood FuseBlock on page 479.

D. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. See JumpStarting on page 414.

E. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. See PowerSteering Fluid on page 408.

F. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add EngineOil” under Engine Oil on page 387.

G. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”under Engine Oil on page 387.

H. Automatic Transmission Fluid Dipstick. See“Checking the Fluid Level” under AutomaticTransmission Fluid on page 394.

I. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “BrakeFluid” under Brakes on page 410.

J. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 392.

K. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See“Adding Washer Fluid” under WindshieldWasher Fluid on page 409.

Engine Oil

Checking Engine OilIt is a good idea to check the engine oil every timeyou get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading,the oil must be warm and the vehicle must beon level ground.

The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop.See Engine Compartment Overview on page 386for the location of the engine oil dipstick.

1. Turn off the engine and give the oilseveral minutes to drain back into the oilpan. If you do not do this, the oil dipstick mightnot show the actual level.

2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a papertowel or cloth, then push it back in all theway. Remove it again, keeping the tip down,and check the level.

387

When to Add Engine Oil

If the oil is below the cross-hatched area at the tipof the dipstick, you need to add at least onequart/liter of oil. But you must use the right kind.This section explains what kind of oil to use.For engine oil crankcase capacity, see Capacitiesand Specifications on page 483.

Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the enginehas so much oil that the oil level gets abovethe cross-hatched area that shows theproper operating range, the engine could bedamaged.

See EngineCompartment Overviewon page 386 for thelocation of the engine oilfill cap.

Be sure to add enough oil to put the levelsomewhere in the proper operating range in thecross-hatched area. Push the dipstick all theway back in when you are through.

388

What Kind of Engine Oil to Use

Look for three things:

• GM6094M

Your vehicle’s engine requires oil meeting GMStandard GM6094M. Look for and use onlyan oil that meets GM Standard GM6094M.

• SAE 5W-30

As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30 isbest for your vehicle.

These numbers on an oil container show itsviscosity, or thickness. Do not use otherviscosity oils such as SAE 20W-50.

• Oils meeting theserequirements shouldhave the starburstsymbol on thecontainer. Thissymbol indicates thatthe oil has beencertified by theAmerican PetroleumInstitute (API).

Look for this information on the oil container, anduse only those oils that are identified as meetingGM Standard GM6094M and have the starburstsymbol on the front of the oil container.

Notice: Use only engine oil identified asmeeting GM Standard GM6094M and showingthe American Petroleum Institute Certified ForGasoline Engines starburst symbol. Failure touse the recommended oil can result in enginedamage not covered by your warranty.

389

If you are in an area of extreme cold, where thetemperature falls below −20°F (−29°C), it isrecommended that you use either an SAE 5W-30synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both provideeasier cold starting and better protection forthe engine at extremely low temperatures.

Engine Oil AdditivesDo not add anything to the oil. The recommendedoils with the starburst symbol that meet GMStandard GM6094M are all you need for goodperformance and engine protection.

Engine Oil Life System

When to Change Engine OilYour vehicle has a computer system that lets youknow when to change the engine oil and filter.This is based on engine revolutions and enginetemperature, and not on mileage. Based on drivingconditions, the mileage at which an oil changewill be indicated can vary considerably. For the oillife system to work properly, you must reset thesystem every time the oil is changed.

When the system has calculated that oil life hasbeen diminished, it will indicate that an oil changeis necessary. A CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage will come on. Change the oil as soon aspossible within the next 600 miles (1 000 km). Itis possible that, if you are driving under thebest conditions, the oil life system might notindicate that an oil change is necessary for over ayear. However, the engine oil and filter must bechanged at least once a year and at this time thesystem must be reset. Your dealer/retailer hastrained service people who will perform this workusing genuine parts and reset the system. It isalso important to check the oil regularly and keepit at the proper level.

If the system is ever reset accidentally, you mustchange the oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) sinceyour last oil change. Remember to reset the oil lifesystem whenever the oil is changed.

390

How to Reset the Engine Oil LifeSystemThe Engine Oil Life System calculates when tochange the engine oil and filter based on vehicleuse. Whenever the oil is changed, reset the systemso it can calculate when the next oil change isrequired. If a situation occurs where you change theoil prior to a CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage being turned on, reset the system.

If your vehicle does not have Driver InformationCenter (DIC) buttons:

1. Turn the ignition to ON, with the engine off.The vehicle must be in PARK (P) to accessthis display. Press the trip odometer resetstem until OIL LIFE REMAINING displays.

2. Press and hold the trip odometer reset stemuntil OIL LIFE REMAINING shows 100%. Youwill hear three chimes and the CHANGEENGINE OIL SOON message will go off.

3. Turn the key to OFF.If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON messagecomes back on when you start your vehicle,the engine oil life system has not reset.Repeat the procedure.

If your vehicle has Driver Information Center (DIC)buttons:

1. Turn the ignition to ON, with the engine off.

2. Press the vehicle information button until OILLIFE REMAINING displays.

3. Press and hold the set/reset button until 100%is displayed. You will hear three chimes andthe CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON messagewill go off.

4. Turn the key to OFF.

If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON messagecomes back on when you start your vehicle, theengine oil life system has not reset. Repeatthe procedure.

391

What to Do with Used OilUsed engine oil contains certain elements that canbe unhealthy for your skin and could evencause cancer. Do not let used oil stay on yourskin for very long. Clean your skin and nails withsoap and water, or a good hand cleaner. Washor properly dispose of clothing or rags containingused engine oil. See the manufacturer’swarnings about the use and disposal of oilproducts.

Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If youchange your own oil, be sure to drain all the oilfrom the filter before disposal. Never dispose of oilby putting it in the trash, pouring it on theground, into sewers, or into streams or bodies ofwater. Instead, recycle it by taking it to a placethat collects used oil. If you have a problemproperly disposing of used oil, ask yourdealer/retailer, a service station, or a localrecycling center for help.

Engine Air Cleaner/FilterWhen to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/FilterInspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance IIintervals and replace it at the first oil change aftereach 50,000 mile (83 000 km) interval. SeeScheduled Maintenance on page 488 for moreinformation. If you are driving in dusty/dirtyconditions, inspect the filter at each engine oilchange.

See Engine Compartment Overview on page 386for the location of the engine air cleaner/filter.

392

How to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/FilterTo inspect the air cleaner/filter, remove the filterfrom the vehicle and lightly shake the filter(away from vehicle) to release loose dust and dirt.If the filter remains caked with dirt, a new filteris required.

To inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter,do the following:

1. Loosen the screws that hold the cover on.

2. Disconnect the electrical connector.

3. Lift off the cover.

4. Remove the engine air cleaner/filter elementand any loose debris that may be found in theair cleaner base.

5. Inspect or replace the air filter element.

6. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to reinstall thecover and reconnect the electrical connector.

{CAUTION:

Operating the engine with the aircleaner/filter off can cause you or othersto be burned. The air cleaner not onlycleans the air; it helps to stop flames ifthe engine backfires. If it is not there andthe engine backfires, you could beburned. Do not drive with it off, and becareful working on the engine with the aircleaner/filter off.

Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfirecan cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirtcan easily get into your engine, which willdamage it. Always have the air cleaner/filter inplace when you are driving.

393

Automatic Transmission Fluid

When to Check and Change AutomaticTransmission FluidA good time to check the automatic transmissionfluid level is when the engine oil is changed.

Change the fluid at the intervals listed in AdditionalRequired Services on page 491, and be sure touse the transmission fluid listed in RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 497.

How to Check Automatic TransmissionFluidBecause this operation can be a little difficult, youmay choose to have this done at the dealer/retailerservice department.

If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all theinstructions here, or you could get a false readingon the dipstick.

Notice: Too much or too little fluid candamage your transmission. Too much canmean that some of the fluid could come outand fall on hot engine parts or exhaust systemparts, starting a fire. Too little fluid couldcause the transmission to overheat. Be sure toget an accurate reading if you check yourtransmission fluid.

Wait at least 30 minutes before checking thetransmission fluid level if you have been driving:

• When outside temperatures are above90°F (32°C).

• At high speed for quite a while.

• In heavy traffic — especially in hot weather.

• While pulling a trailer.

To get the right reading, the fluid should be atnormal operating temperature, which is 180°F to200°F (82°C to 93°C).

Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about15 miles (24 km) when outside temperatures areabove 50°F (10°C). If it is colder than 50°F (10°C),you may have to drive longer.

394

Checking the Fluid LevelPrepare the vehicle as follows:

1. Park the vehicle on a level place. Keep theengine running.

2. With the parking brake applied, place the shiftlever in PARK (P).

3. With your foot on the brake pedal, move theshift lever through each gear, pausing forabout three seconds in each one. Then,position the shift lever in PARK (P).

4. Let the engine run at idle for three tofive minutes.

Then, without shutting off the engine, follow thesesteps:

The transmission fluiddipstick cap has thissymbol on it, andis located near the frontof the enginecompartment.

See Engine Compartment Overview on page 386for more information on location.

1. Remove the dipstick and wipe it with a cleanrag or paper towel.

2. Reinstall back in all the way, waitthree seconds and then pull it back outagain.

3. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read thelower level. The fluid level must be in thecrosshatched area.

4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range,twist & lock dipstick cap in place.

395

How to Add Automatic TransmissionFluidRefer to the Maintenance Schedule to determinewhat kind of transmission fluid to use. SeeRecommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 497.

If the fluid level is low, add only enough of theproper fluid to bring the level into the crosshatchedarea on the dipstick.

1. Remove the dipstick.

2. Using a long-neck funnel, add enough fluid atthe dipstick hole to bring it to the proper level.It does not take much fluid, generally lessthan one half of a pint (0.25 L). Do not overfill.

Notice: Use of the incorrect automatictransmission fluid may damage your vehicle,and the damages may not be covered byyour warranty. Always use the automatictransmission fluid listed in RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 497.

3. After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level asdescribed under “How to Check AutomaticTransmission Fluid,” earlier in this section.

4. When the correct fluid level is obtained, twist& lock dipstick cap in place.

Engine CoolantThe cooling system in your vehicle is filled withDEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant isdesigned to remain in your vehicle for five years or150,000 miles (240 000 km), whichever occursfirst, if you add only DEX-COOL® extendedlife coolant.

The following explains your cooling system andhow to add coolant when it is low. If you havea problem with engine overheating or if you needto add coolant to the radiator, see EngineOverheating on page 400.

A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water andDEX-COOL® coolant will:

• Give freezing protection downto −34°F (−37°C).

• Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).

• Protect against rust and corrosion.

• Help keep the proper engine temperature.

• Let the warning lights and gages work as theyshould.

396

Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL®

may cause premature engine, heater core,or radiator corrosion. In addition, the enginecoolant may require changing sooner, atthe first maintenance service after each30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months,whichever occurs first. Any repairs would notbe covered by your warranty. Always useDEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in yourvehicle.

What to UseUse a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable waterand one-half DEX-COOL® coolant which willnot damage aluminum parts. If you use this coolantmixture, you do not need to add anything else.

{CAUTION:

Adding only plain water to your coolingsystem can be dangerous. Plain water, orsome other liquid such as alcohol, canboil before the proper coolant mixture will.Your vehicle’s coolant warning system isset for the proper coolant mixture. Withplain water or the wrong mixture, yourengine could get too hot but you wouldnot get the overheat warning. Your enginecould catch fire and you or others couldbe burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.

Notice: If you use an improper coolantmixture, your engine could overheat and bebadly damaged. The repair cost would not becovered by your warranty. Too much waterin the mixture can freeze and crack the engine,radiator, heater core, and other parts.

397

If coolant needs to be added more than four timesa year, have your dealer/retailer check thecooling system.

Notice: If you use extra inhibitors and/oradditives in your vehicle’s cooling system, youcould damage your vehicle. Use only theproper mixture of the engine coolant listed inthis manual for the cooling system. SeeRecommended Fluids and Lubricants onpage 497 for more information.

Checking Coolant

The coolant recoverytank cap has thissymbol on it.

See Engine Compartment Overview on page 386for more information on the location of thecoolant recovery tank.

The vehicle must be on a level surface whenchecking the coolant level.

When the engine is cold, the coolant level shouldbe at the FULL COLD line or a little higher.When the engine is warm, the level could beabove the FULL COLD level. The FULL COLD lineis marked on the coolant recovery tank.

398

Adding CoolantIf more coolant is needed, add the properDEX-COOL® coolant mixture at the coolantrecovery tank, but be careful not to spill it.

If the coolant recovery tank is completely empty,add coolant to the radiator. See EngineOverheating on page 400.

{CAUTION:

Turning the radiator pressure cap when theengine and radiator are hot can allowsteam and scalding liquids to blow outand burn you badly. With the coolantrecovery tank, you will almost neverhave to add coolant at the radiator. Neverturn the radiator pressure cap — even alittle — when the engine and radiatorare hot.

{CAUTION:

You can be burned if you spill coolant onhot engine parts. Coolant containsethylene glycol, and it will burn if theengine parts are hot enough. Do not spillcoolant on a hot engine.

Occasionally check the coolant level in theradiator. For information on how to add coolant tothe radiator, see Cooling System on page 402.

Radiator Pressure Cap

Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightlyinstalled, coolant loss and possible enginedamage may occur. Be sure the cap is properlyand tightly secured.

See Engine Compartment Overview on page 386for more information on location.

399

Engine OverheatingThere is an engine coolant temperature gage onyour vehicle’s instrument panel. See EngineCoolant Temperature Gage on page 220.Your vehicle may also have an ENGINEOVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE and ENGINEOVERHEATED STOP ENGINE message displayedin the Driver Information Center (DIC). See DICWarnings and Messages on page 239.

If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine

{CAUTION:

Steam from an overheated engine canburn you badly, even if you just open thehood. Stay away from the engine if you seeor hear steam coming from it. Turn it offand get everyone away from the vehicleuntil it cools down. Wait until there is nosign of steam or coolant before you openthe hood.



If you keep driving when the vehiclesengine is overheated, the liquids in it cancatch fire. You or others could be badlyburned. Stop your engine if it overheats,and get out of the vehicle until the engineis cool.

See Overheated Engine ProtectionOperating Mode on page 402 forinformation on driving to a safe place inan emergency.

Notice: If your engine catches fire becauseyou keep driving with no coolant, your vehiclecan be badly damaged. The costly repairswould not be covered by your warranty. SeeOverheated Engine Protection Operating Modeon page 402 for information on driving to asafe place in an emergency.

400

If No Steam Is Coming From YourEngineIf you get an engine overheat warning but see orhear no steam, the problem may not be tooserious. Sometimes the engine can get a little toohot when you:

• Climb a long hill on a hot day.

• Stop after high-speed driving.

• Idle for long periods in traffic.

• Tow a trailer.

If you get the overheat warning with no sign ofsteam, try this for a minute or so:

1. If your air conditioner is on, turn it off.

2. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highestfan speed and open the windows asnecessary.

3. If you are in a traffic jam, shift to NEUTRAL (N);otherwise, shift to the highest gear whiledriving — DRIVE (D) or LOW (L).

If you no longer have the overheat warning, youcan drive. Just to be safe, drive slower forabout 10 minutes. If the warning does not comeback on, you can drive normally.

If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and parkyour vehicle right away.

If there is still no sign of steam, idle the engine forthree minutes while you are parked. If you stillhave the warning, turn off the engine andget everyone out of the vehicle until it cools down.Also, see “Overheated Engine ProtectionOperating Mode” later in this section.

You may decide not to lift the hood but to getservice help right away.

401

Overheated Engine ProtectionOperating ModeThis emergency operating mode lets your vehiclebe driven to a safe place in an emergencysituation. If an overheated engine condition exists,an overheat protection mode which alternatesfiring groups of cylinders helps prevent enginedamage. In this mode, there is a significant loss inpower and engine performance. The temperaturegage indicates an overheat condition exists.Driving extended distances and/or towing a trailerin the overheat protection mode should beavoided.

Notice: After driving in the overheated engineprotection operating mode, to avoid enginedamage, allow the engine to cool beforeattempting any repair. The engine oil will beseverely degraded. Repair the cause of coolantloss, change the oil and reset the oil lifesystem. See Engine Oil on page 387.

Cooling SystemWhen you decide it is safe to lift the hood, here iswhat you will see:

A. Engine Coolant ReservoirB. Radiator Pressure Cap (covered)C. Engine Cooling Fans

402

{CAUTION:

An electric engine cooling fan under thehood can start up even when the engineis not running and can injure you. Keephands, clothing, and tools away from anyunderhood electric fan.

If the coolant inside the coolant recovery tank isboiling, do not do anything else until it cools down.The vehicle should be parked on a level surface.

When the engine is cold, the coolant levelshould be at least up to the FULL COLD mark. If itis not, you may have a leak at the pressure capor in the radiator hoses, heater hoses, radiator,water pump or somewhere else in the coolingsystem.

{CAUTION:

Heater and radiator hoses, and otherengine parts, can be very hot. Do nottouch them. If you do, you can be burned.

Do not run the engine if there is a leak. Ifyou run the engine, it could lose allcoolant. That could cause an engine fire,and you could be burned. Get any leakfixed before you drive the vehicle.

403

If there seems to be no leak, with the engine on,check to see if the electric engine cooling fansare running. If the engine is overheating, both fansshould be running. If they are not, your vehicleneeds service.

Notice: Engine damage from running yourengine without coolant is not covered by yourwarranty.

Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL®

may cause premature engine, heater core, orradiator corrosion. In addition, the enginecoolant could require changing sooner, at30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months,whichever occurs first. Any repairs would notbe covered by your warranty. Always useDEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in yourvehicle.

How to Add Coolant to the CoolantRecovery Tank

Notice: This vehicle has a specific coolant fillprocedure. Failure to follow this procedurecould cause your engine to overheat andbe severely damaged.

If you have not found a problem yet, check to seeif coolant is visible in the coolant recovery tank.If coolant is visible but the coolant level is not at orabove the FULL COLD mark, add a 50/50 mixtureof clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL®

coolant at the coolant recovery tank, but be surethe cooling system, including the coolant recoverytank pressure cap, is cool before you do it. SeeEngine Coolant on page 396 for more information.

{CAUTION:

Steam and scalding liquids from a hotcooling system can blow out and burnyou badly. They are under pressure, and ifyou turn the radiator pressure cap — evena little — they can come out at highspeed. Never turn the cap when thecooling system, including the radiatorpressure cap, is hot. Wait for the coolingsystem and radiator pressure cap to coolif you ever have to turn the pressure cap.

404

{CAUTION:

Adding only plain water to your coolingsystem can be dangerous. Plain water, orsome other liquid such as alcohol, canboil before the proper coolant mixture will.Your vehicle’s coolant warning system isset for the proper coolant mixture. Withplain water or the wrong mixture, yourengine could get too hot but you wouldnot get the overheat warning. Your enginecould catch fire and you or others couldbe burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.

Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze andcrack the engine, radiator, heater core andother parts. Use the recommended coolant andthe proper coolant mixture.

{CAUTION:

You can be burned if you spill coolant onhot engine parts. Coolant containsethylene glycol and it will burn if theengine parts are hot enough. Do not spillcoolant on a hot engine.

When the coolant in the coolant recovery tank isat the FULL COLD mark, start your vehicle. Ifthe overheat warning continues, there is one morething you can try. You can add the propermixture directly to the radiator, but be sure thecooling system is cool before you do it.

405

1. To remove the panel that covers the radiatorcap, detach fasteners and lift off panel.

2. Remove the radiator pressure cap when thecooling system, including the upper radiatorhose, is no longer hot. Turn the pressure capslowly counterclockwise about one full turn.If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hissmeans there is still some pressure left.

3. Keep turning thepressure cap slowly,and remove it.

4. Fill the radiator with the proper DEX-COOL®

coolant mixture, up to the base of the fillerneck. See Engine Coolant on page 396for more information about the proper coolantmixture.

406

5. Fill the coolant recovery tank to the FULLCOLD mark.

6. Reinstall the cap on the coolant recovery tank,but leave the radiator pressure cap off.

7. Start the engine and let it run until you canfeel the upper radiator hose getting hot.Watch out for the engine cooling fan.

8. By this time, the coolant level inside theradiator filler neck may be lower. If the level islower, add more of the proper DEX-COOL®

coolant mixture through the filler neck until thelevel reaches the base of the filler neck.Replace the pressure cap.

At any time during this procedure if coolant beginsto flow out of the filler neck, reinstall the pressurecap. Be sure to secure it tightly.

407

Power Steering Fluid

The power steering fluidreservoir is locatedtoward the front of theengine compartmenton the passenger’s sideof the vehicle. SeeEngine CompartmentOverview on page 386for reservoir location.

When to Check Power Steering FluidIt is not necessary to regularly check powersteering fluid unless you suspect there is a leak inthe system or you hear an unusual noise. Afluid loss in this system could indicate a problem.Have the system inspected and repaired.

How to Check Power Steering FluidTo check the power steering fluid, do the following:

1. Turn the key off and let the enginecompartment cool down.

2. Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean.

3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with aclean rag.

4. Replace the cap and completely tighten it.

5. Remove the cap again and look at thefluid level on the dipstick.

The fluid level should be somewhere within thecross-hatched area on the dipstick. If the fluid is atthe ADD mark, you should add fluid.

What to UseTo determine what kind of fluid to use, seeRecommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 497.Always use the proper fluid.

Notice: Use of the incorrect fluid may damageyour vehicle and the damages may not becovered by your warranty. Always use thecorrect fluid listed in Recommended Fluids andLubricants Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 497.

408

Windshield Washer Fluid

What to UseWhen adding windshield washer fluid, be sure toread the manufacturer’s instructions beforeuse. If operating your vehicle in an area where thetemperature may fall below freezing, use a fluidthat has sufficient protection against freezing.

Adding Washer FluidWhen the windshield washer fluid reservoir is low,a WASHER FLUID LOW ADD FLUID messagewill be displayed on the Driver Information Center(DIC). See DIC Warnings and Messages onpage 239 for more information.

Open the cap with thewasher symbol on it.Add washer fluiduntil the tank is full. SeeEngine CompartmentOverview on page 386for reservoir location.

Notice:• When using concentrated washer fluid,

follow the manufacturer’s instructionsfor adding water.

• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washerfluid. Water can cause the solution tofreeze and damage your washer fluid tankand other parts of the washer system.Also, water does not clean as wellas washer fluid.

• Fill the washer fluid tank onlythree-quarters full when it is very cold.This allows for fluid expansion if freezingoccurs, which could damage the tank if it iscompletely full.

• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) inyour windshield washer. It can damagethe vehicle’s windshield washer systemand paint.

409

Brakes

Brake Fluid

The brake mastercylinder reservoir isfilled with DOT-3 brakefluid. See EngineCompartment Overviewon page 386 for thelocation of the reservoir.

There are only two reasons why the brake fluidlevel in the reservoir might go down. The firstis that the brake fluid goes down to an acceptablelevel during normal brake lining wear. Whennew linings are put in, the fluid level goes backup. The other reason is that fluid is leaking out ofthe brake system. If it is, you should have thebrake system fixed, since a leak means thatsooner or later the brakes will not work well.

So, it is not a good idea to top off the brake fluid.Adding brake fluid will not correct a leak. If you addfluid when the linings are worn, then you will havetoo much fluid when you get new brake linings. Youshould add or remove brake fluid, as necessary,only when work is done on the brake hydraulicsystem.

{CAUTION:

If your vehicle has too much brake fluid, itcan spill on the engine. The fluid will burn ifthe engine is hot enough. You or otherscould be burned, and your vehicle could bedamaged. Add brake fluid only when workis done on the brake hydraulic system.

When the brake fluid falls to a low level, the brakewarning light comes on. See Brake SystemWarning Light on page 217.

410

What to AddWhen you need brake fluid, use only DOT-3 brakefluid. Use new brake fluid from a sealed containeronly. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricantson page 497.

Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and thearea around the cap before removing it. Thishelps keep dirt from entering the reservoir.

{CAUTION:

With the wrong kind of fluid in the brakesystem, the brakes may not work well.This could cause a crash. Always use theproper brake fluid.

Notice:• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage

brake system parts. For example, just afew drops of mineral-based oil, suchas engine oil, in the brake system candamage brake system parts so badly thatthey will have to be replaced. Do notlet someone put in the wrong kind of fluid.

• If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’spainted surfaces, the paint finish canbe damaged. Be careful not to spill brakefluid on your vehicle. If you do, wash itoff immediately. See Washing Your Vehicleon page 468.

411

Brake WearYour vehicle has four-wheel disc brakes.

Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators thatmake a high-pitched warning sound when thebrake pads are worn and new pads are needed.The sound can come and go or be heard allthe time your vehicle is moving, except when youare pushing on the brake pedal firmly.

{CAUTION:

The brake wear warning sound means thatsoon the brakes will not work well. Thatcould lead to an accident. When you hearthe brake wear warning sound, have yourvehicle serviced.

Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-outbrake pads could result in costly brake repair.

Some driving conditions or climates can cause abrake squeal when the brakes are first appliedor lightly applied. This does not mean somethingis wrong with the brakes.

Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to helpprevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated,inspect brake pads for wear and evenly tightenwheel nuts in the proper sequence to torquespecifications in Capacities and Specifications onpage 483.

Brake linings should always be replaced ascomplete axle sets.

Brake Pedal TravelSee your dealer/retailer if the brake pedal doesnot return to normal height, or if there is arapid increase in pedal travel. This could be a signthat brake service might be required.

Brake AdjustmentEvery time you apply the brakes, with or withoutthe vehicle moving, the brakes adjust for wear.

412

Replacing Brake System PartsThe braking system on a vehicle is complex. Itsmany parts have to be of top quality and work welltogether if the vehicle is to have really goodbraking. Your vehicle was designed and testedwith top-quality brake parts. When you replaceparts of the braking system — for example, whenthe brake linings wear down and you neednew ones put in — be sure you get new approvedreplacement parts. If you do not, the brakesmight not work properly. For example, if someoneputs in brake linings that are wrong for yourvehicle, the balance between the front and rearbrakes can change — for the worse. The brakingperformance you have come to expect canchange in many other ways if someone puts in thewrong replacement brake parts.

BatteryYour vehicle has a maintenance free battery.When it is time for a new battery, see yourdealer/retailer for one that has the replacementnumber shown on the original battery’s label.

For battery replacement, see your dealer/retaileror the service manual. To purchase a servicemanual, see Service Publications OrderingInformation on page 518.Warning: Battery posts, terminals, and relatedaccessories contain lead and lead compounds,chemicals known to the State of Californiato cause cancer and reproductive harm. Washhands after handling.

413

Vehicle StorageIf you are not going to drive your vehicle for25 days or more, remove the black, negative (−)cable from the battery. This will help keep thebattery from running down.

{CAUTION:

Batteries have acid that can burn you andgas that can explode. You can be badlyhurt if you are not careful. See JumpStarting on page 414 for tips on workingaround a battery without getting hurt.

Jump StartingIf your vehicle’s battery has run down, you maywant to use another vehicle and some jumpercables to start your vehicle. Be sure to usethe following steps to do it safely.

{CAUTION:

Batteries can hurt you. They can bedangerous because:

• They contain acid that can burn you.• They contain gas that can explode or

ignite.• They contain enough electricity to

burn you.

If you do not follow these steps exactly,some or all of these things can hurt you.

414

Notice: Ignoring these steps could result incostly damage to your vehicle that wouldnot be covered by your warranty.

Trying to start your vehicle by pushing orpulling it will not work, and it could damageyour vehicle.

1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a12-volt battery with a negative ground system.

Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a12-volt system with a negative ground,both vehicles can be damaged. Only usevehicles with 12-volt systems with negativegrounds to jump start your vehicle.

2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumpercables can reach, but be sure the vehicles arenot touching each other. If they are, it couldcause a ground connection you do notwant. You would not be able to start yourvehicle, and the bad grounding could damagethe electrical systems.

To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling,set the parking brake firmly on both vehiclesinvolved in the jump start procedure. Putan automatic transmission in PARK (P) or amanual transmission in NEUTRAL beforesetting the parking brake. If you have afour-wheel-drive vehicle, be sure the transfercase is not in NEUTRAL.

Notice: If you leave your radio or otheraccessories on during the jump startingprocedure, they could be damaged. The repairswould not be covered by your warranty.Always turn off your radio and otheraccessories when jump starting your vehicle.

3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles.Unplug unnecessary accessories plugged intothe cigarette lighter or the accessory poweroutlets. Turn off the radio and all lampsthat are not needed. This will avoid sparksand help save both batteries. And it couldsave the radio!

415

4. Open the hoods and locate the positive (+)and negative (−) terminal locations on theother vehicle. Your vehicle has a remotepositive (+) and a remote negative (−) jumpstarting terminal. See Engine CompartmentOverview on page 386 for more information onthe terminal locations.

{CAUTION:

Using a match near a battery can causebattery gas to explode. People have beenhurt doing this, and some have beenblinded. Use a flashlight if you needmore light.



Be sure the batteries have enough water.You do not need to add water to theACDelco® battery (or batteries) installed inyour new vehicle. But if a battery has fillercaps, be sure the right amount of fluid isthere. If it is low, add water to take care ofthat first. If you do not, explosive gascould be present.

Battery fluid contains acid that can burnyou. Do not get it on you. If youaccidentally get it in your eyes or on yourskin, flush the place with water and getmedical help immediately.

416

{CAUTION:

Fans or other moving engine parts caninjure you badly. Keep your hands awayfrom moving parts once the engine isrunning.

5. Check that the jumper cables do not haveloose or missing insulation. If they do, youcould get a shock. The vehicles couldbe damaged too.Before you connect the cables, here are somebasic things you should know. Positive (+)will go to positive (+) or to a remotepositive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.Negative (−) will go to a heavy, unpaintedmetal engine part or to a remote negative (−)terminal if the vehicle has one.

Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−) oryou will get a short that would damagethe battery and maybe other parts too. And donot connect the negative (−) cable to thenegative (−) terminal on the dead batterybecause this can cause sparks.

6. Connect the redpositive (+) cable tothe positive (+)terminal of the deadbattery.

Use a remote positive (+) terminal if thevehicle has one.

7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connectit to the positive (+) terminal of the goodbattery. Use a remote positive (+) terminal ifthe vehicle has one.

417

8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable tothe negative (−) terminal of the good battery.Use a remote negative (−) terminal if thevehicle has one.Do not let the other end touch anything untilthe next step. The other end of thenegative (−) cable does not go to the deadbattery. It goes to a heavy, unpaintedmetal engine part, or to a remote negative (−)terminal on the vehicle with the deadbattery.

9. Connect the otherend of thenegative (−) cable atleast 18 inches(45 cm) away fromthe dead battery,but not near engineparts that move.

The electrical connection is just as goodthere, and the chance of sparks getting backto the battery is much less.Your vehicle has a remote negative (−)terminal for this purpose.

10. Now start the vehicle with the good batteryand run the engine for a while.

11. Try to start the vehicle that had the deadbattery. If it will not start after a few tries, itprobably needs service.

Notice: If the jumper cables are connected orremoved in the wrong order, electricalshorting may occur and damage the vehicle.The repairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Always connect and removethe jumper cables in the correct order, makingsure that the cables do not touch each otheror other metal.

418

A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part orRemote Negative (−) Terminal

B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) andRemote Negative (−) Terminals

C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal

To disconnect the jumper cables from bothvehicles, do the following:

1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable fromthe vehicle that had the dead battery.

2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable fromthe vehicle with the good battery.

3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from thevehicle with the good battery.

4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from theother vehicle.

Jumper Cable Removal

419

All-Wheel DriveBe sure to perform the lubricant checks describedin this section. There are two additional systemsthat need lubrication.

Transfer CaseWhen to Check LubricantRefer to the Maintenance Schedule to determinehow often to check the lubricant. See ScheduledMaintenance on page 488.

How to Check Lubricant

To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should beon a level surface.If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,you will need to add some lubricant. Add enoughlubricant to raise the level to the bottom of the fillerplug hole. Use care not to overtighten the plug.

What to UseRefer to the Maintenance Schedule to determinewhat kind of lubricant to use. See RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 497.

(A) Drain Plug (B) Filler Plug

420

Rear Drive ModuleWhen to Check LubricantRefer to the Maintenance Schedule to determinehow often to check the lubricant. See ScheduledMaintenance on page 488.

How to Check Lubricant

To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should beon a level surface.

If the level is below the bottom of the filler plughole, you will need to add some lubricant.Add enough lubricant to raise the level to thebottom of the filler plug hole. Use care notto overtighten the plug.

What to UseRefer to the Maintenance Schedule to determinewhat kind of lubricant to use. See RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 497.

Headlamp AimingHeadlamp aim has been preset at the factory andshould need no further adjustment.

However, if your vehicle is damaged in anaccident, the headlamp aim may be affected. Aimadjustment to the low-beam headlamps maybe necessary if oncoming drivers flash theirhigh-beam headlamps at you (for vertical aim).

If you believe your headlamps need to bere-aimed, it is recommend that you take the vehicleto your dealer/retailer for service.

(A) Filler Plug (B) Drain Plug

421

Bulb ReplacementFor the proper type of replacement bulbs, seeReplacement Bulbs on page 423.

For any bulb changing procedure not listed in thissection, contact your dealer/retailer.

High Intensity Discharge (HID)Lighting

{CAUTION:

The high beam and low beam highintensity discharge lighting systemoperates at a very high voltage. If you tryto service any of the system components,you could be seriously injured. Have yourdealer/retailer or a qualified technicianservice them.

Your vehicle has HID headlamps. After yourvehicle’s HID headlamp bulb has been replaced,you may notice that the beam is a slightly differentshade than it was originally. This is normal.

Halogen Bulbs

{CAUTION:

Halogen bulbs have pressurized gasinside and can burst if you drop orscratch the bulb. You or others could beinjured. Be sure to read and follow theinstructions on the bulb package.

422

License Plate LampTo replace one of these bulbs:

1. Remove the two screws holding each of thelicense plate lamps to the liftgate trim.

2. Turn and pull the license plate lamp forwardthrough the lift gate trim opening.

3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and pullthe bulb straight out of the socket.

4. Install the new bulb.5. Reverse steps 1 – 3 to reinstall the license

plate lamp.

Replacement Bulbs

Exterior Lamp Bulb NumberLicense Plate Lamp 194

For replacement bulbs not listed here, contactyour dealer/retailer.

423

Windshield Wiper BladeReplacementWindshield wiper blades should be inspected forwear or cracking. See Scheduled Maintenanceon page 488 for more information.

Replacement blades come in different types andare removed in different ways. To replace thewiper blade assembly, do the following:

1. Pull the windshield wiper arm away from thewindshield.

2. Press the button in the middle of the wiperarm connector, and pull the wiper bladeaway from the arm connector.

3. Install the new wiper blade, and make surethe wiper blade locks into place.

For the proper size and type see NormalMaintenance Replacement Parts on page 498.

Backglass Wiper Blade1. Pull the wiper blade assembly away from the

backglass. The backglass wiper blade will notlock in a vertical position, so care shouldbe used when pulling it away from the vehicle.

2. Rotate the wiper blade assembly, holdthe wiper arm in position and push the bladeaway from the wiper arm.

3. Replace the wiper blade.

4. Return the wiper arm and blade assembly tothe rest position on the glass.

424

TiresYour new vehicle comes with high-quality tiresmade by a leading tire manufacturer. If you everhave questions about your tire warranty and whereto obtain service, see your Saturn Warranty bookletfor details. For additional information refer to the tiremanufacturer’s booklet included with your vehicle.

{CAUTION:

Poorly maintained and improperly usedtires are dangerous.

• Overloading your vehicle’s tires cancause overheating as a result of toomuch friction. You could have anair-out and a serious accident. SeeLoading Your Vehicle on page 353.



• Underinflated tires pose the samedanger as overloaded tires. Theresulting accident could cause seriousinjury. Check all tires frequently tomaintain the recommended pressure.Tire pressure should be checked whenyour vehicle’s tires are cold. SeeInflation - Tire Pressure on page 432.

• Overinflated tires are more likely to becut, punctured, or broken by a suddenimpact — such as when you hit apothole. Keep tires at therecommended pressure.

• Worn, old tires can cause accidents. Ifthe tire’s tread is badly worn, or ifyour vehicle’s tires have beendamaged, replace them.

425

Tire Sidewall LabelingUseful information about a tire is molded into itssidewall. The examples below show a typicalpassenger vehicle tire and a compact spare tiresidewall.

(A) Tire Size: The tire size is a combination ofletters and numbers used to define a particular tire’swidth, height, aspect ratio, construction type, andservice description. See the “Tire Size” illustrationlater in this section for more detail.

(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance CriteriaSpecification): Original equipment tires designedto GM’s specific tire performance criteria have aTPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all federalsafety guidelines.

(C) DOT (Department of Transportation): TheDepartment of Transportation (DOT) code indicatesthat the tire is in compliance with the U.S.Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle SafetyStandards.

(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The lettersand numbers following DOT (Department ofTransportation) code is the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturerand plant code, tire size, and date the tire wasmanufactured. The TIN is molded onto both sides ofthe tire, although only one side may have the dateof manufacture.

(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord andnumber of plies in the sidewall and under the tread.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire Example

426

(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG): Tiremanufacturers are required to grade tiresbased on three performance factors: treadwear,traction, and temperature resistance. For moreinformation see Uniform Tire Quality Grading onpage 442.

(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:Maximum load that can be carried and themaximum pressure needed to support that load.

(A) Temporary Use Only: The compact sparetire or temporary use tire has a tread life ofapproximately 3,000 miles (5 000 km) and shouldnot be driven at speeds over 65 mph (105 km/h).The compact spare tire is for emergency use whena regular road tire has lost air and gone flat. Ifyour vehicle has a compact spare tire, seeCompact Spare Tire on page 463 and If a TireGoes Flat on page 446.

(B) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord andnumber of plies in the sidewall and under thetread.

(C) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The lettersand numbers following the DOT (Department ofTransportation) code is the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturerand plant code, tire size, and date the tirewas manufactured. The TIN is molded onto bothsides of the tire, although only one side may havethe date of manufacture.

(D) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:Maximum load that can be carried and themaximum pressure needed to support that load.

Compact Spare Tire Example

427

(E) Tire Inflation: The temporary use tire orcompact spare tire should be inflated to 60 psi(420 kPa). For more information on tire pressureand inflation see Inflation - Tire Pressure onpage 432.

(F) Tire Size: A combination of letters andnumbers define a tire’s width, height, aspect ratio,construction type, and service description. Theletter T as the first character in the tire size meansthe tire is for temporary use only.

(G) TPC Spec (Tire Performance CriteriaSpecification): Original equipment tires designedto GM’s specific tire performance criteria havea TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed allfederal safety guidelines.

Tire SizeThe following illustration shows an example of atypical passenger vehicle tire size.

(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The United Statesversion of a metric tire sizing system. The letter Pas the first character in the tire size means apassenger vehicle tire engineered to standards setby the U.S. Tire and Rim Association.

(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicatesthe tire section width in millimeters from sidewall tosidewall.

(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number thatindicates the tire height-to-width measurements.For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is 60, asshown in item C of the illustration, it would meanthat the tire’s sidewall is 60 percent as high asit is wide.

428

(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used toindicate the type of ply construction in the tire.The letter R means radial ply construction;the letter D means diagonal or bias plyconstruction; and the letter B means belted-biasply construction.

(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel ininches.

(F) Service Description: These charactersrepresent the load range and speed rating of thetire. The load index represents the load carrycapacity a tire is certified to carry. The load indexcan range from 1 to 279. The speed rating isthe maximum speed a tire is certified to carry aload. Speed ratings range from A to Z.

Tire Terminology and DefinitionsAir Pressure: The amount of air inside the tirepressing outward on each square inch of thetire. Air pressure is expressed in poundsper square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).

Accessory Weight: This means the combinedweight of optional accessories. Some examples ofoptional accessories are, automatic transmission,power steering, power brakes, power windows,power seats, and air conditioning.

Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s heightto its width.

Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that islocated between the plies and the tread. Cordsmay be made from steel or other reinforcingmaterials.

Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrappedby steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.

Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the pliesare laid at alternate angles less than 90 degreesto the centerline of the tread.

Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of air pressurein a tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi)or kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up heatfrom driving. See Inflation - Tire Pressure onpage 432.

429

Curb Weight: The weight of a motor vehicle withstandard and optional equipment including themaximum capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant,but without passengers and cargo.

DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewallof a tire signifying that the tire is in compliancewith the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT)motor vehicle safety standards. The DOT codeincludes the Tire Identification Number (TIN),an alphanumeric designator which can also identifythe tire manufacturer, production plant, brand,and date of production.

GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. SeeLoading Your Vehicle on page 353.

GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for thefront axle. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 353.

GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for therear axle. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 353.

Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of anasymmetrical tire, that must always face outwardwhen mounted on a vehicle.

Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.

Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on lightduty trucks and some multipurpose passengervehicles.

Load Index: An assigned number ranging from1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carryingcapacity of a tire.

Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum airpressure to which a cold tire can be inflated.The maximum air pressure is molded onto thesidewall.

Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tireat the maximum permissible inflation pressurefor that tire.

Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum ofcurb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacityweight, and production options weight.

Normal Occupant Weight: The number ofoccupants a vehicle is designed to seat multipliedby 150 lbs (68 kg). See Loading Your Vehicleon page 353.

Occupant Distribution: Designated seatingpositions.

430

Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of anasymmetrical tire that has a particular side thatfaces outward when mounted on a vehicle.The side of the tire that contains a whitewall, bearswhite lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand,and/or model name molding that is higheror deeper than the same moldings on the othersidewall of the tire.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used onpassenger cars and some light duty trucks andmultipurpose vehicles.

Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehiclemanufacturer’s recommended tire inflationpressure as shown on the tire placard. SeeInflation - Tire Pressure on page 432 and LoadingYour Vehicle on page 353.

Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which theply cords that extend to the beads are laid at90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.

Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon whichthe tire beads are seated.

Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the treadand the bead.

Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assignedto a tire indicating the maximum speed atwhich a tire can operate.

Traction: The friction between the tire and theroad surface. The amount of grip provided.

Tread: The portion of a tire that comes intocontact with the road.

Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimescalled wear bars, that show across the tread ofa tire when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of treadremains. See When It Is Time for New Tires onpage 440.

UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality GradingStandards): A tire information system thatprovides consumers with ratings for a tire’straction, temperature, and treadwear. Ratings aredetermined by tire manufacturers usinggovernment testing procedures. The ratings aremolded into the sidewall of the tire. See UniformTire Quality Grading on page 442.

Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number ofdesignated seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs(68 kg) plus the rated cargo load. See LoadingYour Vehicle on page 353.

431

Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on anindividual tire due to curb weight, accessoryweight, occupant weight, and cargo weight.

Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached toa vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacity weightand the original equipment tire size andrecommended inflation pressure. See “Tire andLoading Information Label” under LoadingYour Vehicle on page 353.

Inflation - Tire PressureTires need the correct amount of air pressure tooperate effectively.

Notice: Do not let anyone tell you thatunder-inflation or over-inflation is all right. It isnot. If your tires do not have enough air(under-inflation), you can get the following:• Too much flexing

• Too much heat

• Tire overloading

• Premature or irregular wear

• Poor handling

• Reduced fuel economy

If your tires have too much air (over-inflation),you can get the following:• Unusual wear

• Poor handling

• Rough ride

• Needless damage from road hazards

A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Informationlabel is attached to your vehicle. This label showsyour vehicle’s original equipment tires and thecorrect inflation pressures for your tires when theyare cold. The recommended cold tire inflationpressure, shown on the label, is the minimumamount of air pressure needed to supportyour vehicle’s maximum load carrying capacity.

For additional information regarding how muchweight your vehicle can carry, and an example ofthe Tire and Loading Information label, seeLoading Your Vehicle on page 353. How you loadyour vehicle affects vehicle handling and ridecomfort. Never load your vehicle with more weightthan it was designed to carry.

432

When to CheckCheck your tires once a month or more. Do notforget to check the compact spare tire, it should beat 60 psi (420 kPa). For additional informationregarding the compact spare tire, see CompactSpare Tire on page 463.

How to CheckUse a good quality pocket-type gage to check tirepressure. You cannot tell if your tires areproperly inflated simply by looking at them. Radialtires may look properly inflated even when theyare under-inflated. Check the tire’s inflationpressure when the tires are cold. Cold means yourvehicle has been sitting for at least three hoursor driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).

Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem.Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve toget a pressure measurement. If the cold tireinflation pressure matches the recommendedpressure on the Tire and Loading Informationlabel, no further adjustment is necessary. If theinflation pressure is low, add air until you reach therecommended amount.

If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing onthe metal stem in the center of the tire valve.Re-check the tire pressure with the tire gage.

Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valvestems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirtand moisture.

Tire Pressure Monitor SystemThe Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) usesradio and sensor technology to check tire pressurelevels. TPMS sensors are mounted onto eachtire and wheel assembly, except the sparetire. TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure inyour vehicle’s tires and transmit tire pressurereadings to a receiver located in the vehicle.

The TPMS is designed to alert the driver, if a lowtire pressure condition exists. If your vehicle has theDriver Information Center (DIC), the driver can alsocheck tire pressure levels using the DIC.

When a low tire pressure condition is detected,the TPMS illuminates the low tire pressure warningsymbol located on the instrument panel cluster.

433

If your vehicle has the DIC feature, a messageto check the pressure in a specific tire alsoappears on the DIC display. The low tire pressurewarning symbol on the instrument panel clusterand the CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warningmessage on the DIC display appears at eachignition cycle until the tires are inflated tothe correct inflation pressure. For additionalinformation and details about the DIC operationand displays see DIC Operation and Displays(With DIC Buttons) on page 229 or DIC Operationand Displays (Without DIC Buttons) on page 235and DIC Warnings and Messages on page 239.

You may notice, during cooler weather conditions,the tire pressure monitor light, located on theinstrument panel cluster, and the CHECK TIREPRESSURE message appears when the vehicle isfirst started and then turn off as you start todrive the vehicle. This could be an early indicatorthat the tire pressures are getting low andneed to be inflated to the proper pressure.

Each tire, including the spare (if provided), shouldbe checked monthly when cold and inflated tothe inflation pressure recommended by the vehiclemanufacturer on the vehicle placard or tireinflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of

a different size than the size indicated on thevehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, youshould determine the proper tire inflationpressure for those tires.)

As an added safetyfeature, your vehiclehas been equipped witha tire pressuremonitoring system(TPMS) that illuminatesa low tire pressuretelltale when oneor more of your tires issignificantlyunder-inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltaleilluminates, you should stop and check your tiresas soon as possible, and inflate them to theproper pressure. Driving on a significantlyunder-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat andcan lead to tire failure. Under-inflation alsoreduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and mayaffect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.

434

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute forproper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’sresponsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,even if under-inflation has not reached the level totrigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressuretelltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMSmalfunction indicator to indicate when thesystem is not operating properly. The TPMSmalfunction indicator is combined with the low tirepressure telltale. When the system detects amalfunction, the telltale will flash for approximatelyone minute and then remain continuouslyilluminated. This sequence will continue uponsubsequent vehicle start-ups as long as themalfunction exists.

When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, thesystem may not be able to detect or signal low tirepressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions mayoccur for a variety of reasons, including theinstallation of replacement or alternate tires orwheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from

functioning properly. Always check the TPMSmalfunction telltale after replacing one or more tiresor wheels on your vehicle to ensure that thereplacement or alternate tires and wheels allow theTPMS to continue to function properly.

The Tire and Loading Information label (tireinformation placard) shows the size of yourvehicle’s original tires and the correct inflationpressure for your vehicle’s tires when theyare cold. See Inflation - Tire Pressure onpage 432. For the location of the tire and loadinginformation label, see Loading Your Vehicleon page 353.

Your vehicle’s TPMS can alert you about a lowtire pressure condition but it does not replacenormal tire maintenance. See Tire Inspection andRotation on page 438 and Tires on page 425.

Notice: Do not use a tire sealant if yourvehicle has Tire Pressure Monitors. The liquidsealant can damage the tire pressure monitorsensors.

435

Resetting the TPMS IdentificationCodesEach TPMS sensor has a unique identificationcode. Any time you rotate your vehicle’s tires orreplace one or more of the TPMS sensors,the identification codes need to be matched to thenew tire/wheel position. The sensors arematched to the tire/wheel positions in the followingorder: driver side front tire, passenger side fronttire, passenger side rear tire, and driver siderear tire using a TPMS diagnostic tool. See yourdealer/retailer for service.

The TPMS sensors can also be matched to eachtire/wheel position by increasing or decreasingthe tire’s air pressure. If increasing the tire’sair pressure, do not exceed the maximum inflationpressure indicated on the tire’s sidewall. Todecrease air-pressure out of a tire you can usethe pointed end of the valve cap, a pencil-style airpressure gage, or a key.

You have two minutes to match the first tire/wheelposition, and five minutes overall to match allfour tire/wheel positions. If it takes longer thantwo minutes to match the first tire and wheel, or

more than five minutes to match all four tire andwheel positions, the matching process stopsand you will need to start over.

The TPMS sensor matching process is outlinedbelow:


2. Turn the ignition switch to ON with theengine off.

3. Using the DIC, press the vehicle informationbutton until the PRESS V TO RELEARNTIRE POSITIONS message displays. If yourvehicle does not have the DIC buttons,press the trip odometer reset stem located onthe instrument panel cluster until theRELEARN TIRE POSITIONS messagedisplays.

4. If your vehicle has the DIC buttons, press theset/reset button. The horn sounds twice toindicate the TPMS receiver is ready, and theTIRE LEARNING ACTIVE messagedisplays. If your vehicle does not have theDIC buttons, press and hold the trip odometerreset stem until the horn chirps twice andthe TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE messageis displayed.

436

5. Start with the driver side front tire. The driverside front turn signal lamp is on.

6. Remove the valve cap from the valvestem. Activate the TPMS sensor by increasingor decreasing the tire’s air pressure forfive seconds, or until a horn chirp sounds.The horn chirp, which may take up to30 seconds to sound, confirms that the sensoridentification code has been matched to thistire and wheel position.

7. Proceed to the passenger side front tire. Thepassenger side front turn signal lamp is on.Repeat the procedure in Step 6.

8. Proceed to the passenger side rear tire. Thepassenger side rear turn signal lamp is on.Repeat the procedure in Step 6.

9. Proceed to the driver side rear tire. The driverside rear turn signal lamp is on. Repeat theprocedure in Step 6. Instead of a singlehorn chirp a double horn chirp signals theTPMS sensor has been matched to this tireand wheel position and the matchingprocess is no longer active.

10. Turn the ignition switch to OFF.

11. Set all four tires to the recommended airpressure level as indicated on the Tireand Loading Information label.

12. Put the valve caps back on the valve stems.

The spare tire does not have a TPMS sensor.If you replace one of the road tires with the spare,the SERVICE TIRE MONITOR SYSTEMmessage displays on the DIC screen. Thismessage should go off once you re-install theroad tire containing the TPMS sensor.

437

Federal Communications Commission(FCC) and Industry and ScienceCanadaThe Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)operates on a radio frequency and complies withPart 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subjectto the following two conditions:



The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)operates on a radio frequency and complies withRSS-210 of Industry and Science Canada.Operation is subject to the following twoconditions:




Tire Inspection and RotationTires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles(8 000 to 13 000 km).

Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate yourtires as soon as possible and check wheelalignment. Also check for damaged tires or wheels.See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 440and Wheel Replacement on page 444 formore information.

The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve moreuniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. Thefirst rotation is the most important. See ScheduledMaintenance on page 488.

438

When rotating your tires, always use the correctrotation pattern shown here.

Do not include the compact spare tire in your tirerotation.

After the tires have been rotated, adjust the frontand rear inflation pressures as shown on theTire and Loading Information label.

Make certain that all wheel nuts are properlytightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” underCapacities and Specifications on page 483.

{CAUTION:

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts towhich it is fastened, can make wheel nutsbecome loose after time. The wheel couldcome off and cause an accident. Whenyou change a wheel, remove any rust ordirt from places where the wheel attachesto the vehicle. In an emergency, you canuse a cloth or a paper towel to do this;but be sure to use a scraper or wire brushlater, if needed, to get all the rust or dirtoff. See Changing a Flat Tire on page 447.

439

When It Is Time for New Tires

One way to tell when itis time for new tires isto check the treadwearindicators, which willappear when your tireshave only 1/16 inch(1.6 mm) or less of treadremaining.

You need a new tire if any of the followingstatements are true:

• You can see the indicators at three or moreplaces around the tire.

• You can see cord or fabric showing throughthe tire’s rubber.

• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut, orsnagged deep enough to show cord or fabric.

• The tire has a bump, bulge, or split.

• The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damagethat cannot be repaired well because of thesize or location of the damage.

Buying New TiresGM has developed and matched specific tires foryour vehicle. The original equipment tiresinstalled on your vehicle, when it was new, weredesigned to meet General Motors TirePerformance Criteria Specification (TPC spec)system rating. If you need replacement tires, GMstrongly recommends that you get tires withthe same TPC Spec rating. This way, your vehiclewill continue to have tires that are designed togive the same performance and vehicle safety,during normal use, as the original tires.

GM’s exclusive TPC Spec system considers overa dozen critical specifications that impact theoverall performance of your vehicle, includingbrake system performance, ride and handling,traction control, and tire pressure monitoringperformance. GM’s TPC Spec number is moldedonto the tire’s sidewall by the tire manufacturer.If the tires have an all-season tread design,

440

the TPC spec number will be followed by an MSfor mud and snow. See Tire Sidewall Labelingon page 426 for additional information.

{CAUTION:

Mixing tires could cause you to losecontrol while driving. If you mix tires ofdifferent sizes, brands, or types (radialand bias-belted tires), the vehicle may nothandle properly, and you could have acrash. Using tires of different sizes,brands, or types may also cause damageto your vehicle. Be sure to use the correctsize, brand, and type of tires on allwheels. It is all right to drive with yourcompact spare temporarily, as it wasdeveloped for use on your vehicle. SeeCompact Spare Tire on page 463.

{CAUTION:

If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle,the wheel rim flanges could developcracks after many miles of driving. A tireand/or wheel could fail suddenly, causinga crash. Use only radial-ply tires with thewheels on your vehicle.

If you must replace your vehicle’s tires with thosethat do not have a TPC Spec number, makesure they are the same size, load range, speedrating, and construction type (radial andbias-belted tires) as your vehicle’s original tires.

Your vehicle’s original equipment tires are listed onthe Tire and Loading Information label. Thislabel is attached to the vehicle’s center pillar(B-pillar). See Loading Your Vehicle on page 353,for more information about the Tire and LoadingInformation label and its location on your vehicle.

441

Different Size Tires and WheelsIf you add wheels or tires that are a different sizethan your original equipment wheels and tires,this may affect the way your vehicle performs,including its braking, ride and handlingcharacteristics, stability, and resistance to rollover.Additionally, if your vehicle has electronicsystems such as, anti-lock brakes, rollover airbags,traction control, and stability control, theperformance of these systems can be affected.

{CAUTION:

If you add different sized wheels, yourvehicle may not provide an acceptablelevel of performance and safety if tires notrecommended for those wheels areselected. You may increase the chancethat you will crash and suffer seriousinjury. Only use Saturn specific wheel andtire systems developed for your vehicle,and have them properly installed by aSaturn certified technician.

See Buying New Tires on page 440 andAccessories and Modifications on page 377 foradditional information.

Uniform Tire Quality GradingQuality grades can be found where applicable onthe tire sidewall between tread shoulder andmaximum section width. For example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature AThe following information relates to the systemdeveloped by the United States National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), whichgrades tires by treadwear, traction, andtemperature performance. This applies only tovehicles sold in the United States. The grades aremolded on the sidewalls of most passenger cartires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG)system does not apply to deep tread, winter-typesnow tires, space-saver, or temporary usespare tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to somelimited-production tires.

442

While the tires available on General Motorspassenger cars and light trucks may vary withrespect to these grades, they must also conform tofederal safety requirements and additional GeneralMotors Tire Performance Criteria (TPC) standards.

TreadwearThe treadwear grade is a comparative rating basedon the wear rate of the tire when tested undercontrolled conditions on a specified governmenttest course. For example, a tire graded 150 wouldwear one and a half (1.5) times as well on thegovernment course as a tire graded 100. Therelative performance of tires depends upon theactual conditions of their use, however, and maydepart significantly from the norm due to variationsin driving habits, service practices, and differencesin road characteristics and climate.

Traction – AA, A, B, CThe traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA,A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’sability to stop on wet pavement as measured undercontrolled conditions on specified government testsurfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked Cmay have poor traction performance.

Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tireis based on straight-ahead braking tractiontests, and does not include acceleration, cornering,hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

Temperature – A, B, CThe temperature grades are A (the highest), B,and C, representing the tire’s resistance tothe generation of heat and its ability to dissipateheat when tested under controlled conditions on aspecified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustainedhigh temperature can cause the material of the tireto degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessivetemperature can lead to sudden tire failure.The grade C corresponds to a level of performancewhich all passenger car tires must meet underthe Federal Motor Vehicle Safety StandardNo. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levelsof performance on the laboratory test wheelthan the minimum required by law.

Warning: The temperature grade for this tire isestablished for a tire that is properly inflatedand not overloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessive loading, eitherseparately or in combination, can cause heatbuildup and possible tire failure.

443

Wheel Alignment and Tire BalanceThe tires and wheels on your vehicle were alignedand balanced carefully at the factory to give you thelongest tire life and best overall performance.Adjustments to wheel alignment and tire balancingwill not be necessary on a regular basis. However,if you notice unusual tire wear or your vehiclepulling to one side or the other, the alignment mightneed to be checked. If you notice your vehiclevibrating when driving on a smooth road, the tiresand wheels might need to be rebalanced. See yourdealer/retailer for proper diagnosis.

Wheel ReplacementReplace any wheel that is bent, cracked or badlyrusted or corroded. If wheel nuts keep comingloose, the wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nutsshould be replaced. If the wheel leaks air, replaceit (except some aluminum wheels, which cansometimes be repaired). See your dealer/retailer ifany of these conditions exist.

Your dealer/retailer will know the kind of wheelyou need.

Each new wheel should have the sameload-carrying capacity, diameter, width, offset andbe mounted the same way as the one it replaces.

If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheelbolts or wheel nuts, replace them only withnew Saturn original equipment parts. This way,you will be sure to have the right wheel, wheelbolts and wheel nuts for your vehicle.

{CAUTION:

Using the wrong replacement wheels,wheel bolts, or wheel nuts on your vehiclecan be dangerous. It could affect thebraking and handling of your vehicle,make your tires lose air and make youlose control. You could have a collision inwhich you or others could be injured.Always use the correct wheel, wheel bolts,and wheel nuts for replacement.

444

Notice: The wrong wheel can also causeproblems with bearing life, brake cooling,speedometer or odometer calibration,headlamp aim, bumper height, vehicle groundclearance, and tire or tire chain clearanceto the body and chassis.

See Changing a Flat Tire on page 447 for moreinformation.

Used Replacement Wheels

{CAUTION:

Putting a used wheel on your vehicle isdangerous. You cannot know how it hasbeen used or how far it has been driven. Itcould fail suddenly and cause a crash. Ifyou have to replace a wheel, use a newSaturn original equipment wheel.

Tire Chains

{CAUTION:

Do not use tire chains. There is not enoughclearance. Tire chains used on a vehiclewithout the proper amount of clearancecan cause damage to the brakes,suspension or other vehicle parts. The areadamaged by the tire chains could causeyou to lose control of your vehicle and youor others may be injured in a crash.

Use another type of traction deviceonly if its manufacturer recommends itfor use on your vehicle and tire sizecombination and road conditions. Followthat manufacturer’s instructions. To helpavoid damage to your vehicle, drive slowly,readjust or remove the device if it iscontacting your vehicle, and do not spinyour vehicle’s wheels. If you do findtraction devices that will fit, install them onthe front tires.

445

If a Tire Goes FlatIt is unusual for a tire to blowout while you aredriving, especially if you maintain your vehicle’stires properly. If air goes out of a tire, it ismuch more likely to leak out slowly. But if youshould ever have a blowout, here are a few tipsabout what to expect and what to do:

If a front tire fails, the flat tire creates a drag thatpulls the vehicle toward that side. Take yourfoot off the accelerator pedal and grip the steeringwheel firmly. Steer to maintain lane position,and then gently brake to a stop well out of thetraffic lane.

A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts muchlike a skid and may require the same correctionyou would use in a skid. In any rear blowoutremove your foot from the accelerator pedal. Getthe vehicle under control by steering the wayyou want the vehicle to go. It may be very bumpyand noisy, but you can still steer. Gently braketo a stop, well off the road if possible.

{CAUTION:

Lifting a vehicle and getting under it todo maintenance or repairs is dangerouswithout the appropriate safety equipmentand training. The jack provided with yourvehicle is designed only for changing aflat tire. If it is used for anything else, youor others could be badly injured or killedif the vehicle slips off the jack. Use thejack provided with your vehicle only forchanging a flat tire.

If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use thejacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.

446

Changing a Flat TireIf a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheeldamage by driving slowly to a level place. Turn onyour vehicle’s hazard warning flashers. See HazardWarning Flashers on page 172 for moreinformation.

{CAUTION:

Changing a tire can be dangerous. Thevehicle can slip off the jack and roll over orfall on you or other people. You and theycould be badly injured or even killed. Find alevel place to change your tire. To helpprevent the vehicle from moving:

1. Set the parking brake firmly.

2. Put the shift lever in PARK (P).

3. Turn off the engine and do not restartwhile the vehicle is raised.

4. Do not allow passengers to remain inthe vehicle.



To be even more certain the vehicle will notmove, you should put blocks at the frontand rear of the tire farthest away from theone being changed. That would be the tire,on the other side, at the opposite end of thevehicle.

When your vehicle has a flat tire, use the followingexample as a guide to assist you in the placementof wheel blocks.

The following information tells you how to use thejack and change a tire.

447

Removing the Spare Tire and ToolsThe tools needed to remove the spare tire arelocated in the storage compartment on the driverside, at the rear of the vehicle.

1. Open the jack storage compartment bysqueezing down on the latch tab andpulling the cover off.

A. Tool BagB. Wing BoltC. Jack

2. Remove the wing bolt (B) by turning itcounterclockwise

3. Push the jack (C) up out of the holdingbracket.

4. Turn the jack on its side, with the bottomfacing toward you.

5. Pull the jack straight out, bottom first.

The tools you will be using include the jack (A)and lug wrench (B).

448

Removing the Spare TireThe compact spare tire is located under thevehicle, in front of the rear bumper. See CompactSpare Tire on page 463 for more informationabout the compact spare.

A. RearConvenienceCenter

B. Lug wrenchC. Storage

CompartmentCap Hole

D. Hoist ShaftE. Compact

Spare TireF. RetainerG. Hoist Shaft

Assembly

1. Open the storage compartment door of theconvenience center that is nearest the liftgate.

2. Move the carpet cutout that is located throughthe hole of the storage compartment.

3. Attach the lug wrench into the hoist shaft.4. Turn the lug wrench counterclockwise to lower

the spare tire to the ground. Continue turningthe wrench until the spare tire can be pulled outfrom under the vehicle.

5. Tilt the retainer and slip it through the wheelopening to remove the spare tire from thecable.

449

6. Turn the wrench clockwise to raise the cableback up after removing the spare tire.Do not store a full-size or a flat road tire underthe vehicle. See Storing a Flat or Spare Tireand Tools on page 459.

To continue changing the flat tire, see Removingthe Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire onpage 451.

If the spare tire will not lower, the secondary latchcould be engaged.

Do the following to check the cable:

1. Check under the vehicle to see if the cable isvisible.

2. If it is not visible, see Secondary LatchSystem on page 456.If it is visible, first try to tighten the cable byturning the lug wrench clockwise until you heartwo clicks or feel it skip twice. You cannotover-tighten the cable.

3. Loosen the cable by turning the wrenchcounterclockwise three or four turns.

4. If the spare tire has not lowered, tighten thecable all the way and then loosen it at leasttwo times.If the spare tire did lower to the ground,continue with Step 5 under “Removing theSpare Tire (Vehicles with the RearConvenience Center)” listed previously.

5. If you still cannot lower the spare tire to theground, see Secondary Latch System onpage 456.

450

Removing the Flat Tire andInstalling the Spare Tire1. Do a safety check before proceeding. See

Changing a Flat Tire on page 447 for moreinformation.

2. If the vehicle has a wheel cover, loosen theplastic nut caps with the wheel wrench. Theywill not come off. Then, using the flat endof the wheel wrench, pry along the edge of thecover until it comes off. Be careful; theedges may be sharp. Do not try to remove thecover with your bare hands.Store the wheel cover securely in the rear ofthe vehicle until you have the flat tirerepaired or replaced.If your vehicle has aluminum wheels, removethe wheel nut caps using the wheel wrench.

3. Loosen the wheel nuts — but do not removethem — using the lug wrench. For wheelswith a wheel lock key, use the wheel lock keybetween the lock nut and lug wrench. Thekey is supplied in the front passengerdoor pocket.

Notice: If your vehicle has wheel locks and animpact wrench is used to remove the wheelnuts, the lock nut or wheel lock key could bedamaged. Do not use an impact wrench toremove the wheel nuts if your vehicle haswheel locks.

451

4. To identify the appropriate jacking location, findthe triangle (A) about 12 inches (30.5 cm) fromthe front tire or (B) about 10.5 inches (27 cm)from the rear tire.The triangle is located near each wheel on thevehicle’s exterior.

Notice: If a jack is used to raise the vehiclewithout positioning it correctly, your vehiclecould be damaged. When raising your vehicleon a jack, avoid contact with the rear axlecontrol arms.

5. Do not raise the vehicle yet. Put the compactspare tire near you.

{CAUTION:

Getting under a vehicle when it is jackedup is dangerous. If the vehicle slips offthe jack you could be badly injured orkilled. Never get under a vehicle when itis supported only by a jack.

{CAUTION:

Raising your vehicle with the jackimproperly positioned can damage thevehicle and even make the vehicle fall.To help avoid personal injury and vehicledamage, be sure to fit the jack lift headinto the proper location before raisingthe vehicle.

452

6. Attach the lug wrench to the jack, and turn thewrench clockwise to raise the jack head3 inches (7.6 cm).

7. Place the jack under the vehicle as identifiedin Step 3. Raise the vehicle by turning the lugwrench clockwise in the jack. Raise thevehicle far enough off the ground so that thereis enough room for the spare tire to fitunder the wheel well.

8. Remove all the wheel nuts and the flat tire.

9. Remove the plastic spare tire heat shield bypulling the rubber latch. Store the plasticspare tire heat shield. See Storing a Flat orSpare Tire and Tools on page 459 formore information.

453

{CAUTION:

Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the partsto which it is fastened, can make thewheel nuts become loose after time. Thewheel could come off and cause anaccident. When changing a wheel, removeany rust or dirt from the places where thewheel attaches to the vehicle. In anemergency, a cloth or a paper towel canbe used to do this; but be sure to use ascraper or wire brush later, if needed, toget all the rust or dirt off.

{CAUTION:

Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts.Because the nuts might come loose. Thevehicle’s wheel could fall off, causing aserious accident.

10. Remove any rust ordirt from the wheelbolts, mountingsurfaces, and sparewheel.

11. Install the compact spare tire.

12. Lower the vehicle by attaching the lug wrenchto the jack and turning the wrenchcounterclockwise. Lower the jack completely.

454

{CAUTION:

Incorrect wheel nuts or improperlytightened wheel nuts can cause the wheelto come loose and even come off. Thiscould lead to an accident. Be sure to usethe correct wheel nuts. If you have toreplace them, be sure to get new GMoriginal equipment wheel nuts. Stopsomewhere as soon as you can and havethe nuts tightened with a torque wrench tothe proper torque specification. SeeCapacities and Specifications on page 483for wheel nut torque specification.

Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts canlead to brake pulsation and rotor damage.To avoid expensive brake repairs, evenlytighten the wheel nuts in the proper sequenceand to the proper torque specification. SeeCapacities and Specifications on page 483 forthe wheel nut torque specification.

13. Tighten the wheelnuts firmly in acrisscross sequence,as shown.

Notice: Wheel covers will not fit on yourvehicle’s compact spare. If you try to put awheel cover on the compact spare, the cover orthe spare could be damaged.

455

Secondary Latch SystemYour vehicle has an underbody mounted tire hoistassembly equipped with a secondary latchsystem. It is designed to stop the compact sparetire from suddenly falling off your vehicle if thecable holding the spare tire is damaged. For thesecondary latch to work, the tire must bestowed with the valve stem pointing down. SeeStoring a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools on page 459for instructions on storing the spare tire correctly.

{CAUTION:

Before beginning this procedure read allthe instructions. Failure to read and followthe instructions could damage the hoistassembly and you and others could gethurt. Read and follow the instructionslisted next.

To release the spare tire from the secondary latch,do the following:

{CAUTION:

Someone standing too close during theprocedure could be injured by the jack. Ifthe spare tire does not slide off the jackcompletely, make sure no one is behindyou or on either side of you as you pullthe jack out from the under spare.

1. If the cable is not visible, start this procedureat Step 3.

456

2. Turn the folding wrench counterclockwise untilapproximately 6 inches (15 cm) of cable isexposed.

3. Attach the folding wrench to the jack andraise the jack at least 10 turns.

4. Place the jack under the vehicle, ahead of therear bumper. Position the center lift point ofthe jack under the center of the spare tire.

5. Turn the folding wrench clockwise to raise thejack until it lifts the secondary latch spring.

All-Wheel-Drive Vehicle shown Front-Wheel-Drive Vehicle shown

457

6. Keep raising the jack until the spare tire stopsmoving upward and is held firmly in place.This lets you know that the secondarylatch has released and the spare tire isbalancing on the jack.

7. Lower the jack by turning the folding wrenchcounterclockwise. Keep lowering the jack untilthe spare tire slides off the jack.

8. Disconnect the folding wrench from the jackand carefully remove the jack. Use one hand topush against the spare tire while firmly pullingthe jack out from under the spare tire with theother hand.

9. Tilt the retainer and slip it through the wheelopening when the spare tire has beencompletely lowered.

10. Turn the folding wrench clockwise to raise thecable back up if the cable is hanging.

Have the hoist assembly inspected as soon asyou can. You will not be able to store a spare tireusing the hoist assembly until it has been repairedor replaced.

458

Storing a Flat or Spare Tireand Tools

Storing the Spare Tire

{CAUTION:

The underbody-mounted spare tire needsto be stored with the valve stem pointingdown. If the spare tire is stored with thevalve stem pointing upwards, itssecondary latch will not work properlyand the spare tire could loosen andsuddenly fall from your vehicle. If thishappened when your vehicle was beingdriven, the tire might contact a person oranother vehicle, causing injury and, ofcourse, damage to itself as well. Be surethe underbody-mounted spare tire isstored with its valve stem pointing down.

{CAUTION:

Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipmentin the passenger compartment of thevehicle could cause injury. In a suddenstop or collision, loose equipment couldstrike someone. Store all these in theproper place.

To store the spare tire:

1. Lay the compact spare tire near the rear ofthe vehicle with the valve stem down.

2. Reinstall the plastic spare tire heat shield onthe compact spare tire.

3. If the vehicle has aluminum wheels, removethe small center cap by tapping the back ofthe cap with the extension of the shaft.

459

4. Slide the cable retainer through the center ofthe wheel and start to raise the compactspare tire.Make sure the retainer is fully seated acrossthe underside of the wheel.

5. When the compact spare tire is almost in thestored position, turn the tire so the valve istoward the rear of the vehicle.This position helps when checking the airpressure in the compact spare tire.

6. Raise the tire fully against the underside ofthe vehicle. Continue turning the lug wrenchuntil you feel more than two clicks. Thisindicates that the compact spare tire is secureand the cable is tight. The spare tire hoistcannot be overtightened. 7. Make sure the tire is stored securely. Push,

pull (A), and then try to turn (B) the tire. If thetire moves, use the lug wrench to tightenthe cable.

460

Storing the Flat Tire

Notice: Storing the full-size flat tire in theunderbody hoist system can expose it to heatfrom the exhaust system. This can damagethe tire and underbody hoist system. Donot store the full-size flat tire in the underbodyhoist system.

1. Remove the cable package from the jackstorage area.

2. Remove the small center cap by tapping theback of the cap with the extension of theshaft, if the vehicle has aluminum wheels.

3. Put the flat tire in the rear storage area withthe valve stem pointing toward the rear of thevehicle.

4. Hook on end of the cable onto the outsideportion of the liftgate hinge opposite (B).

5. Pull the cable (A) through the door striker (E),the center of the wheel (D), and the plasticspare tire heat shield (C), as shown.

461

6. Hook the other endof the cable onto theoutside portion ofthe liftgate hinge (B).

7. Pull on the cable to make sure it is secure.

8. Make sure the metal tube is centered atthe striker.

9. Push the tubetoward the front ofthe vehicle.

10. Close the liftgate and make sure it is latchedproperly.

Storing the Tools

A. Tool BagB. Wing BoltC. Jack

462

Put back all tools as they were stored in the jackstorage compartment and put the compartmentcover back on.

1. Make that the bottom of the jack is facingtoward you.

2. Turn the jack (C) on its side and place it downon the holding bracket.

3. Reinstall the wing bolt (B) by turning itclockwise.

4. To replace the cover, line up the tabs on thebottom of the cover with the slots in the coveropening. Push the cover in place, insuringthat the upper front and rear tabs are inthe opening and push the cover closed. Makesure that the center latch is fully engaged.This secures the cover in place.

Store the center cap or the plastic bolt-on wheelcovers until a full size tire is put back on thevehicle. When you replace the compact spare witha full-size tire, reinstall the bolt-on wheel coversor the center cap. Hand-tighten them overthe wheel nuts, using the lug wrench.

Compact Spare TireAlthough the compact spare tire was fully inflatedwhen the vehicle was new, it can lose air aftera time. Check the inflation pressure regularly. Itshould be 60 psi (420 kPa).

After installing the compact spare on the vehicle,stop as soon as possible and make sure thespare tire is correctly inflated. The compact spareis made to perform well at speeds up to 65 mph(105 km/h) for distances up to 3,000 miles(5 000 km), so you can finish your trip and havethe full-size tire repaired or replaced at yourconvenience. Of course, it is best to replace thespare with a full-size tire as soon as possible. Thespare tire will last longer and be in good shapein case it is needed again.

Notice: When the compact spare is installed,do not take your vehicle through an automaticcar wash with guide rails. The compactspare can get caught on the rails. That candamage the tire and wheel, and maybeother parts of your vehicle.

Do not use the compact spare on other vehicles.

463

And do not mix the compact spare tire or wheel withother wheels or tires. They will not fit. Keep thespare tire and its wheel together.The All-Wheel Drive (AWD) system will beautomatically disabled when you use the compactspare. To restore the AWD and prevent excessivewear on the clutch in your AWD, replace thecompact spare tire with a full-size tire as soon aspossible.

Notice: Tire chains will not fit your compactspare. Using them can damage your vehicle andcan damage the chains too. Do not use tirechains on your compact spare.

Appearance Care

Cleaning the Inside of Your VehicleYour vehicle’s interior will continue to look itsbest if it is cleaned often. Although not alwaysvisible, dust and dirt can accumulate on yourupholstery. Dirt can damage carpet, fabric, leather,and plastic surfaces. Regular vacuuming isrecommended to remove particles from yourupholstery. It is important to keep your upholsteryfrom becoming and remaining heavily soiled.

Soils should be removed as quickly as possible.Your vehicle’s interior may experience extremes ofheat that could cause stains to set rapidly.

Lighter colored interiors may require more frequentcleaning. Use care because newspapers andgarments that transfer color to your homefurnishings may also transfer color to yourvehicle’s interior.

When cleaning your vehicle’s interior, only usecleaners specifically designed for the surfacesbeing cleaned. Permanent damage may resultfrom using cleaners on surfaces for whichthey were not intended. Use glass cleaner only onglass. Remove any accidental over-spray fromother surfaces immediately. To prevent over-spray,apply cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth.

Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners whencleaning glass surfaces on your vehicle, youcould scratch the glass and/or cause damageto the rear window defogger. When cleaningthe glass on your vehicle, use only a soft clothand glass cleaner.

464

Many cleaners contain solvents that may becomeconcentrated in your vehicle’s breathing space.Before using cleaners, read and adhere toall safety instructions on the label. While cleaningyour vehicle’s interior, maintain adequateventilation by opening your vehicle’s doors andwindows.

Dust may be removed from small buttons andknobs using a small brush with soft bristles.

Your dealer/retailer has a product for cleaningyour vehicle’s glass. Should it become necessary,you can also obtain a product from yourdealer/retailer to remove odors from your vehicle’supholstery.

Do not clean your vehicle using the followingcleaners or techniques:

• Never use a knife or any other sharp object toremove a soil from any interior surface.

• Never use a stiff brush. It can cause damageto your vehicle’s interior surfaces.

• Never apply heavy pressure or rubaggressively with a cleaning cloth. Use ofheavy pressure can damage your interior anddoes not improve the effectiveness of soilremoval.

• Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps. Avoid laundrydetergents or dishwashing soaps withdegreasers. Using too much soap will leave aresidue that leaves streaks and attracts dirt.For liquid cleaners, about 20 drops per gallon(3.78 L) of water is a good guide.

• Do not heavily saturate your upholstery whilecleaning.

• Damage to your vehicle’s interior may resultfrom the use of many organic solvents such asnaptha, alcohol, etc.

Fabric/CarpetUse a vacuum cleaner with a soft brush attachmentfrequently to remove dust and loose dirt. A canistervacuum with a beater bar in the nozzle may only beused on floor carpet and carpeted floor mats. Forsoils, always try to remove them first with plainwater or club soda. Before cleaning, gently removeas much of the soil as possible using one of thefollowing techniques:

• For liquids: gently blot the remaining soil with apaper towel. Allow the soil to absorb into thepaper towel until no more can be removed.

• For solid dry soils: remove as much as possibleand then vacuum.

465

To clean, use the following instructions:

1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth withwater or club soda.

2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture.

3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and gentlyrub toward the center. Continue cleaning,using a clean area of the cloth each time itbecomes soiled.

4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area until thecleaning cloth remains clean.

5. If the soil is not completely removed, use amild soap solution and repeat the cleaningprocess that was used with plain water.

If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabriccleaner or spot lifter may be necessary. When acommercial upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to beused, test a small hidden area for colorfastnessfirst. If the locally cleaned area gives anyimpression that a ring formation may result, cleanthe entire surface.

After the cleaning process has been completed, apaper towel can be used to blot excess moisturefrom the fabric or carpet.

LeatherA soft cloth dampened with water can be used toremove dust. If a more thorough cleaning isnecessary, a soft cloth dampened with a mild soapsolution can be used. Allow the leather to drynaturally. Do not use heat to dry. Never use steamto clean leather. Never use spot lifters or spotremovers on leather. Many commercial leathercleaners and coatings that are sold to preserveand protect leather may permanently changethe appearance and feel of your leather and arenot recommended. Do not use silicone orwax-based products, or those containing organicsolvents to clean your vehicle’s interior becausethey can alter the appearance by increasingthe gloss in a non-uniform manner. Never useshoe polish on leather.

466

Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and OtherPlastic SurfacesA soft cloth dampened with water may be used toremove dust. If a more thorough cleaning isnecessary, a clean soft cloth dampened with amild soap solution can be used to gently removedust and dirt. Never use spot lifters or removerson plastic surfaces. Many commercial cleaners andcoatings that are sold to preserve and protectsoft plastic surfaces may permanently change theappearance and feel of your interior and arenot recommended. Do not use silicone orwax-based products, or those containing organicsolvents to clean your vehicle’s interior becausethey can alter the appearance by increasingthe gloss in a non-uniform manner.

Some commercial products may increase gloss onyour instrument panel. The increase in glossmay cause annoying reflections in the windshieldand even make it difficult to see through thewindshield under certain conditions.

Care of Safety BeltsKeep belts clean and dry.

{CAUTION:

Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If youdo, it may severely weaken them. In acrash, they might not be able to provideadequate protection. Clean safety beltsonly with mild soap and lukewarm water.

WeatherstripsSilicone grease on weatherstrips will make themlast longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak.Apply silicone grease with a clean cloth. Duringvery cold, damp weather frequent application maybe required. See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 497.

467

Washing Your VehicleThe paint finish on the vehicle provides beauty,depth of color, gloss retention, and durability.

The best way to preserve the vehicle’s finish is tokeep it clean by washing it often with lukewarmor cold water.Do not wash the vehicle in the direct rays of thesun. Use a car washing soap. Do not use strongsoaps or chemical detergents. Be sure to rinse thevehicle well, removing all soap residue completely.Approved cleaning products can be obtained fromyour dealer/retailer. See Vehicle Care/AppearanceMaterials on page 473. Do not use cleaning agentsthat are petroleum based, or that contain acid orabrasives. All cleaning agents should be flushedpromptly and not allowed to dry on the surface, orthey could stain. Avoid using hard brushes duringcleaning. It may damage your vehicle’s finish. Drythe finish with a soft, clean chamois or an all-cottontowel to avoid surface scratches and water spotting.High pressure car washes may cause water toenter the vehicle. Avoid using high pressurewashes closer than 12 inches (30 cm) to thesurface of the vehicle.

Cleaning Exterior Lamps/LensesUse only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth anda car washing soap to clean exterior lampsand lenses. Follow instructions under WashingYour Vehicle on page 468.

Finish CareOccasional waxing or mild polishing of yourvehicle by hand may be necessary to removeresidue from the paint finish. You can get approvedcleaning products from your dealer/retailer. SeeVehicle Care/Appearance Materials on page 473.

If your vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paintfinish, the clearcoat gives more depth and gloss tothe colored basecoat. Always use waxes andpolishes that are non-abrasive and made for abasecoat/clearcoat paint finish.

Notice: Machine compounding or aggressivepolishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paintfinish may damage it. Use only non-abrasivewaxes and polishes that are made for abasecoat/clearcoat paint finish on your vehicle.

468

Foreign materials such as calcium chloride andother salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, treesap, bird droppings, chemicals from industrialchimneys, etc., can damage your vehicle’s finish ifthey remain on painted surfaces. Wash the vehicleas soon as possible. If necessary, use non-abrasivecleaners that are marked safe for painted surfacesto remove foreign matter.

Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging,weather and chemical fallout that can take their tollover a period of years. You can help to keepthe paint finish looking new by keeping yourvehicle garaged or covered whenever possible.

Protecting Exterior Bright Metal PartsBright metal parts should be cleaned regularly tokeep their luster. Washing with water is allthat is usually needed. However, you may usechrome polish on chrome or stainless steel trim, ifnecessary.

Use special care with aluminum trim. To avoiddamaging protective trim, never use auto orchrome polish, steam or caustic soap to cleanaluminum. A coating of wax, rubbed to high polish,is recommended for all bright metal parts.

Windshield, Backglass, and WiperBladesClean the outside of the windshield and backglasswith glass cleaner.

Clean the rubber blades using a lint free cloth orpaper towel soaked with windshield washer fluid ora mild detergent. Wash the windshield thoroughlywhen you clean the blades. Bugs, road grime,sap and a buildup of vehicle wash/wax treatmentsmay cause wiper streaking. Replace the wiperblades if they are worn or damaged.

Wipers can be damaged by:

• Extreme dusty conditions

• Sand and salt

• Heat and sun

• Snow and ice, without proper removal

469

Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheelsand TrimYour vehicle may be equipped with eitheraluminum or chrome-plated wheels.

Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean clothwith mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water.After rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft cleantowel. A wax may then be applied.

Notice: If you use strong soaps, chemicals,abrasive polishes, cleaners, brushes, orcleaners that contain acid on aluminum orchrome-plated wheels, you could damage thesurface of the wheel(s). The repairs wouldnot be covered by your warranty. Useonly Saturn-approved cleaners on aluminum orchrome-plated wheels.

The surface of these wheels is similar to thepainted surface of your vehicle. Do not use strongsoaps, chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasivecleaners, cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaningbrushes on them because you could damagethe surface. Do not use chrome polish onaluminum wheels.

Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminumwheels could damage the wheels. The repairswould not be covered by your warranty.Use chrome polish on chrome wheels only.

Use chrome polish only on chrome-plated wheels,but avoid any painted surface of the wheel, andbuff off immediately after application.

Notice: If you drive your vehicle through anautomatic car wash that has silicone carbidetire cleaning brushes, you could damagethe aluminum or chrome-plated wheels. Therepairs would not be covered by your warranty.Never drive a vehicle equipped with aluminumor chrome-plated wheels through anautomatic car wash that uses silicone carbidetire cleaning brushes.

Do not take your vehicle through an automatic carwash that has silicone carbide tire cleaningbrushes. These brushes can also damage thesurface of these wheels.

470

TiresTo clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tirecleaner.

Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressingproducts on your vehicle may damage thepaint finish and/or tires. When applying a tiredressing, always wipe off any oversprayfrom all painted surfaces on your vehicle.

Sheet Metal DamageIf the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metalrepair or replacement, make sure the bodyrepair shop applies anti-corrosion material to partsrepaired or replaced to restore corrosionprotection.

Original manufacturer replacement parts willprovide the corrosion protection while maintainingthe warranty.

Finish DamageAny stone chips, fractures or deep scratches inthe finish should be repaired right away. Baremetal will corrode quickly and may develop intomajor repair expense.

Minor chips and scratches can be repaired withtouch-up materials available from yourdealer/retailer. Larger areas of finish damage canbe corrected in your dealer’s/retailer’s bodyand paint shop.

471

Underbody MaintenanceChemicals used for ice and snow removal anddust control can collect on the underbody. If theseare not removed, corrosion and rust can developon the underbody parts such as fuel lines,frame, floor pan, and exhaust system even thoughthey have corrosion protection.

At least every spring, flush these materials fromthe underbody with plain water. Clean anyareas where mud and debris can collect. Dirtpacked in close areas of the frame shouldbe loosened before being flushed. Yourdealer/retailer or an underbody car washingsystem can do this for you.

Chemical Paint SpottingSome weather and atmospheric conditions cancreate a chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants canfall upon and attack painted surfaces on yourvehicle. This damage can take two forms: blotchy,ring-shaped discolorations, and small, irregulardark spots etched into the paint surface.

Although no defect in the paint job causes this, wewill repair, at no charge to the owner, thesurfaces of new vehicles damaged by this falloutcondition within 12 months or 12,000 miles(20 000 km) of purchase, whichever occurs first.

472

Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials

Description UsagePolishing ClothWax-Treated

Interior and exteriorpolishing cloth.

Tar and Road OilRemover

Removes tar, road oil,and asphalt.

Chrome Cleaner andPolish

Use on chrome orstainless steel.

White Sidewall TireCleaner

Removes soil and blackmarks from whitewalls.

Vinyl Cleaner Cleans vinyl.

Glass Cleaner Removes dirt, grime,smoke, and fingerprints.

Chrome and Wire WheelCleaner

Removes dirt and grimefrom chrome wheels andwire wheel covers.

Finish Enhancer

Removes dust,fingerprints, and surfacecontaminants. Spray onwipe off.

Description Usage

Swirl Remover PolishRemoves swirl marks, finescratches, and other lightsurface contamination.

Cleaner Wax Removes light scratchesand protects finish.

Foaming Tire Shine LowGloss

Cleans, shines, andprotects in one easy step.No wiping necessary.

Wash Wax Concentrate

Medium foamingshampoo. Cleans andlightly waxes.Biodegradable andphosphate free.

Spot Lifter

Quickly and easilyremoves spots and stainsfrom carpets, vinyl, andcloth upholstery.

Odor EliminatorOdorless spray odoreliminator used on fabrics,vinyl, leather, and carpet.

473

Vehicle Identification

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. Itappears on a plate in the front corner of theinstrument panel, on the driver side. You can seeit if you look through the windshield from outsideyour vehicle. The VIN also appears on theCertification/Tire and Service Parts labels and thecertificates of title and registration.

Engine IdentificationThe eighth character in the VIN is the enginecode. This code helps you identify your vehicle’sengine, specifications, and replacement parts.

Service Parts Identification LabelThis label is on the inside of the glove box.It is very helpful if you ever need to order parts.The label has the following information:

• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

• Model designation

• Paint information

• Production options and special equipment

Do not remove this label from the vehicle.

474

Electrical System

High Voltage Devices and Wiring

{CAUTION:

Exposure to high voltage can causeshock, burns, and even death. The highvoltage systems in your vehicle can onlybe serviced by technicians with specialtraining.

High voltage devices are identified bylabels. Do not remove, open, take apart, ormodify these devices. High voltage cableor wiring has orange covering. Do notprobe, tamper with, cut, or modify highvoltage cable or wiring.

Add-On Electrical Equipment

Notice: Do not add anything electrical toyour vehicle unless you check with yourdealer/retailer first. Some electrical equipmentcan damage your vehicle and the damagewould not be covered by your warranty. Someadd-on electrical equipment can keep othercomponents from working as they should.

Add-on equipment can drain your vehicle’s battery,even if your vehicle is not operating.

Your vehicle has an airbag system. Beforeattempting to add anything electrical to yourvehicle, see Servicing Your Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 91.

Windshield Wiper FusesThe windshield wiper motor is protected by acircuit breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheatsdue to heavy snow or ice, the wiper will stopuntil the motor cools. If the overload is caused bysome electrical problem, have it fixed.

475

Power Windows and Other PowerOptionsCircuit breakers in the fuse panel protect thepower windows and other power accessories.When the current load is too heavy, the circuitbreaker opens and closes, protecting the circuituntil the problem is fixed.

Fuses and Circuit BreakersThe wiring circuits in your vehicle are protectedfrom short circuits by a combination of fuses,circuit breakers and fusible thermal links.This greatly reduces the chance of fires caused byelectrical problems.

Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. Ifthe band is broken or melted, replace the fuse.Be sure you replace a bad fuse with a new one ofthe identical size and rating.

If you ever have a problem on the road and do nothave a spare fuse, you can borrow one that hasthe same amperage. Just pick some featureof your vehicle that you can get along without, likethe radio or cigarette lighter, and use its fuse ifit is the correct amperage. Replace it as soon asyou can.

Instrument Panel Fuse BlockThe instrument panel fuse block is located underthe instrument panel on the passenger side ofthe vehicle. Pull down on the cover to access thefuse block.

476

Fuses UsageFRT/WSW Front Windshield WiperSPARE SpareHTD/SEAT Front Heated SeatsSTR/WHL/ILLUM Steering Wheel Illumination

MSM Memory Seat ModulePWR/MIRRORS Power MirrorsDR/LCK Door LocksAIRBAG Airbag SystemLT/TRN/SIG Driver Side Turn SignalREAR WIPER Rear Window Wiper

PWR MOD PassKey Module, Body ControlModule

BCK/UP/STOP Back-up Lamps, StoplampsHVAC Climate Control SystemDISPLAY DisplayRT/TRN/SIG Passenger Side Turn SignalDRL* Daytime Running LampsRADIO RadioPDM Power Mirrors, Liftgate Release

Fuse Side

477

Fuses UsageDRL 2** Not UsedINFOTAINMENT Infotainment SystemBCM Body Control ModuleSPARE SpareCTSY Dome LampsINADV/PWR/LED Interior Lamps

ONSTR/VENT EmissionsAMP Audio Amplifier

HarnessConnector Usage

BODY Harness Connector

Relay Side

478

Relays UsageLT/PWR/SEAT Driver Side Power Seat RelayRT/PWR/SEAT Passenger Side Power Seat RelayPWR/WNDW Power Windows RelayPWR/COLUMN Power Steering Column RelayL/GATE Liftgate RelayLCK Power Lock RelayREAR/WSW Rear Window Washer RelayUNLCK Power Unlock RelayDRL2 Daytime Running Lamps 2 RelayLT/UNLCK Driver Side Unlock RelayDRL Daytime Running Lamps RelaySPARE SpareFRT/WSW Front Windshield Washer Relay

Underhood Fuse BlockThe underhood fuse block is located in the enginecompartment, on the passenger side of thevehicle.

Lift the cover for access to the fuse/relay block.

479

To remove fuses, hold the end of the fuse between your thumb and index finger and pull straight out.

480

Fuses UsageLT PRK Left Parking LampRT PRK Right Parking Lamp

TRLR PRKLAMP Trailer Parking Lamps

AIRBAG Airbag SystemPCM IGN Powertrain Control Module Ignition

AFS Adaptive Forward Lighting SystemTRANS TransmissionREAR

CAMERA Rear Camera

EMISSION 1 Antilock Brakes System 2TRLR BRK Trailer Brake

AWD All-Wheel-Drive SystemTRLR PWR Trailer Power

EVEN COILS Even Injector CoilsRR HVAC Rear Climate Control System

SPARE SpareODD COILS Odd Injector Coils

SPARE SpareLT HI BEAM Left High-Beam Headlamp

SPARE SpareLT TRLR

STOP/TRNTrailer Left Stoplamp and TurnSignal

EMISSION 2 Emission 2

Fuses UsageECM Engine Control Module

RT HI BEAM Right High-Beam HeadlampRVC SNSR Regulated Voltage Control SensorRT TRLR

STOP/TRNTrailer Right Stoplamp and TurnSignal

ECM 1 Engine Control Module 1SPARE Spare

WPR/WSW Windshield Wiper/WasherSPARE Spare

PWR OUTLET Power OutletAUX POWER Auxiliary PowerRT LO BEAM Right Low-Beam Headlamp

RR APO Rear Accessory Power OutletLT LO BEAM Left Low-Beam Headlamp

TCM Transmission Control ModuleTRLR BCK/UP Trailer Back-up Lamps

HTD MIR Heated Outside Rearview MirrorABS MTR Antilock Brake System Motor

FOG LAMP Fog LampsHORN Horn

A/C CLTCH Air Conditioning ClutchFUEL PUMP Fuel Pump

SPARE Spare

481

J-Case Fuses UsageFAN 2 Cooling Fan 2

PWR L/GATE Power LiftgateFAN 1 Cooling Fan 1

HVAC BLWR Climate Control System BlowerSTRTR StarterBATT 2 Battery 2

HTD WASH Heated Windshield Washer SystemBATT 1 Battery 1BATT 3 Battery 3

ABS MTR Antilock Brake System MotorRR DEFOG Rear Defogger

S/ROOF/SUNSHADE Sunroof, Sunshade

Relays UsageFAN 3 Cooling Fan 3FAN 2 Cooling Fan 2

PRK LAMP Park LampFAN 1 Cooling Fan 1

Relays UsageRT TRLR

STOP/TRNTrailer Right Stoplamp and TurnSignal

LT TRLRSTOP/TRN

Trailer Left Stoplamp and TurnSignal

IGN Ignition MainCRNK Switched Power

PWR/TRN PowertrainHI BEAM High-Beam Headlamps

WPR Windshield WiperWPR HI Windshield Wiper High Speed

RR DEFOG Rear Window Defogger

HID/LO BEAM High Intensity Discharge (HID)Low-Beam Headlamps

SPARE SpareFOG LAMP Fog Lamps

HORN HornA/C CMPRSR

CLTCH Air Conditioning Compressor Clutch

FUEL PUMP Fuel PumpTRLR BCK/UP Trailer Back-up Lamps

482

Capacities and SpecificationsThe following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. See RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 497 for more information.

ApplicationCapacities

English Metric

Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a

For the air conditioning system refrigerant chargeamount, see the refrigerant caution label locatedunder the hood. See your dealer/retailer for more

information.Cooling System 12.0 qt 11.4 LEngine Oil with Filter 5.5 qt 5.2 LFuel Tank 22.0 gal 83.3 LTransmission Fluid 9.5 qt 9.0 LWheel Nut Torque 140 lb ft 190 YAll capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in thismanual. Recheck fluid level after filling.

Engine SpecificationsEngine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap

3.6L V6 7 Automatic 0.043 inches (1.10 mm)

483

✍ NOTES

484

Maintenance Schedule ................................ 486Introduction ............................................... 486Maintenance Requirements ........................ 486Your Vehicle and the Environment ............ 486Using the Maintenance Schedule ............... 486Scheduled Maintenance ............................. 488Additional Required Services ..................... 491Maintenance Footnotes .............................. 492

Owner Checks and Services ..................... 493At Each Fuel Fill ....................................... 494At Least Once a Month ............................. 494At Least Once a Year ............................... 495Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ........ 497Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ..... 498Engine Drive Belt Routing ......................... 499Maintenance Record .................................. 500

Section 6 Maintenance Schedule

485

Maintenance Schedule

IntroductionImportant: Keep engine oil at the proper leveland change as recommended.

Maintenance Requirements

Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks,inspections, replacement parts, andrecommended fluids and lubricants asprescribed in this manual are necessary to keepyour vehicle in good working condition. Anydamage caused by failure to follow scheduledmaintenance might not be covered by warranty.

Your Vehicle and the EnvironmentProper vehicle maintenance not only helps tokeep your vehicle in good working condition, butalso helps the environment. All recommendedmaintenance is important. Improper vehiclemaintenance can even affect the quality of theair we breathe. Improper fluid levels or the wrongtire inflation can increase the level of emissionsfrom your vehicle. To help protect our environment,and to keep your vehicle in good condition,be sure to maintain your vehicle properly.

Using the Maintenance ScheduleWe want to help you keep your vehicle ingood working condition. But we do not knowexactly how you will drive it. You might drivevery short distances only a few times a week.Or you might drive long distances all the timein very hot, dusty weather. You might useyour vehicle in making deliveries. Or you mightdrive it to work, to do errands, or in manyother ways.

486

Because of all the different ways people use theirvehicles, maintenance needs vary. You mightneed more frequent checks and replacements.So please read the following and note howyou drive. If you have any questions on howto keep your vehicle in good condition, seeyour dealer/retailer.

This schedule is for vehicles that:

• carry passengers and cargo withinrecommended limits. You will find these limitson the Tire and Loading Information label.See Loading Your Vehicle on page 353.

• are driven on reasonable road surfaces withinlegal driving limits.

• use the recommended fuel. See GasolineOctane on page 379.

The services in Scheduled Maintenance on page 488should be performed when indicated. SeeAdditional Required Services on page 491 andMaintenance Footnotes on page 492 for furtherinformation.

{CAUTION:

Performing maintenance work on avehicle can be dangerous. In trying to dosome jobs, you can be seriously injured.Do your own maintenance work only ifyou have the required know-how and theproper tools and equipment for the job.If you have any doubt, see yourdealer/retailer to have a qualifiedtechnician do the work. See DoingYour Own Service Work on page 378.

Some maintenance services can be complex.So, unless you are technically qualified andhave the necessary equipment, you shouldhave your dealer/retailer do these jobs.

When you go to your dealer/retailer for yourservice needs, you will know that trained andsupported service technicians will perform thework using genuine parts.

487

If you want to purchase service information, seeService Publications Ordering Information onpage 518.

Owner Checks and Services on page 493 tellsyou what should be checked, when to check it,and what you can easily do to help keep yourvehicle in good condition.

The proper replacement parts, fluids, andlubricants to use are listed in RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 497 and NormalMaintenance Replacement Parts on page 498.When your vehicle is serviced, make sure theseare used. All parts should be replaced and allnecessary repairs done before you or anyoneelse drives the vehicle. We recommend the useof genuine parts from your dealer/retailer.

Scheduled MaintenanceWhen the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON messagecomes on, it means that service is required for yourvehicle. Have your vehicle serviced as soon aspossible within the next 600 miles (1 000 km).It is possible that, if you are driving under the bestconditions, the engine oil life system might notindicate that vehicle service is necessary for overa year. However, the engine oil and filter must bechanged at least once a year and at this time thesystem must be reset. Your dealer/retailer hastrained service technicians who will perform thiswork using genuine parts and reset the system.

If the engine oil life system is ever resetaccidentally, you must service your vehicle within3,000 miles (5 000 km) since your last service.Remember to reset the oil life system wheneverthe oil is changed. See Engine Oil Life System onpage 390 for information on the Engine Oil LifeSystem and resetting the system.

488

When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON messageappears, certain services, checks, and inspectionsare required. Required services are describedin the following for “Maintenance I” and“Maintenance II.” Generally, it is recommendedthat your first service be Maintenance I, yoursecond service be Maintenance II, and that youalternate Maintenance I and Maintenance IIthereafter. However, in some cases,Maintenance II may be required more often.

Maintenance I — Use Maintenance I if theCHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message comes onwithin 10 months since the vehicle was purchasedor Maintenance II was performed.

Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if theprevious service performed was Maintenance I.Always use Maintenance II whenever the messagecomes on 10 months or more since the lastservice or if the message has not come on atall for one year.

Scheduled MaintenanceService Maintenance I Maintenance II

Change engine oil and filter. See Engine Oil on page 387. Reset oil life system.See Engine Oil Life System on page 390. An Emission Control Service. • •

Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (g). • •

Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace filter. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 392. See footnote (l). •

Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear. See Tire Inspection andRotation on page 438 and “Tire Wear Inspection” in At Least Once a Month onpage 494.

• •

Inspect brake system. See footnote (a). • •

489

Scheduled Maintenance (cont’d)Service Maintenance I Maintenance II

Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and add fluid asneeded. • •

Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services” inthis section. • •

Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b). •

Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c). •

Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d). •

Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e). •

Lubricate body components. See footnote (f). •

Check transmission fluid level and add fluid as needed. •

Inspect throttle system. See footnote (j). •

490

Additional Required ServicesThe following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicatedmiles (kilometers) shown for each item.

Additional Required Services

Service and Miles (Kilometers) 25,000(40 000)

50,000(80 000)

75,000(120 000)

100,000(160 000)

125,000(200 000)

150,000(240 000)

Inspect fuel system for damage or leaks. • • • • • •Inspect exhaust system for loose ordamaged components. • • • • • •

Replace engine air cleaner filter. SeeEngine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 392. • • •

Change automatic transmission fluid(severe service). See footnote (h). • • •

Change automatic transmission fluid(normal service). •

Replace spark plugs and inspect sparkplug wires. An Emission Control Service. •

Engine cooling system service (or everyfive years, whichever occurs first).An Emission Control Service.See footnote (i).

•

Inspect engine accessory drive belt.An Emission Control Service.See footnote (k).

•

491

Maintenance Footnotes(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses forproper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing,etc. Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotorsfor surface condition. Inspect other brakeparts, including calipers, parking brake, etc.Check parking brake adjustment.

(b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension andsteering system for damaged, loose, or missingparts or signs of wear. Inspect power steering linesand hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks,cracks, chafing, etc.

(c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replacedif they are cracked, swollen, or deteriorated.Inspect all pipes, fittings and clamps; replacewith genuine parts as needed. To help ensureproper operation, a pressure test of the coolingsystem and pressure cap and cleaning the outsideof the radiator and air conditioning condenser isrecommended at least once a year.

(d) Inspect wiper blades for wear, cracking,or contamination. Clean the windshield and wiperblades, if contaminated. Replace wiper blades

that are worn or damaged. See Windshield WiperBlade Replacement on page 424 and Windshield,Backglass, and Wiper Blades on page 469 formore information.

(e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light andall belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors, andanchorages are working properly. Look forany other loose or damaged safety belt systemparts. If you see anything that might keep a safetybelt system from doing its job, have it repaired.Have any torn or frayed safety belts replaced.Also look for any opened or broken airbagcoverings, and have them repaired or replaced.The airbag system does not need regularmaintenance.

(f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders, hood latchassemblies, secondary latches, pivots, springanchor and release pawl, hood and door hinges,rear folding seats, and liftgate hinges. Morefrequent lubrication may be required whenexposed to a corrosive environment. Applyingsilicone grease on weatherstrips with a clean clothwill make them last longer, seal better, and not stickor squeak.

492

(g) A fluid loss in any vehicle system couldindicate a problem. Have the system inspectedand repaired and the fluid level checked. Add fluidif needed.

(h) Change automatic transmission fluid if thevehicle is mainly driven under one or moreof these conditions:

− In heavy city traffic where the outsidetemperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C)or higher.

− In hilly or mountainous terrain.− When doing frequent trailer towing.− Uses such as found in taxi, police, or delivery

service.

(i) Drain, flush, and refill cooling system.This service can be complex; you should haveyour dealer/retailer perform this service. SeeEngine Coolant on page 396 for what to use.Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser,pressure cap, and filler neck. Pressure testthe cooling system and pressure cap.

(j) Check system for interference or binding andfor damaged or missing parts. Replace partsas needed. Replace any components that havehigh effort or excessive wear. Do not lubricateaccelerator or cruise control cables.

(k) Visually inspect belt for fraying, excessivecracks, or obvious damage. Replace belt ifnecessary.

(l) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions,inspect the filter at each engine oil change.

Owner Checks and ServicesThese owner checks and services should beperformed at the intervals specified to help ensurethe safety, dependability, and emission controlperformance of your vehicle. Your dealer/retailercan assist you with these checks and services.

Be sure any necessary repairs are completed atonce. Whenever any fluids or lubricants are addedto your vehicle, make sure they are the properones, as shown in Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 497.

493

At Each Fuel FillIt is important to perform these underhood checksat each fuel fill.

Engine Oil Level CheckCheck the engine oil level and add the properoil if necessary. See Engine Oil on page 387 forfurther details.

Notice: It is important to check the engineoil regularly and keep it at the properlevel. Failure to keep the engine oil at theproper level can cause damage to the enginenot covered by your warranty.

Engine Coolant Level CheckCheck the engine coolant level and addDEX-COOL® coolant mixture if necessary. SeeEngine Coolant on page 396 for further details.

Windshield Washer Fluid Level CheckCheck the windshield washer fluid level inthe windshield washer fluid reservoir and addthe proper fluid if necessary.

At Least Once a Month

Tire Inflation CheckInspect your vehicle’s tires and make sure theyare inflated to the correct pressures. Do not forgetto check the spare tire. See Inflation - TirePressure on page 432. Check to make sure thespare tire is stored securely. See Changing a FlatTire on page 447.

Tire Wear InspectionTire rotation may be required for high mileagehighway drivers prior to the Engine Oil Life Systemservice notification. Check the tires for wearand, if necessary, rotate the tires. See TireInspection and Rotation on page 438.

494

At Least Once a Year

Starter Switch Check

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this inspection, thevehicle could move suddenly. If thevehicle moves, you or others could beinjured.

1. Before you start, be sure you have enoughroom around the vehicle.

2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and theregular brake. See Parking Brake on page 133.Do not use the accelerator pedal, and beready to turn off the engine immediately if itstarts.

3. Try to start the engine in each gear. Thevehicle should start only in PARK (P) orNEUTRAL (N). If the vehicle starts in anyother position, contact your dealer/retailer forservice.

Automatic Transmission Shift LockControl System Check

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this inspection, thevehicle could move suddenly. If thevehicle moves, you or others could beinjured.

1. Before you start, be sure you have enoughroom around the vehicle. It should be parkedon a level surface.

2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See ParkingBrake on page 133.Be ready to apply the regular brakeimmediately if the vehicle begins to move.

3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to ON,but do not start the engine. Without applyingthe regular brake, try to move the shiftlever out of PARK (P) with normal effort.If the shift lever moves out of PARK (P),contact your dealer/retailer for service.

495

Ignition Transmission Lock CheckWhile parked, and with the parking brake set, tryto turn the ignition to OFF in each shift leverposition.

• The ignition should turn to OFF only when theshift lever is in PARK (P).

• The ignition key should come out only in OFF.

Contact your dealer/retailer if service is required.

Parking Brake and AutomaticTransmission Park (P) Mechanism Check

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this check, yourvehicle could begin to move. You orothers could be injured and propertycould be damaged. Make sure there isroom in front of your vehicle in case itbegins to roll. Be ready to apply theregular brake at once should the vehiclebegin to move.

Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facingdownhill. Keeping your foot on the regularbrake, set the parking brake.

• To check the parking brake’s holding ability:With the engine running and the transmission inNEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressurefrom the regular brake pedal. Do this until thevehicle is held by the parking brake only.

• To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holdingability: With the engine running, shift toPARK (P). Then release the parkingbrake followed by the regular brake.

Contact your dealer/retailer if service is required.

Underbody Flushing ServiceAt least every spring, use plain water to flush anycorrosive materials from the underbody. Takecare to clean thoroughly any areas where mudand other debris can collect.

496

Recommended Fluids andLubricantsFluids and lubricants identified below by name,part number, or specification can be obtained fromyour dealer/retailer.

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Engine Oil

Engine oil which meets GMStandard GM6094M and displaysthe American Petroleum InstituteCertified for Gasoline Enginesstarburst symbol. To determine theproper viscosity for your vehicle’sengine, see Engine Oil on page 387.

Engine Coolant

50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and use only DEX-COOL®

Coolant. See Engine Coolant onpage 396.

Hydraulic BrakeSystem

Delco® Supreme 11 Brake Fluid orequivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.

WindshieldWasher GM Optikleen® Washer Solvent.

Power SteeringSystem

GM Power Steering Fluid(GM Part No. U.S. 89021184,in Canada 89021186).

AutomaticTransmission

DEXRON®-VI AutomaticTransmission Fluid.

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Key LockCylinders

Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,in Canada 10953474).

CarrierAssembly —Differential(Rear DriveModule) and

TransferCase (PowerTransfer Unit)

SAE 75W-90 SyntheticAxle Lubricant(GM Part No. U.S. 89021677,in Canada 89021678) meetingGM Specification 9986115.

Hood LatchAssembly,Secondary

Latch, Pivots,Spring

Anchor, andRelease Pawl

Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol(GM Part No. U.S. 12346293,in Canada 992723) or lubricantmeeting requirements of NLGI #2,Category LB or GC-LB.

Hood andDoor Hinges

and RearFolding Seat

Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,in Canada 10953474).

WeatherstripConditioning

Weatherstrip Lubricant(GM Part No. U.S. 3634770,in Canada 10953518) orDielectric Silicone Grease(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579,in Canada 992887).

497

Normal Maintenance Replacement PartsReplacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from yourdealer/retailer.

Part Part Number ACDelco® Part Number

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 15278634 —

Engine Oil Filter 89017524 PF48

Spark Plugs 12611882 41-107

Windshield Wiper Blades

Right – 20.8 inches (53. cm) 15254804 —

Left – 24.6 inches (62.5 cm) 15254805 —

Rear – 11.6 inches (30.0 cm) 15276259 —

498

Engine Drive Belt Routing

3.6L V6 Engine

499

Maintenance RecordAfter the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed theservice, and the type of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements onpage 486. Any additional information from Owner Checks and Services on page 493 can be added on thefollowing record pages. You should retain all maintenance receipts.

Maintenance Record

Date OdometerReading Serviced By Maintenance I or

Maintenance II Services Performed

500

Maintenance Record (cont’d)



501

Maintenance Record (cont’d)



502

Customer Assistance and Information ....... 504Customer Satisfaction Procedure ............... 504Online Owner Center ................................. 507Customer Assistance for

Text Telephone (TTY) Users .................. 508Customer Assistance Offices ..................... 508GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ........ 509Roadside Assistance Program ................... 509Collision Damage Repair ........................... 513

Reporting Safety Defects ............................ 516Reporting Safety Defects to the

United States Government ..................... 516Reporting Safety Defects to the

Canadian Government ............................ 517Reporting Safety Defects to Saturn ............ 517Service Publications Ordering Information ... 518

Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy ......... 519Event Data Recorders ............................... 520OnStar ...................................................... 521Navigation System ..................................... 521Radio Frequency Identification (RFID) ........ 521

Section 7 Customer Assistance Information

503

Customer Assistance andInformation

Customer Satisfaction ProcedureYour satisfaction and goodwill are importantto your retailer and to Saturn. Together weare committed to providing our customers withunparalleled service, before, during, and after thepurchase of a Saturn vehicle, for total customersatisfaction. We call this the Saturn Difference.Normally, any concerns with the sales transactionor the operation of your vehicle are resolved byyour retailer’s sales or service departments.If, for any reason, your ownership experiencefalls below your expectations, we suggestyou take the following action:

STEP ONE: Contact the Retail CustomerAssistance Liaison. Any member of the retailmanagement team has the authority and the desireto resolve your concerns. Normally, concernscan be quickly resolved at this level.

STEP TWO: Should you need additionalassistance, in the U.S., contact theSaturn Customer Assistance Center

by calling 1-800-553-6000. In Canada, contactthe Saturn Customer Communication Centre at1-800-263-1999. A Saturn Customer AssistanceCenter team member will handle your call andassist in providing product and warrantyinformation, the nearest retailer location, roadsideassistance, brochures, literature and discuss anyconcerns you may have.

We encourage you to call the toll-free number inorder to give your inquiry prompt attention. Pleasehave the following information available to give theCustomer Assistance Representative:

• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This17-digit number can be found on the vehicleregistration or title, on the upper driver sidecorner of the dash, or on your roadsideassistance key card.

• The name of your selling and servicing retailfacility.

• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage.

• Your daytime and evening phone numbers.

When contacting Saturn, please remember thatyour concern will likely be resolved at a retailer’sfacility. That is why we suggest you followStep One first if you have a concern.

504

STEP THREE (U.S. Owners): Both Saturn andits retailers are committed to making sure you arecompletely satisfied with your Saturn vehicle.However, if you continue to remain unsatisfied afterfollowing the procedure outlined in Steps One andTwo, Saturn and its retailers offer the additionalassistance of a neutral party through our voluntaryparticipation in a mediation/arbitration programcalled Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto Line.

The BBB Auto Line Program is an out-of-courtprogram administered by the Council of BetterBusiness Bureaus to settle automotive disputesregarding vehicle repairs or the interpretation ofthe New Vehicle Limited Warranty. This programis available at no cost to you, our customer.

Although you may be required to resort to thisinformal dispute resolution program prior to filing acourt action, use of the program is free of chargeand your case is generally heard within 40 days.If you do not agree with the decision given in yourcase, you can reject it and proceed with any othervenue for relief available to you.

Contact the BBB Auto Line Program by using thetoll-free telephone number or by writing them at thefollowing address:

BBB Auto Line ProgramCouncil of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.4200 Wilson BoulevardSuite 800Arlington, VA 22203-1838

Telephone: 1-800-955-5100

This program is available in all 50 states andthe District of Columbia. Eligibility is limitedby vehicle age, mileage and other factors.Saturn Corporation reserves the right to changeeligibility limitations and/or discontinue itsparticipation in this program.

505

STEP THREE (Canadian Owners):

General Motors Participation in theMediation/Arbitration ProgramIn the event that you do not feel yourconcerns have been addressed after followingthe procedure outlined in Steps 1 and 2,General Motors of Canada Limited has committedto binding arbitration of owner disputes involvingfactory-related vehicle service claims. The programprovides for the review of the facts involved byan impartial third party arbiter, and may include aninformal hearing before the arbiter. The programis designed so that the entire dispute settlementprocess, from the time you file your complaintto the final decision, should be completedin approximately 70 days. We believe ourimpartial program offers advantages overcourts in most jurisdictions because it isinformal, quick, and free of charge.

For further information concerning eligibilityin the Canadian Motor Vehicle ArbitrationPlan (CAMVAP), call toll-free 1-800-207-0685.Alternatively, you may call the Saturn CustomerCommunication Centre, 1-800-263-1999, oryou may write to:

Mediation/Arbitration Programc/o Customer Communication CentreGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedMail Code: CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Telephone: 1-800-955-5100

Your inquiry should be accompanied by yourVehicle Identification Number (VIN).

506

Online Owner Center

Online Owner Center(United States only)The Owner Center is a resource for your Saturnownership needs. Specific vehicle information canbe found in one place.

The Online Owner Center allows you to:• Get e-mail service reminders.

• Access information about your specificvehicle, including tips and videos andan electronic version of this owner manual.

• Keep track of your vehicle’s service historyand maintenance schedule.

• Find Saturn retailers for service nationwide.

• Receive special promotions and privileges onlyavailable to members.

Refer to www.saturn.com on the web for updatedinformation and to register your vehicle.

My GM Canada (Canada only)My GM Canada is a password-protected sectionof gmcanada.com where you can save informationon GM vehicles, get personalized offers, anduse handy tools and forms with greater ease.

Here are a few of the valuable tools and servicesyou will have access to:

− My Showroom: Find and save information onvehicles and current offers in your area.

− My Dealers/Retailers: Save details such asaddress and phone number for each ofyour preferred GM Dealers or Retailers.

− My Driveway: Receive service reminders andhelpful advice on owning and maintainingyour vehicle.

− My Preferences: Manage your profile,subscribe to E-News and use tools and formswith greater ease.

To sign up to My GM Canada, visit the My GMCanada section within www.gmcanada.com.

507

Customer Assistance for TextTelephone (TTY) UsersTo assist owners who have hearingdifficulties, Saturn has installed special TDD(Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf)equipment in its Saturn Customer AssistanceCenter.

Any hearing- or speech-impaired customerwho has access to a TDD or to a conventionalText Telephone (TTY) can communicate withSaturn by dialing 1-800-TDD-6000. TTY usersin Canada may dial 1-800-263-3830.

Customer Assistance OfficesSaturn encourages customers to call the toll-freenumber for assistance. If a customer wishes to writeto Saturn, the letter should be addressed to:

Saturn Customer Assistance Center100 Saturn ParkwayMail Code 371-999-S24Spring Hill, TN 37174-1500

1-800-553-60001-800-833-6000 (For Text Telephonedevices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance: 1-800-553-6000

In Canada, write to:

Saturn Customer Communication CentreGeneral Motors of Canada Ltd.CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

www.gmcanada.com1-800-263-19991-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephonedevices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800

508

GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram

This program, available to qualified applicants,can reimburse you up to $1,000 toward eligibleaftermarket driver or passenger adaptiveequipment you may require for your vehicle suchas hand controls, wheelchair/scooter lifts, etc.

The offer is available for a limited period of timefrom the date of vehicle purchase/lease.

For more details, or to determine your vehicle’seligibility, visit your Saturn retailer or call theSaturn Customer Assistance Center at1-800-553-6000. Text telephone (TTY) users,call 1-800-833-6000.

In Canada, customers may call theSaturn Customer Communication Centreat 1-800-263-1999. TTY users in Canadamay call 1-800-263-3830.

Roadside Assistance ProgramFor vehicles purchased in the U.S., call1-800-553-6000; (Text Telephone (TTY):1-800-833-6000).

For vehicles purchased in Canada, call1-800-268-6800.

Service is available 24 hours a day,365 days a year.

As the owner of a new Saturn vehicle, you areautomatically enrolled in the Saturn RoadsideAssistance Program.

Who is Covered?Roadside Assistance coverage is for the vehicleoperator, regardless of ownership. In Canada,a person driving this vehicle without the consentof the owner is not eligible for coverage.

509

Services ProvidedThe following services are provided in the U.S. andCanada up to 5 years/100,000 miles (160 000 km),whichever comes first, and, in Canada only, up to amaximum of $100.

• Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel for thevehicle to get to the nearest service station(approximately $5 Canada). In Canada, serviceto provide diesel may be restricted. For safetyreasons, propane and other alternative fuelsare not provided through this service.

• Lock-out Service: Lock-out service is coveredat no charge if you are unable to gain entry intoyour vehicle. A remote unlock may be availableif you have an active OnStar® subscription.To ensure security, the driver must presentpersonal identification before lock-out service isprovided. In Canada, the vehicle registration isalso required.

• Emergency Tow From a Public Roadwayor Highway: Tow to the nearest Saturnretailer for warranty service or in the eventof a vehicle-disabling accident. Winch-outassistance is provided when the vehicle ismired in sand, mud, or snow.

• Flat Tire Change: Installation of a spare tire ingood condition, when equipped and properlyinflated, is covered at no charge. The customeris responsible for the repair or replacement ofthe tire if not covered by a warrantable failure.

• Jump Start: A battery jump start is covered atno charge if the vehicle does not start.

• Trip Routing Service (Canada only): Uponrequest, Roadside Assistance will send youdetailed, computer personalized maps,highlighting your choice of either the mostdirect route or the most scenic route to yourdestination, anywhere in North America, alongwith helpful travel information pertaining toyour trip.Please allow three weeks before your planneddeparture date. Trip routing requests are limitedto six per calendar year.

510

• Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance(Canada only): In the event of a warrantyrelated vehicle disablement, while en route andover 250 kilometres from the original point ofdeparture, you might qualify for trip interruptionexpense assistance. This assistance coversreasonable reimbursement of up to a maximumof $500 (Canadian) for (A) meals (maximum of$50/day), (B) lodging (maximum of $100/night),and (C) alternate ground transportation(maximum of $40/day). This benefit is to assistyou with some of the unplanned expense youmay incur while waiting for your vehicle to berepaired.Pre-authorization, original detailed receipts,and a copy of the repair order are required.Once authorization has been given, youradvisor will help you make any necessaryarrangements and explain how to claim fortrip interruption expense assistance.

• Alternative Service (Canada only): Therecould be times when Roadside Assistancecannot provide timely assistance. Your advisormay authorize you to secure local emergencyroad service, and you will be reimbursed up to$100 upon submission of the original receipt toRoadside Assistance.

In many instances, mechanical failures may becovered. However, any cost for parts and laborfor non-warranty repairs are the responsibilityof the driver.

Saturn and General Motors of Canada Limitedreserve the right to limit services or reimbursementto an owner or driver when, in their sole discretion,the claims become excessive in frequency or typeof occurrence.

511

Calling for AssistanceFor prompt and efficient assistance when calling,please provide the following to the RoadsideAssistance Representatives:

• Your name, home address, and hometelephone number

• Telephone number of your location

• Location of the vehicle

• Model, year, color, and license plate numberof the vehicle

• Odometer reading, Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN) and delivery date of the vehicle

• Description of the problem

Towing and Road Service ExclusionsSpecifically excluded from Roadside Assistancecoverage are towing or services for vehiclesoperated on a non-public roadway or highway,fines, impound towing caused by a violationof local, Municipal, State, Provincial or Federallaw, and mounting, dismounting or changingof snow tires, chains, or other traction devices.

Roadside Assistance is not part of or includedin the coverage provided by the New VehicleLimited Warranty. Saturn and General Motors ofCanada Limited reserve the right to make anychanges or discontinue the Roadside Assistanceprogram at any time without notification.

512

Collision Damage RepairIf your vehicle is involved in a collision and itis damaged, have the damage repaired bya qualified technician using the proper equipmentand quality replacement parts. Poorly performedcollision repairs diminish your vehicle’s resalevalue, and safety performance can becompromised in subsequent collisions.

Collision PartsGenuine GM Collision parts are new partsmade with the same materials and constructionmethods as the parts with which your vehicle wasoriginally built. Genuine GM Collision parts areyour best choice to assure that your vehicle’sdesigned appearance, durability, and safety arepreserved. The use of Genuine GM parts canhelp maintain your GM New Vehicle Warranty.

Recycled original equipment parts may alsobe used for repair. These parts are typicallyremoved from vehicles that were total losses inprior accidents. In most cases, the parts beingrecycled are from undamaged sections ofthe vehicle. A recycled original equipment GMpart, may be an acceptable choice to maintain

your vehicle’s originally designed appearanceand safety performance, however, the history ofthese parts is not known. Such parts are notcovered by your GM New Vehicle LimitedWarranty, and any related failures are notcovered by that warranty.

Aftermarket collision parts are also available.These are made by companies other than GMand may not have been tested for your vehicle.As a result, these parts may fit poorly, exhibitpremature durability/corrosion problems, andmay not perform properly in subsequent collisions.Aftermarket parts are not covered by your GMNew Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any vehiclefailure related to such parts are not covered bythat warranty.

Repair FacilityGM also recommends that you choose a collisionrepair facility that meets your needs before youever need collision repairs. Your Saturn retailermay have a collision repair center with GM-trainedtechnicians and state of the art equipment, orbe able to recommend a collision repair centerthat has GM-trained technicians and comparableequipment.

513

Insuring Your VehicleProtect your investment in your GM vehicle withcomprehensive and collision insurance coverage.There are significant differences in the qualityof coverage afforded by various insurance policyterms. Many insurance policies provide reducedprotection to your GM vehicle by limitingcompensation for damage repairs by usingaftermarket collision parts. Some insurancecompanies will not specify aftermarket collisionparts. When purchasing insurance, we recommendthat you assure your vehicle will be repairedwith GM original equipment collision parts.If such insurance coverage is not availablefrom your current insurance carrier, considerswitching to another insurance carrier.

If your vehicle is leased, the leasing companymay require you to have insurance that assuresrepairs with Genuine GM Original EquipmentManufacturer (OEM) parts or GenuineManufacturer replacement parts. Read yourlease carefully, as you may be charged at theend of your lease for poor quality repairs.

If an Accident OccursHere is what to do if you are involved in anaccident.

• Try to relax and then check to make sure youare all right. If you are uninjured, make sure thatno one else in your vehicle, or the other vehicle,is injured.

• If there has been an injury, call 911 for help.Do not leave the scene of an accident until allmatters have been taken care of. Move yourvehicle only if its position puts you in danger oryou are instructed to move it by a police officer.

• Give only the necessary and requestedinformation to police and other parties involvedin the accident. Do not discuss your personalcondition, mental frame of mind, or anythingunrelated to the accident. This helps guardagainst post-accident legal action.

• If you need roadside assistance, callGM Roadside Assistance. See RoadsideAssistance Program on page 509 for moreinformation.

514

• If your vehicle cannot be driven, know wherethe towing service is taking it. Get a card fromthe tow truck operator or write down the driver’sname, the service’s name, and the phonenumber.

• Remove any valuables from your vehicle beforeit is towed away. Make sure this includes yourinsurance information and registration if youkeep these items in your vehicle.

• Gather the important information you need fromthe other driver. Things like name, address,phone number, driver’s license number, vehiclelicense plate, vehicle make, model and modelyear, Vehicle Identification Number (VIN),insurance company and policy number, and ageneral description of the damage to the othervehicle.

• If possible, call your insurance company fromthe scene of the accident. They will walk youthrough the information they need. If they askfor a police report, phone or go to the policedepartment headquarters the next day and youcan get a copy of the report for a nominal fee. Insome states/provinces with “no fault” insurancelaws, a report may not be necessary. This isespecially true if there are no injuries and bothvehicles are driveable.

• Choose a reputable collision repair facility foryour vehicle. Whether you select a Saturnretailer or a private collision repair facility to fixthe damage, make sure you are comfortablewith them. Remember, you will have to feelcomfortable with their work for a long time.

• Once you have an estimate, read it carefullyand make sure you understand what work willbe performed on your vehicle. If you have aquestion, ask for an explanation. Reputableshops welcome this opportunity.

515

Managing the Vehicle Damage RepairProcessIn the event that your vehicle requires damagerepairs, GM recommends that you take an activerole in its repair. If you have a pre-determinedrepair facility of choice, take your vehicle there,or have it towed there. Specify to the facilitythat any required replacement collision partsbe original equipment parts, either new GenuineGM parts or recycled original GM parts.Remember, recycled parts are not coveredby your GM vehicle warranty.

Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you mustlive with the repair. Depending on your policy limits,your insurance company may initially value therepair using aftermarket parts. Discuss this withyour repair professional, and insist on GenuineGM parts. Remember if your vehicle is leased youmay be obligated to have the vehicle repaired withGenuine GM parts, even if your insurance coveragedoes not pay the full cost.

If another party’s insurance company is paying forthe repairs, you are not obligated to accept a repairvaluation based on that insurance company’scollision policy repair limits, as you have nocontractual limits with that company. In such cases,you can have control of the repair and parts choicesas long as cost stays within reasonable limits.

Reporting Safety Defects

Reporting Safety Defects to theUnited States GovernmentIf you believe that your vehicle has a defect whichcould cause a crash or could cause injury ordeath, you should immediately inform the NationalHighway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA),in addition to notifying Saturn Corporation.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it couldopen an investigation, and if it finds that a safetydefect exists in a group of vehicles, it couldorder a recall and remedy campaign. However,NHTSA cannot become involved in individualproblems between you, your retailer or SaturnCorporation.

516

To contact NHTSA, call the Vehicle Safety Hotlinetoll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:

Administrator, NHTSA400 Seventh Street, SW.Washington, D.C. 20590

You can also obtain other information about motorvehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.

Reporting Safety Defects tothe Canadian GovernmentIf you live in Canada, and you believe that yourvehicle has a safety defect, notify TransportCanada immediately, in addition to notifyingGeneral Motors of Canada Limited. Call themat 1-800-333-0510 or write to:

Transport CanadaRoad Safety Branch2780 Sheffield RoadOttawa, Ontario K1B 3V9

Reporting Safety Defects to SaturnIn addition to notifying NHTSA (or TransportCanada) in a situation like this, please notifySaturn.

Call 1-800-553-6000, or write:

Saturn Corporation100 Saturn ParkwayMail Drop 371-999-S24Spring Hill, TN 37174-1500

In Canada, call 1-800-263-1999, or write:

Saturn Customer Communication CentreGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedCA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

517

Service Publications OrderingInformation

Service ManualsA variety of publications are available to you.Saturn service manuals are written for trainedtechnicians, and in some cases, specializedtools and equipment are necessary to completecertain repairs. However, the manuals areavailable to owners who either have the training,or wish to gain a greater understanding of thetechnical aspect of their Saturn.

For additional publications information orto order publications in the United States,call toll free 1-800-2-SATURN or visitwww.saturn-publications.com to order on-line.

In Canada, Saturn service manuals are availableby calling toll free 1-800-551-4123.

Owner PublicationsInformation on how to obtain product bulletins andas described below is applicable only in the fiftyU.S. states and the District of Columbia, and onlyfor cars and light trucks with a Gross VehicleWeight Rating (GVWR) less than 10,000 pounds(4 536 kg). Copies of individual bulletins are also atyour participating Saturn retailer. You can ask tosee them.

In Canada, information relating to product servicebulletins can be obtained by contacting yourSaturn retailer.

518

Service BulletinsSaturn regularly sends its retailers useful servicebulletins about Saturn products. Saturn monitorsproduct performance in the field. We then preparebulletins for servicing our products better. Youcan get these bulletins, too.

Bulletins cover various subjects. Some pertainto the proper use and care of your vehicle.Some describe costly repairs. Others describeinexpensive repairs which, if done on time withthe latest parts, may avoid future costly repairs.

Some bulletins tell a technician how to repaira new or unexpected condition. Others describea quicker way to fix your vehicle. They can helpa technician service your vehicle better.

Most bulletins apply to conditions affecting asmall number of vehicles. Your Saturn retaileror a qualified technician may have to determineif a specific bulletin applies to your vehicle.To order Saturn bulletins, call SaturnPublications at 1-800-2-SATURN or visitwww.saturn-publications.com to order online.

Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacyYour Saturn vehicle has a number of sophisticatedcomputers that record information about thevehicle’s performance and how it is driven. Forexample, your vehicle uses computer modulesto monitor and control engine and transmissionperformance, to monitor the conditions for airbagdeployment and deploy airbags in a crash and, if soequipped, to provide anti-lock braking to help thedriver control the vehicle. These modules may storedata to help your dealer/retailer technician serviceyour vehicle. Some modules may also store dataabout how you operate the vehicle, such as rateof fuel consumption or average speed. Thesemodules may also retain the owner’s personalpreferences, such as radio pre-sets, seat positions,and temperature settings.

519

Event Data RecordersThis vehicle has an Event Data Recorder (EDR).The main purpose of an EDR is to record, incertain crash or near crash-like situations, such asan air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle,data that will assist in understanding how avehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designedto record data related to vehicle dynamics andsafety systems for a short period of time, typically30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle isdesigned to record such data as:

• How various systems in your vehicle wereoperating

• Whether or not the driver and passengersafety belts were buckled/fastened

• How far, if at all, the driver was depressingthe accelerator and/or brake pedal

• How fast the vehicle was traveling

This data can help provide a better understandingof the circumstances in which crashes andinjuries occur.Important: EDR data is recorded by your vehicleonly if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; nodata is recorded by the EDR under normal driving

conditions and no personal data (e.g., name,gender, age, and crash location) is recorded.However, other parties, such as law enforcement,could combine the EDR data with the type ofpersonally identifying data routinely acquiredduring a crash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, specialequipment is required, and access to the vehicleor the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehiclemanufacturer, other parties, such as lawenforcement, that have the special equipment,can read the information if they have access tothe vehicle or the EDR.

Saturn will not access this data or share it withothers except: with the consent of the vehicleowner or, if the vehicle is leased, with the consentof the lessee; in response to an official requestof police or similar government office; as partof Saturn’s defense of litigation through thediscovery process; or, as required by law.Data that Saturn collects or receives mayalso be used for Saturn research needs ormay be made available to others for researchpurposes, where a need is shown and the datais not tied to a specific vehicle or vehicle owner.

520

OnStarIf your vehicle has OnStar® and you subscribeto the OnStar® services, please refer to theOnStar® Terms and Conditions for informationon data collection and use. See also OnStar®

System on page 145 in this manual for moreinformation.

Navigation SystemIf your vehicle has a navigation system,use of the system may result in the storage ofdestinations, addresses, telephone numbers,and other trip information. Please refer tothe navigation system operating manual forinformation on stored data and for deletioninstructions.

Radio FrequencyIdentification (RFID)RFID technology is used in some vehiclesfor functions such as tire pressure monitoring andignition system security, as well as in connectionwith conveniences such as key fobs for remotedoor locking/unlocking and starting, and in-vehicletransmitters for garage door openers. RFIDtechnology in Saturn vehicles does not use orrecord personal information or link with any otherSaturn system containing personal information.

521

✍ NOTES

522

AAccessories and Modifications ..................... 377Adding Equipment to Your

Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ............................ 92Additives, Fuel ............................................ 380Add-On Electrical Equipment ....................... 475Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ............................. 392Air Conditioning .................................. 194, 198Airbag

Passenger Status Indicator ....................... 214Readiness Light ....................................... 212

Airbag System ............................................... 76What Will You See After an

Airbag Inflates? ...................................... 84When Should an Airbag Inflate? ................. 82Where Are the Airbags? ............................. 79

Airbag SystemsAdding Equipment to Your

Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ......................... 92How Does an Airbag Restrain? .................. 84Passenger Sensing System ....................... 86Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ....... 91What Makes an Airbag Inflate? .................. 83

All-Wheel Drive ........................................... 420All-Wheel-Drive (AWD) System .................... 332

Antilock Brake System (ABS) ...................... 327Antilock Brake, System Warning Light ......... 218Appearance Care

Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels ........ 470Care of Safety Belts ................................ 467Chemical Paint Spotting ........................... 472Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .............. 468Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle .......... 464Fabric/Carpet ........................................... 465Finish Care .............................................. 468Finish Damage ......................................... 471Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other

Plastic Surfaces .................................... 467Leather .................................................... 466Sheet Metal Damage ............................... 471Tires ........................................................ 471Underbody Maintenance ........................... 472Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials .......... 473Washing Your Vehicle .............................. 468Weatherstrips ........................................... 467Windshield, Backglass, and

Wiper Blades ........................................ 469Audio System .............................................. 260

Audio Steering Wheel Controls ................. 317Care of Your CD and DVD Player ............ 320Care of Your CDs and DVDs ................... 320

523

Audio System (cont.)Navigation/Radio System,

see Navigation Manual ......................... 305Radio with CD ......................................... 263Rear Seat Audio (RSA) ............................ 315Setting the Time ...................................... 261Theft-Deterrent Feature ............................ 317Understanding Radio Reception ............... 318

Audio System(s)Radio with CD and DVD .......................... 273

Automatic TransmissionFluid ........................................................ 394Operation ................................................. 129

BBattery ........................................................ 413

Electric Power Management ..................... 187Run-Down Protection ............................... 188

Before Leaving on a Long Trip .................... 343Brake

Emergencies ............................................ 329Brakes ........................................................ 410

System Warning Light .............................. 217Braking ....................................................... 326

Braking in Emergencies ............................... 329Break-In, New Vehicle ................................. 123Bulb Replacement ....................................... 422

Halogen Bulbs ......................................... 422Headlamp Aiming ..................................... 421High Intensity Discharge (HID) Lighting ...... 422License Plate Lamps ................................ 423Replacement Bulbs .................................. 423

Buying New Tires ........................................ 440

CCalibration ................................................... 139California Fuel ............................................. 380California Proposition 65 Warning ................ 378Canadian Owners ........................................... 3Capacities and Specifications ...................... 483Carbon Monoxide .............. 110, 137, 347, 362Care of

Safety Belts ............................................. 467Your CD and DVD Player ........................ 320Your CDs and DVDs ................................ 320

Cargo Cover ............................................... 163Cargo Management System ........................ 164Cargo Tie Downs ........................................ 163

524

CD, MP3 ............................................ 290, 296Center Console Storage Area ...................... 161Chains, Tire ................................................. 445Charging System Light ................................ 216Check

Engine Light ............................................ 222Checking Things Under the Hood ................ 384Chemical Paint Spotting .............................. 472Child Restraints

Child Restraint Systems ............................. 55Infants and Young Children ........................ 51Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children ....... 61Older Children ........................................... 48Securing a Child Restraint in a

Rear Seat Position ................................. 69Securing a Child Restraint in the

Right Front Seat Position ........................ 72Where to Put the Restraint ........................ 59

CleaningAluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels ........ 470Exterior Lamps/Lenses ............................. 468Fabric/Carpet ........................................... 465Finish Care .............................................. 468Inside of Your Vehicle .............................. 464

Cleaning (cont.)Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other

Plastic Surfaces .................................... 467Leather .................................................... 466Tires ........................................................ 471Underbody Maintenance ........................... 472Washing Your Vehicle .............................. 468Weatherstrips ........................................... 467Windshield, Backglass, and

Wiper Blades ........................................ 469Climate Control System ............................... 194

Dual Automatic ......................................... 198Outlet Adjustment ..................................... 205Rear Air Conditioning and

Heating System .................................... 206Rear Air Conditioning and Heating

System, Electronic ................................ 207Clock .......................................................... 261Collision Damage Repair ............................. 513Comfort Guides, Rear Safety Belt ................. 43Compact Spare Tire .................................... 463Compass ..................................................... 139Content Theft-Deterrent ............................... 119Control of a Vehicle ..................................... 326

525

Convenience Net ......................................... 163Coolant

Engine Temperature Gage ........................ 220Engine Temperature Warning Light ........... 220Heater, Engine ......................................... 127

Cooling System ........................................... 402Courtesy Lamps .......................................... 184Cruise Control ............................................. 179Cruise Control Light .................................... 226Cupholder(s) ................................................ 161Customer Assistance Information

Customer Assistance for TextTelephone (TTY) Users ......................... 508

Customer Assistance Offices .................... 508Customer Satisfaction Procedure .............. 504GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ...... 509Reporting Safety Defects to Saturn .......... 517Reporting Safety Defects to the

Canadian Government .......................... 517Reporting Safety Defects to the

United States Government .................... 516Roadside Assistance Program .................. 509Service Publications Ordering

Information ........................................... 518

DDaytime Running Lamps/Automatic

Headlamp System .................................... 183Defensive Driving ........................................ 322Delayed Entry Lighting ................................ 186Delayed Exit Lighting ................................... 186Delayed Headlamps .................................... 183Delayed Locking .......................................... 107Disc, MP3 .......................................... 290, 296Doing Your Own Service Work .................... 378Dome Lamp Override .................................. 185Dome Lamps ............................................... 185Door

Delayed Locking ...................................... 107Locks ....................................................... 106Power Door Locks ................................... 107Programmable Automatic Door Locks ....... 107Rear Door Security Locks ........................ 108

DriverPosition, Safety Belt ................................... 30Seat Height Adjuster .................................. 10

526

Driver Information Center (DIC) ................... 228DIC Operation and Displays ............ 229, 235DIC Vehicle Customization ....................... 250DIC Warnings and Messages ................... 239

DrivingAt Night ................................................... 337City .......................................................... 342Defensive ................................................. 322Drunken ................................................... 323Freeway ................................................... 342Hill and Mountain Roads .......................... 345In Rain and on Wet Roads ...................... 339Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .......... 352Winter ...................................................... 347

Dual Automatic Climate Control System ......... 198DVD

Rear Seat Entertainment System ............. 305

EEDR ............................................................ 519Electrical System

Add-On Equipment ................................... 475Fuses and Circuit Breakers ...................... 476Instrument Panel Fuse Block ................... 476

Electrical System (cont.)Power Windows and Other Power

Options ................................................. 476Underhood Fuse Block ............................. 479Windshield Wiper Fuses ........................... 475

EngineAir Cleaner/Filter ...................................... 392Check and Service Engine Soon Light ........ 222Coolant .................................................... 396Coolant Heater ......................................... 127Coolant Temperature Gage ...................... 220Coolant Temperature Warning Light .......... 220Drive Belt Routing .................................... 499Engine Compartment Overview ................ 386Exhaust ................................................... 137Oil ........................................................... 387Oil Life System ........................................ 390Overheated Protection Operating Mode ...... 402Overheating ............................................. 400Running While Parked ............................. 138Starting .................................................... 126

Entry Lighting .............................................. 185Event Data Recorders ................................. 520Extender, Safety Belt ..................................... 47Exterior Lamps ............................................ 182

527

FFilter

Engine Air Cleaner ................................... 392Finish Damage ............................................ 471Flashers, Hazard Warning ........................... 172Flash-to-Pass .............................................. 176Flat Tire ...................................................... 446Flat Tire, Changing ...................................... 447Flat Tire, Storing ......................................... 459Floor Mats ................................................... 162Fluid

Automatic Transmission ............................ 394Power Steering ........................................ 408Windshield Washer .................................. 409

Fog LampFog .......................................................... 184

Fog Lamp Light ........................................... 226Fuel ............................................................ 379

Additives .................................................. 380California Fuel .......................................... 380Filling a Portable Fuel Container .............. 384Filling Your Tank ...................................... 381Fuels in Foreign Countries ....................... 381

Fuel (cont.)Gage ....................................................... 227Gasoline Octane ...................................... 379Gasoline Specifications ............................ 379

FusesFuses and Circuit Breakers ...................... 476Instrument Panel Fuse Block ................... 476Underhood Fuse Block ............................. 479Windshield Wiper ..................................... 475

GGage

Engine Coolant Temperature .................... 220Fuel ......................................................... 227Speedometer ........................................... 211Tachometer .............................................. 211Voltmeter Gage ........................................ 216

Garage Door Opener ................................... 149Gasoline

Octane ..................................................... 379Specifications ........................................... 379

Glove Box ................................................... 161GM Mobility Reimbursement Program .......... 509

528

HHazard Warning Flashers ............................ 172Head Restraints ............................................ 17Headlamp

Aiming ..................................................... 421Headlamps

Bulb Replacement .................................... 422Daytime Running Lamps/Automatic

Headlamp System ................................ 183Delayed ................................................... 183Exterior Lamps ......................................... 182Flash-to-Pass ........................................... 176Halogen Bulbs ......................................... 422High Intensity Discharge (HID) Lighting ...... 422High/Low Beam Changer ......................... 175

Heated Seats ................................................ 12Heater ......................................................... 194Heater ......................................................... 198Height Adjuster, Driver Seat .......................... 10High Voltage Devices and Wiring ................ 475Highbeam On Light ..................................... 227Highway Hypnosis ....................................... 344Hill and Mountain Roads ............................. 345

HoodChecking Things Under ............................ 384Release ................................................... 385

Horn ............................................................ 172How to Use This Manual ................................ 3How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............... 29

IIgnition Positions ......................................... 124Infants and Young Children, Restraints .......... 51Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................... 432Instrument Panel

Overview .................................................. 170Storage Area ............................................ 161

Instrument Panel (I/P)Brightness ................................................ 184Cluster ..................................................... 210

JJump Starting .............................................. 414

529

KKeyless Entry System ................................... 98Keys ............................................................. 97

LLabeling, Tire Sidewall ................................. 426Lamps

Courtesy .................................................. 184Dome ....................................................... 185Dome Lamp Override ............................... 185Reading ................................................... 187

LATCH SystemChild Restraints ......................................... 61

License Plate Lamps ................................... 423Liftgate

Carbon Monoxide ..................................... 109Liftgate, Power ............................................ 110Light

Airbag Readiness ..................................... 212Antilock Brake System Warning ................ 218Brake System Warning ............................. 217Charging System ..................................... 216

Light (cont.)Cruise Control .......................................... 226Engine Coolant Temperature Warning ....... 220Fog Lamp ................................................ 226Highbeam On .......................................... 227Malfunction Indicator ................................ 222Oil Pressure ............................................. 225Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............ 214Passenger Safety Belt Reminder .............. 212Safety Belt Reminder ............................... 211Security ................................................... 226StabiliTrak® Indicator ................................ 219Tire Pressure ........................................... 221Tow/Haul Mode ........................................ 227

LightingDelayed Entry .......................................... 186Delayed Exit ............................................ 186Entry ........................................................ 185Parade Dimming ...................................... 186

LightsExterior Lamps ......................................... 182Flash-to-Pass ........................................... 176High/Low Beam Changer ......................... 175

Loading Your Vehicle ................................... 353

530

Lockout Protection ....................................... 109Locks

Delayed Locking ...................................... 107Door ........................................................ 106Lockout Protection ................................... 109Power Door ............................................. 107Programmable Automatic Door Locks ....... 107Rear Door Security Locks ........................ 108

Loss of Control ........................................... 336Luggage Carrier .......................................... 162Lumbar

Manual Controls ......................................... 11Power Controls .......................................... 12

MMaintenance Schedule

Additional Required Services .................... 491At Each Fuel Fill ...................................... 494At Least Once a Month ............................ 494At Least Once a Year .............................. 495Introduction .............................................. 486Maintenance Footnotes ............................ 492Maintenance Record ................................ 500Maintenance Requirements ...................... 486

Maintenance Schedule (cont.)Normal Maintenance

Replacement Parts ............................... 498Owner Checks and Services .................... 493Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ....... 497Scheduled Maintenance ........................... 488Using ....................................................... 486Your Vehicle and the Environment ............ 486

Malfunction Indicator Light ........................... 222Manual Lumbar Controls ............................... 11Manual Seats .................................................. 9Memory Seat and Mirrors .............................. 13Message

DIC Warnings and Messages ................... 239Mirrors

Automatic Dimming Rearview withOnStar® and Compass ......................... 139

Manual Rearview Mirror with OnStar® ...... 139Outside Convex Mirror ............................. 144Outside Heated Mirrors ............................ 145Outside Power Foldaway Mirrors .............. 143Outside Power Mirrors ............................. 142

MP3 ................................................... 290, 296MyGMLink.com ............................................ 507

531

NNavigation System, Privacy ......................... 521Navigation/Radio System,

see Navigation Manual ............................. 305New Vehicle Break-In .................................. 123Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ....... 498

OOdometer .................................................... 211Off-Road Recovery ...................................... 334Oil

Engine ..................................................... 387Pressure Light .......................................... 225

Oil, Engine Oil Life System ......................... 390Older Children, Restraints ............................. 48Online Owner Center ................................... 507OnStar, Privacy ........................................... 521OnStar® System, see OnStar® Manual ........ 145Operation, Universal Home Remote

System ............................................ 150, 154Orange Covered Wiring ............................... 475Other Warning Devices ................................ 172Outlet Adjustment ........................................ 205

OutletsAccessory Power ..................................... 192

OutsideConvex Mirror .......................................... 144Heated Mirrors ......................................... 145Power Foldaway Mirrors ........................... 143Power Mirrors .......................................... 142

Overheated Engine ProtectionOperating Mode ....................................... 402

Owner Checks and Services ....................... 493Owners, Canadian .......................................... 3

PPaint, Damage ............................................ 471Parade Dimming .......................................... 186Park Aid ...................................................... 188Park Brake .................................................. 133Park (P)

Shifting Into ............................................. 134Shifting Out of ......................................... 136

ParkingAssist ....................................................... 188Over Things That Burn ............................ 136

532

Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............... 214Passenger Sensing System ........................... 86Passing ....................................................... 335PASS-Key® III+ ........................................... 121PASS-Key® III+ Operation ........................... 121Power

Door Locks .............................................. 107Electrical System ..................................... 476Liftgate ..................................................... 110Lumbar Controls ........................................ 12Outlet 115 Volt Alternating Current ........... 193Retained Accessory (RAP) ....................... 125Seat .......................................................... 10Steering Fluid .......................................... 408Tilt Wheel and Telescopic Steering

Column ................................................. 173Windows .................................................. 116

Pretensioners, Safety Belt ............................. 47Privacy ........................................................ 519

Event Data Recorders .............................. 520Navigation System ................................... 521OnStar ..................................................... 521Radio Frequency Identification .................. 521

Programmable Automatic Door Locks .......... 107

QQuestions and Answers About Safety Belts ...... 28

RRadiator Pressure Cap ................................ 399Radio Frequency Identification (RFID),

Privacy ..................................................... 521Radios ........................................................ 260

Care of Your CD and DVD Player ............ 320Care of Your CDs and DVDs ................... 320Navigation/Radio System,

see Navigation Manual ......................... 305Radio with CD ......................................... 263Radio with CD and DVD .......................... 273Rear Seat Audio ...................................... 315Setting the Time ...................................... 261Theft-Deterrent ......................................... 317Understanding Reception ......................... 318

Reading Lamps ........................................... 187Rear Air Conditioning and Heating

System .................................................... 206Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System

and Electronic Climate Controls ............... 207

533

Rear Door Security Locks ........................... 108Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides .................. 43Rear Seat Armrest ...................................... 163Rear Seat Audio (RSA) ............................... 315Rear Seat Entertainment System ................. 305Rear Seat Operation ..................................... 18Rear Seat Passengers, Safety Belts .............. 40Rear Windshield Washer/Wiper .................... 178Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming

with OnStar® and Compass ..................... 139Rearview Mirror with OnStar® ...................... 139Reclining Seatbacks ...................................... 15Recommended Fluids and Lubricants .......... 497Recreational Vehicle Towing ........................ 358Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System ............ 98Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System,

Operation ................................................. 100Removing the Flat Tire and Installing

the Spare Tire .......................................... 451Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ............ 448Replacement Bulbs ..................................... 423Reporting Safety Defects

Canadian Government ............................. 517Saturn ...................................................... 517United States Government ....................... 516

Restraint System CheckChecking the Restraint Systems ................. 93Replacing Restraint System Parts

After a Crash ......................................... 94Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ................ 125Right Front Passenger Position,

Safety Belts ............................................... 39Roadside

Assistance Program ................................. 509Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .............. 352Routing, Engine Drive Belt .......................... 499Running the Engine While Parked ............... 138

SSafety Belt

Passenger Reminder Light ....................... 212Pretensioners ............................................. 47Reminder Light ........................................ 211

Safety BeltsCare of .................................................... 467Driver Position ........................................... 30How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............ 29Questions and Answers About

Safety Belts ............................................ 28

534

Safety Belts (cont.)Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ............... 43Rear Seat Passengers ............................... 40Right Front Passenger Position .................. 39Safety Belt Extender .................................. 47Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ............. 39Safety Belts Are for Everyone .................... 24Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster .................... 38

Safety Warnings and Symbols ......................... 4Scheduled Maintenance ............................... 488Seats

Driver Seat Height Adjuster ........................ 10Head Restraints ......................................... 17Heated Seats ............................................. 12Manual Lumbar .......................................... 11Memory, Mirrors ......................................... 13Power Lumbar ........................................... 12Power Seats .............................................. 10Rear Seat Operation .................................. 18Reclining Seatbacks ................................... 15Third Row Seat ......................................... 21

Secondary Latch System ............................. 456Securing a Child Restraint

Rear Seat Position ..................................... 69Right Front Seat Position ........................... 72

Security Light .............................................. 226Service ........................................................ 377

Accessories and Modifications .................. 377Adding Equipment to the Outside of

Your Vehicle ......................................... 379California Proposition 65 Warning ............. 378Doing Your Own Work ............................. 378Engine Soon Light ................................... 222Publications Ordering Information ............. 518

Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ......... 91Sheet Metal Damage ................................... 471Shifting Into Park (P) ................................... 134Shifting Out of Park (P) ............................... 136Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster ........................ 38Signals, Turn and Lane-Change .................. 174Spare Tire

Compact .................................................. 463Installing .................................................. 451Removing ................................................ 448Storing ..................................................... 459

Specifications, Capacities ............................ 483Speedometer ............................................... 211StabiliTrak® System ..................................... 329StabiliTrak® Indicator Light ........................... 219Starting Your Engine ................................... 126

535

Steering ...................................................... 332Steering Wheel Controls, Audio ................... 317Steering Wheel, Power Tilt Wheel and

Telescopic Steering Column ..................... 173Storage Areas

Cargo Management System ..................... 164Center Console Storage Area ................... 161Convenience Net ..................................... 163Cupholder(s) ............................................ 161Glove Box ................................................ 161Instrument Panel Storage Area ................. 161Luggage Carrier ....................................... 162Rear Seat Armrest ................................... 163

Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow ............... 352Sun Visors .................................................. 118Sunroof ....................................................... 165System Identification, Universal Home

Remote System ....................................... 149

TTachometer ................................................. 211Telescopic Steering Column,

Power Tilt Wheel ...................................... 173Theft-Deterrent, Radio ................................. 317

Theft-Deterrent Systems .............................. 119Content Theft-Deterrent ............................ 119PASS-Key® III+ ........................................ 121PASS-Key® III+ Operation ........................ 121

Time, Setting ............................................... 261Tire

Pressure Light .......................................... 221Tires ........................................................... 425

Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels,Cleaning ............................................... 470

Buying New Tires ..................................... 440Chains ..................................................... 445Changing a Flat Tire ................................ 447Cleaning .................................................. 471Compact Spare Tire ................................. 463Different Size ........................................... 442If a Tire Goes Flat ................................... 446Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................ 432Inspection and Rotation ............................ 438Installing the Spare Tire ........................... 451Pressure Monitor System ......................... 433Removing the Flat Tire ............................. 451Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ......... 448Secondary Latch System ......................... 456

536

Tires (cont.)Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ..... 459Tire Sidewall Labeling .............................. 426Tire Terminology and Definitions ............... 429Uniform Tire Quality Grading .................... 442Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ........... 444Wheel Replacement ................................. 444When It Is Time for New Tires ................. 440

Tow/Haul Mode ........................................... 132Tow/Haul Mode Light ................................... 227Towing

Recreational Vehicle ................................. 358Towing a Trailer ....................................... 362Your Vehicle ............................................. 358

TractionStabiliTrak® System ................................. 329

TransmissionFluid, Automatic ....................................... 394

Transmission Operation, Automatic .............. 129Turn and Lane-Change Signals ................... 174Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .................... 174

UUltrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) ........ 188Understanding Radio Reception ................... 318Uniform Tire Quality Grading ....................... 442Universal Home Remote System ................. 149

Operation ........................................ 150, 154System Identification ................................ 149

VVehicle

Control ..................................................... 326Damage Warnings ....................................... 5Loading .................................................... 353Symbols ...................................................... 5

Vehicle Customization, DIC ......................... 250Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy ............ 519Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN) .......................................... 474Service Parts Identification Label .............. 474

Ventilation Adjustment .................................. 205Visors .......................................................... 118Voltage Devices, High and Wiring ............... 475Voltmeter Gage ........................................... 216

537

WWarning Lights, Gages and Indicators ......... 209Warnings

DIC Warnings and Messages ................... 239Hazard Warning Flashers ......................... 172Other Warning Devices ............................ 172Safety and Symbols ..................................... 4Vehicle Damage .......................................... 5

WheelsAlignment and Tire Balance ..................... 444Different Size ........................................... 442Replacement ............................................ 444

Where to Put the Restraint ............................ 59Windows ..................................................... 115

Power ...................................................... 116Windshield

Backglass, and Wiper Blades,Cleaning ............................................... 469

Washer .................................................... 177

Windshield (cont.)Washer Fluid ........................................... 409Wiper Blade Replacement ........................ 424Wiper Fuses ............................................ 475Wipers ..................................................... 176

Windshield, Rear Washer/Wiper ................... 178Winter Driving ............................................. 347Wiring, High Voltage Devices ...................... 475

XXM Radio Messages ................................... 303

YYour Vehicle and the Environment ............... 486

538

2007 saturn outlook owner manual m - gmc · 2020-03-08 · how to use this manual many people read...

Documents